D60 Line Distance Relay: Instruction Manual

Title Page
g
GE Industrial Systems
D60 Line Distance Relay

Instruction Manual
D60 Revision: 4.2x
Manual P/N: 1601-0089-H2 (GEK-106625A)

Copyright © 2004 GE Multilin
837766A1.CDR
T
GIS ERE
RE
GE Multilin ISO9001:2000
EM
G
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario I

U LT I L
Canada L6E 1B3
GE Multilin's Quality Management
Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 System is registered to
ISO9001:2000
Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin QMI # 005094
UL # A3775
Addendum
g
GE Industrial Systems
ADDENDUM
This Addendum contains information that relates to the D60 Line Distance Relay relay, version 4.2x. This addendum
lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-106625A (revision H2) but are not
included in the current D60 operations.
The following functions/items are not yet available with the current version of the D60 relay:
• Signal Sources SRC 5 and SRC 6
• STUB BUS: The final Stub Bus protection is not implemented for this release. This feature can be implemented
using a Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent function and the auxiliary contact from the line disconnect, incorporated
into a simple FlexLogic™ equation.
Version 4.0x and higher releases of the D60 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules).
• The new CPU modules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, and 9H.
• The new CT/VT modules are specified with the following order codes: 8F, 8G.
The following table maps the relationship between the old CPU and CT/VT modules to the newer versions:
MODULE OLD NEW DESCRIPTION

CPU 9A 9E RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP)
9C 9G RS485 and 10Base-F (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
9D 9H RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
CT/VT 8A 8F Standard 4CT/4VT
8B 8G Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with the new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H), and the old CT/VT modules can only be
used with the old CPU modules (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent any hardware mismatches, the new CPU and CT/VT modules
have blue labels and a warning sticker stating “Attn.: Ensure CPU and DSP module label colors are the same!”. In
the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or
HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed.
All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware.
With respect to the firmware, firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT mod-
ules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.
The UCA2 specifications are not yet finalized. There will be changes to the object models described in
Appendix C: UCA/MMS Protocol.
NOTE
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4
1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-4
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5
1.3.2 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA UR SETUP WITH THE D60 ................................ 1-7
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-10
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-10
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY .................................................................................... 1-10
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-11
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-11
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-11
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-12
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-12
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-12
1.5.7 COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-13
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

2.1.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-6
2.2.2 USER PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-11
2.2.3 MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-12
2.2.4 METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-12
2.2.5 INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-13
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-13
2.2.7 OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-14
2.2.8 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 2-15
2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-15
2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-16
2.2.11 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-16
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-16
2.2.13 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-16
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-16
3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION

3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ..................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-5
3.2 WIRING
3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING.............................................................................................. 3-6
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER ........................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES .............................................................................................. 3-8
3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 3-9
3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS ................................................................ 3-15
3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ............................................................................. 3-16
3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS .................................................................... 3-17
3.2.9 IRIG-B .............................................................................................................. 3-19
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay v

TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS

3.3.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-20
3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-22
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-22
3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-23
3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-26
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-28
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-28
3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-29
4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE OVERVIEW...........................................4-1
4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-3
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.2.1 FACEPLATE .......................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 LED INDICATORS..............................................................................................4-5
4.2.3 DISPLAY.............................................................................................................4-8
4.2.4 KEYPAD .............................................................................................................4-8
4.2.5 BREAKER CONTROL ........................................................................................4-8
4.2.6 MENUS ...............................................................................................................4-9
4.2.7 CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-11
5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-3
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY....................................................................................5-7
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES ....................................................................................5-8
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ..............................................................................5-10
5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................5-11
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................5-18
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-18
5.2.7 FAULT REPORTS ............................................................................................5-19
5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................5-20
5.2.9 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................5-22
5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-23
5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS .........................................................5-26
5.2.12 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ............................................................................5-26
5.2.13 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS....................................................5-28
5.2.14 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................5-29
5.2.15 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ........................................................................5-30
5.2.16 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ............................................................................5-32
5.2.17 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................5-37
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.1 AC INPUTS.......................................................................................................5-38
5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM ............................................................................................5-39
5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES ..........................................................................................5-40
5.3.4 BREAKERS ......................................................................................................5-42
5.3.5 FLEXCURVES™ .............................................................................................5-45
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™................................................................5-52
5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC™ RULES .....................................................................................5-61
5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION ..........................................................................5-62
5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE ................................................................................5-62
5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR................................................................5-67
5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS ...................................................................................5-67
5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS™ ..........................................................................................5-68
vi D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.4.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ............................................................................. 5-72

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5.1 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 5-73
5.5.2 SETTING GROUP ........................................................................................... 5-73
5.5.3 LINE PICKUP................................................................................................... 5-74
5.5.4 DISTANCE ....................................................................................................... 5-76
5.5.5 POWER SWING DETECT ............................................................................... 5-93
5.5.6 LOAD ENCROACHMENT.............................................................................. 5-101
5.5.7 PHASE CURRENT ........................................................................................ 5-103
5.5.8 NEUTRAL CURRENT.................................................................................... 5-113
5.5.9 GROUND CURRENT..................................................................................... 5-121
5.5.10 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT ............................................................. 5-123
5.5.11 BREAKER FAILURE ...................................................................................... 5-129
5.5.12 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................. 5-138
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-145
5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS ....................................................................................... 5-145
5.6.3 SELECTOR SWITCH..................................................................................... 5-146
5.6.4 TRIP OUTPUT ............................................................................................... 5-151
5.6.5 SYNCHROCHECK......................................................................................... 5-155
5.6.6 AUTORECLOSE ............................................................................................ 5-159
5.6.7 DIGITAL ELEMENTS..................................................................................... 5-171
5.6.8 DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-174
5.6.9 MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-176
5.6.10 PILOT SCHEMES .......................................................................................... 5-184
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-199
5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-201
5.7.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS.................................................................................... 5-202
5.7.4 LATCHING OUTPUTS ................................................................................... 5-202
5.7.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-204
5.7.6 REMOTE DEVICES ....................................................................................... 5-205
5.7.7 REMOTE INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-206
5.7.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-207
5.7.9 RESETTING................................................................................................... 5-208
5.7.10 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 5-208
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS .............................................................................................. 5-212
5.8.2 RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................. 5-213
5.8.3 DCMA OUTPUTS .......................................................................................... 5-213
5.9 TESTING
5.9.1 TEST MODE .................................................................................................. 5-217
5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS .......................................................................... 5-217
5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ...................................................................... 5-218
6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ........................................................................ 6-1
6.2 STATUS
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS............................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS........................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS .......................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.6 AUTORECLOSE ................................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.7 REMOTE DEVICES ........................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.8 DIGITAL COUNTERS ........................................................................................ 6-5
6.2.9 SELECTOR SWITCHES.................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.10 FLEX STATES ................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.11 ETHERNET........................................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.12 DIRECT INPUTS................................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.13 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS.............................................................................. 6-7
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.3 METERING
6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS .............................................................................6-8
6.3.2 SOURCES ........................................................................................................6-11
6.3.3 SYNCHROCHECK ...........................................................................................6-13
6.3.4 TRACKING FREQUENCY................................................................................6-14
6.3.5 FLEXELEMENTS™ ..........................................................................................6-14
6.3.6 TRANSDUCER I/O ...........................................................................................6-14
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.1 FAULT REPORTS ............................................................................................6-15
6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-17
6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................6-17
6.4.4 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................6-17
6.4.5 BREAKER MAINTENANCE .............................................................................6-18
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-19
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS..................................................................................6-19
7. COMMANDS AND 7.1 COMMANDS

TARGETS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU ...........................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-1
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS .............................................................................................7-1
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME ........................................................................................7-2
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................7-2
7.2 TARGETS
7.2.1 TARGETS MENU ...............................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................................................7-3
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS .........................................................................................7-3
8. THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS

8.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................8-1
8.1.2 PHASOR ESTIMATION......................................................................................8-1
8.1.3 DISTANCE CHARACTERISTICS.......................................................................8-2
8.1.4 MEMORY POLARIZATION ................................................................................8-6
8.1.5 DISTANCE ELEMENTS ANALYSIS...................................................................8-7
8.2 PHASE DISTANCE APPLIED TO POWER TRANSFORMERS
8.2.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................8-10
8.2.2 EXAMPLE .........................................................................................................8-13
8.3 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
8.3.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................8-15
8.3.2 EXAMPLE .........................................................................................................8-15
8.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES
8.4.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................8-16
8.5 SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING
8.5.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................8-19
8.5.2 PHASE SELECTION ........................................................................................8-22
8.5.3 COMMUNICATIONS CHANNELS FOR PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES.................8-23
8.5.4 PERMISSIVE ECHO SIGNALING ....................................................................8-27
8.5.5 PILOT SCHEME / PHASE SELECTOR COORDINATION...............................8-28
8.5.6 CROSS-COUNTRY FAULT EXAMPLE............................................................8-29
9. APPLICATION OF 9.1 APPLICATION GUIDELINES

SETTINGS 9.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................9-1
9.1.2 IMPACT OF MEMORY POLARIZATION............................................................9-1
9.1.3 HIGH-SET OVERCURRENT ELEMENTS..........................................................9-1
viii D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
9.2 DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME)

9.2.1 PHASE DISTANCE............................................................................................ 9-2
9.2.2 GROUND DISTANCE ........................................................................................ 9-3
9.3 PROTECTION SIGNALING SCHEMES
9.3.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 9-6
9.3.2 DIRECT UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (DUTT) ................................. 9-6
9.3.3 PERMISSIVE UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (PUTT) ......................... 9-6
9.3.4 PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (POTT) ........................... 9-6
9.3.5 HYBRID POTT SCHEME (HYB-POTT) ............................................................. 9-7
9.3.6 DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING ...................................................... 9-8
9.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES
9.4.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................ 9-9
9.4.2 DISTANCE ......................................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.3 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT ................................................... 9-10
9.4.4 HIGH-SET PHASE OVERCURRENT .............................................................. 9-10
9.5 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS
9.5.1 PHASE DISTANCE PROTECTION ................................................................. 9-11
9.5.2 EXAMPLE ........................................................................................................ 9-12
A. FLEXANALOG A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST

PARAMETERS
B. MODBUS B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

COMMUNICATIONS B.1.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................B-1
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER.............................................................................................B-1
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER............................................................................................B-1
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM........................................................................................B-2
B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ...................................................................B-3
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ...........B-3
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H) ...........................................B-4
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) .......................................B-4
B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................B-5
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ...............................................................................B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS ........................................................B-6
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ...............................................................B-7
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP .................................................................................B-8
B.4.2 DATA FORMATS .............................................................................................B-49
C. UCA/MMS C.1 UCA/MMS PROTOCOL

COMMUNICATIONS C.1.1 UCA....................................................................................................................C-1
C.1.2 MMS...................................................................................................................C-1
C.1.3 UCA REPORTING .............................................................................................C-6
D. IEC 60870-5-104 COMMS. D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT ...................................................................D-1
D.1.2 POINT LIST......................................................................................................D-10
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS
E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE .......................................................................... E-1
E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE .............................................................................. E-4
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS ................................................................................... E-8
E.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT.................................................... E-14
E.2.3 COUNTERS..................................................................................................... E-15
E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS............................................................................................ E-16
F. MISCELLANEOUS F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY......................................................................................... F-1
F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE D60 MANUAL ................................................................... F-1
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-4
F.3 WARRANTY
F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY............................................................................... F-6
INDEX
x D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay. 1
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAU-
TIONS in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/
or downtime.
WARNING CAUTION
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
• Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage.
• View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.
D60H00HCHF8FH6AM6BP8GX7A
D60 Line Distance Relay RATINGS: Model:

Mods: 000
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA Wiring Diagram: 837774
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA Inst. Manual: D
Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A Serial Number: MAZB98000029
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break Firmware: D
GE Multilin 4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W Mfg. Date: 1998/01/05
Technical Support:
Made in
Tel: (905) 294-6222 http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin ®
®
Canada
Fax: (905) 201-2098 - M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
Figure 1–1: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)

• Ensure that the following items are included:
• Instruction Manual
• GE enerVista CD (includes the enerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format)
• mounting screws
• registration card (attached as the last page of the manual)
• Fill out the registration form and return to GE Multilin (include the serial number located on the rear nameplate).
• For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin web-
site at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE
Multilin immediately.
NOTE
GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:

GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
TELEPHONE: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America only)
FAX: (905) 201-2098
E-MAIL: [email protected]
HOME PAGE: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay 1-1

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
1.2UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
1 Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This
first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the single-
function approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxil-
iary equipment to produce functioning systems.
Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equip-
ment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and
auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and aux-
iliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using elec-
tronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the
term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).
It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further
reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more
functions within the IEDs.
Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and
as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to
perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly.
High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and moni-
toring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a
performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 5
milliseconds. This has been established by the Electric Power Research Institute, a collective body of many American and
Canadian power utilities, in their Utilities Communications Architecture 2 (MMS/UCA2) project. In late 1998, some Euro-
pean utilities began to show an interest in this ongoing initiative.
IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available,
enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control sys-
tems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and
enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.
1-2 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
a) UR BASIC DESIGN 1
The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or
another UR device.
Input Elements CPU Module Output Elements

Contact Inputs Protective Elements Contact Outputs
Virtual Inputs Pickup Virtual Outputs
Dropout
Input Output
Analog Inputs Operate Analog Outputs
CT Inputs Status Status Remote Outputs
VT Inputs Table Logic Gates Table -DNA
-USER
Remote Inputs
Direct Inputs Direct Outputs
LAN
Programming Operator
Device Interface
827822A2.CDR
Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM

The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as program-
mable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used
to control field devices.
b) UR SIGNAL TYPES
The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both ‘wet’ and ‘dry’
contacts are supported.
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include
signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic™ equations used to customize
the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic™ equations.
The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detec-
tors (RTDs).
The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines.
The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs.
The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series
devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic™
operands inserted into UCA2 GOOSE messages and are of two assignment types: DNA standard functions and user-
defined (UserSt) functions.
The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a
dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are con-
nected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilot-
aided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
c) UR SCAN OPERATION
1 The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the
logic program (FlexLogic™ equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any
resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.
Read Inputs
Protection elements
serviced by sub-scan
Protective Elements
PKP
Solve Logic DPO
OP
Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR
Figure 1–3: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as
required. This is achieved with Object-Oriented Design and Programming (OOD/OOP) techniques.
Object-Oriented techniques involve the use of ‘objects’ and ‘classes’. An ‘object’ is defined as “a logical entity that contains
both data and code that manipulates that data”. A ‘class’ is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept,
one can create a Protection Class with the Protection Elements as objects of the class such as Time Overcurrent, Instanta-
neous Overcurrent, Current Differential, Undervoltage, Overvoltage, Underfrequency, and Distance. These objects repre-
sent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for Metering, I/O Control,
HMI, Communications, or any functional entity in the system.
Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the Universal Relay achieves the same features as the hardware
architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any Universal Relay (e.g. Feeder Protection,
Transformer Protection, Distance Protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes.
This results in a ’common look and feel’ across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications.
1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS
As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understand-
ing of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in
“elements”. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to Elements section in Chapter 5. An
example of a simple element, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Digital Elements section. An
explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC Sources section in Chapter 5. A description of
how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic™ section in Chapter 5.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS
The faceplate keypad and display or the enerVista UR Setup software interface can be used to communicate with the relay.
1
The enerVista UR Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC
monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format.
The following minimum requirements must be met for the enerVista UR Setup software to properly operate on a PC.
• Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended)
• Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP
• Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher
• 128 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended)
• 200 MB of available space on system drive and 200 MB of available space on installation drive
• Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in high-color mode (16-bit color)
• RS232 and/or Ethernet port for communications to the relay
The following qualified modems have been tested to be compliant with the D60 and the enerVista UR Setup software.
• US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686
• US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2
• PCTEL 2304WT V.92 MDC internal modem
1.3.2 INSTALLATION
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using enerVista UR Setup are met (see previous section), use the following
procedure to install the enerVista UR Setup from the enclosed GE enerVista CD.
1. Insert the GE enerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge enerVista software.
3. When installation is complete, start the enerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
5. In the enerVista Launch Pad window, click the Install Software button and select the “D60 Line Distance Relay” from
1 the Install Software window as shown below. Select the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software release, or
select “CD” if you do not have a web connection, then click the Check Now button to list software items for the D60.
6. Select the D60 software program and release notes (if desired) from the list and click the Download Now button to
obtain the installation program.
7. enerVista Launchpad will obtain the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, double-
click the installation program to install the enerVista UR Setup software.
8. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the enerVista UR Setup will be installed.
9. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program
will automatically create icons and add enerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu.

10. Click Finish to end the installation. The D60 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the enerVista Launch-
pad window, as shown below.
1
1.3.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA UR SETUP WITH THE D60
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the enerVista UR Setup software. Please refer to the enerVista UR
Setup Help File and Chapter 4 of this manual for more information.
a) CONFIGURING AN ETHERNET CONNECTION

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To
setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site.
1. Install and start the latest version of the enerVista UR Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD or online
from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin (see previous section for installation instructions).
2. Select the “UR” device from the enerVista Launchpad to start enerVista UR Setup.
3. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, them click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4. Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete.
5. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the enerVista UR Setup window. Click on the new site name and then
click the Device Setup button to re-open the Device Setup window.
6. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7. Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.
8. Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
• Enter the relay IP address (from SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" NETWORK ! IP ADDRESS)
in the “IP Address” field.
• Enter the relay Modbus address (from the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" MODBUS PROTOCOL ! MOD-
BUS SLAVE ADDRESS setting) in the “Slave Address” field.
• Enter the Modbus port address (from the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" MODBUS PROTOCOL !"
MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting) in the “Modbus Port” field.
9. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the UR device and upload the order code. If an communications error
occurs, ensure that the three enerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting
values.

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
1 Online window) located in the top left corner of the main enerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to Section c) below to begin communica-
tions.
b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION

Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable is properly connected to the RS232 port on the front panel of the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the enerVista UR Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD or online
from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
2. Select the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
3. Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete.
4. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the enerVista UR Setup window. Click on the new site name and then
click the Device Setup button to re-open the Device Setup window.
5. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6. Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.
7. Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper serial communications.
• Enter the relay slave address and COM port values (from the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS
!" SERIAL PORTS menu) in the “Slave Address” and “COM Port” fields.
• Enter the physical communications parameters (baud rate and parity settings) in their respective fields.
8. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the UR device and upload the order code. If an communications error
occurs, ensure that the enerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to
the relay setting values.
9. Click “OK” when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main enerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to Section c) Connecting to the Relay
below to begin communications.
c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY

1. Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:

Expand the Site List by double-clicking

or by selecting the [+] box
Communications Status Indicator

Green LED = OK, Red LED = No Communications
UR icon = report open
842743A1.CDR
2. The Display Properties window will open with a status indicator on the lower left of the enerVista UR Setup window.
3. If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the
back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier).
If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, than a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open.
Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
4. The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications.
Refer to Chapter 4 in this manual and the enerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the
using the enerVista UR Setup software interface.
NOTE

1.4 UR HARDWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1.4UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
1 Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
carefully.
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS
The enerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ether-
net ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard “straight-through” serial cable is used. The DB-9 male
end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described
in the CPU Communications Ports section of Chapter 3.
Figure 1–4: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS

To communicate through the D60 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is
required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a “straight-through” serial cable. A shielded
twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the D60 rear communications port. The converter termi-
nals (+, –, GND) are connected to the D60 communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU Communica-
tions Ports section in Chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (i.e. 120 Ω, 1 nF) as
described in the Chapter 3.
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 × 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting con-
ditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the
aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will
default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and
appear on the display.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into ‘pages’ under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Tar-
1
gets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement
numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit
mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The key may be
pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values.
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION
Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily fol-
lowed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as
illustrated below.
! ! !
ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS TARGETS
" " " "
## ACTUAL VALUES ## SETTINGS ## COMMANDS No Active

## STATUS ## PRODUCT SETUP ## VIRTUAL INPUTS Targets
!
USER DISPLAYS
(when in use)
"
User Display 1
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (##), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (#). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the
MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually
pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
## SETTINGS # PASSWORD ACCESS LEVEL:

## PRODUCT SETUP # SECURITY Restricted
## SETTINGS
## SYSTEM SETUP

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
1 The relay is defaulted to the “Not Programmed” state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of
a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Ser-
vice LED off. The relay in the “Not Programmed” state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain
until the relay is explicitly put in the “Programmed” state.
Select the menu message SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" INSTALLATION ! RELAY SETTINGS
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
To put the relay in the “Programmed” state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press . The face-
plate Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually
(refer to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the enerVista UR Setup Help file) via the enerVista UR
Setup software interface.
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS
It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user
password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING:
1. COMMAND
The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the fol-
lowing operations:
• operate breakers via faceplate keypad
• change state of virtual inputs
• clear event records
• clear oscillography records
• operate user-programmable pushbuttons
2. SETTING
The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.
Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level
passwords.
NOTE
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION
FlexLogic™ equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the Flex-
Logic™ section in Chapter 5 for additional details.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5.7 COMMISSIONING
Templated tables for charting all the required settings before entering them via the keypad are available from the GE Multi-
1
lin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
The D60 requires a minimum amount of maintenance when it is commissioned into service. The D60 is a microprocessor-
based relay and its characteristics do not change over time. As such no further functional tests are required.
Furthermore the D60 performs a number of ongoing self-tests and takes the necessary action in case of any major errors
(see the Relay Self-Test section in Chapter 7 for details). However, it is recommended that maintenance on the D60 be
scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance may involve the following.
In-service maintenance:
1. Visual verification of the analog values integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the cor-
responding system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3. LED test.
4. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
5. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
Out-of-service maintenance:
1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated
test equipment is required.
3. Protection elements setpoints verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against
relay settings schedule).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the
system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
7. LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.
Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption:
1. View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.
If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin or one of its representatives for
prompt service.

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The D60 Line Distance Relay is a microprocessor-based relay intended for use on transmission lines of any voltage level,
without, with, and in the vicinity of series compensation, in three-pole and single-pole tripping applications. The primary
function of the relay consists of five phase and ground distance zones of protection, either mho or quadrilateral as per user
selection, with built-in logic for the five common pilot-aided schemes. The distance elements are optimized to provide good
measurement accuracy with a fast operating time, even when used with Capacitive Voltage Transformers, and can be
supervised by detection of power swings. The relay also provides directional ground overcurrent elements, which are com-
monly used as part of an overall line protection system.
2
D60 phase distance zones can be configured to work with voltages and currents fed from VTs and CTs located indepen-
dently from one another on either side of a three-phase power transformer. The relay compensates accordingly to preserve
reach and correct target information regardless of the location and type of fault. This feature allows backup protection appli-
cations for generators and power transformers.
A Close-Into-Fault, or Switch-On-To-Fault, function is performed by the Line Pickup element. Out-of-step tripping, three-
pole/single-pole dual-breaker autoreclosing, synchrocheck, fault location, and many other functions are also available. In
addition, overcurrent and undervoltage protection, fault diagnostics, power metering, and RTU functions are provided. The
D60 provides phase, neutral, and ground time overcurrent protection. The time overcurrent functions can be programmed
with multiple curve shapes or FlexCurve™ for optimum coordination.
Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total
waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include an event recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events, oscillography capable of storing
up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content and sampling rate, and data logger acquisition of up to 16 channels,
with programmable content and sampling rate. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG-
B signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be
determined throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic™ equations) to trigger oscillography
data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal
computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a sys-
tem fault.
A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual val-
ues. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and
engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus® RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers
with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules
include a 10BaseF Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments.
Another option provides two 10BaseF fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports MMS/UCA2, Modbus®/
TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (D60 web pages). The IEC 60870-
5-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. DNP 3.0 and IEC 60870-5-104 cannot be enabled at the same time.
The D60 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following Single
Line Diagram illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers.

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Table 2–1: DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS

DEVICE FUNCTION DEVICE FUNCTION
NUMBER NUMBER
21G Ground Distance 51P Phase Time Overcurrent
21P Phase Distance 51_2 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent
25 Synchrocheck 52 AC Circuit Breaker
2 27P Phase Undervoltage 59N Neutral Overvoltage
27X Auxiliary Undervoltage 59P Phase Overvoltage
50BF Breaker Failure 59X Auxiliary Overvoltage
50DD Current Disturbance Detector 59_2 Negative Sequence Overvoltage
50G Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 67N Neutral Directional Overcurrent
50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 67P Phase Directional Overcurrent
50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 67_2 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent
50_2 Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 68 Power Swing Blocking
51G Ground Time Overcurrent 78 Out-of-Step Tripping
51N Neutral Time Overcurrent 79 Automatic Recloser
52 52
CLOSE TRIP
Monitoring
59X 27X 25 (2)
79
50DD 50P (2) 50_2 (2) 51P (2) 51_2 (2) 50BF (2) 21P (4) 67P (2) 67_2 (2) 68 78 50N (2) 51N (2) 67N/G (2) 21G (4)
59P
Data From/To Remote End Pilot Transducer
(via Communications)
FlexElementTM Metering Inputs
Schemes
27P (2)
50G (2) 51G (2)
59N

837709AE.CDR
Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

Table 2–2: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS

FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION
Breaker Arcing Current (I2t) FlexElements™ (16) Pilot Schemes
Breaker Control FlexLogic™ Equations Setting Groups (6)
Contact Inputs (up to 96) Line Pickup Time Synchronization over SNTP
Contact Outputs (up to 64) Metering: Current, Energy, Frequency, Transducer Inputs/Outputs
Control Pushbuttons
Power, Power Factor, Voltage
User Definable Displays 2
Data Logger MMS/UCA Communications User Programmable LEDs
Digital Counters (8) MMS/UCA Remote Inputs/Outputs User Programmable Pushbuttons
(“GOOSE”)
Digital Elements (16) User Programmable Self-Tests
Direct Inputs/Outputs (32) Modbus Communications Virtual Inputs (32)
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 Comms Modbus User Map Virtual Outputs (64)
Event Recorder Non-Volatile Latches VT Fuse Failure
Fault Detector and Fault Report Non-Volatile Selector Switch
Fault Locator Oscillography
2.1.2 ORDERING
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit or a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, and consists of the
following modules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, digital input/output, transducer input/output. Each of these modules can be
supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of ordering. The information required to completely specify the
relay is provided in the following table (see Chapter 3 for full details of relay modules).

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Table 2–3: D60 ORDER CODES

D60 - * 00 - H * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - P ** - U ** - W ** Full Size Horizontal Mount
D60 - * 00 - V * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - # ** Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note below for value of slot #)
BASE UNIT D60 | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU E | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP)
G | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
H | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
2
SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | | | | No Software Options
02 | | | | | | | | | Breaker-and-a-Half Software
MOUNT/ H C | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack)
FACEPLATE Horizontal (19” rack) with User-Programmable Pushbuttons
H P | | | | | | |
V F | | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack)
POWER H | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
SUPPLY
H | | | | | RH 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
L | | | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
L | | | | | RL 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
CT/VT MODULES 8F | 8F | | | Standard 4CT/4VT
8G | 8G | | | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX XX XX No Module
4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4 Solid-State (No Monitoring) MOSFET Outputs
4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4 Solid-State (Voltage w/ opt Current) MOSFET Outputs
4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4 Solid-State (Current w/ opt Voltage) MOSFET Outputs
4L 4L 4L 4L 4L 14 Form-A (No Monitoring) Latching Outputs
67 67 67 67 67 8 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs
6A 6A 6A 6A 6A 2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 2 Form-C outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6B 6B 6B 6B 6B 2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6C 6C 6C 6C 6C 8 Form-C Outputs
6D 6D 6D 6D 6D 16 Digital Inputs
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6F 6F 6F 6F 6F 8 Fast Form-C Outputs
6G 6G 6G 6G 6G 4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6H 6H 6H 6H 6H 6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6K 6K 6K 6K 6K 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs
6L 6L 6L 6L 6L 2 Form-A (Curr w/ opt Volt) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 2 Form-A (Curr w/ opt Volt) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6N 6N 6N 6N 6N 4 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6R 6R 6R 6R 6R 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6T 6T 6T 6T 6T 4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6U 6U 6U 6U 6U 6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
TRANSDUCER 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 4 dcmA Inputs, 4 dcmA Outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5C 5C 5C 5C 5C 8 RTD Inputs
(select a maximum of 3 per unit)
5D 5D 5D 5D 5D 4 RTD Inputs, 4 dcmA Outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
5E 5E 5E 5E 5E 4 RTD Inputs, 4 dcmA Inputs
5F 5F 5F 5F 5F 8 dcmA Inputs
INTER-RELAY 2A C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
COMMUNICATIONS 2B C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
72 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
73 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
75 Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
7E Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
7L Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
For vertical mounting units, # = slot P for digital and transducer 7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
input/output modules; # = slot R for inter-relay communications 7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
NOTE modules 7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels

The order codes for replacement modules to be ordered separately are shown in the following table. When ordering a
replacement CPU module or faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit.
Table 2–4: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES

UR - ** -
POWER SUPPLY | 1H | 125 / 250 V AC/DC
| 1L | 24 to 48 V (DC only)
| RH | redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC
CPU
|
|
|
RH
9E
9G
|
|
|
redundant 24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 and RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0)
RS485 and 10Base-F (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
2
| 9H | RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
FACEPLATE | 3C | Horizontal faceplate with display and keypad
| 3F | Vertical faceplate with display and keypad
| 3P | Horizontal faceplate with display, keypad, and user-programmable pushbuttons
DIGITAL | 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET Outputs
INPUTS/OUTPUTS | 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET Outputs
| 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET Outputs
| 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching Outputs
| 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) Outputs
| 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6C | 8 Form-C Outputs
| 6D | 16 Digital Inputs
| 6E | 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6F | 8 Fast Form-C Outputs
| 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6K | 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs
| 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
CT/VT | 8F | Standard 4CT/4VT
MODULES | 8G | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
(NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
| 8H | Standard 8CT
| 8J | Sensitive Ground 8CT
UR INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS | 2A | C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
| 2B | C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
| 72 | 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
| 73 | 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
| 74 | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 75 | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER
| 76 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 77 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7A | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7B | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7C | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
| 7D | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
| 7E | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode
| 7F | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode
| 7G | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
| 7H | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7I | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7J | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
| 7K | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
| 7L | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7M | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7N | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
| 7P | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 7Q | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER
| 7R | G.703, 1 Channel
| 7S | G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels
TRANSDUCER | 5A | 4 dcmA Inputs, 4 dcmA Outputs (only one 5A module is allowed)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS | 5C | 8 RTD Inputs
| 5D | 4 RTD Inputs, 4 dcmA Outputs (only one 5D module is allowed)
| 5E | 4 dcmA Inputs, 4 RTD Inputs
| 5F | 8 dcmA Inputs

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated Form-A output contact unless otherwise indi-
cated. FlexLogic™ operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using
NOTE
FlexLogic™ to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic™ equations, or
2 interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.
PHASE DISTANCE
Characteristic: Mho (memory polarized or offset) or Right blinder (Quad only):
Quad (memory polarized or non-direc- Reach: 0.02 to 500 Ω in steps of 0.01
tional), selectable individually per zone Characteristic angle: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
Number of zones: 5 Left Blinder (Quad only):
Directionality: forward, reverse, or non-directional per Reach: 0.02 to 500 Ω in steps of 0.01
zone Characteristic angle: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
Reach (secondary Ω): 0.02 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01 Time delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Reach accuracy: ±5% including the effect of CVT tran- Timing accuracy: ±3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater
sients up to an SIR of 30 Current supervision:
Distance: Level: line-to-line current
Characteristic angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1 Pickup: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Comparator limit angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1 Dropout: 97 to 98%
Directional supervision: Memory duration: 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1
Characteristic angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1 VT location: all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers
Limit angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
CT location: all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers
Voltage supervision pickup (series compensation applications):
0 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PHASE DISTANCE OPERATING TIME CURVES
The operating times are response times of a microprocessor part of the relay. See output contacts specifications for estimation of the total
response time for a particular application. The operating times are average times including variables such as fault inception angle or type
of a voltage source (magnetic VTs and CVTs).
Phase Element (21P)
30
SIR = 0.1
SIR = 1
25 SIR = 10
SIR = 20
SIR = 30
Operating Time [ms]
20
15
10
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80%
Fault Location [%]
837717A1.CDR

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
GROUND DISTANCE
Characteristic: Mho (memory polarized or offset) or Zero-sequence mutual compensation
Quad (memory polarized or non-direc- Z0M/Z1 magnitude: 0.00 to 7.00 in steps of 0.01
tional), selectable individually per zone Z0M/Z1 angle: –90 to 90° in steps of 1
Reactance polarization: negative-sequence or zero-sequence Right blinder (Quad only):
current Reach: 0.02 to 500 Ω in steps of 0.01
Non-homogeneity angle: –40 to 40° in steps of 1 Characteristic angle: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
Number of zones: 5 Left blinder (Quad only):
Directionality: forward, reverse, or non-directional per
Reach: 0.02 to 500 Ω in steps of 0.01
Characteristic angle: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
2
zone
Time delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Reach (secondary Ω): 0.02 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Reach accuracy: ±5% including the effect of CVT tran- Timing accuracy: ±3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater
sients up to an SIR of 30 Current supervision:
Distance characteristic angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1 Level: neutral current (3I_0)
Pickup: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Distance comparator limit angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
Dropout: 97 to 98%
Directional supervision:
Memory duration: 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1
Limit angle: 30 to 90° in steps of 1 Voltage supervision pickup (series compensation applications):
Zero-sequence compensation 0 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Z0/Z1 magnitude: 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01 Operation time: 1 to 1.5 cycles (typical)
Z0/Z1 angle: –90 to 90° in steps of 1 Reset time: 1 power cycle (typical)
GROUND DISTANCE OPERATING TIME CURVES
The operating times are response times of a microprocessor part of the relay. See output contacts specifications for estimation of the total
response time for a particular application. The operating times are average times including variables such as fault inception angle or type
of a voltage source (magnetic VTs and CVTs).
Ground Element (21G)
35
SIR = 0.1
SIR = 1
30 SIR = 10
SIR = 20
25 SIR = 30
Operating Time [ms]
20
15
10
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80%
Fault Location [%]
837718A1.CDR

LINE PICKUP NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC

Phase IOC: 0.000 to 30.000 pu Pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Undervoltage pickup: 0.000 to 3.000 pu Dropout level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Overvoltage delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s Level accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC (whichever is greater)
Current: Phasor or RMS
> 2.0 × CT rating: ±1.5% of reading
Pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
2 Dropout level: 97% to 98% of Pickup
Overreach:
Pickup delay:
< 2%
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Level accuracy:
Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
for 0.1 to 2.0 × CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated
Operate time: < 20 ms at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz
(whichever is greater)
for > 2.0 × CT: ±1.5% of reading > 2.0 × CT rating Timing accuracy: Operate at 1.5 × Pickup
Curve shapes: IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely ±3% or ± 4 ms (whichever is greater)
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/ Relay connection: 90° (quadrature)
Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves™
Quadrature voltage:
(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s ABC phase seq.: phase A (VBC), phase B (VCA), phase C (VAB)
base curve) ACB phase seq.: phase A (VCB), phase B (VAC), phase C (VBA)
Curve multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of Polarizing voltage threshold: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
0.01
Current sensitivity threshold: 0.05 pu
Reset type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)
Timing accuracy: Operate at > 1.03 × actual Pickup
Angle accuracy: ±2°
±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle
(whichever is greater) Operation time (FlexLogic™ operands):
Tripping (reverse load, forward fault):< 12 ms, typically
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC Blocking (forward load, reverse fault):< 8 ms, typically
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Directionality: Co-existing forward and reverse
Level accuracy:
Polarizing: Voltage, Current, Dual
(whichever is greater) Polarizing voltage: V_0 or VX
> 2.0 × CT rating ±1.5% of reading Polarizing current: IG
Overreach: <2% Operating current: I_0
Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 Level sensing: 3 × (|I_0| – K × |I_1|), IG
Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 Restraint, K: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
Operate time: <20 ms at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz Characteristic angle: –90 to 90° in steps of 1
Timing accuracy: Operate at 1.5 × Pickup Limit angle: 40 to 90° in steps of 1, independent for
±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater) forward and reverse
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC Angle accuracy: ±2°
Pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Offset impedance: 0.00 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Dropout level: 97% to 98% of Pickup Pickup level: 0.05 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated (which- Dropout level: 97 to 98%
ever is greater) Operation time: < 16 ms at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz
from 0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating
±1.5% of reading > 2.0 x CT rating
Curve shapes: IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/
Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves™
(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s
base curve)
Curve multiplier (Time dial): 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) and Lin-
ear
Timing accuracy: Operate at > 1.03 × Actual Pickup
±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE

Directionality: Co-existing forward and reverse Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Polarizing: Voltage Dropout level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Polarizing voltage: V_2 Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Operating current: I_2 Pickup delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Level sensing: Reset delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Zero-sequence: |I_0| – K × |I_1| Timing accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±4 ms
Negative-sequence:
Restraint, K:
|I_2| – K × |I_1|
0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001 Operate time:
< 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
2
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE
Limit angle: 40 to 90° in steps of 1, independent for
forward and reverse
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Offset impedance: 0.00 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Pickup delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Reset delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Dropout level: 97 to 98%
Time accuracy: ±3% or ±20 ms, whichever is greater
Operation time: < 16 ms at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz
Operate time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × Pickup at 60 Hz
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
BREAKER FAILURE
Mode: 1-pole, 3-pole
Current supervision: phase, neutral current
Current supv. pickup: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Curve shapes: GE IAV Inverse;
Definite Time (0.1s base curve) Current supv. dropout: 97 to 98% of pickup
Curve multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of Current supv. accuracy:
0.01
Timing accuracy: Operate at < 0.90 × Pickup
above 2 × CT rating: ±2.5% of reading
±3.5% of operate time or ±4 ms (which-
ever is greater) BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
Principle: accumulates breaker duty (I2t) and mea-
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE sures fault duration
Initiation: programmable per phase from any Flex-
Dropout level: 102 to 103% of pickup Logic™ operand
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V Compensation for auxiliary relays: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Curve shapes: GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time Alarm threshold: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1
Curve multiplier: Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Fault duration accuracy: 0.25 of a power cycle
Timing accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±4 ms Availability: 1 per CT bank with a minimum of 2
BREAKER FLASHOVER
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE Operating quantity: phase current, voltage and voltage differ-
Voltage: Phasor only ence
Pickup level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Pickup level voltage: 0 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Dropout level voltage: 97 to 98% of pickup
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V Pickup level current: 0 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s Dropout level current: 97 to 98% of pickup
Operate time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × Pickup at 60 Hz Level accuracy: ±0.5%
Timing accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater) Pickup delay: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE Time accuracy: ±3% or ±20 ms, whichever is greater
Pickup level: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 Operate time: <35 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
SYNCHROCHECK
Max voltage difference: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1
Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Max angle difference: 0 to 100° in steps of 1
Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Max freq. difference: 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Timing accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
Hysteresis for max. freq. diff.: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01
Operate time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × Pickup at 60 Hz
Dead source function: None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or
DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2
(L = Live, D = Dead)

AUTORECLOSURE LOAD ENCROACHMENT

Two breakers applications Responds to: Positive-sequence quantities
Single- and three-pole tripping schemes Minimum voltage: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Up to 4 reclose attempts before lockout Reach (sec. Ω): 0.02 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Selectable reclosing mode and breaker sequence Impedance accuracy: ±5%
PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES Angle: 5 to 50° in steps of 1
Direct Underreaching Transfer Trip (DUTT) Angle accuracy: ±2°
2 Permissive Underreaching Transfer Trip (PUTT) Pickup delay:
Reset delay:
0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (POTT)
Hybrid POTT Scheme Time accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater
Directional Comparison Blocking Scheme Operate time: < 30 ms at 60 Hz
TRIP OUTPUT OPEN POLE DETECTOR

Collects trip and reclose input requests and issues outputs to con- Detects an open pole condition, monitoring breaker auxiliary con-
trol tripping and reclosing. tacts, the current in each phase and optional voltages on the line
Communications timer delay: 0 to 65535 s in steps of 0.001 Current pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Evolving fault timer: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 Line capacitive reactances (XC1, XC0): 300.0 to 9999.9 sec. Ω in
Timing accuracy: ±3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater steps of 0.1
Remote current pickup level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
POWER SWING DETECT Current dropout level: Pickup + 3%, not less than 0.05 pu
Functions: Power swing block, Out-of-step trip
Characteristic: Mho or Quad
Measured impedance: Positive-sequence
Blocking / tripping modes: 2-step or 3-step
Tripping mode: Early or Delayed
Current supervision:
Fwd / reverse reach (sec. Ω): 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Left and right blinders (sec. Ω): 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
Impedance accuracy: ±5%
Fwd / reverse angle impedances: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
Characteristic limit angles: 40 to 140° in steps of 1
Timers: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy: ±3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater

2.2.2 USER PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
FLEXLOGIC™ USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs

Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical Number: 48 plus Trip and Alarm
visualization (keypad programmable) Programmability: from any logical variable, contact, or vir-
Lines of code: 512 tual input
Internal variables: 64 Reset mode: Self-reset or Latched
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2
to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs),
LED TEST 2
Initiation: from any digital input or user-program-
NAND (2 to 16 inputs), Latch (Reset
mable condition
dominant), Edge Detectors, Timers
Number of tests: 3, interruptible at any time
Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual
Duration of full test: approximately 3 minutes
input
Test sequence 1: all LEDs on
Number of timers: 32
Test sequence 2: all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s
Pickup delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Test sequence 3: all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s
Dropout delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
FLEXCURVES™ USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of displays: 16
Number: 4 (A through D)
Lines of display: 2 × 20 alphanumeric characters
Reset points: 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Parameters: up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
Operate points: 80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Invoking and scrolling: keypad, or any user-programmable con-
Time delay: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
dition, including pushbuttons
FLEX STATES
Number: up to 256 logical variables grouped
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
under 16 Modbus addresses Number of pushbuttons: 7
Programmability: any logical variable, contact, or virtual Operation: drive FlexLogic™ operands
input USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)
FLEXELEMENTS™ Number of pushbuttons: 12
Number of elements: 8 Mode: Self-Reset, Latched
Operating signal: any analog actual value, or two values in Display message: 2 lines of 20 characters each
differential mode SELECTOR SWITCH
Operating signal mode: Signed or Absolute Value Number of elements: 2
Operating mode: Level, Delta Upper position limit: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
Comparator direction: Over, Under Selecting mode: Time-out or Acknowledge
Pickup Level: –30.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Time-out timer: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
Hysteresis: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1 Control inputs: step-up and 3-bit
Delta dt: 20 ms to 60 days Power-up mode: restore from non-volatile memory or syn-
Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 chronize to a 3-bit control input
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type: Set-dominant or Reset-dominant
Number: 16 (individually programmed)
Output: Stored in non-volatile memory
Execution sequence: As input prior to protection, control, and
FlexLogic™

2.2.3 MONITORING
OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA LOGGER

Maximum records: 64 Number of channels: 1 to 16
Sampling rate: 64 samples per power cycle Parameters: Any available analog actual value
Triggers: Any element pickup, dropout or operate Sampling rate: 1 sec.; 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min.
Digital input change of state Storage capacity: (NN is dependent on memory)
2 Digital output change of state
FlexLogic™ equation
1-second rate: 01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
Data: AC input channels ↓ ↓
Element state 60-minute rate: 01 channel for NN days
Digital input state 16 channels for NN days
Digital output state
Data storage: In non-volatile memory
FAULT LOCATOR
Method: Single-ended
EVENT RECORDER Maximum accuracy if: Fault resistance is zero or fault currents
Capacity: 1024 events from all line terminals are in phase
Time-tag: to 1 microsecond Relay accuracy: ±1.5% (V > 10 V, I > 0.1 pu)
Triggers: Any element pickup, dropout or operate Worst-case accuracy:
Digital input change of state VT%error + (user data)
Digital output change of state CT%error + (user data)
Self-test events ZLine%error + (user data)
Data storage: In non-volatile memory METHOD%error + (Chapter 6)
RELAY ACCURACY%error + (1.5%)
2.2.4 METERING
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy at Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated Range: ±0 to 2 × 109 MWh
(whichever is greater) Parameters: 3-phase only
> 2.0 × CT rating: ±1.0% of reading
Update rate: 50 ms
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading
REAL POWER (WATTS) Range: ±0 to 2 × 109 Mvarh
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading at
Parameters: 3-phase only
–0.8 < PF ≤ –1.0 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1.0
Update rate: 50 ms
REACTIVE POWER (VARS)
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading at –0.2 ≤ PF ≤ 0.2
FREQUENCY
Accuracy at
APPARENT POWER (VA) V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: ±0.01 Hz (when voltage signal is used
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading for frequency measurement)
I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: ±0.05 Hz
I > 0.25 pu: ±0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for
frequency measurement)

2.2.5 INPUTS
AC CURRENT RTD INPUTS

CT rated primary: 1 to 50000 A Types (3-wire): 100 Ω Platinum, 100 & 120 Ω Nickel, 10
CT rated secondary: 1 A or 5 A by connection Ω Copper
Nominal frequency: 20 to 65 Hz Sensing current: 5 mA
Relay burden: < 0.2 VA at rated secondary Range: –50 to +250°C
Conversion range:
Standard CT: 0.02 to 46 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
Accuracy:
Isolation:
±2°C
36 V pk-pk
2
Sensitive Ground module:
0.002 to 4.6 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude modulation: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
Current withstand: 20 ms at 250 times rated
DC shift: TTL
1 sec. at 100 times rated
continuous at 3 times rated Input impedance: 22 kΩ
Isolation: 2 kV
AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary: 50.0 to 240.0 V REMOTE INPUTS (MMS GOOSE)
VT ratio: 1.00 to 24000.00 Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
Nominal frequency: 20 to 65 Hz Number of remote devices:16
Relay burden: < 0.25 VA at 120 V Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Conversion range: 1 to 275 V DIRECT INPUTS
Voltage withstand: continuous at 260 V to neutral Number of input points: 32
1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral No. of remote devices: 16
CONTACT INPUTS Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Dry contacts: 1000 Ω maximum Ring configuration: Yes, No
Wet contacts: 300 V DC maximum Data rate: 64 or 128 kbps
Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V CRC: 32-bit
Recognition time: < 1 ms CRC alarm:
Debounce timer: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5 Responding to: Rate of messages failing the CRC
Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
DCMA INPUTS Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Current input (mA DC): 0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, Unreturned message alarm:
0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
Responding to: Rate of unreturned messages in the ring
Input impedance: 379 Ω ±10% configuration
Conversion range: –1 to + 20 mA DC Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Accuracy: ±0.2% of full scale Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Type: Passive
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY
LOW RANGE ALL RANGES

Nominal DC voltage: 24 to 48 V at 3 A Volt withstand: 2 × Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
Min/max DC voltage: 20 / 60 V Voltage loss hold-up: 50 ms duration at nominal
NOTE: Low range is DC only. Power consumption: Typical = 15 VA; Max. = 30 VA
HIGH RANGE INTERNAL FUSE
Nominal DC voltage: 125 to 250 V at 0.7 A RATINGS
Min/max DC voltage: 88 / 300 V Low range power supply: 7.5 A / 600 V
Nominal AC voltage: 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz, 0.7 A High range power supply: 5 A / 600 V
Min/max AC voltage: 88 / 265 V at 48 to 62 Hz INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical
DC: 10 000 A

2.2.7 OUTPUTS
FORM-A RELAY SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY

Operate and release time: <100 µs
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Maximum voltage: 265 V DC
Carry continuous: 6A
Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45°C; 4 A at 65°C
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max. at 48 V
0.10 A DC max. at 125 V Make and carry for 0.2 s: as per ANSI C37.90
2 Operate time: < 4 ms Breaking capacity:
Contact material: Silver alloy IEC 647-5 / UL508 Utility Industrial
application application
LATCHING RELAY (autoreclose
scheme)
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Operations/ 5000 ops / 5 ops /
Carry continuous: 6A interval 0.2 s-On, 10000 ops /
1 s-On, 9 s-Off
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max. 0.2 s-Off 0.2 s-On,
1000 ops / within 1 30 s-Off
Operate time: < 4 ms 0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off minute
Contact material: Silver alloy Break 3.2 A
Control: separate operate and reset inputs capability L/R = 10 ms
(0 to 250 V
Control mode: operate-dominant or reset-dominant DC) 1.6 A 10 A 10 A
L/R = 20 ms L/R = 40 ms L/R = 40 ms
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR 0.8 A
Applicable voltage: approx. 15 to 250 V DC L/R = 40 ms
Trickle current: approx. 1 to 2.5 mA
IRIG-B OUTPUT
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR Amplitude: 10 V peak-peak RS485 level
Threshold current: approx. 80 to 100 mA Maximum load: 100 ohms
FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY Time delay: 1 ms for AM input
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 10 A 40 µs for DC-shift input
Carry continuous: 6A Isolation: 2 kV
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max. at 48 V CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT
0.10 A DC max. at 125 V (FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)
Operate time: < 8 ms Capacity: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC
Contact material: Silver alloy Isolation: ±300 Vpk
FAST FORM-C RELAY REMOTE OUTPUTS (MMS GOOSE)
Make and carry: 0.1 A max. (resistive load) Standard output points: 32
Minimum load impedance: User output points: 32
INPUT IMPEDANCE
VOLTAGE DIRECT OUTPUTS
2 W RESISTOR 1 W RESISTOR Output points: 32
250 V DC 20 KΩ 50 KΩ
DCMA OUTPUTS
120 V DC 5 KΩ 2 KΩ
Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
48 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ Max. load resistance: 12 kΩ for –1 to 1 mA range
24 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ 12 kΩ for 0 to 1 mA range
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a 600 Ω for 4 to 20 mA range
required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance. Accuracy: ±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range
Operate time: < 0.6 ms ±0.5% of full-scale for –1 to 1 mA range
Internal Limiting Resistor: 100 Ω, 2 W ±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range
99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms
Isolation: 1.5 kV
Driving signal: any FlexAnalog quantity
Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: –90 to 90 pu in steps of
0.001

RS232 ETHERNET PORT

Front port: 19.2 kbps, Modbus® RTU 10Base-F: 820 nm, multi-mode, supports half-
duplex/full-duplex fiber optic with ST
RS485 connector
1 or 2 rear ports: Up to 115 kbps, Modbus® RTU, isolated
together at 36 Vpk Redundant 10Base-F: 820 nm, multi-mode, half-duplex/full-
Typical distance: 1200 m

10Base-T:
duplex fiber optic with ST connector
RJ45 connector
2
Isolation: 2 kV
Power budget: 10 db
Max optical input power: –7.6 dBm
Max optical output power: –20 dBm
Receiver sensitivity: –30 dBm
Typical distance: 1.65 km
SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

INTERFACE TYPE TYPICAL DISTANCE EMITTER TYPE FIBER TYPE CONNECTOR TYPICAL
TYPE DISTANCE
RS422 1200 m
820 nm LED Multimode ST 1.65 km
G.703 100 m
1300 nm LED Multimode ST 3.8 km
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power 1300 nm ELED Singlemode ST 11.4 km
NOTE and does not take into consideration the clock
1300 nm Laser Singlemode ST 64 km
source provided by the user.
1550 nm Laser Singlemode ST 105 km
LINK POWER BUDGET
EMITTER, TRANSMIT RECEIVED POWER Typical distances listed are based on the fol-
FIBER TYPE POWER SENSITIVITY BUDGET lowing assumptions for system loss. As
820 nm LED, –20 dBm –30 dBm 10 dB NOTE
actual losses will vary from one installation to
Multimode another, the distance covered by your system
1300 nm LED, –21 dBm –30 dBm 9 dB may vary.
Multimode
1300 nm ELED, –21 dBm –30 dBm 9 dB CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)
Singlemode ST connector 2 dB
1300 nm Laser, –1 dBm –30 dBm 29 dB FIBER LOSSES
Singlemode
820 nm multimode 3 dB/km
1550 nm Laser, +5 dBm –30 dBm 35 dB 1300 nm multimode 1 dB/km
Singlemode
1300 nm singlemode 0.35 dB/km
These Power Budgets are calculated from the 1550 nm singlemode 0.25 dB/km
NOTE manufacturer’s worst-case transmitter power Splice losses: One splice every 2 km,
and worst case receiver sensitivity. at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER SYSTEM MARGIN
EMITTER, FIBER TYPE MAX. OPTICAL 3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for
INPUT POWER all other losses.
820 nm LED, Multimode –7.6 dBm
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel
1300 nm LED, Multimode –11 dBm asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
1300 nm ELED, Singlemode –14 dBm
1300 nm Laser, Singlemode –14 dBm
1550 nm Laser, Singlemode –14 dBm

2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES OTHER

Cold: IEC 60028-2-1, 16 h at –40°C Humidity (noncondensing): IEC 60068-2-30, 95%, Variant 1, 6
Dry Heat: IEC 60028-2-2, 16 h at +85°C days
Altitude: Up to 2000 m
Installation Category: II
2 2.2.11 TYPE TESTS
Electrical fast transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Conducted RFI: IEC 61000-4-6

IEC 61000-4-4 Voltage dips/interruptions/variations:
IEC 60255-22-4 IEC 61000-4-11
Oscillatory transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 60255-11
IEC 61000-4-12 Power frequency magnetic field immunity:
Insulation resistance: IEC 60255-5 IEC 61000-4-8
Dielectric strength: IEC 60255-6 Vibration test (sinusoidal): IEC 60255-21-1
ANSI/IEEE C37.90 Shock and bump: IEC 60255-21-2
Electrostatic discharge: EN 61000-4-2
Type test report available upon request.
Surge immunity: EN 61000-4-5
RFI susceptibility: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 NOTE
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 60255-22-3
Ontario Hydro C-5047-77
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS
THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an
Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.
2.2.13 APPROVALS
APPROVALS CE:
UL Listed for the USA and Canada LVD 73/23/EEC: IEC 1010-1
EMC 81/336/EEC: EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING CLEANING
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (±2 inch-pounds) Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust
of torque. has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.

3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit or as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, with a removable
faceplate. The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The face-
plate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with lim-
ited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting
to access the keypad or RS232 communications port.
The vertical and horizontal case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When
planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interfer-
ence to or from adjacent equipment.
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
3
e UR SERIES
Figure 3–1: D60 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS

3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
Figure 3–2: D60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION

Figure 3–3: D60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS
Figure 3–4: D60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS

3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION
Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the
unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or con-
WARNING
nected equipment, or undesired operation!
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with
modules while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with
like modules in their original factory configured slots. The faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the
right side has been pushed up, as shown below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
Figure 3–5: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION

• MODULE WITHDRAWAL: The ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled
simultaneously to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed
from the relay. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot. Modules with current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits.
• MODULE INSERTION: Ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/
inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is
smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simulta-
neously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Type 9G and 9H CPU modules are equipped with 10Base-T and 10Base-F Ethernet connectors. These connectors
must be individually disconnected from the module before the it can be removed from the chassis.
NOTE
The version 4.0 release of the D60 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules). The new CPU mod-
ules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, and 9H. The new CT/VT modules are specified with the
NOTE
following order codes: 8F, 8G.
The new CT/VT modules (8F, 8G) can only be used with the new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H); similarly, the old CT/VT mod-
ules (8A, 8B) can only be used with the old CPUs (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent hardware mismatches, the new CPU
and CT/VT modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating “Attn.: Ensure CPU and DSP module label
colors are the same!”. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will
not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed.
All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware. Firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only
compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only
compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.

3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
837773A1.CDR
Figure 3–6: REAR TERMINAL VIEW

Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in
order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the
first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following
figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
Figure 3–7: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS

3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3.2WIRING 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING
The purpose of this diagram is to provide an example of how the relay is typically wired, not specifically how to wire your own relay. Please refer to the following pages for exam-
TRIPPING DIRECTION
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
A (5 Amp)
B
52 52
C
A B C
CURRENT
POLARIZATION
SOURCE
F 1b
F 2b
F 3b
F 4b
F 1a
F 2a
F 3a
F 4a
F 5a
F 6a
F 7a
F 8a
F 1c
F 2c
F 3c
F 4c
F 5c
F 6c
F 7c
F 8c
3
VX
VB
VC
VA
VX
VB
VC
IG5
IG1
VA
IG
IA5
IA1
IA
IB
IB5
IB1
IC5
IC
IC1
CURRENT SUPV.
VOLT &
CURRENT INPUTS VOLTAGE INPUTS
8F / 8G
H 7a CONTACT IN H 7a DIGITAL I/O 6H I H 1a TC1
H 7c CONTACT IN H 7c H1 H 1b
V
H 8a CONTACT IN H 8a H 1c
H 8c CONTACT IN H 8c I H 2a
H 7b COMMON H7b H2 H 2b
V
VOLTAGE SUPV.
H 8b SURGE H 2c
I H 3a
H3 H 3b
V TC2
H 3c
I H 4a
H4 H 4b
V
GE Multilin H 4c
I H 5a
H5 H 5b
D60 LINE DISTANCE RELAY V
I
H 5c
H 6a
H6 H 6b
V
H 6c
W 5a CONTACT IN W 5a DIGITAL I/O 6A I W1a
W 5c CONTACT IN W 5c W1 W1b
V
ples to help you wire your relay correctly based on your own relay configuration and order code.
W 6a CONTACT IN W 6a W1c
This diagram is based on the following order code: D60-E00-HCL-F8F-H6H-M6K-P6C-U6D-W6A.

W 6c CONTACT IN W 6c I W2a
W 5b COMMON W 5b W2 W2b
V
W2c
W 7a CONTACT IN W 7a
W3a
W7c CONTACT IN W 7c
W3 W3b
W 8a CONTACT IN W 8a
W3c
W 8c CONTACT IN W 8c
W4a
W7b COMMON W7b
W4 W4b
W 8b SURGE W4c
( DC ONLY )
P 1a
6C
P1 P 1b
P 1c
P 2a
P2 P 2b
U 1a CONTACT IN U1a P 2c
6D
U 1c CONTACT IN U1c P 3a
U 2a CONTACT IN U2a P3 P 3b
U 2c CONTACT IN U2c P 3c
U 1b COMMON U1b P 4a
P4 P 4b
U 3a CONTACT IN U3a
U 3c CONTACT IN U3c
P 4c
U 4a CONTACT IN U4a
P 5a
P5 P 5b
U 4c CONTACT IN U4c
U 3b COMMON U3b
P 5c
P 6a
U 5a CONTACT IN U5a P6 P 6b
U 5c CONTACT IN U5c P 6c
U 6a CONTACT IN U6a P 7a
U 6c CONTACT IN U6c P7
DIGITAL I/O
P 7b
U 5b COMMON U5b P 7c
U 7a CONTACT IN U7a P 8a
U 7c CONTACT IN U7c P8 P 8b
DIGITAL I/O
U 8a CONTACT IN U8a P 8c PERSONAL

U 8c CONTACT IN U8c COMPUTER
U 7b COMMON U7b
U 8b SURGE
M1a
6K
RS-232 M1 M1b
B 1b M1c 9 PIN 25 PIN
1
CRITICAL DB-9
B 1a M2a CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
FAILURE
B 2b (front) M2 M2b 1 1 8
B 3a 48 VDC M2c TXD 2 2 3 RXD
POWER SUPPLY
B 3b OUTPUT M3a
DC RXD 3 3 2 TXD
B5b HI M3 M3b 4 4 20
CONTROL
B 6b LO CONTACTS SHOWN M3c
AC or DC POWER SGND 5 5 7 SGND
B 6a WITH NO M4a 6 6 6
B 8a SURGE CONTROL POWER M4 M4b 7 7
Shielded 4
B 8b FILTER M4c 8 8 5
twisted pairs
M5a 9 9 22
D1b M5 M5b
9E
RS485 UR COMPUTER
D2b M5c
Ground at COM 1
D3b COM M6a
Remote
D1a M6 M6b
Device RS485
D2a
COM 2 M6c
D3a COM
D4b
M7a
M7
DIGITAL I/O
Co-axial * D4a IRIG-B M7b

Input M7c
BNC M8a
Co-axial
IRIG-B M8 M8b
CPU
BNC
Output M8c
Co-axial
Co-axial * - For IRIG-B Input No. 10AWG GROUND BUS MODULE ARRANGEMENT 837774A2.CDR
only use one Minimum
X W V U T S R P N M L K J H G F D B
terminal as input 6 6 6 6 6 8 9 1
MODULES MUST BE
CAUTION
GROUNDED IF
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O CT/VT CPU Power
TERMINAL IS
* * * * Supply
PROVIDED
(Rear View)
* Optional
Figure 3–8: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware is shown in the following table:
Table 3–1: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR-SERIES MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE MODULE FUNCTION TERMINALS DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
TYPE (AC)
FROM TO
1 Power Supply High (+); Low (+); (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
1 Power Supply 48 V DC (+) and (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
1 Power Supply Relay Terminals Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
2 Reserved N/A N/A N/A
3 Reserved N/A N/A N/A
4
5
Reserved
Analog Inputs/Outputs
N/A
All except 8b
N/A
Chassis
N/A
< 50 V DC
3
6 Digital Inputs/Outputs All (See Precaution 2) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
G.703 All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
7
RS422 All except 6a, 7b, 8a Chassis < 50 V DC
8 CT/VT All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
9 CPU All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in module hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak volt-
age transients, radio frequency interference (RFI) and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components
can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one
minute.
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER
CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY
RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY
CAUTION
OCCUR!
The D60 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well
known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be
NOTE
avoided by powering the relays up once a year.
The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges. Each range has a dedicated input connection for
proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical Specifications section for additional details):
• LO range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal
• HI range: 125 to 250 V nominal
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the
Typical Wiring Diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a Form-C that will be energized once control power is applied
and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a
critical failure (see the Self-Test Errors table in Chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.

Figure 3–9: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES
A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on Channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or Channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels
1 and 5 are intended for connection to Phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 2 and 6 are intended for
connection to Phase B, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to Phase C and
are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single phase source. If voltage, this
channel is labelled the auxiliary voltage (VX). If current, this channel is intended for connection to a CT between a system
neutral and ground, and is labelled the ground current (IG).
a) CT INPUTS
VERIFY THAT THE CONNECTION MADE TO THE RELAY NOMINAL CURRENT OF 1 A OR 5 A MATCHES
THE SECONDARY RATING OF THE CONNECTED CTs. UNMATCHED CTs MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
DAMAGE OR INADEQUATE PROTECTION.
The CT/VT module may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current inputs (Type
8F) or with a sensitive ground input (Type 8G) which is 10 times more sensitive (see the Technical Specifications section for
additional details). Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the
input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Cur-
rent transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram.
b) VT INPUTS
The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as
input for the Synchrocheck and Volts/Hertz features.
Substitute the tilde “~” symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figures.
827831AA-X5.CDR
Figure 3–10: CT/VT MODULE WIRING

3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Every digital input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as 3 terminals per row, with 8 rows in
total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for Form-C relay outputs, the
terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a Form-A out-
put, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered. The
terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications. When a digital input/output module is ordered
with contact inputs, they are arranged in groups of four and use two rows of three terminals. Ideally, each input would be
totally isolated from any other input. However, this would require that every input have two dedicated terminals and limit the
available number of contacts based on the available number of terminals. So, although each input is individually optically
isolated, each group of four inputs uses a single common as a reasonable compromise. This allows each group of four out-
puts to be supplied by wet contacts from different voltage sources (if required) or a mix of wet and dry contacts.
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may
be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot 3
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot
position, row number, and column position.
UR-SERIES FORM-A / SOLID STATE (SSR) OUTPUT CONTACTS:
Some Form-A/SSR outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC
current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to
logic “On = 1” when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to “On = 1” when the
current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to “On = 1” when the current exceeds about 80 to 100
mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to
seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. The block diagrams of the circuits are below
above for the Form-A outputs with:
a) optional voltage monitor
b) optional current monitor
c) with no monitoring
If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion

~#a ~#a otherwise Cont Op x Ioff -
I I If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von
otherwise Cont Op x Voff
If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von
~#b
otherwise Cont Op x Voff - ~#b Load
V Load V
~#c + ~#c +
a) Voltage with optional Voltage monitoring only Both voltage and current monitoring
current monitoring

~#a ~#a otherwise Cont Op x Ioff -
V V If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von
otherwise Cont Op x Voff
~#b
otherwise Cont Op x Ioff - ~#b Load
I I
Load
~#c + ~#c +
b) Current with optional
voltage monitoring Current monitoring only Both voltage and current monitoring
(external jumper a-b is required)
827821A5.CDR
~#a
~#b -
Load
~#c +
c) No monitoring
Figure 3–11: FORM-A /SOLID STATE CONTACT FUNCTIONS

The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (Cont Op # Von, Cont
Op # Voff, Cont Op # Ion, and Cont Op # Ioff) which can be used in protection, control and alarm logic. The typical application of
the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the
control command. Refer to the Digital Elements section of Chapter 5 for an example of how Form-A/SSR contacts can be
applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.
Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay contacts need to
be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure proper insula-
WARNING
tion levels!
USE OF FORM-A/SSR OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE For Form-A/SSR output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit
has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitor-
ing equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the
3 Form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance.
The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the
Form-A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power sup-
ply is used as a source, a 500 Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the
Form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module; wherever a number
sign "#" appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the Form-A/SSR contact outputs, the FlexLogic™ operand driv-
ing the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in
NOTE
situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup
value).
Table 3–2: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~6A I/O MODULE ~6B I/O MODULE ~6C I/O MODULE ~6D I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-C ~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-C ~2a, ~2c 2 Inputs
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3a, ~3c 2 Inputs
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4a, ~4c 2 Inputs
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6E I/O MODULE ~6F I/O MODULE ~6G I/O MODULE ~6H I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-C ~1 Fast Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

~6K I/O MODULE ~6L I/O MODULE ~6M I/O MODULE ~6N I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-C ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
3
~6P I/O MODULE ~6R I/O MODULE ~6S I/O MODULE ~6T I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-A ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6U I/O MODULE ~67 I/O MODULE ~4A I/O MODULE ~4B I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Not Used ~1 Not Used
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Solid-State ~2 Solid-State
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-A ~7 Not Used ~7 Not Used
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-A ~8 Solid-State ~8 Solid-State
~4C I/O MODULE ~4L I/O MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Not Used ~1 2 Outputs
~2 Solid-State ~2 2 Outputs
~8 Solid-State ~8 Not Used

827719CY-X1.dwg
Figure 3–12: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)

– MOSFET Solid State Contact 827719CY-X2.dwg
Figure 3–13: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2)

CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT AND SOLID STATE OUTPUT CON-
NECTIONS FOR PROPER FUNCTIONALITY.
CAUTION

A dry contact has one side connected to Terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power sup-
ply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group
has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply
module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact
is connected to the required contact input terminal. In addition, the negative side of the external source must be connected
to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact input group. The maximum external source voltage for this
arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
(Dry) DIGITAL I/O 6B (Wet) DIGITAL I/O 6B
3 ~ 7a + CONTACT IN
~ 7c + CONTACT IN
~ 8a + CONTACT IN
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a
~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a
~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c 24-250V ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c
~ 7b - COMMON ~ 7b ~ 7b - COMMON ~ 7b
~ 8b SURGE ~ 8b SURGE
B 1b
1
B 1a CRITICAL
FAILURE
B 2b
B 3a -
POWER SUPPLY
48 VDC
B 3b + OUTPUT
B 5b HI+
CONTROL
B 6b LO+
POWER
B 6a -
B 8a SURGE
B 8b FILTER
827741A4.CDR
Figure 3–14: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS

Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE
Contact outputs may be ordered as Form-A or Form-C. The Form A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervi-
sion. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the
circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the Form-A contact closes. If enabled, the cur-
rent monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the Form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized
inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We
recommend using an external DC supply.
NOTE

3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance tem-
perature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and con-
vert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard dcmA ranges. Software is provided to configure
virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.
Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three ter-
minals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a"
having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/
output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to Terminal 8b. The current outputs
require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The figure below illustrates the trans- 3
ducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay.
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE
827831AB-X1.CDR
Figure 3–15: TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING

3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT
A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the relay’s faceplate for programming with a portable (personal) computer. All that
is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the enerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay.
Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors.
The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
NOTE
Figure 3–16: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION

3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS
a) OPTIONS
In addition to the RS232 port on the faceplate, the relay provides the user with two additional communication port(s)
depending on the CPU module installed.
The 9E, 9G, and 9H CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.
NOTE
CPU TYPE COM1 COM2

9E RS485 RS485
9G 10Base-F and 10Base-T RS485
9H Redundant 10Base-F RS485 3
827831AB-X6.DWG
Figure 3–17: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING
b) RS485 PORTS
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternat-
ing over the same two wires. Through the use of these port(s), continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer,
SCADA system or PLC is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be
observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–”
terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when pro-
vided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to
the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For
larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to
increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An iso-
lated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.

Figure 3–18: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION
c) 10BASE-F FIBER OPTIC PORT

ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED
CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
CAUTION
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps. Optical fiber
may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nanometers in multimode. Optical fiber is only available for
CPU types 9G and 9H. The 9H CPU has a 10BaseF transmitter and receiver for optical fiber communications and a second
pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy.
The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 µm, 62.5/125 µm and 100/140 µm. The fiber optic port is designed such
that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 µm or less in diameter. For optical power budgeting, splices are
required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair (the ST type connector contributes for a connector loss of 0.2 dB).
When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or dis-
engage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.

3.2.9 IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within
1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or ampli-
tude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
RELAY 3
4B IRIG-B(+)
4A IRIG-B(-)
IRIG-B
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE RECEIVER
TIME CODE
GENERATOR + BNC (IN)
(DC SHIFT OR
AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
-
BNC (OUT) REPEATER
TO OTHER DEVICES
(DC-SHIFT ONLY)
827756A5.CDR
Figure 3–19: IRIG-B CONNECTION

The IRIG-B repeater provides an amplified DC-shift IRIG-B signal to other equipment. By using one IRIG-B serial connec-
tion, several UR-series relays can be synchronized. The IRIG-B repeater has a bypass function to maintain the time signal
even when a relay in the series is powered down.
Figure 3–20: IRIG-B REPEATER

3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS 3 HARDWARE
3.3DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The D60 direct inputs/outputs feature makes use of the Type 7 series of communications modules. These modules are also
used by the L90 Line Differential Relay for inter-relay communications. The direct input/output feature uses the communica-
tions channel(s) provided by these modules to exchange digital state information between relays. This feature is available
on all UR-series relay models except for the L90 Line Differential relay.
The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown below. The transmitter of one mod-
ule is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then connected to the receiver
of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure below illustrates a ring of four
UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx
to UR1-Rx. A maximum of eight (8) UR-series relays can be connected in a single ring
Tx
3 UR #1
Rx
Tx
UR #2
Rx
Tx
UR #3
Rx
Tx
UR #4
Rx
842006A1.CDR
Figure 3–21: DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION

The interconnection for dual-channel Type 7 communications modules is shown below. Two channel modules allow for a
redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The required
connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the first
ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, UR2-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, and UR4-Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the second
ring.
Tx1
Rx1
UR #1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR #2
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR #3
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR #4
Tx2
Rx2
842007A1.CDR
Figure 3–22: DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION

The following diagram shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels.
UR1 and UR3 have single Type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication
channels can be of different types, depending on the Type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input/output data to ‘cross-
over’ from Channel 1 to Channel 2 on UR2, the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be “Enabled” on UR2. This
forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.

3 HARDWARE 3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
Tx
UR #1
Rx
Channel #1
Tx1
Rx1
UR #2
Tx2
Rx2
Channel #2
3
Tx
UR #3
Rx
842013A1.CDR
Figure 3–23: DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT SINGLE/DUAL CHANNEL COMBINATION CONNECTION

The interconnection requirements are described in further detail in this section for each specific variation of Type 7 commu-
nications module. These modules are listed in the following table. All fiber modules use ST type connectors.
Table 3–3: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS

MODULE SPECIFICATION
2A C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
2B C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
7B 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 channel
7E Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode
7F Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode
7G Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels
7L Channel 1: RS422, Channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7Q Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7R G.703, 1 channel
7S G.703, 2 channels
7T RS422, 1 channel
7W RS422, 2 channels
72 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 channel
73 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels
74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
75 Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION

3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module: 7A / 7B / 7C 7H / 7I / 7J
Connection Location: Slot X Slot X
RX1 RX1
TX1 TX1
3
RX2
TX2
1 Channel 2 Channels 831719A2.CDR
Figure 3–24: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module: 72/ 7D 73/ 7K

Connection Location: Slot X Slot X
TX1 TX1
RX1 RX1
TX2
RX2
1 Channel 2 Channels 831720A3.CDR
Figure 3–25: LASER FIBER MODULES

When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum
Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING

3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.
The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps only. The SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !" DIRECT I/O DATA
RATE setting is not applicable to this module.
NOTE
AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Con-
necting the shield to Pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if
Pin X1a or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
X 1a
3
Shld.
7R
Tx – X 1b
G.703
CHANNEL 1
Rx – X 2a
Tx + X 2b
Rx + X 3a
SURGE X 3b
Shld. X 6a
Tx – X 6b
G.703
CHANNEL 2
Rx – X 7a
X 7b
COMM.
Tx +
Rx + X 8a
SURGE X 8b
831727A2-X1.CDR
Figure 3–26: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrange-
ment of these pins, see the Rear Terminal Assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Shld. X 1a X 1a Shld.
7R
7R
Tx - X 1b X 1b Tx -
G.703 G.703
CHANNEL 1
Rx - X 2a X 2a Rx -
CHANNEL 1
Tx + X 2b X 2b Tx +
Rx + X 3a X 3a Rx +
SURGE X 3b X 3b SURGE
Shld. X 6a X 6a Shld.
Tx - X 6b X 6b Tx -
G.703 G.703
Rx - X 7a X 7a Rx -
COMM.
COMM.
CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 2
Tx + X 7b X 7b Tx +
Rx + X 8a X 8a Rx +
SURGE X 8b X 8b SURGE
831727A2.CDR
Figure 3–27: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES

Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see
pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that “A” is equivalent to “+”
NOTE
and “B” is equivalent to “–”.
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES

1. Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2. Remove the module cover screw.
3. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4. Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes.
5. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.

6. Re-insert the G.703 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as
the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the
clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 3–28: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
Table 3–4: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS

SWITCHES FUNCTION
S1 OFF → Octet Timing Disabled
ON → Octet Timing 8 kHz
S5 and S6 S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF → Loop Timing Mode
S5 = ON and S6 = OFF → Internal Timing Mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON → Minimum Remote Loopback Mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON → Dual Loopback Mode
c) OCTET TIMING (SWITCH S1)

If Octet Timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of Bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connect-
ing to higher order systems. When L90's are connected back to back, Octet Timing should be disabled (OFF).
d) TIMING MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6)

• Internal Timing Mode: The system clock generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in the
Internal Timing Mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For Back to Back Connections, set for Octet Timing
(S1 = OFF) and Timing Mode = Internal Timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
• Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection
should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (UR-
to-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to Octet Timing (S1 = ON) and set Timing Mode = Loop Timing (S5 = OFF and S6
= OFF).

e) TEST MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6)

MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE:
In Minimum Remote Loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any
processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 Line Side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs,
passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer
and then returns to the transmitter. The Differential Received Data is processed and passed to the G.703 Transmitter mod-
ule after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 Receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and
passes it to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is
expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMR G7X DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
3
DMX G7R
DUAL LOOPBACK MODE:

In Dual Loopback Mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each Receiver/
Transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data
enters the Differential Manchester Receiver module and then is returned to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 Receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 Transmitter module to be
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks
are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One
source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the Differential Manchester side of the interface.
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver

DMR G7X DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMX G7R

3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the RS422 2-terminal interface configuration at 64 kbps. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recom-
mended for external connections. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices which optically isolated.
The RS422 module is fixed at 64 kbps only. The SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !" DIRECT I/O DATA
RATE setting is not applicable to this module.
NOTE
SHIELD TERMINATION
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a and/or 7b; Site 2: Terminate shield to ‘COM’ pin 2b.
3 The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
W 3b Tx -
W7W
W 3a Rx -
RS422
W 2a Tx +
CHANNEL 1
W 4b Rx +
W 6a Shld.
W 5b Tx -
W 5a Rx -
RS422
W 4a Tx +
CHANNEL 2
W 6b Rx +
W 7b Shld.
W 7a +
CLOCK
W 8b -
W 2b com
W 8a SURGE
RS422.CDR
p/o 827831A6.CDR
Figure 3–29: RS422 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two RS422 interfaces. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Tx - W 3b W 3b Tx -
7T
7T
Rx - W 3a W 3a Rx -
RS422 RS422
Tx + W 2a W 2a Tx +
CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1
Rx + W 4b W 4b Rx +
Shld. W 6a W 6a Shld.
+ W 7a W 7a +
CLOCK CLOCK
- W 8b W 8b -
com W 2b + W 2b com
SURGE W 8a W 8a SURGE
64 KHz
831728A3.CDR
Figure 3–30: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES
b) TWO CHANNEL APPLICATIONS VIA MULTIPLEXERS

The RS422 Interface may be used for ‘1 channel’ or ‘2 channel’ applications over SONET/SDH and/or Multiplexed systems.
When used in 1 channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing Tx,
Rx, and Send Timing connections. However, when used in 2 channel applications, certain criteria have to be followed due
to the fact that there is 1 clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connec-
tions are observed and your Data Module has a feature called Terminal Timing. Terminal Timing is a common feature to
most Synchronous Data Units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the Terminal Timing
feature, 2 channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The Send Timing outputs from the Multi-
plexer - Data Module 1, will connect to the Clock inputs of the UR–RS422 interface in the usual fashion. In addition, the
Send Timing outputs of Data Module 1 will also be paralleled to the Terminal Timing inputs of Data Module 2. By using this
configuration the timing for both Data Modules and both UR–RS422 channels will be derived from a single clock source. As

a result, data sampling for both of the UR–RS422 channels will be synchronized via the Send Timing leads on Data Module
1 as shown in the following figure. If the Terminal Timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the
G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
Data Module 1
Pin No. Signal Name
7W
Tx1(+) W 2a SD(A) - Send Data
Tx1(-) W 3b SD(B) - Send Data
RS422
Rx1(+) W 4b RD(A) - Received Data
CHANNEL 1
Rx1(-) W 3a RD(B) - Received Data
Shld. W 6a RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS)
+ W 7a RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS)
CLOCK
- W 8b RT(A) - Receive Timing
Tx2(+) W 4a RT(B) - Receive Timing
Tx2(-) W 5b CS(A) - Clear To Send
RS422
Rx2(+) W 6b CS(B) - Clear To Send
3
CHANNEL 2
L90 COMM.
Rx2(-) W 5a Local Loopback

Shld. W 7b Remote Loopback
com W 2b Signal Ground
SURGE W 8a ST(A) - Send Timing
ST(B) - Send Timing
Data Module 2
Pin No. Signal Name
TT(A) - Terminal Timing
TT(B) - Terminal Timing
SD(A) - Sand Data
SD(B) - Sand Data
RD(A) - Received Data
RD(B) - Received Data
RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS)
CS(A) - Clear To Send
CS(B) - Clear To Send
Local Loopback
Remote Loopback
Signal Ground
ST(A) - Send Timing
ST(B) - Send Timing
831022A2.CDR
Figure 3–31: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION

Data Module 1 provides timing to the D60 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data Module 1 also provides
timing to Data Module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The Data Module pin numbers have been
omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer.
c) TRANSIT TIMING
The RS422 Interface accepts one clock input for Transmit Timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz Transmit
Timing clock of the Multiplexer Interface is sampling the data in the center of the Transmit Data window. Therefore, it is
important to confirm Clock and Data Transitions to ensure Proper System Operation. For example, the following figure
shows the positive edge of the Tx Clock in the center of the Tx Data bit.
Tx Clock
Tx Data
Figure 3–32: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS

d) RECEIVE TIMING
The RS422 Interface utilizes NRZI-MARK Modulation Code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx Clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
To recover the Rx Clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (Digital Phase Lock Loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is
driven by an internal clock, which is over-sampled 16X, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a data
clock that can be used as the SCC (Serial Communication Controller) receive clock.
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74
modules are used in 2-terminal with a redundant channel or 3-terminal configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the
RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and Channel 2 via direct fiber.
3 AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at
one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly.
WARNING
W 3b Tx1 -
W7L, M, N, P and 74
W 3a Rx1 -
RS422
W 2a Tx1 +
CHANNEL 1
W 4b Rx1 +
W 6a Shld.
Tx2
FIBER
CHANNEL 2
Rx2
W 7a + CLOCK
W 8b - (CHANNEL1)
W 2b com
W 8a SURGE
L907LMNP.CDR
P/O 827831A6.CDR
Figure 3–33: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (Data Communications Equipment) units.
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75
modules are used in configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and
Channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the
shield to Pin 1A at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See pre-
vious sections for more details on the G.703 and Fiber interfaces.
WARNING
X 1a Shld.
W7E, F, G and Q
X 1b Tx -
G.703
X 2a Rx -
CHANNEL 1
X 2b Tx +
X 3a Rx +
X 3b SURGE
Tx2
FIBER
CHANNEL 2
Rx2
Figure 3–34: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (76 and 77) are designed to interface with IEEE C37.94 compliant
digital multiplexers and/or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input/output applications for
firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data
between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to
64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame
is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and
data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 × 64 kbps optical fiber interface
Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber
Fiber optic mode: multi-mode
Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km
3
Fiber optic connector: type ST
Wavelength: 830 ±40 nm
Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports
the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.
IEEE C37.94
Fiber Interface
Digital
UR series Multiplexer
relay IEEE C37.94
compliant
up to 2 km
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a
non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as
shown below.
IEEE C37.94 RS422

Fiber Interface Interface
Digital
UR series IEEE C37.94 Multiplexer
relay Converter with EIA-422
up to 2 km Interface
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The func-
tions of these control switches is shown below.
Internal Timing Mode Loop Timed
te te
xt xt
ON ON
te te
xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te xt
te
xt xt xt xt OFF xt xt xt xt xt xt OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Switch Internal Loop Timed

1 ON OFF
2 ON OFF
3 OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF
5 OFF OFF
6 OFF OFF

For the Internal Timing Mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be
Internal Timing for Relay 1 and Loop Timed for Relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the Looped Timing Mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection
should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems.
The C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1. Remove the C37.94 module (76 or 77):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2. Remove the module cover screw.
3 3. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4. Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
5. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
6. Re-insert the C37.94 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot posi-
tion. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position
as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage
the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 3–35: C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The enerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device.
The alternate human interface is implemented via the device’s faceplate keypad and display (see Faceplate Interface sec-
tion in this chapter).
The enerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation
of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (i.e. off-
line) or connected (i.e. on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to
the device. In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time.
The enerVista UR Setup software, provided with every D60 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Win-
dows® 95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic enerVista UR Setup software interface
features. The enerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the enerVista UR Setup software
interface.
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST
To start using the enerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the enerV-
ista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting enerVista UR Setup with the D60 section in Chapter 1 for details.
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE OVERVIEW

4
a) ENGAGING A DEVICE
The enerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a UR relay.
Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any num-
ber of relays selected from the UR product series.
b) USING SETTINGS FILES

The enerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
• In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
• While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then
save the settings to the relay.
• You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
• Device Definition
• Product Setup
• System Setup
• FlexLogic™
• Grouped Elements
• Control Elements
• Inputs/Outputs
• Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC™

You can create or edit a FlexLogic™ equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically
generated logic diagram.

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES

You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.
e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS

While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified
parameters, via one of the following:
• Event Recorder facility: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in
chronological order from most recent to oldest.
• Oscillography facility: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of
power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) FILE SUPPORT
• Execution: Any enerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus
to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from
the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu.
• Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target
for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any
4 Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.
New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabet-
ically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu
in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device.
g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES
The firmware of a D60 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the enerVista UR Setup software. The correspond-
ing instructions are provided by the enerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic “Upgrading Firmware”.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default
values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firm-
NOTE
ware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.
The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test
message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This
message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW
The enerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components:
a. Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view
b. Main window menu bar
c. Main window tool bar
d. Site List control bar window
e. Settings List control bar window
f. Device data view window(s), with common tool bar
g. Settings File data view window(s), with common tool bar
h. Workspace area with data view tabs
i. Status bar
Figure 4–1: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2.1 FACEPLATE
The keypad/display/LED interface is one of two alternate human interfaces supported. The other alternate human interface
is implemented via the enerVista UR Setup software. The faceplate interface is available in two configurations: horizontal or
vertical. The faceplate interface consists of several functional panels.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over
the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following two figures show the horizontal
and vertical arrangement of faceplate panels.
LED PANEL 1 LED PANEL 2 LED PANEL 3 DISPLAY
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TROUBLE CURRENT RESET
TEST MODE
TRIP
FREQUENCY
OTHER USER 1
GE Multilin
ALARM PHASE A
PICKUP PHASE B USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3
MENU 7 8 9
1 3 5 7 9 11
4
USER 4
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL HELP MESSAGE 4 5 6
USER 5
ESCAPE 1 2 3
USER 6
2 4 6 8 10 12 ENTER VALUE 0 . +/-
USER 7 USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
CONTROL USER-PROGRAMMABLE KEYPAD

PUSHBUTTONS 1-7 PUSHBUTTONS 1-12 827801A5.CDR
Figure 4–2: UR-SERIES HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS
DISPLAY
MENU 7 8 9
HELP MESSAGE 4 5 6
ESCAPE 1 2 3 KEYPAD
ENTER VALUE 0 . +/-
LED PANEL 3
LED PANEL 2
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP
ALARM
PICKUP
OTHER
PHASE A
PHASE B
USER 1
USER 2
LED PANEL 1
827830A1.CDR
PHASE C
Figure 4–3: UR-SERIES VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.2.2 LED INDICATORS
a) LED PANEL 1
This panel provides several LED indicators, several keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any
latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset
via the SETTINGS !" INPUT/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING menu). The USER keys are used by the Breaker Control feature. The
RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC.
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP OTHER USER 1
ALARM PHASE A
PHASE C
Figure 4–4: LED PANEL 1

STATUS INDICATORS:
• IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the
4
relay has been programmed.
• TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
• TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.
• TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; the RESET command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
• ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
• PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:
These indicate the input type that was involved in a condition detected by an element that is operated or has a latched flag
waiting to be reset.
• VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved.
• CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.
• FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.
• OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.
• PHASE A: Indicates Phase A was involved.
• PHASE B: Indicates Phase B was involved.
• PHASE C: Indicates Phase C was involved.
• NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates neutral or ground was involved.

b) LED PANELS 2 AND 3

These panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a custom-
ized label beside every LED is provided.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-Programmable LEDs section in Chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
Figure 4–5: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)
c) DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2

4 The default labels are intended to represent:
• GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.
• BREAKER n OPEN: The breaker is open.
• BREAKER n CLOSED: The breaker is closed.
• BREAKER n TROUBLE: A problem related to the breaker has been detected.
• SYNCHROCHECK NO n IN-SYNCH: Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element.
• RECLOSE ENABLED: The recloser is operational.
• RECLOSE DISABLED: The recloser is not operational.
• RECLOSE IN PROGRESS: A reclose operation is in progress.
• RECLOSE LOCKED OUT: The recloser is not operational and requires a reset.
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support
six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight
NOTE
setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-Programmable LEDs section of Chapter 5. The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both LED panels 2 and 3
as explained in the next section.
SETTINGS IN USE BREAKER 1 SYNCHROCHECK

GROUP 1 OPEN NO1 IN-SYNCH
GROUP 2 CLOSED NO2 IN-SYNCH
GROUP 3 TROUBLE
GROUP 4 RECLOSE
GROUP 5 BREAKER 2 ENABLED
GROUP 6 OPEN DISABLED
GROUP 7 CLOSED IN PROGRESS
GROUP 8 TROUBLE LOCKED OUT
Figure 4–6: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABELS)

d) CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS

Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL:
http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/
This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures
are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x)
edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.
1. Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1501-0014).
Push in
and gently lift
up the cover.
2. Pop out the LED Module and/or the Blank Module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the
plastic. 4
( LED MODULE ) ( BLANK MODULE )
3. Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side.
4. Put the clear Lexan Front Cover back into place.
e) CUSTOMIZING THE DISPLAY MODULE

The following items are required to customize the UR display module:
• Black and white or color printer (color preferred)
• Microsoft Word 97 or later software
• 1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069),
and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015)
1. Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on
the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required.
2. When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use.
3. Print the template(s) to a local printer.
4. From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide.
5. Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the
clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.

4.2.3 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 × 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting con-
ditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the
aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will
default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and
appear on the display.
4.2.4 KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into ‘pages’ under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Tar-
gets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement
numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit
mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The key may be
pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values.
4 4.2.5 BREAKER CONTROL
a) DESCRIPTION
The D60 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker,
which can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually
initiated from faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic™ operand. A setting is provided to assign names
to each breaker; this user-assigned name is used for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided for
two breakers; the user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker No. 1.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" BREAKERS ! BREAKER n ! BREAKER FUNC-
TION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.
b) CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING

Installations may require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-Pole), or in the one and three-pole (1-
Pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as 3-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed position.
If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be in agree-
ment to indicate the position of the breaker.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" BREAKERS ! BREAKER n !" BREAKER
PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is "Enabled" for each breaker. The D60 has features required for single-pole operation.
Inputs that trip individual breaker poles and cause a breaker reclose are passed directly to this element.
c) FACEPLATE PUSHBUTTON (USER KEY) CONTROL

After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user
cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.
d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS

For the following example setup, the symbol (Name) represents the user-programmed variable name.
For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker No. 1 and breaker No. 2.
The USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2
key is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.

ENTER COMMAND This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a
PASSWORD COMMAND PASSWORD is required; i.e. if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no com-
mands have been issued within the last 30 minutes.
Press USER 1 This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This mes-
To Select Breaker sage will be maintained for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items (1), (2)
and (3) below:
(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is
To Close BKR1-(Name) pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to close breaker No. 1.
(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is
To Open BKR1-(Name) pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to open breaker No. 1.
(3) 4
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1),
(2) and (3). Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers.
Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2 or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.
e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER

For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker No. 1 only. Operation for this application is identical
to that described for two breakers.
4.2.6 MENUS
a) NAVIGATION
Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily fol-
lowed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as
illustrated below.
! ! !
ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS TARGETS
" " " "
## ACTUAL VALUES ## SETTINGS ## COMMANDS No Active

## STATUS ## PRODUCT SETUP ## VIRTUAL INPUTS Targets
!
USER DISPLAYS
(when in use)
"
User Display 1

b) HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters (##), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (#). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the
MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually
pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)

## SETTINGS
## SYSTEM SETUP
4 c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION
## ACTUAL VALUES Press the key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This
## STATUS page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the
MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers.
"
## SETTINGS Press the key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page
## PRODUCT SETUP contains settings to configure the relay.
"
## SETTINGS Press the MESSAGE key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains
## SYSTEM SETUP settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display
the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header.
"
# PASSWORD From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE key
# SECURITY once to display the first sub-header (Password Security).
"
ACCESS LEVEL: Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first setting for Pass-
Restricted word Security. Pressing the MESSAGE key repeatedly will display the remaining
" setting messages for this sub-header.
# PASSWORD Press the MESSAGE key once to move back to the first sub-header message.
# SECURITY
"
# DISPLAY Pressing the MESSAGE key will display the second setting sub-header associ-
# PROPERTIES ated with the Product Setup header.
"
FLASH MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first setting for Dis-
TIME: 1.0 s play Properties.
"
DEFAULT MESSAGE To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader,
INTENSITY: 25% repeatedly press the MESSAGE key. The last message appears as shown.

4.2.7 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA

Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
FLASH MESSAGE For example, select the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES ! FLASH
TIME: 1.0 s MESSAGE TIME setting.
"
MINIMUM: 0.5 Press the key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the key
MAXIMUM: 10.0 again to view the next context sensitive help message.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
• 0 to 9 and (decimal point): The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A num-
ber is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the
MESSAGE key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
• VALUE : The VALUE key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value
allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE
upward from the minimum value. The VALUE
key again will allow the setting selection to continue
key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the
4
minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to con-
tinue downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate
TIME: 2.5 s numeric keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are
" being entered.
NEW SETTING Until is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press
HAS BEEN STORED to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear as
confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places will
be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA

Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is
comprised of two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL: For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command",
Restricted "Setting", and "Factory Service".
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE key displays the next selection while the
VALUE key displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL: If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selec-
Setting tion is displayed. Press at any time for the context sensitive help messages.
"
NEW SETTING Changes are not registered by the relay until the key is pressed. Pressing
HAS BEEN STORED stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirma-
tion of the storing process.

c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT

Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper
case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific appli-
cations. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example: to enter the text, “Breaker #1”
1. Press to enter text edit mode.
2. Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press to advance the cursor to the next position.
3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4. Press to store the text.
5. If you have any problem, press to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for sev-
eral seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing displays how to edit and store new values.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY
4 RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and
this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is
safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings
have not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the
"Programmed" state.
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows:
1. Press the key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message
appears on the display.
2. Press the MESSAGE key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.
SETTINGS
"
## SETTINGS # PASSWORD
## PRODUCT SETUP # SECURITY
# DISPLAY
# PROPERTIES
↓
# USER-DEFINABLE
# DISPLAYS
# INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS:
# Not Programmed
5. After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the
selection to "Programmed".
6. Press the key.
RELAY SETTINGS: RELAY SETTINGS: NEW SETTING

Not Programmed Programmed HAS BEEN STORED

7. When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the
In Service LED will turn on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS

To enter the initial Setting (or Command) Password, proceed as follows:
1. Press the key until the 'SETTINGS' header flashes momentarily and the ‘SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP’ mes-
sage appears on the display.
2. Press the MESSAGE key until the ‘ACCESS LEVEL:’ message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE key until the ‘CHANGE SETTING (or COMMAND) PASSWORD:’ message appears on the
display.
SETTINGS
"
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No 4
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ----------
ENCRYPTED SETTING
4. After the 'CHANGE...PASSWORD' message appears on the display, press the VALUE key or the VALUE key to
change the selection to Yes.
5. Press the key and the display will prompt you to 'ENTER NEW PASSWORD'.
6. Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the key.
7. When the 'VERIFY NEW PASSWORD' is displayed, re-type in the same password and press .
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING ENTER NEW VERIFY NEW

PASSWORD: Yes PASSWORD: ########## PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
8. When the 'NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED' message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will
be active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD

To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will
prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.
In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding Encrypted Password from the PASSWORD
SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding.


5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU
## SETTINGS # PASSWORD
See page 5-7.
## PRODUCT SETUP # SECURITY
# DISPLAY
See page 5-8.
# PROPERTIES
# CLEAR RELAY
See page 5-10.
# RECORDS
# COMMUNICATIONS
See page 5-11.
#
# MODBUS USER MAP
See page 5-18.
#
# REAL TIME
See page 5-18.
# CLOCK
# FAULT REPORTS
See page 5-19.
#
# OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 5-20.
#
# DATA LOGGER
See page 5-22.
#
5
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
See page 5-23.
# LEDS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
See page 5-26.
# SELF TESTS
# CONTROL
See page 5-26.
# PUSHBUTTONS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
See page 5-28.
# PUSHBUTTONS
# FLEX STATE
See page 5-29.
# PARAMETERS
# USER-DEFINABLE
See page 5-30.
# DISPLAYS
# DIRECT I/O
See page 5-32.
#
# INSTALLATION
See page 5-37.
#
## SETTINGS # AC INPUTS
See page 5-38.
## SYSTEM SETUP #
# POWER SYSTEM
See page 5-39.
#
# SIGNAL SOURCES
See page 5-40.
#
# BREAKERS
See page 5-42.
#

5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETTINGS
# FLEXCURVES
See page 5-45.
#
## SETTINGS # FLEXLOGIC
See page 5-67.
## FLEXLOGIC # EQUATION EDITOR
# FLEXLOGIC
See page 5-67.
# TIMERS
# FLEXELEMENTS
See page 5-68.
#
# NON-VOLATILE
See page 5-72.
# LATCHES
## SETTINGS # SETTING GROUP 1

See page 5-73.
## GROUPED ELEMENTS #
# SETTING GROUP 2
#
↓
# SETTING GROUP 6
#
5 ## SETTINGS # SETTING GROUPS

See page 5-145.
## CONTROL ELEMENTS #
# SELECTOR SWITCH
See page 5-146.
#
# TRIP OUTPUT
See page 5-151.
#
# SYNCHROCHECK
See page 5-155.
#
# AUTORECLOSE
See page 5-159.
#
# DIGITAL ELEMENTS
See page 5-171.
#
# DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 5-174.
#
# MONITORING
See page 5-176.
# ELEMENTS
# PILOT SCHEMES
See page 5-184.
#
## SETTINGS # CONTACT INPUTS

See page 5-199.
## INPUTS / OUTPUTS #
# VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 5-201.
#
# CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 5-202.
#

# LATCHING OUTPUTS
See page 5-202.
#
# VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 5-204.
#
# REMOTE DEVICES
See page 5-205.
#
# REMOTE INPUTS
See page 5-206.
#
# REMOTE OUTPUTS
See page 5-207.
# DNA BIT PAIRS
# REMOTE OUTPUTS
See page 5-208.
# UserSt BIT PAIRS
# RESETTING
See page 5-208.
#
# DIRECT INPUTS
See page 5-208.
#
# DIRECT OUTPUTS
See page 5-208.
#
## SETTINGS # DCMA INPUTS

## TRANSDUCER I/O #
See page 5-212.
5
# RTD INPUTS
See page 5-213.
#
# DCMA OUTPUTS
See page 5-213.
#
## SETTINGS TEST MODE

See page 5-217.
## TESTING FUNCTION: Disabled
TEST MODE INITIATE:
See page 5-217.
On
# FORCE CONTACT
See page 5-217.
# INPUTS
# FORCE CONTACT
See page 5-218.
# OUTPUTS
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
In the design of UR relays, the term “element” is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The com-
parator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to deter-
mine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as “setting the flag”. A single
comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a
Pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an Operate flag when the input current has been at a level
above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators, except the Digital Ele-
ment which uses a logic state as the input, use analog parameter actual values as the input.
Elements are arranged into two classes, GROUPED and CONTROL. Each element classed as a GROUPED element is
provided with six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a GROUPED ele-
ment is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a CONTROL element is independent
of the selected active setting group.

The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the input(s), settings, fixed
logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F).
Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
• For current elements, the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT. Where the current
source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the ‘base quantity’ will be the common secondary or primary current
to which the sum is scaled (i.e. normalized to the larger of the 2 rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and
CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the ‘base quantity’ will be 5 A
secondary or 300 A primary.
• For voltage elements the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal primary voltage of the protected system which corresponds
(based on VT ratio and connection) to secondary VT voltage applied to the relay. For example, on a system with a
13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with 14400:120 V Delta-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu)
would be:
13800
---------------- × 120 = 115 V (EQ 5.1)
14400
For Wye-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:
13800
---------------- × 120
---------- = 66.4 V (EQ 5.2)
14400 3
Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
• FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as “Enabled”. The factory
default is “Disabled”. Once programmed to “Enabled”, any element associated with the Function becomes active and
5 all options become available.
• NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
• SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored.
• PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or
below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the
range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup.
• PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the Pickup
and Operate output states.
• RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
• BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or “flag not set”. The comparator
remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN
input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise
the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
• TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no
target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to Self-
Reset, the target message and LED indication follow the Operate state of the element, and self-resets once the oper-
ate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the
element output returns to logic 0 - until a RESET command is received by the relay.
• EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the Pickup, Dropout or Operate states are recorded by the
event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
Enabled, events are created for:
(Element) PKP (pickup)
(Element) DPO (dropout)
(Element) OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to
the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not ‘0’.

5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES
a) BACKGROUND
The D60 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applications, each of the two
three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker fail-
ure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying
and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer application, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each
of three windings, using voltage from different sets of VTs. These requirements can be satisfied with a single UR, equipped
with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the
AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some metering elements.
Selection of the parameter(s) to measure is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/control
comparator by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component,
total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.) to measure. The user completes the process
by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some of the parameters calculated from these channels.
The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of
phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before summation.
A mechanism called a “Source” configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems.
Sources, in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source
contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all
or some of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary
voltage from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
To illustrate the concept of Sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. In this
application, the current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other location
or power equipment, and some current flows into transformer Winding 1. The current into Winding 1 is the phasor sum (or
difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of the CT 5
connections). The same considerations apply to transformer Winding 2. The protection elements require access to the net
current for transformer protection, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.
CT1 CT2
Through Current
WDG 1
UR Power
Platform
Transformer
WDG 2
CT3 CT4 827791A2.CDR
Figure 5–1: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME

In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of
all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to
perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions
have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summa-
tion are applied internally via configuration settings.
A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for
example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features
that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure.
Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to
select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device.

The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be given a specific name
through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can
be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above
diagram, the configures one Source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this Source as “Wdg 1 Current”.
Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the pro-
tection elements and as metered quantities.
b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION

CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage,
phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental
frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each
channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.
A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the
module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group,
hereafter called a “bank,” and all four are either current or voltage, as are Channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6,
7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and
from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2 CT/VT MODULE 3
< bank 1 > < bank 3 > < bank 5 >
< bank 2 > < bank 4 > < bank 6 >
5 The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The
result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of
Sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM MAXIMUM NUMBER
CT/VT Module 3
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) 6
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) 3
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically
generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of
channels in a given product. The ‘bank’ naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by
the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot
in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents
the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them
in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1,
F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5.
The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument
transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element
and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and
voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make
multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a
watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes.
The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An applica-
tion example of the grouping of parameters in a Source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is mea-
sured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.

5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP ! PASSWORD SECURITY
# PASSWORD ACCESS LEVEL: Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

# SECURITY Restricted Factory Service (for factory use only)
CHANGE COMMAND Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND Range: 0 to 9999999999
MESSAGE Note: ---------- indicates no password
ENCRYPTED SETTING Range: 0 to 9999999999
MESSAGE Note: ---------- indicates no password
Two levels of password security are provided: Command and Setting. Operations under password supervision are:
• COMMAND: operating the breakers via faceplate keypad, changing the state of virtual inputs, clearing the event
records, clearing the oscillography records, clearing fault reports, changing the date and time, clearing
the breaker arcing amps, clearing the data logger
• SETTING: changing any setting, test mode operation
The Command and Setting passwords are defaulted to "Null" when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password
is set to "Null", the password security feature is disabled.
Programming a password code is required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical charac- 5
ters. When a CHANGE ... PASSWORD setting is set to "Yes", the following message sequence is invoked:
1. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________
2. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________
3. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED
To gain write access to a "Restricted" setting, set ACCESS LEVEL to "Setting" and then change the setting, or attempt to
change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access
will be allowed. If no keys are pressed for longer than 30 minutes or control power is cycled, accessibility will automatically
revert to the "Restricted" level.
If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD.
The D60 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing
a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic™ operand is
asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS !" CLEAR RECORDS !" RESET UNAUTHORIZED
ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected.
The operand does not generate events or targets. If these are required, the operand can be assigned to a digital element
programmed with event logs and/or targets enabled.
If the SETTING and COMMAND passwords are identical, this one password allows access to both commands
and settings.
NOTE
When enerVista UR Setup is used to access a particular level, the user will continue to have access to that
level as long as there are open windows in the enerVista UR Setup software. To re-establish the Password
NOTE
Security feature, all windows must be closed for at least 30 minutes.

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES
# DISPLAY FLASH MESSAGE Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

# PROPERTIES TIME: 1.0 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
MESSAGE Visible only if a VFD is installed
INTENSITY: 25 %
SCREEN SAVER Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE Visible only if an LCD is installed
FEATURE: Disabled
SCREEN SAVER Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE Visible only if an LCD is installed
WAIT TIME: 30 min
CURRENT CUT-OFF Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
LEVEL: 1.0 V
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
• FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several
seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal mes-
5 sages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
• DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a
default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough
during programming or reading of actual values.
• DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be
attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.
• SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the D60 has a liquid
crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is “Enabled”, the LCD backlighting
is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys
have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD
backlighting is turned on.
• CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the
rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others
prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The D60 applies a cut-
off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substi-
tuted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical compo-
nents. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by
communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
• VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measure-
ments (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed
as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual sig-
nal. The D60 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below
the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical
components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those
used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.
This setting relates to the actual measured voltage at the VT secondary inputs. It can be converted to per-unit values
(pu) by dividing by the PHASE VT SECONDARY setting value. For example, a PHASE VT SECONDARY setting of “66.4 V”
and a VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL setting of “1.0 V” gives a cut-off value of 1.0 V / 66.4 V = 0.015 pu.

The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The
power cut-off level is calculated as follows:
power cut-off level = CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × 1.0 pu current × 1.0 pu voltage (EQ 5.3)
For example, given the following settings:

CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: “0.02 pu”
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: “1.0 V”
PHASE CT PRIMARY: “100 A”
PHASE VT SECONDARY: “66.4 V”
PHASE VT RATIO: “208.00 : 1".
We have:
1.0 pu current = CT primary = “100 A”, and
1.0 pu voltage = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V
The power cut-off is therefore:
power cut-off = CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × 1.0 pu current × 1.0 pu voltage
= 0.02 pu × 0.015 pu × 100 A × 13811.2 V
= 416 watts
Any calculated power value below this cut-off will not be displayed. As well, the three-phase energy data will not accumu-
late if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off.
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals
as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of “0.02
NOTE
pu” for CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and “1.0 V” for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.
5

5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
# CLEAR RELAY CLEAR FAULT REPORTS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# RECORDS Off
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
No
CLEAR DATA LOGGER: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR ARC AMPS 1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR ARC AMPS 2: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR ENERGY: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CLEAR DIR I/O STATS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand.
5 MESSAGE
Off Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic™ operands. Assigning user-program-
mable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since the D60 responds to rising
edges of the configured FlexLogic™ operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-program-
mable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programma-
ble pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be
applied.
1. Assign the clear demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP
!" CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
2. Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT
SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.20 s”

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS
# COMMUNICATIONS # SERIAL PORTS

See below.
# #
# NETWORK
MESSAGE See page 5–12.
#
# MODBUS PROTOCOL
#
# DNP PROTOCOL
#
# UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
#
# WEB SERVER
# HTTP PROTOCOL
# TFTP PROTOCOL
#
# IEC 60870-5-104
# PROTOCOL
MESSAGE
# SNTP PROTOCOL
See page 5–17. 5
#
b) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS ! SERIAL PORTS
# SERIAL PORTS RS485 COM1 BAUD Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
# RATE: 19200 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only
active if CPU 9E is ordered.
RS485 COM1 PARITY: Range: None, Odd, Even
MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type 9E is ordered
None
RS485 COM1 RESPONSE Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type 9E is ordered
MIN TIME: 0 ms
RS485 COM2 BAUD Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
MESSAGE 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200
RATE: 19200
RS485 COM2 PARITY: Range: None, Odd, Even
MESSAGE
None
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MESSAGE
MIN TIME: 0 ms
The D60 is equipped with up to 3 independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local
use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type is selected when ordering: either an Ethernet or
RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that
these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of
these ports may be connected to a computer running enerVista UR Setup. This software can download and upload setting
files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and con-
nected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports.
For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be
set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after
NOTE
each transmission.

c) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" NETWORK
# NETWORK IP ADDRESS: Range: Standard IP address format

# 0.0.0.0 Only active if CPU Type 9G or 9H is ordered.
SUBNET IP MASK: Range: Standard IP address format

MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type 9G or 9H is ordered.
0.0.0.0
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS: Range: Standard IP address format
0.0.0.0
# OSI NETWORK Range: Press the MESSAGE ! key to enter the OSI
MESSAGE NETWORK ADDRESS. Only active if CPU Type
# ADDRESS (NSAP)
9G or 9H is ordered.
ETHERNET OPERATION Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex
MODE: Full-Duplex
These messages appear only if the D60 is ordered with an Ethernet card.
The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, MMS/UCA2, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols. The
NSAP address is used with the MMS/UCA2 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a set-
ting for the TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally
be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple UR-series relays
behind a router). By setting a different TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER for a given protocol on each UR-series relay, the router can
map the relays to the same external IP address. The client software (enerVista UR Setup, for example) must be configured
to use the correct port number if these settings are used.
5 When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP Port Number, or any User Map setting (when used with DNP) is changed,
it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (OFF/ON).
NOTE
Do not set more than one protocol to use the same TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER, as this will result in unreliable
operation of those protocols.
WARNING
d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" MODBUS PROTOCOL
# MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS SLAVE Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1

# ADDRESS: 254
MODBUS TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 502
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP operation (see the DNP Protocol
description below). This allows the enerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device
only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the D60 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS pro-
grammed. For the RS485 ports each D60 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address
which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same
address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher
address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol.

e) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" DNP PROTOCOL
# DNP PROTOCOL DNP PORT: Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT
# NONE PANEL - RS232, NETWORK
DNP ADDRESS: Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
255
# DNP NETWORK Range: Press the MESSAGE ! key to enter the DNP
MESSAGE NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
# CLIENT ADDRESSES
DNP TCP/UDP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 20000
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 5 s
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MAX RETRIES: 10
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEST ADDRESS: 1
USER MAP FOR DNP Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
ANALOGS: Disabled
NUMBER OF SOURCES Range: 1 to 4 in steps of 1 5
MESSAGE
IN ANALOG LIST: 1
DNP CURRENT SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP POWER SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP ENERGY SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP OTHER SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
MESSAGE 100000
FACTOR: 1
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP POWER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP TIME SYNC IIN Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PERIOD: 1440 min

DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
SIZE: 240
# DNP BINARY INPUTS
MESSAGE
# USER MAP
DNP OBJECT 1 Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
DNP OBJECT 2 Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 20 Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 30 Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
MESSAGE
DNP OBJECT 32 Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
MESSAGE
5 The D60 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The D60 can be used as a DNP slave device con-
nected to a single DNP master (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the D60 maintains one set of DNP data
change buffers and connection information, only one DNP master should actively communicate with the D60 at one time.
The DNP PORT setting selects the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol; only a single port can be assigned.
Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can be used only in
non-ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to “Network”, the DNP protocol can be used over either TCP/IP or UDP/IP.
Refer to Appendix E for more information on the DNP protocol. The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This
number identifies the D60 on a DNP communications link. Each DNP slave should be assigned a unique address. The DNP
NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS setting can force the D60 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be “Disabled” for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the D60 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited
response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the D60 retransmits an unsolic-
ited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of “255” allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL
RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolic-
ited responses are sent is determined by the D60 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
The USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting allows the large pre-defined Analog Inputs points list to be replaced by the much
smaller Modbus User Map. This can be useful for users wishing to read only selected Analog Input points from the D60.
See Appendix E for more information.
The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that
are included in the Analog Inputs points list. This allows the list to be customized to contain data for only the sources that
are configured. This setting is relevant only when the User Map is not used.
The DNP SCALE FACTOR settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These settings group the D60 Ana-
log Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all Analog
Input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to a value of 1000, all DNP Analog
Input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value of 72000 V on the D60 will be
returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP
masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be 10 times larger).
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing Analog Input data. These
settings group the D60 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the
default deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited responses from the D60

when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should be set to “15”. Note that
these settings are the deadband default values. DNP Object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the
default, for each individual DNP Analog Input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the D60, the default
deadbands will be in effect.
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the D60.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be
necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
The DNP BINARY INPUTS USER MAP setting allows for the creation of a custom DNP Binary Inputs points list. The default DNP
Binary Inputs list contains 928 points representing various binary states (contact inputs and outputs, virtual inputs and out-
puts, protection element states, etc.). If not all of these points are required in the DNP master, a custom Binary Inputs points
list can be created by selecting up to 58 blocks of 16 points. Each block represents 16 binary input points. Block 1 repre-
sents binary input points 0 to 15, block 2 represents binary input points 16 to 31, block 3 represents binary input points 32
to 47, etc. The minimum number of binary input points that can be selected is 16 (1 block). If all of the BIN INPUT BLOCK X
settings are set to “Not Used”, the standard list of 928 points will be in effect. The D60 will form the binary inputs points list
from the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings up to the first occurrence of a setting value of “Not Used”.
When using the User Maps for DNP data points (analog inputs and/or binary inputs) for relays with ethernet
installed, check the “DNP Points Lists” D60 web page to ensure the desired points lists are created. This
NOTE
web page can be viewed using a web browser by entering the D60 IP address to access the D60 “Main
Menu”, then by selecting the “Device Information Menu” > “DNP Points Lists” menu item.
The DNP OBJECT N DEFAULT VARIATION settings allow the user to select the DNP default variation number for object types 1,
2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation response when variation 0 is requested and/or in
class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Refer to the DNP Implementation section in Appendix E for additional details.
5
f) UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
# UCA/MMS PROTOCOL DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1. See UserSt Bit Pairs in the
# TIME: 60 s Remote Outputs section of this Chapter.
UCA LOGICAL DEVICE: Range: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters representing

MESSAGE the name of the UCA logical device.
UCADevice
UCA/MMS TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 102
GOOSE FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Enabled
GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
The D60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by the Utility Communication
Architecture (UCA). UCA/MMS is supported over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over eth-
ernet. The D60 operates as a UCA/MMS server. The Remote Inputs/Outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-to-
peer GOOSE message scheme.
The UCA LOGICAL DEVICE setting represents the MMS domain name (UCA logical device) where all UCA objects are
located. The GOOSE FUNCTION setting allows for the blocking of GOOSE messages from the D60. This can be used during
testing or to prevent the relay from sending GOOSE messages during normal operation. The GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS setting
selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide the state of the UCA GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS data item. Refer to Appendix C:
UCA/MMS Communications for additional details on the D60 UCA/MMS support.
Since GOOSE messages are multicast ethernet by specification, router networks must not be used for UCA/MMS.
NOTE

g) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
# WEB SERVER HTTP TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

# HTTP PROTOCOL NUMBER: 80
The D60 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. This feature is available only if the D60 has the ethernet option installed. The web
pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the D60 “Main Menu”. Web pages are available
showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, Event Records, Fault Reports, etc. The web pages can
be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The Main Menu will be displayed in the web
browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the D60 into the “Address” box on the web browser.
h) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" TFTP PROTOCOL
# TFTP PROTOCOL TFTP MAIN UDP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

# NUMBER: 69
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the UR over a network. The D60 operates as a
5 TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file
obtained from the D60 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).
i) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
# IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-5-104 Range: Enabled, Disabled

# PROTOCOL FUNCTION: Disabled
IEC TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 2404
IEC COMMON ADDRESS Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
OF ASDU: 0
IEC CYCLIC DATA Range: 1 to 65535 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PERIOD: 60 s
NUMBER OF SOURCES Range: 1 to 2 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IN MMENC1 LIST: 1
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC POWER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000

The D60 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The D60 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to
a single master (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the D60 maintains one set of IEC 60870-5-104
data change buffers, only one master should actively communicate with the D60 at one time. For situations where a second
master is active in a “hot standby” configuration, the UR supports a second IEC 60870-5-104 connection providing the
standby master sends only IEC 60870-5-104 Test Frame Activation messages for as long as the primary master is active.
The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN MMENC1 LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that
are included in the M_ME_NC_1 (Measured value, short floating point) Analog points list. This allows the list to be custom-
ized to contain data for only the sources that are configured.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are the values used by the UR to determine when to trigger spontaneous
responses containing M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the UR analog data into types: current, voltage,
power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that
type. For example, in order to trigger spontaneous responses from the UR when any current values change by 15 A, the
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the dead-
bands. P_ME_NC_1 (Parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold val-
ues, from the default, for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the UR,
the default thresholds will be in effect.
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols can not be used at the same time. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNC-
TION setting is set to “Enabled”, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it
NOTE
will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (Off/On).
j) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" SNTP PROTOCOL
# SNTP PROTOCOL SNTP FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled

# Disabled
5
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR: Range: Standard IP address format
MESSAGE
0.0.0.0
SNTP UDP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER: 123
The D60 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the D60 can obtain clock time
over an Ethernet network. The D60 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a ded-
icated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported.
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the D60 clock for
as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If
either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the D60 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad.
To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is
set and SNTP FUNCTION is “Enabled”, the D60 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time
values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the D60 clock is closely synchronized with
the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to one minute for the D60 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to “0.0.0.0” and SNTP FUNCTION to “Enabled”. The
D60 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the “all ones” broadcast address for the subnet. The D60 waits up to eighteen
minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error.
The UR-series relays do not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality.

5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" MODBUS USER MAP
# MODBUS USER MAP ADDRESS 1: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

# VALUE: 0
↓
ADDRESS 256: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
VALUE: 0
The Modbus User Map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired
address in the ADDRESS line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is dis-
played in the VALUE line. A value of “0” in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous
ADDRESS lines incremented by “1”. An address value of “0” in the initial register means “none” and values of “0” will be dis-
played for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
These settings can also be used with the DNP protocol. See the DNP Analog Input Points section in Appen-
dix E for details.
NOTE
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" REAL TIME CLOCK
# REAL TIME IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE: Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
# CLOCK None
5 MESSAGE
REAL TIME CLOCK Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled
The date and time for the relay clock can be synchronized to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy
as an electronic watch, approximately ±1 minute per month. An IRIG-B signal may be connected to the relay to synchronize
the clock to a known time base and to other relays. If an IRIG-B signal is used, only the current year needs to be entered.
See also the COMMANDS !" SET DATE AND TIME menu for manually setting the relay clock.
The REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record.

5.2.7 FAULT REPORTS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" FAULT REPORTS ! FAULT REPORT 1
# FAULT REPORT 1 FAULT REPORT 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

# SOURCE: SRC 1
FAULT REPORT 1 TRIG: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 Range: 0.01 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MAG: 3.00 Ω
FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ANGLE: 75°
FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 Range: 0.01 to 650.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MAG: 9.00 Ω
FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ANGLE: 75°
FAULT REPORT 1 LINE Range: km, miles
MESSAGE
LENGTH UNITS: km
FAULT REP 1 LENGTH Range: 0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
(km ): 100.0
The D60 relay supports one fault report and an associated fault locator. The signal source and trigger condition, as well as
the characteristics of the line or feeder, are entered in this menu. 5
The fault report stores data, in non-volatile memory, pertinent to an event when triggered. The captured data contained in
the FaultReport.txt file includes:
• Fault report number
• Name of the relay, programmed by the user
• Firmware revision of the relay
• Date and time of trigger
• Name of trigger (specific operand)
• Line/Feeder ID via the name of a configured signal source
• Active setting group at the time of trigger
• Pre-fault current and voltage phasors (one-quarter cycle before the trigger)
• Fault current and voltage phasors (three-quarter cycle after the trigger)
• Elements operated at the time of triggering
• Events: 9 before trigger and 7 after trigger (only available via the relay webpage)
• Fault duration times for each breaker (created by the Breaker Arcing Current feature)
The captured data also includes the fault type and the distance to the fault location, as well as the reclose shot number
(when applicable). To include fault duration times in the fault report, the user must enable and configure Breaker Arcing
Current feature for each of the breakers. Fault duration is reported on a per-phase basis.
The trigger can be any FlexLogic™ operand, but in most applications it is expected to be the same operand, usually a vir-
tual output, that is used to drive an output relay to trip a breaker. To prevent the overwriting of fault events, the disturbance
detector should not be used to trigger a fault report. A FAULT RPT TRIG event is automatically created when the report is
triggered.

If a number of protection elements are ORed to create a fault report trigger, the first operation of any element causing the
OR gate output to become high triggers a fault report. However, If other elements operate during the fault and the first oper-
ated element has not been reset (the OR gate output is still high), the fault report is not triggered again. Considering the
reset time of protection elements, there is very little chance that fault report can be triggered twice in this manner. As the
fault report must capture a usable amount of pre and post-fault data, it can not be triggered faster than every 20 ms.
Each fault report is stored as a file; the relay capacity is fifteen (15) files. An sixteenth (16th) trigger overwrites the oldest
file.
The enerVista UR Setup software is required to view all captured data. The relay faceplate display can be used to view the
date and time of trigger, the fault type, the distance location of the fault, and the reclose shot number.
The FAULT REPORT 1 SOURCE setting selects the Source for input currents and voltages and disturbance detection. The
FAULT 1 REPORT TRIG setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand representing the protection element/elements requiring oper-
ational fault location calculations. The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal. The FAULT REPORT 1 Z1 MAG
and FAULT REPORT 1 Z0 MAG impedances are entered in secondary ohms.
See the ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS ! FAULT REPORTS menu for additional details.
5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" OSCILLOGRAPHY
# OSCILLOGRAPHY NUMBER OF RECORDS: Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1

# 15
TRIGGER MODE: Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
MESSAGE
5 Automatic Overwrite
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
TRIGGER POSITION:
MESSAGE
50%
TRIGGER SOURCE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS: Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
MESSAGE
16 samples/cycle
# DIGITAL CHANNELS
MESSAGE
#
# ANALOG CHANNELS
MESSAGE
#
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic™ operand. Multiple oscillography records may be cap-
tured simultaneously.
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational CT/VT modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage
for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES !"
RECORDS !" OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sam-
ple configurations with corresponding cycles/record.

Table 5–1: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE

# RECORDS # CT/VTS SAMPLE # DIGITALS # ANALOGS CYCLES/
RATE RECORD
1 1 8 0 0 1872.0
1 1 16 16 0 1685.0
8 1 16 16 0 276.0
8 1 16 16 4 219.5
8 2 16 16 4 93.5
8 2 16 64 16 93.5
8 2 32 64 16 57.6
8 2 64 64 16 32.3
32 2 64 64 16 9.5
A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to “Automatic Overwrite”.
Set the TRIGGER POSITION to a percentage of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position of 25% con-
sists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any
FlexLogic™ parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle.
The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (i.e. current and voltage) are
stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling
rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle, i.e. it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records will be CLEARED.
WARNING
5
b) DIGITAL CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" OSCILLOGRAPHY !" DIGITAL CHANNELS
# DIGITAL CHANNELS DIGITAL CHANNEL 1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# Off
↓
DIGITAL CHANNEL 63: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
A DIGITAL CHANNEL setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each
oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored. Upon
startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list.
c) ANALOG CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" OSCILLOGRAPHY !" ANALOG CHANNELS
# ANALOG CHANNELS ANALOG CHANNEL 1: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

# Off See Appendix A for complete list.
ANALOG CHANNEL 16: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

MESSAGE See Appendix A for complete list.
Off
An ANALOG CHANNEL setting selects the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscil-
lography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored. The
parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: (a) the type of relay, (b) the type and number of CT/VT hardware
modules installed, and (c) the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will
automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in
Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the
selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the
relay keypad/display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed.

All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB desig-
nates the IB signal on Terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F. If there are no CT/VT modules and Analog Input modules,
no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear.
5.2.9 DATA LOGGER
PATH: SETTINGS !" PRODUCT SETUP !" DATA LOGGER
# DATA LOGGER DATA LOGGER RATE: Range: 1 sec; 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30
# 1 min min, 60 min
DATA LOGGER CHNL 1: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:
MESSAGE FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
Off
Off
↓
Off
DATA LOGGER CONFIG: Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only
MESSAGE
0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS
5 The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may
be downloaded to the enerVista UR Setup software and displayed with ‘parameters’ on the vertical axis and ‘time’ on the
horizontal axis. All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is
lost.
For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of
channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use.
Changing any setting affecting Data Logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.
NOTE
• DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded.
• DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of
the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/
VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup,
the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is
shown in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to
expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of
parameters via the relay keypad/display – entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding
parameter to be displayed.
• DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not
selected to “Off” without over-writing old data.

5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE # LED TEST

See below
# LEDS #
# TRIP & ALARM LEDS
#
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
# LED1
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
MESSAGE
# LED2
↓
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE
MESSAGE
# LED48
b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS ! LED TEST
# LED TEST LED TEST FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled.

# Disabled
MESSAGE
LED TEST CONTROL: Range: FlexLogic™ operand 5
Off
When enabled, the LED Test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-program-
mable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs,
including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The test consists of three stages.
Stage 1: All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is “burned”. This stage
lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.
Stage 2: All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine
starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures
that lead to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
Stage 3: All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at
the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that
lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitor-
ing features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and
stores the actual LED states (On or Off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting
from relay response during testing. The Reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
A dedicated FlexLogic™ operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is ini-
tiated, the LED Test Initiated event is stored in the Event Recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, Stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and Stages 2 and 3 can be
interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL set-
ting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.

READY TO TEST
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
rising edge of the
operand
control input
Start the software image of Restore the LED states

the LEDs from the software image
Set the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
control input is on
STAGE 1 time-out
(all LEDs on) (1 minute)
dropping edge of the

control input
rising edge of the

Wait 1 second
control input
STAGE 2 rising edge of the

(one LED on at a time) control input
rising edge of the
5
Wait 1 second
control input
rising edge
STAGE 3
of the control
(one LED off at a time) input
842011A1.CDR
Figure 5–2: LED TEST SEQUENCE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1:
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is “burned” through User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The following set-
tings should be applied. Configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS !
PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
Configure the LED test to recognize User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS !
PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS ! LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: “Enabled”

LED TEST CONTROL: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
The test will be initiated when the User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for
as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then
automatically start Stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2:
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are “burned” as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via User-Programmable Pushbutton 1.
After applying the settings in Application Example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next,
release the pushbutton to automatically start Stage 2. Once Stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When
Stage 2 is completed, Stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.

c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS !" TRIP & ALARM LEDS
# TRIP & ALARM LEDS TRIP LED INPUT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
# Off
ALARM LED INPUT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
The Trip and Alarm LEDs are on LED Panel 1. Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the
selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the Logic 1 state.
d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# LED 1 Off
LED 1 TYPE: Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illumi-
nate when the selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the Logic 1 state.
• LEDs 1 through 24 inclusive are on LED Panel 2; LEDs 25 through 48 inclusive are on LED Panel 3.
Refer to the LED Indicators section in Chapter 4 for the locations of these indexed LEDs. This menu selects the operands
to control these LEDs. Support for applying user-customized labels to these LEDs is provided. If the LED X TYPE setting is
“Self-Reset” (default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED X TYPE setting 5
is ‘Latched’, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communi-
cations channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
Table 5–2: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR LED PANEL 2 LABELS

SETTING PARAMETER SETTING PARAMETER
LED 1 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 1 LED 13 Operand Off
LED 2 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 2 LED 14 Operand BREAKER 2 OPEN
LED 3 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 3 LED 15 Operand BREAKER 2 CLOSED
LED 4 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 4 LED 16 Operand BREAKER 2 TROUBLE
LED 5 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 5 LED 17 Operand SYNC 1 SYNC OP
LED 6 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 6 LED 18 Operand SYNC 2 SYNC OP
LED 7 Operand Off LED 19 Operand Off
LED 8 Operand Off LED 20 Operand Off
LED 9 Operand BREAKER 1 OPEN LED 21 Operand AR ENABLED
LED 10 Operand BREAKER 1 CLOSED LED 22 Operand AR DISABLED
LED 11 Operand BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED 23 Operand AR RIP
LED 12 Operand Off LED 24 Operand AR LO
Refer to the Control of Setting Groups example in the Control Elements section of this chapter for group activation.

5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
# USER-PROGRAMMABLE DIRECT RING BREAK Range: Disabled, Enabled.

# SELF TESTS FUNCTION: Enabled Valid for units equipped with Direct I/O Module.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF Range: Disabled, Enabled.

MESSAGE Valid for units equipped with Direct I/O Module.
FUNCTION: Enabled
REMOTE DEVICE OFF Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE Valid for units equipped with CPU Type C or D.
FUNCTION: Enabled
PRI. ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
FUNCTION: Disabled
SEC. ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE Valid for units equipped with CPU Type D.
FUNCTION: Disabled
BATTERY FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Enabled
SNTP FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
FUNCTION: Enabled
IRIG-B FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Enabled
5 All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic™ operands, events, and targets.
Most of the Minor Alarms can be disabled if desired.
When in the “Disabled” mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic™ operand, write to the event recorder, display target
messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in the “Enabled” mode,
minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay Self-Tests section in Chapter
7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms.
5.2.12 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ! CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
# CONTROL CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

# PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The three standard pushbuttons located on the top left panel of the faceplate are user-programmable and can be used for
various applications such as performing an LED test, switching setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-pro-
grammable displays, etc. Firmware revisions 3.2x and older use these three pushbuttons for manual breaker control. This
functionality has been retained – if the Breaker Control feature is configured to use the three pushbuttons, they cannot be
used as user-programmable control pushbuttons. The location of the control pushbuttons in the following figure.
An additonal four control pushbuttons are included when the D60 is ordered with twelve user programmable pushbuttons.

STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP OTHER USER 1 THREE
ALARM PHASE A STANDARD
PHASE C
CONTROL
NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3 PUSHBUTTONS
USER 4
USER 5 FOUR EXTRA

OPTIONAL
USER 6
CONTROL
USER 7 PUSHBUTTONS
842733A2.CDR
Figure 5–3: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

The control pushbuttons are typically not used for critical operations. As such, they are not protected by the control pass-
word. However, by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable the control pushbuttons
for security reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic™ operand, CONTROL PUSHBTN 1(7) ON. These operands should be
configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is
pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton
manipulation will be recognized by various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the Event Record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed; no event is logged when
the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously – a given key
must be released before the next one can be pressed. 5
The control pushbuttons become user-programmable only if the Breaker Control feature is not configured for manual con-
trol via the User 1 through User 7 pushbuttons as shown below. If configured for manual control, the Breaker Control fea-
ture typically uses the larger, optional user-programmable pushbuttons, making the control pushbuttons available for other
user applications.
SETTING
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON
{
1 FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL:
When applicable
AND RUN
Enabled=1
OFF TIMER
SYSTEM SETUP/ FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/ ON 0 CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON 100 msec
CONTROL:
842010A2.CDR
Enabled=1
Figure 5–4: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC

5.2.13 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1(12)
# USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

# FUNCTION: Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE
TIME: 0.00 s
PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGETS: Disabled
PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The D60 has 12 optional user-programmable pushbuttons available, each configured via 12 identical menus. The pushbut-
tons provide an easy and error-free method of manually entering digital information (On, Off) into FlexLogic™ equations as
well as protection and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, ground protec-
5 tion blocking, and setting groups changes.
The user-configurable pushbuttons are shown below. They can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, avail-
able online at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
1 3 5 7 9 11
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
2 4 6 8 10 12
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
Figure 5–5: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

Each pushbutton asserts its own On and Off FlexLogic™ operands, respectively. FlexLogic™ operands should be used to
program desired pushbutton actions. The operand names are PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF.
A pushbutton may be programmed to latch or self-reset. An indicating LED next to each pushbutton signals the present sta-
tus of the corresponding "On" FlexLogic™ operand. When set to "Latched", the state of each pushbutton is stored in non-
volatile memory which is maintained during any supply power loss.
Pushbuttons states can be logged by the Event Recorder and displayed as target messages. User-defined messages can
also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is ON.
• PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to “Disabled”, the push-
button is deactivated and the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (both “On” and “Off”) are de-asserted. If set to
“Self-reset”, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the “On” corresponding FlexLogic™ operand as long as the
pushbutton is being pressed. As soon as the pushbutton is released, the FlexLogic™ operand is de-asserted. The
“Off” operand is asserted/de-asserted accordingly.
If set to “Latched”, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic™ operand between “On” and
“Off” on each push of the button. When operating in “Latched” mode, FlexLogic™ operand states are stored in non-vol-
atile memory. Should power be lost, the correct pushbutton state is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay.

• PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on
how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
• PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is in the “on” position. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on
entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
• PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the On to the Off position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is
“Latched”. This message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Self-reset” as the pushbutton operand
status is implied to be “Off” upon its release. All user text messaging durations for the pushbuttons are configured with
the PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES ! FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
• PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting specifies a drop-out time delay for a pushbutton in the self-reset mode. A
typical applications for this setting is providing a select-before-operate functionality. The selecting pushbutton should
have the drop-out time set to a desired value. The operating pushbutton should be logically ANDed with the selecting
pushbutton in FlexLogic™. The selecting pushbutton LED remains on for the duration of the drop-out time, signaling
the time window for the intended operation.
For example, consider a relay with the following settings: PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: “AUTORECLOSER”, PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
“DISABLED - CALL 2199", and PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: “ENABLED”. When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the “On” posi-
tion, the following AUTOCLOSER DISABLED – Call 2199 message is displayed: When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the
“Off” position, the message will change to AUTORECLOSER ENABLED.
User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP relay faceplate. If an HP-type faceplate was ordered sepa-
rately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the HP faceplate option. This can be done via enerVista
NOTE
UR Setup with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command.
5.2.14 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS 5

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
# FLEX STATE PARAMETER 1: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand

# PARAMETERS Off
PARAMETER 2: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
PARAMETER 256: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand

MESSAGE
Off
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic™ operand states can be used for efficient moni-
toring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic™ operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed
so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states
which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
The state bits may be read out in the "Flex States" register array beginning at Modbus address 900 hex. 16 states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are 16 registers in total to accom-
modate the 256 state bits.

5.2.15 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
# USER-DEFINABLE INVOKE AND SCROLL: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# DISPLAYS Off
# USER DISPLAY 1 Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
#
↓
# USER DISPLAY 16 Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
#
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing
sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facili-
tate text entry and Modbus Register data pointer options for defining the User Display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
• KEYPAD: Use the Menu key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user-definable display (note
that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the Up and Down keys. The dis-
play disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES
!" DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.
• USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL
setting. Any FlexLogic™ operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navi-
5 gate the programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the Down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first
one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the Down keypad key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay will start to cycle through the
user displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user dis-
play, not at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.
b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ! USER DISPLAY 1(16)
# USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

#
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
0
DISP 1 ITEM 5: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
0

Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and
pressing the key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting “Yes”, a message indi-
cates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are
automatically configured with the proper content – this content may subsequently be edited.
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and/or user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user
display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the
start of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to 5 separate data fields (ITEM 1(5)) can be
entered in a user display - the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the enerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience).
The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad:
1. Select the line to be edited.
2. Press the key to enter text edit mode.
3. Use either Value key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4. Press the key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5. Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6. The key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.
7. Press the key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the 5 items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate key-
pad, use the number keypad. Use the value of ‘0’ for any items not being used. Use the key at any selected system
display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus
address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (enerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this
conversion). 5
Use the key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in
sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a user display, press the key and then select the ‘Yes” option
to remove the display from the user display list. Use the key again to exit the user displays menu.
An example User Display setup and result is shown below:
# USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.
# Current X ~ A
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
Current Y ~ A
DISP 1 ITEM 1: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register
MESSAGE Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker.
6016
DISP 1 ITEM 2: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus
MESSAGE Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker.
6357
DISP 1 ITEM 3: This item is not being used - there is no corresponding
MESSAGE Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
0
MESSAGE Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
0
MESSAGE
0 Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
USER DISPLAYS Current X 0.850 A Shows the resultant display content.

→
Current Y 0.327 A

5.2.16 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O
# DIRECT I/O DIRECT OUTPUT Range: 1 to 16

# DEVICE ID: 1
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O DATA Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps
MESSAGE
RATE: 64 kbps
DIRECT I/O CHANNEL Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CROSSOVER: Disabled
# CRC ALARM CH1
#
# CRC ALARM CH2
#
# UNRETURNED
# MESSAGES ALARM CH1
5 MESSAGE
# UNRETURNED
# MESSAGES ALARM CH2
See page 5–37.
Direct inputs/outputs are intended for exchange of status information (inputs and outputs) between UR-series relays con-
nected directly via Type-7 digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to UCA GOOSE, except that com-
munications takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On Type 7 cards that support
two channels, direct output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends direct output
messages both ways around a ring configuration. On Type 7 cards that support one channel, direct output messages are
sent only in one direction. Messages will be resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at
the receiver.
Direct output message timing is similar to GOOSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at
least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the
outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two Self-Tests are performed and signaled by
the following FlexLogic™ operands:
1. DIRECT RING BREAK (direct input/output ring break). This FlexLogic™ operand indicates that direct output messages
sent from a UR-series relay are not being received back by the relay.
2. DIRECT DEVICE 1(16) OFF (direct device offline). This FlexLogic™ operand indicates that direct output messages from
at least one direct device are not being received.
Direct input/output settings are similar to remote input/output settings. The equivalent of the remote device name strings for
direct inputs/outputs is the DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID. The DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID identifies the relay in all direct output
messages. All UR-series IEDs in a ring should have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used to identify the sender of
the direct input/output message.
If the direct input/output scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”), all direct output
messages should be received back. If not, the Direct Input/Output Ring Break self-test is triggered. The self-test error is sig-
naled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic™ operand.
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. Back-to-back connections of
the local relays configured with the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D, 7H, 7I, 7J, 7K, 72 and 73 fiber optic communication cards may be set to
128 kbps. For local relays configured with all other communication cards (i.e. 7E, 7F, 7G, 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 7R, 7S, 7T, 7W,
74, 75, 76 and 77), the baud rate will be set to 64 kbps. All IEDs communicating over direct inputs/outputs must be set to

the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel communications cards apply the same data rate to both
channels. Delivery time for direct input/output messages is approximately 0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4
of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each ‘bridge’.
The G.703 and RS422 modules are fixed at 64 kbps only. The SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !"
setting is not applicable to these modules.
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE
NOTE
The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to D60s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing
over messages from Channel 1 to Channel 2. This places all UR-series IEDs into one direct input/output network regard-
less of the physical media of the two communication channels.
The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input/output configuration. Please refer to the
Inputs/Outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic™ operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.
EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING THE INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A UR-SERIES RELAY
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of program-
mable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series
IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional input/output and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are con-
nected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
5
842711A1.CDR
Figure 5–6: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT I/OS

In the above application, the following settings should be applied:
UR IED 1: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "1"
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes"
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps"

DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps"
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); i.e., from Device 1 to Device 2, and from
Device 2 to Device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (fiber,
G.703, or RS422).
EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.
UR IED 1 BLOCK
UR IED 2 UR IED 3 UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5–7: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.
TX1 RX1
UR IED 1
RX2 TX2
RX1 TX2 RX2 TX1

UR IED 2 UR IED 4
TX1 RX2 TX2 RX1
TX2 RX2
UR IED 3
RX1 TX1
842716A1.CDR
Figure 5–8: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT I/OS

UR IED 1: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1” UR IED 2: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes” DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of ‘bridges’ between the ori-
gin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum ‘communications distance’ by a factor of two.
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy:
5 IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle;
IED 1 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle;
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
If one ring is broken (say TX2/RX2) the delivery times are as follows:
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of power sys-
tem cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of power system
cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings,
failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the direct inputs/outputs feature would
be primarily used to address these concerns.
EXAMPLE 3: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5–9: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION

A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute
a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):

TX1 RX1 RX2

UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 TX1 TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5–10: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION

In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps):
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as
explained in the Inputs/Outputs section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and, ide-
ally, faster message delivery time. This could be accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown below. 5
TX2 TX1 RX1 RX2
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 RX2 TX2 TX1
TX1 RX1
UR IED 3
RX2 TX2
842715A1.CDR
Figure 5–11: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION

In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy:
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and
cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture.

b) CRC ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !" CRC ALARM CH1(2)
# CRC ALARM CH1 CRC ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

CRC ALARM CH1 Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
CRC ALARM CH1 Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 10
CRC ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The D60 checks integrity of the incoming direct input/output messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC Alarm function is
available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The
monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter adds
up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the CRC
ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM
FlexLogic™ operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT set-
ting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions - if required - should be programmed accordingly.
5 The CRC Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of direct input/output messages that failed
the CRC check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT INPUTS !" CRC FAIL COUNT CH1(2) actual value.
Message Count and Length of the Monitoring Window:

To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1 message per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (128
kbps) even if there is no change in the direct outputs. For example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to “10000”,
corresponds a time window of about 160 minutes at 64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster
as a result of direct outputs activity, the monitoring time interval will shorten. This should be taken into account when deter-
mining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval
of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT should be set to 10 × 60 × 1 = 600.
Correlation of Failed CRC and Bit Error Rate (BER):

The CRC check may fail if one or more bits in a packet are corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail
rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A direct input/out-
put packet containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equiva-
lent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 10–4 implies 1 bit error for every 10,000 bits sent/received. Assuming the best case of only 1
bit error in a failed packet, having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10–4.

c) UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" DIRECT I/O !" UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
# UNRETURNED UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

# MESSAGES ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 10
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The D60 checks integrity of the direct input/output communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring con-
figuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The Unreturned
Messages Alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of unre-
turned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have failed
to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM
CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET
ALM FlexLogic™ operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE
COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, should be programmed accordingly.
The Unreturned Messages Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration. 5
The total number of unreturned input/output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT INPUTS
!" UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1(2) actual value.
5.2.17 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" INSTALLATION
# INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS: Range: Not Programmed, Programmed

# Not Programmed
RELAY NAME: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Relay-1
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output
relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name
is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet com-
munications channel using the UCA2/MMS protocol.

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5.3SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 AC INPUTS
a) CURRENT BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS ! CURRENT BANK F1(M5)
# CURRENT BANK F1 PHASE CT F1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

# PRIMARY: 1 A
PHASE CT F1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PRIMARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 1 A
Four banks of phase/ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {1, 5}.
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected
in Wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = Neutral Current = 3Io) is used as the
input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the
5 circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground
CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this
case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to Chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct opera-
tion, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the
following current banks:
F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio; F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio; M1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio
The following rule applies:
SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + M1 (EQ 5.4)
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be
adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then
a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary.
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).

5 SETTINGS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
b) VOLTAGE BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE BANK F5(M5)
# VOLTAGE BANK F5 PHASE VT F5 Range: Wye, Delta

# CONNECTION: Wye
PHASE VT F5 Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
PHASE VT F5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RATIO: 1.00 :1
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
CONNECTION: Vag
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RATIO: 1.00 :1
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing VT characteristics.
CAUTION
Two banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {5}.
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
5
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CON-
NECTION made to the system as “Wye” or “Delta”. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as “Delta”. See
the Typical Wiring Diagram in Chapter 3 for details.
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal
voltage is applied to the VT primary.
NOTE
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a Delta connec-
tion, the secondary voltage would be 115, i.e. (13800 / 14400) × 120. For a Wye connection, the voltage value
entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4.
On a 14.4 kV system with a Delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage
value entered would be 120, i.e. 14400 / 120.
5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM
# POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY: Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1

# 60 Hz
PHASE ROTATION: Range: ABC, ACB
MESSAGE
ABC
FREQUENCY AND PHASE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
REFERENCE: SRC 1
FREQUENCY TRACKING: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Enabled
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency
cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before
reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe
period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.

The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.
The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the
actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be con-
nected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for
phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source:
phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.
For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the
phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2V A – V B – V C ) ⁄ 3 ) for better performance dur-
ing fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of
whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.
Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this sig-
nal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they
have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between
different UR relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
FREQUENCY TRACKING should only be set to "Disabled" in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for spe-
cial variable-frequency applications.
NOTE
5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES
5 PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" SIGNAL SOURCES ! SOURCE 1(4)
# SOURCE 1 SOURCE 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters

# SRC 1
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of
MESSAGE any 5 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of
MESSAGE any 5 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5
MESSAGE Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 AUX VT: Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5
MESSAGE Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.
None
Four identical Source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate for
the associated source.
“F” and “M” represent the module slot position. The number directly following these letters represents either the first bank of
four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called “1” or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called “5” in a particular CT/VT module.
Refer to the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details on this concept.
It is possible to select the sum of up to five (5) CTs. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be referred.
For example, the selection “F1+F5” indicates the sum of each phase from channels “F1” and “F5”, scaled to whichever CT
has the higher ratio. Selecting “None” hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type,
ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each Source is entered,
including specifying which CTs will be summed together.

User Selection of AC Parameters for Comparator Elements:

CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the
specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the ele-
ment specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for Source selection. In elements where the parame-
ter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting
specifies the Source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
AC Input Actual Values:
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and volt-
age sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be dis-
played here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values.
Disturbance Detectors (Internal):
The 50DD element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on the protected system. 50DD
is intended for use in conjunction with measuring elements, blocking of current based elements (to prevent maloperation as
a result of the wrong settings), and starting oscillography data capture. A disturbance detector is provided for each Source.
The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector scheme
logic is as follows:
SETTING
ACTUAL
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
SOURCE 1 PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CURRENT PHASOR CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1 I_1 - I_1’ >2*CUT-OFF FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
I_2 I_2 - I_2’ >2*CUT-OFF OR SRC 1 50DD OP
I_0 I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
Where I’ is 2 cycles old
ACTUAL
SETTING
5
I_0 I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
Where I’ is 2 cycles old
SETTING
ACTUAL
I_0 I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
Where I’ is 2 cycles old 827092A3.CDR
Figure 5–12: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR LOGIC DIAGRAM

The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold
is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting (PROD-
UCT SETUP !" DISPLAY PROPERTIES !" CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector
accordingly.

5.3.4 BREAKERS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" BREAKERS ! BREAKER 1(2)
# BREAKER 1 BREAKER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CONTROL: Disabled
BREAKER 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Bkr 1
BREAKER 1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
3-Pole
BREAKER 1 OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 φA/3-POLE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 φB: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 φC: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
5 MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BREAKER 1 ALARM Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
TIME: 0.000 s
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
UCA XCBR1 PwrSupSt0: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
UCA XCBR1 PresSt: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
UCA XCBR1 TrpCoil: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
# BREAKER 2
As for Breaker 1 above
#
# UCA XCBR SBO TIMER BKR XCBR SBO TIMEOUT: Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1
# 30 s
A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in Chapter 4. Only informa-
tion concerning programming of the associated settings is covered here. These features are provided for two breakers; a
user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be Breaker No. 1.
• BREAKER 1(2) FUNCTION: Set to "Enable" to allow the operation of any breaker control feature.

• BREAKER1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Set to "Enable" to allow faceplate push button operations.
• BREAKER 1(2) NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to 6 characters) to the breaker. This name will be used in
flash messages related to Breaker No. 1.
• BREAKER 1(2) MODE: Selects "3-pole" mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or "1-pole" mode
where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
• BREAKER 1(2) OPEN: Selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open
Breaker No. 1.
• BREAKER 1(2) CLOSE: Selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close
Breaker No. 1.
• BREAKER 1(2) ΦA/3-POLE: Selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position
tracking mechanism. This input can be either a 52/a or 52/b contact, or a combination the 52/a and 52/b contacts, that
must be programmed to create a logic 0 when the breaker is open. If BREAKER 1 MODE is selected as "3-Pole", this set-
ting selects a single input as the operand used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as
"1-Pole", the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and settings BREAKER 1 ΦB and BREAKER 1 ΦC select
operands to track phases B and C, respectively.
• BREAKER 1(2) ΦB: If the mode is selected as 3-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as 1-pole,
this input is used to track phase B as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1(2) ΦC: If the mode is selected as 3-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as 1-pole,
this input is used to track phase C as above for phase A.
• BREAKER 1(2) EXT ALARM: Selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker alarm
reporting contact.
• BREAKER 1(2) ALARM DELAY: Sets the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three pole
position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement, to allow for non-simultaneous operation of the poles. If 5
single-pole tripping and reclosing is used, the breaker may trip unsymmetrically for faults. In this case, the minimum
alarm delay setting must exceed the maximum time required for fault clearing and reclosing by a suitable margin.
• MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: Sets the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after an operator has
initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker.
• BREAKER 1(2) OUT OF SV: Selects an operand indicating that Breaker No. 1 is out-of-service.
• UCA XCBR1(2) PwrSupSt0: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) PwrSupSt bit 0
data item.
• UCA XCBR1(2) PresSt: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) PresSt data item.
• UCA XCBR1(2) TrpCoil: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) TrpCoil data item.
• BKR XCBR SBO TIMEOUT: The Select-Before-Operate timer specifies an interval from the receipt of the UCA
Breaker Control Select signal until the automatic de-selection of the breaker, so that the breaker does not remain
selected indefinitely. This setting applies only to UCA SBO operation.

Figure 5–13: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC

5.3.5 FLEXCURVES™
a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" FLEXCURVES ! FLEXCURVE A(D)
# FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

# 0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
FlexCurves™ A through D have settings for entering times to Reset/Operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98 /
1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into 2 continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a cus-
tom FlexCurve™, enter the Reset/Operate time (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D).
Table 5–3: FLEXCURVE™ TABLE

RESET TIME RESET TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME
MS MS MS MS MS MS
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0

5
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0
The relay using a given FlexCurve™ applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered
points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of
NOTE
1, i.e. 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear
approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.

b) FLEXCURVE™ CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP

The enerVista UR Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves™ and their associated
data points. Prospective FlexCurves™ can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approxi-
mate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file
(.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From enerVista UR Setup setting.
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves™ are customized
by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at
zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.
c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING

Recloser Curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response
time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite oper-
ating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream pro-
tective devices have different operating characteristics. The Recloser Curve configuration window shown below appears
when the Initialize From enerVista UR Setup setting is set to “Recloser Curve” and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked.
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each
curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting

defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests
5
a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating
characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower
than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time;
otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears
when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum
curve time.
High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple

from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is
normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio
defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the
operating time.
842721A1.CDR
Figure 5–14: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION

Multiplier and Adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings.
The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT Ratio.
NOTE

d) EXAMPLE
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then
enabled at 8 times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately 4 times pickup, the curve operating time is
equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
842719A1.CDR
Figure 5–15: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED

With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
842720A1.CDR
Figure 5–16: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED

Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this
is attempted, the enerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE
e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES

The standard Recloser curves available for the D60 are displayed in the following graphs.

1 GE106
0.5
0.2
TIME (sec)
GE103
GE104 GE105
0.1
0.05
GE101 GE102
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
5 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
Figure 5–17: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106

842723A1.CDR
50
20 GE142
10
5
GE138
TIME (sec)
1 GE120
GE113
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 842725A1.CDR
Figure 5–18: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142

50
20
10
GE201
TIME (sec)
GE151
2
GE134 GE140
1
GE137
0.5
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20

CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
Figure 5–19: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
842730A1.CDR
5
50
GE152
20
TIME (sec)
GE141
10
GE131
5
GE200
2
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–20: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200

50
20
GE164
10
2
TIME (sec)
GE162
1
0.5
GE133
0.2
GE165
0.1
0.05
GE161
0.02 GE163
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
5
842729A1.CDR
Figure 5–21: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
20
GE132
10
1
TIME (sec)
0.5 GE139
0.2
GE136
0.1
GE116
0.05
GE118 GE117
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–22: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139

20
10
5
GE122
2
1
TIME (sec)
0.5
GE114
0.2
GE111
GE121
0.1
0.05 GE115 GE112

GE107
0.02
0.01
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
5
842724A1.CDR
Figure 5–23: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
50
20
GE202
10
TIME (sec)
GE135
2 GE119
0.5
0.2
1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Figure 5–24: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202

5.4 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
5.4FLEXLOGIC™ 5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed
parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through
elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic
through FlexLogic™. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital
outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process are shown below.
Figure 5–25: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW

The states of all digital signals used in the D60 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic™ operands, which are described
later in this section). A digital “1” is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an
element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic™ equation, or to operate a contact output. The state
of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple
scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the ele-
ment. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and
human operators.
If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic™. For example, if it is desired to
have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of
the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic™ equation. This equation
ANDs the two control inputs to produce a ‘virtual output’ which is then selected when programming the phase time overcur-
rent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic™ equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic™ minimizes the requirement for
auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.

5 SETTINGS 5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available
internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic™).
FlexLogic™ allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as
inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual out-
put. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic™ equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parame-
ters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e.
flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of oper-
ands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different
types of operands are listed in the table below.
Table 5–4: D60 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES

OPERAND TYPE STATE EXAMPLE FORMAT CHARACTERISTICS
[INPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...]
Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact
closed).
Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external
contact open).
Contact Output
(type Form-A contact
Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact. 5
only) Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exists across the contact.
Current On Cont Op 1 IOn Current is flowing through the contact.
Current Off Cont Op 1 IOff Current is not flowing through the contact.
Direct Input On DIRECT INPUT 1 On The direct input is presently in the ON state.
Element Pickup PHASE TOC1 PKP The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting
(Analog) of an element which responds to rising values or below the
pickup setting of an element which responds to falling
values.
Dropout PHASE TOC1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate PHASE TOC1 OP The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup
setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or
has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer
has not finished timing.
Block PH DIR1 BLK The output of the comparator is set to the block function.
Element Pickup Dig Element 1 PKP The input operand is at logic 1.
(Digital)
Dropout Dig Element 1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate Dig Element 1 OP The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed
pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and
is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing.
Element Higher than Counter 1 HI The number of pulses counted is above the set number.
(Digital Counter)
Equal to Counter 1 EQL The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number.
Lower than Counter 1 LO The number of pulses counted is below the set number.
Fixed On On Logic 1
Off Off Logic 0
Remote Input On REMOTE INPUT 1 On The remote input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Input On Virt Ip 1 On The virtual input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Output On Virt Op 1 On The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e.
evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual
output results in a "1").

The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table.
Table 5–5: D60 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 7)
OPERAND TYPE OPERAND SYNTAX OPERAND DESCRIPTION
CONTROL CONTROL PUSHBTN n ON Control Pushbutton n (n = 1 to 7) is being pressed.
PUSHBUTTONS
DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE 1On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16On Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT DEVICE 1Off Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16Off Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT INPUT/ DIR IO CH1(2) CRC ALARM The rate of Direct Input messages received on Channel 1(2) and failing the
OUTPUT CRC exceeded the user-specified level.
CHANNEL DIR IO CRC ALARM The rate of Direct Input messages failing the CRC exceeded the user-
MONITORING specified level on Channel 1 or 2.
DIR IO CH1(2) UNRET ALM The rate of returned direct input/output messages on Channel 1(2) exceeded
the user-specified level (ring configurations only).
DIR IO UNRET ALM The rate of returned direct input/output messages exceeded the user-
specified level on Channel 1 or 2 (ring configurations only).
ELEMENT: AR ENABLED Autoreclosure is enabled and ready to perform
Autoreclose AR DISABLED Autoreclosure is disabled
(1P/3P) AR RIP Autoreclosure is in "Reclose in Progress" state
AR 1-P RIP A single-pole reclosure is in progress
AR 3-P/1 RIP A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via Dead Time 1
AR LO Autoreclosure is in lockout state
AR BKR1 BLK Reclosure of Breaker 1 is blocked
AR BKR2 BLK Reclosure of Breaker 2 is blocked
AR CLOSE BKR1 Reclose Breaker 1 signal
5 AR CLOSE BKR2
AR FORCE 3-P TRIP
Reclose Breaker 2 signal
Force any trip to a three-phase trip
AR SHOT CNT > 0 The first ‘CLOSE BKR X’ signal has been issued
AR SHOT CNT = 1 Shot count is equal to 1
AR ZONE 1 EXTENT The Zone 1 Distance function must be set to the extended overreach value
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ The incomplete sequence timer timed out
AR RESET AR has been reset either manually or by the reset timer
ELEMENT: AUX OV1 PKP Auxiliary Overvoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary AUX OV1 DPO Auxiliary Overvoltage element has dropped out
Overvoltage AUX OV1 OP Auxiliary Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT: AUX UV1 PKP Auxiliary Undervoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary AUX UV1 DPO Auxiliary Undervoltage element has dropped out
Undervoltage AUX UV1 OP Auxiliary Undervoltage element has operated
ELEMENT: DIR BLOCK TX INIT Directional blocking signal is initiated
Blocking Scheme DIR BLOCK TX1 STOP Directional blocking scheme de-asserts transmit bit no. 1
DIR BLOCK TX2 STOP Directional blocking scheme de-asserts transmit bit no. 2
DIR BLOCK TRIP A Directional blocking scheme has operated to trip phase A
DIR BLOCK TRIP B Directional blocking scheme has operated to trip phase B
DIR BLOCK TRIP C Directional blocking scheme has operated to trip phase C
DIR BLOCK TRIP 3P Directional blocking scheme has tripped all 3 phases
DIR BLOCK OP Directional blocking scheme has operated
ELEMENT: BKR ARC 1 OP Breaker Arcing Current 1 has operated
Breaker Arcing BKR ARC 2 OP Breaker Arcing Current 2 has operated
ELEMENT BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase A (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker Failure BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase B (only for 1-pole schemes)
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase C (only for 1-pole schemes)
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP Breaker Failure 1 re-trip 3-phase
BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 is operated
BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP Breaker Failure 1 trip is operated
BKR FAIL 2 Same set of operands as shown for BKR FAIL 1


ELEMENT BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP A Breaker 1 Flashover element phase A has picked up
Breaker Flashover BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP B Breaker 1 Flashover element phase B has picked up
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP C Breaker 1 Flashover element phase C has picked up
BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP Breaker 1 Flashover element has picked up
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP A Breaker 1 Flashover element phase A has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP B Breaker 1 Flashover element phase B has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP C Breaker 1 Flashover element phase C has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR OP Breaker 1 Flashover element has operated
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO A Breaker 1 Flashover element phase A has dropped out
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO B Breaker 1 Flashover element phase B has dropped out
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO C Breaker 1 Flashover element phase C has dropped out
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DPO Breaker 1 Flashover element has dropped out
BKR 2 FLSHOVR... Same set of operands as shown for BKR 1 FLSHOVR
ELEMENT: BREAKER 1 OFF CMD Breaker 1 OFF command
Breaker Control BREAKER 1 ON CMD Breaker 1 ON command
BREAKER 1 φA CLSD Breaker 1 phase A is closed
BREAKER 1 φB CLSD Breaker 1 phase B is closed
BREAKER 1 φC CLSD Breaker 1 phase C is closed
BREAKER 1 CLOSED Breaker 1 is closed
BREAKER 1 OPEN Breaker 1 is open
BREAKER 1 DISCREP Breaker 1 has discrepancy
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE Breaker 1 trouble alarm
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS Breaker 1 manual close
BREAKER 1 TRIP A Breaker 1 trip phase A command
BREAKER 1 TRIP B Breaker 1 trip phase B command
BREAKER 1 TRIP C Breaker 1 trip phase C command
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN At least one pole of Breaker 1 is open
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN Only one pole of Breaker 1 is open
BREAKER 1 OOS Breaker 1 is out of service
BREAKER 2 Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1
ELEMENT: Counter 1 HI Digital Counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison value 5
Digital Counters Counter 1 EQL Digital Counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Counter 1 LO Digital Counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
↓ ↓
Counter 8 HI Digital Counter 8 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Counter 8 EQL Digital Counter 8 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Counter 8 LO Digital Counter 8 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
ELEMENT: Dig Element 1 PKP Digital Element 1 is picked up
Digital Elements Dig Element 1 OP Digital Element 1 is operated
Dig Element 1 DPO Digital Element 1 is dropped out
↓ ↓
Dig Element 16 PKP Digital Element 16 is picked up
Dig Element 16 OP Digital Element 16 is operated
Dig Element 16 DPO Digital Element 16 is dropped out
ELEMENT: DUTT TX1 Direct under-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 1
DUTT DUTT TX2 Direct under-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 2
(Direct Underreach DUTT TX3 Direct under-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 3
Transfer Trip) DUTT TX4 Direct under-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 4
DUTT TRIP A Direct under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase A
DUTT TRIP B Direct under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase B
DUTT TRIP C Direct under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase C
DUTT TRIP 3P Direct under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip all three phases
DUTT OP Direct under-reaching transfer trip has operated
ELEMENT: FxE 1 PKP FlexElement™ 1 has picked up
FlexElements™ FxE 1 OP FlexElement™ 1 has operated
FxE 1 DPO FlexElement™ 1 has dropped out
↓ ↓
FxE 8 PKP FlexElement™ 8 has picked up
FxE 8 OP FlexElement™ 8 has operated
FxE 8 DPO FlexElement™ 8 has dropped out


ELEMENT: GND DIST Z1 PKP Ground Distance Zone 1 has picked up
Ground Distance GND DIST Z1 OP Ground Distance Zone 1 has operated
GND DIST Z1 OP A Ground Distance Zone 1 phase A has operated
GND DIST Z1 OP B Ground Distance Zone 1 phase B has operated
GND DIST Z1 OP C Ground Distance Zone 1 phase C has operated
GND DIST Z1 PKP A Ground Distance Zone 1 phase A has picked up
GND DIST Z1 PKP B Ground Distance Zone 1 phase B has picked up
GND DIST Z1 PKP C Ground Distance Zone 1 phase C has picked up
GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN Ground Distance Zone 1 neutral is supervising
GND DIST Z1 DPO A Ground Distance Zone 1 phase A has dropped out
GND DIST Z1 DPO B Ground Distance Zone 1 phase B has dropped out
GND DIST Z1 DPO C Ground Distance Zone 1 phase C has dropped out
GND DIST Z2 DIR SUPN Ground Distance Zone 2 directional is supervising
GND DIST Z2 to Z5 Same set of operands as shown for GND DIST Z1
ELEMENT: GROUND IOC1 PKP Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground GROUND IOC1 OP Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated
Instantaneous GROUND IOC1 DPO Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Overcurrent
GROUND IOC2 Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1
ELEMENT: GROUND TOC1 PKP Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground Time GROUND TOC1 OP Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has operated
Overcurrent GROUND TOC1 DPO Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND TOC2 Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1
ELEMENT: HYBRID POTT TX1 Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 1
Hybrid POTT HYBRID POTT TX2 Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 2
(Hybrid Permissive HYBRID POTT TX3 Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 3
Overreach Transfer HYBRID POTT TX4 Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transmit bit no. 4
Trip) HYBRID POTT TRIP A Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase A
HYBRID POTT TRIP B Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase B
5 HYBRID POTT TRIP C
HYBRID POTT TRIP 3P
Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip phase C
Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip has tripped all 3 phases
HYBRID POTT OP Hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated
ELEMENT LATCH 1 ON Non-Volatile Latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)
Non-Volatile LATCH 1 OFF Non-Voltage Latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
Latches ↓ ↓
LATCH 16 ON Non-Volatile Latch 16 is ON (Logic = 1)
LATCH 16 OFF Non-Voltage Latch 16 is OFF (Logic = 0)
ELEMENT: LINE PICKUP OP Line Pickup has operated
Line Pickup LINE PICKUP PKP Line Pickup has picked up
LINE PICKUP DPO Line Pickup has dropped out
LINE PICKUP I<A Line Pickup detected Phase A current below 5% of nominal
LINE PICKUP I<B Line Pickup detected Phase B current below 5% of nominal
LINE PICKUP I<C Line Pickup detected Phase C current below 5% of nominal
LINE PICKUP UV PKP Line Pickup Undervoltage has picked up
LINE PICKUP LEO PKP Line Pickup Line End Open has picked up
LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP Line Pickup operated from overreaching Zone 2 when reclosing the line
(Zone 1 extension functionality)
ELEMENT: LOAD ENCHR PKP Load Encroachment has picked up
Load Encroachment LOAD ENCHR OP Load Encroachment has operated
LOAD ENCHR DPO Load Encroachment has dropped out
ELEMENT: NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD Negative Sequence Directional OC1 Forward has operated
Negative Sequence NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV Negative Sequence Directional OC1 Reverse has operated
Directional NEG SEQ DIR OC2 FWD Negative Sequence Directional OC2 Forward has operated
Overcurrent NEG SEQ DIR OC2 REV Negative Sequence Directional OC2 Reverse has operated
ELEMENT: NEG SEQ IOC1 PKP Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Negative Sequence NEG SEQ IOC1 OP Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated
Instantaneous NEG SEQ IOC1 DPO Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Overcurrent
NEG SEQ IOC2 Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ IOC1
ELEMENT: NEG SEQ OV PKP Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has picked up
Negative Sequence NEG SEQ OV DPO Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has dropped out
Overvoltage NEG SEQ OV OP Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT: NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Negative Sequence NEG SEQ TOC1 OP Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 has operated
Time Overcurrent NEG SEQ TOC1 DPO Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEG SEQ TOC2 Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ TOC1


ELEMENT: NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral NEUTRAL IOC1 OP Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated
Instantaneous NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
Overcurrent
NEUTRAL IOC2 Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL IOC1
ELEMENT: NEUTRAL OV1 PKP Neutral Overvoltage element has picked up
Neutral Overvoltage NEUTRAL OV1 DPO Neutral Overvoltage element has dropped out
NEUTRAL OV1 OP Neutral Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT: NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral Time NEUTRAL TOC1 OP Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has operated
Overcurrent NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEUTRAL TOC2 Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1
ELEMENT: NTRL DIR OC1 FWD Neutral Directional OC1 Forward has operated
Neutral Directional NTRL DIR OC1 REV Neutral Directional OC1 Reverse has operated
Overcurrent
NTRL DIR OC2 Same set of operands as shown for NTRL DIR OC1
ELEMENT: OPEN POLE OP ΦA Open pole condition is detected in phase A
Open Pole Detector OPEN POLE OP ΦB Open pole condition is detected in phase B
OPEN POLE OP ΦC Open pole condition is detected in phase C
OPEN POLE BKR ΦA OP Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is
detected on phase A
OPEN POLE BKR ΦB OP Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is
detected on phase B
OPEN POLE BKR ΦC OP Based on the breaker(s) auxiliary contacts, an open pole condition is
detected on phase C
OPEN POLE BLK N Blocking signal for neutral, ground, and negative-sequence overcurrent
element is established
OPEN POLE BLK AB Blocking signal for the AB phase distance elements is established
OPEN POLE BLK BC Blocking signal for the BC phase distance elements is established
OPEN POLE BLK CA
OPEN POLE REM OP ΦA
Blocking signal for the CA phase distance elements is established
Remote open pole condition detected in phase A 5
OPEN POLE REM OP ΦB Remote open pole condition detected in phase B
OPEN POLE REM OP ΦC Remote open pole condition detected in phase C
OPEN POLE OP Open pole detector is operated
ELEMENT: PH DIR1 BLK A Phase A Directional 1 Block
Phase Directional PH DIR1 BLK B Phase B Directional 1 Block
Overcurrent PH DIR1 BLK C Phase C Directional 1 Block
PH DIR1 BLK Phase Directional 1 Block
PH DIR2 Same set of operands as shown for PH DIR1
ELEMENT: PH DIST Z1 PKP Phase Distance Zone 1 has picked up
Phase Distance PH DIST Z1 OP Phase Distance Zone 1 has operated
PH DIST Z1 OP AB Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB has operated
PH DIST Z1 OP BC Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC has operated
PH DIST Z1 OP CA Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA has operated
PH DIST Z1 PKP AB Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB has picked up
PH DIST Z1 PKP BC Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC has picked up
PH DIST Z1 PKP CA Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA has picked up
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB IOC is supervising
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC IOC is supervising
PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA IOC is supervising
PH DIST Z1 DPO AB Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB has dropped out
PH DIST Z1 DPO BC Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC has dropped out
PH DIST Z1 DPO CA Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA has dropped out
PH DIST Z2 to Z5 Same set of operands as shown for PH DIST Z1
ELEMENT: PHASE IOC1 PKP At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
Phase PHASE IOC1 OP At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has operated
Instantaneous PHASE IOC1 DPO At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
Overcurrent PHASE IOC1 PKP A Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP B Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP C Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 OP A Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 OP B Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 OP C Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 DPO A Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO B Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO C Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1


ELEMENT: PHASE OV1 PKP At least one phase of Overvoltage 1 has picked up
Phase Overvoltage PHASE OV1 OP At least one phase of Overvoltage 1 has operated
PHASE OV1 DPO At least one phase of Overvoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE OV1 PKP A Phase A of Overvoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE OV1 PKP B Phase B of Overvoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE OV1 PKP C Phase C of Overvoltage 1 has picked up
PHASE OV1 OP A Phase A of Overvoltage 1 has operated
PHASE OV1 OP B Phase B of Overvoltage 1 has operated
PHASE OV1 OP C Phase C of Overvoltage 1 has operated
PHASE OV1 DPO A Phase A of Overvoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE OV1 DPO B Phase B of Overvoltage 1 has dropped out
PHASE OV1 DPO C Phase C of Overvoltage 1 has dropped out
ELEMENT PHASE SELECT AG Phase A to Ground fault is detected.
Phase Select PHASE SELECT BG Phase B to Ground fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT CG Phase C to Ground fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT SLG Single Line to Ground fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT AB Phase A to B fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT BC Phase B to C fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT CA Phase C to A fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT ABG Phase A to B to Ground fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT BCG Phase B to C to Ground fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT CAG Phase C to A to Ground fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT 3P Three-phase symmetrical fault is detected.
PHASE SELECT MULTI-P Multi-phase fault is detected
PHASE SELECT VOID Fault type cannot be detected
ELEMENT: PHASE TOC1 PKP At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
Phase Time PHASE TOC1 OP At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has operated
Overcurrent PHASE TOC1 DPO At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 PKP A Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 PKP B Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
5 PHASE TOC1 PKP C
PHASE TOC1 OP A
PHASE TOC1 OP B
Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has operated
Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 OP C Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 DPO A Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 DPO B Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 DPO C Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1
ELEMENT: PHASE UV1 PKP At least one phase of UV1 has picked up
Phase Undervoltage PHASE UV1 OP At least one phase of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 DPO At least one phase of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 PKP A Phase A of UV1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 PKP B Phase B of UV1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 PKP C Phase C of UV1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 OP A Phase A of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 OP B Phase B of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 OP C Phase C of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 DPO A Phase A of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 DPO B Phase B of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 DPO C Phase C of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
ELEMENT: POTT OP Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated
POTT POTT TX1 Permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 1
(Permissive POTT TX2 Permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 2
Overreach Transfer POTT TX3 Permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 3
Trip) POTT TX4 Permissive over-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 4
POTT TRIP A Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase A
POTT TRIP B Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase B
POTT TRIP C Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase C
POTT TRIP 3P Permissive over-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip all three phases
ELEMENT: POWER SWING OUTER Positive Sequence impedance in outer characteristic.
Power Swing Detect POWER SWING MIDDLE Positive Sequence impedance in middle characteristic.
POWER SWING INNER Positive Sequence impedance in inner characteristic.
POWER SWING BLOCK Power Swing Blocking element operated.
POWER SWING TMRX PKP Power Swing Timer x picked up.
POWER SWING TRIP Out-of-step Tripping operated.
POWER SWING 50DD The Power Swing element detected a disturbance other than power swing.
POWER SWING INCOMING An unstable power swing has been detected (incoming locus).
POWER SWING OUTGOING An unstable power swing has been detected (outgoing locus).
POWER SWING UN/BLOCK


ELEMENT: PUTT OP Permissive under-reaching transfer trip has operated
PUTT PUTT TX1 Permissive under-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 1
(Permissive PUTT TX2 Permissive under-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 2
Underreach PUTT TX3 Permissive under-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 3
Transfer Trip) PUTT TX4 Permissive under-reaching transfer trip asserts transit bit number 4
PUTT TRIP A Permissive under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase A
PUTT TRIP B Permissive under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase B
PUTT TRIP C Permissive under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip Phase C
PUTT TRIP 3P Permissive under-reaching transfer trip has operated to trip all three phases
ELEMENT: SELECTOR 1 POS Y Selector Switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands).
Selector Switch SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2 Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control
input but not acknowledged.
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but
not acknowledged.
SELECTOR 1 ALARM Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged.
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM Position of Selector Switch 1 is undetermined when the relay powers up and
synchronizes to the 3-bit input.
SELECTOR 2 Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1
ELEMENT: SETTING GROUP ACT 1 Setting Group 1 is active
Setting Group ↓ ↓
SETTING GROUP ACT 6 Setting Group 6 is active
ELEMENT: SRCx 50DD OP Source x Disturbance Detector is operated
Disturbance
Detector
ELEMENT: SRCx VT FUSE FAIL OP Source x VT Fuse Failure detector has operated
VTFF (Voltage
Transformer Fuse
Failure)
SRCx VT FUSE FAIL DPO
SRCx VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS
Source x VT Fuse Failure detector has dropped out
Source x has lost voltage signals (V2 above 25% or V1 below 70%
of nominal)
5
ELEMENT: SYNC 1 DEAD S OP Synchrocheck 1 dead source has operated
Synchrocheck SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO Synchrocheck 1 dead source has dropped out
SYNC 1 SYNC OP Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has operated
SYNC 1 SYNC DPO Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has dropped out
SYNC 1 CLS OP Synchrocheck 1 close has operated
SYNC 1 CLS DPO Synchrocheck 1 close has dropped out
SYNC 1 V1 ABOVE MIN Synchrocheck 1 V1 is above the minimum live voltage
SYNC 1 V1 BELOW MAX Synchrocheck 1 V1 is below the maximum dead voltage
SYNC 1 V2 ABOVE MIN Synchrocheck 1 V2 is above the minimum live voltage
SYNC 1 V2 BELOW MAX Synchrocheck 1 V2 is below the maximum dead voltage
SYNC 2 Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1
ELEMENT TRIP 3-POLE Trip all three breaker poles
Trip Output TRIP 1-POLE A single-pole trip-and-reclose operation is initiated
TRIP PHASE A Trip breaker pole A, initiate phase A breaker fail and reclose
TRIP PHASE B Trip breaker pole B, initiate phase B breaker fail and reclose
TRIP PHASE C Trip breaker pole C, initiate phase C breaker fail and reclose
TRIP AR INIT 3-POLE Initiate a three-pole reclose
TRIP FORCE 3-POLE Three-pole trip must be initiated
FIXED OPERANDS Off Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list;
used as ‘Disable’ by other features.
On Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Ip 1 On (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact Inputs Cont Ip 2 On (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
Cont Ip 1 Off (will not appear unless ordered)
Cont Ip 2 Off (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Op 1 IOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact Outputs, Cont Op 2 IOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Current ↓ ↓
(from detector on
Form-A output only) Cont Op 1 IOff (will not appear unless ordered)
Cont Op 2 IOff (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓


INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Op 1 VOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact Outputs, Cont Op 2 VOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Voltage ↓ ↓
(from detector on
Form-A output only) Cont Op 1 VOff (will not appear unless ordered)
Cont Op 2 VOff (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT INPUT 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Direct Inputs ↓ ↓
DIRECT INPUT 32 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: REMOTE INPUT 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Remote Inputs ↓ ↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Ip 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual Inputs ↓ ↓
Virt Ip 32 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Op 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual Outputs ↓ ↓
Virt Op 64 On Flag is set, logic=1
LED TEST LED TEST IN PROGRESS An LED test has been initiated and has not finished.
REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 On Flag is set, logic=1
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off Flag is set, logic=1
RESETTING RESET OP Reset command is operated (set by all 3 operands below)
5 RESET OP (COMMS)
RESET OP (OPERAND)
Communications source of the reset command
Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING menu) source
of the reset command
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON) Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command
SELF- ANY MAJOR ERROR Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)
DIAGNOSTICS ANY MINOR ERROR Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
ANY SELF-TEST Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
BATTERY FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
DIRECT RING BREAK See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
DSP ERROR See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
EEPROM DATA ERROR See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
IRIG-B FAILURE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
LATCHING OUT ERROR See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
LOW ON MEMORY See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
NO DSP INTERRUPTS See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
PRI ETHERNET FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
PROGRAM MEMORY See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
REMOTE DEVICE OFF See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
SEC ETHERNET FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
SNTP FAILURE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
SYSTEM EXCEPTION See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
WATCHDOG ERROR See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
UNAUTHORIZED UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password-protected
ACCESS ALARM level of the relay.
USER- PUSHBUTTON x ON Pushbutton Number x is in the ’On’ position
PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON x OFF Pushbutton Number x is in the ’Off’ position
PUSHBUTTONS
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID
(identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name/
ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in
the FlexLogic™ operands table above.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic™ are listed in the Flex-
Logic™ operators table.

Table 5–6: FLEXLOGIC™ GATE CHARACTERISTICS

GATES NUMBER OF INPUTS OUTPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...
NOT 1 input is ‘0’
OR 2 to 16 any input is ‘1’
AND 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘1’
NOR 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘0’
NAND 2 to 16 any input is ‘0’
XOR 2 only one input is ‘1’
Table 5–7: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERATORS

TYPE SYNTAX DESCRIPTION NOTES
Editor INSERT Insert a parameter in an equation list.
DELETE Delete a parameter from an equation list.
End END The first END encountered signifies the last entry in
the list of processed FlexLogic™ parameters.
One Shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge. A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate
that generates a pulse in response to an
NEGATIVE ONE One shot that responds to a negative going edge. edge on the input. The output from a ‘one
SHOT shot’ is True (positive) for only one pass
DUAL ONE SHOT One shot that responds to both the positive and through the FlexLogic™ equation. There is
negative going edges. a maximum of 32 ‘one shots’.
Logic NOT Logical Not Operates on the previous parameter.
Gate
OR(2)
↓
OR(16)
2 input OR gate
↓
16 input OR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
5
AND(2) 2 input AND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
AND(16) 16 input AND gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
NOR(2) 2 input NOR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
NOR(16) 16 input NOR gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
NAND(2) 2 input NAND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
NAND(16) 16 input NAND gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
XOR(2) 2 input Exclusive OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
LATCH (S,R) Latch (Set, Reset) - reset-dominant The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is
the Reset input. The parameter preceding
the Reset input is the Set input.
Timer TIMER 1 Timer set with FlexLogic™ Timer 1 settings. The timer is started by the preceding
↓ ↓ parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER 32 Timer set with FlexLogic™ Timer 32 settings. TIMER #.
Assign = Virt Op 1 Assigns previous FlexLogic™ parameter to Virtual The virtual output is set by the preceding
Virtual ↓ Output 1. parameter
Output = Virt Op 64 ↓
Assigns previous FlexLogic™ parameter to Virtual
Output 64.
5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC™ RULES
When forming a FlexLogic™ equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
2. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
3. Assigning the output of an operator to a Virtual Output terminates the equation.
4. A timer operator (e.g. "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (e.g. " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is
broken, a syntax error will be declared.

5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION
Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
FlexLogic™ provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the
set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; i.e. they reset on the re-application of control
CAUTION
power.
When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic™ equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting
value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic™ during
testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.
5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE
This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite impor-
tant as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure
below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.
In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce Virtual Outputs 1 and 2, and is
only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic™, it is important to make a note of each Virtual Output
used – a Virtual Output designation (1 to 64) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset

State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay Operate Output
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2
on Dropout Relay H1
State=Pickup
(200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 Timer 1

State=Operated Time Delay
AND
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c 827025A2.vsd
State=Closed
Figure 5–26: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME

1. Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic™ opera-
tors. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs
to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic™ limits, which is unlikely but possible. If
the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25
inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs
from these two gates to AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator
is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a Virtual Output.
For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must
therefore be made a Virtual Output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output
must also be assigned to a Virtual Output as Virtual Output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section
to operate relay H1 (i.e. Output Contact H1).

Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic™ equations with outputs of Virtual Output 3 and
Virtual Output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
on Dropout
State=Pickup (200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 Timer 1

State=Operated Time Delay
AND
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD
Figure 5–27: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

2. Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce Virtual Output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the
Virtual Output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these
operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific Virtual Output). The logic for
Virtual Output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
AND(2) VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 5

CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
827027A2.VSD
Figure 5–28: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

3. Prepare a logic diagram for Virtual Output 4, replacing the logic ahead of Virtual Output 3 with a symbol identified as
Virtual Output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay VIRTUAL
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2
on Dropout OUTPUT 4
State=Pickup
(200 ms)
Timer 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 Time Delay
State=ON on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed 827028A2.VSD
Figure 5–29: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

4. Program the FlexLogic™ equation for Virtual Output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic™ parameters.
The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the
output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to
list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99,
and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic™, it is suggested that
a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.

01
02
03
04
05
.....
97
98
99
827029A1.VSD
Figure 5–30: FLEXLOGIC™ WORKSHEET

5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:
99: The final output of the equation is Virtual Output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter
is therefore "= Virt Op 3."
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2-
input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic™ rules require that the number of inputs to most
types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the
two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is
5 “NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next.
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be
set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact.
The operand is therefore “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2.
This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3:
[95] DIG ELEM 2 OP
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] NOT
[98] AND(2)
[99] = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 3 dia-
gram as a check.
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
95 DIG ELEM 2 OP VIRTUAL
AND
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OUTPUT 3
96 Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
97 NOT
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
98 AND (2)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
99 =Virt Op 3
827030A2.VSD
Figure 5–31: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

6. Repeating the process described for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3, select the FlexLogic™ parameters for Virtual Output 4.
99: The final output of the equation is VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".
98: The operator preceding the output is Timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the
timer are established in the timer programming section.

97: The operator preceding Timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".
94: The input to Timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which
is parameter “OR(4)”.
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".
The equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 is:
[85] Virt Op 4 On
[86] Virt Op 1 On
[87] Virt Op 2 On
[88] Virt Ip 1 On
[89]
[90]
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
5
[91] Virt Op 3 On
[92] OR(4)
[93] LATCH (S,R)
[94] Virt Op 3 On
[95] TIMER 1
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] OR(3)
[98] TIMER 2
[99] = Virt Op 4
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 4 dia-
gram as a check.

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
85 Virt Op 4 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
86 Virt Op 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
87 Virt Op 2 On
Set
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
88 Virt Ip 1 On
LATCH
XOR OR Reset
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
89 DIG ELEM 1 PKP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
90 XOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
91 Virt Op 3 On VIRTUAL
OR T2 OUTPUT 4
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
92 OR (4)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
93 LATCH (S,R)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
94 Virt Op 3 On T1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
95 TIMER 1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
96 Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
97 OR (3)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
98 TIMER 2
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
99 =Virt Op 4 827031A2.VSD
5 Figure 5–32: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

7. Now write the complete FlexLogic™ expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the
equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases
where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause
problems as all logic is calculated at least 4 times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by
sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic™ before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, Virtual Output 3 is used as an input to both Latch 1 and Timer 1 as arranged in the order
shown below:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In the expression above, the Virtual Output 4 input to the 4-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a
form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.

8. The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past.
Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic™ equations. The equations
will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and
the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC ! FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
# FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1: Range: FlexLogic™ parameters

# EQUATION EDITOR END
↓
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512: Range: FlexLogic™ parameters

MESSAGE
END
There are 512 FlexLogic™ entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default ‘END’ entry settings. If a "Disabled" Ele-
ment is selected as a FlexLogic™ entry, the associated state flag will never be set to ‘1’. The ‘+/–‘ key may be used when
editing FlexLogic™ equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC !" FLEXLOGIC TIMERS ! FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
# FLEXLOGIC
# TIMER 1
TIMER 1
TYPE: millisecond
Range: millisecond, second, minute
5
TIMER 1 PICKUP Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
TIMER 1 DROPOUT Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
There are 32 identical FlexLogic™ timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic™ equations.
• TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.
• TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".
• TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".

5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS™
PATH: SETTING !" FLEXLOGIC !" FLEXELEMENTS ! FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
# FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
FxE1
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT Range: Signed, Absolute
MESSAGE
MODE: Signed
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP Range: Level, Delta
MESSAGE
MODE: Level
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Over, Under
MESSAGE
DIRECTION: Over
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
5 MESSAGE
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes
MESSAGE
UNIT: milliseconds
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
20
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
A FlexElement™ is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a
net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice.
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as
per user's choice.

SETTING
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE:
Enabled = 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE:
Disabled = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION:
SETTING
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
AND HYSTERESIS:
Off = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: SETTINGS
SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
RUN DELAY:
Actual Value FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
+ tPKP
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: FxE 1 OP
- tRST
Actual Value FxE 1 DPO
FxE 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE
FlexElement 1 OpSig 842004A3.CDR
Figure 5–33: FLEXELEMENT™ SCHEME LOGIC

The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands.
5
This FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the
element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not
operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build
the effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to “Signed”. The ele-
ment responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to “Absolute”. Sample applications for the
“Absolute” setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both
directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of
decreases.
The element responds directly to its operating signal – as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN and FLEX-
ELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings – if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Threshold”. The element responds to
the rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Delta”. In this case the FLEXELE-
MENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The
following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYS-
TERESIS settings.

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
PICKUP
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
PICKUP
842705A1.CDR
Figure 5–34: FLEXELEMENT™ DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS

In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra charac-
teristics as shown in the figure below.
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
5 FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT INPUT
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A2.CDR
Figure 5–35: FLEXELEMENT™ INPUT MODE SETTING

The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set
to “Over”, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to “Under”, the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal
and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexEle-
ment™ can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP set-
ting is entered in per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units:
Table 5–8: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS

BREAKER ARCING AMPS BASE = 2000 kA2 × cycle
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C)
dcmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100°C
SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE ENERGY EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
(Positive and Negative Watthours,
Positive and Negative Varhours)
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SYNCHROCHECK
(Max Delta Volts)
VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and –IN inputs 5
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement™ Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis dia-
gram.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta”. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the
rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta”.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting
specifies the reset delay of the element.

5.4.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS !" FLEXLOGIC !" NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ! LATCH 1(16)
# LATCH 1 LATCH 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

LATCH 1 TYPE: Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
MESSAGE
Reset Dominant
LATCH 1 SET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
LATCH 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
LATCH 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
LATCH 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay
is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as
Autorecloser, until a deliberate HMI action resets the latch. The settings, logic, and element operation are described below:
• LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
• LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operands 'sets' Latch 1.
5 • LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operand 'resets' Latch 1.
SETTING
SETTING
LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N LATCH N LATCH 1 FUNCTION:
TYPE SET RESET ON OFF
LATCH 1 TYPE:
Reset ON OFF ON OFF Disabled=0
Dominant Enabled=1 RUN
OFF OFF Previous Previous
State State
ON ON OFF ON SETTING
OFF ON OFF ON LATCH 1 SET:

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Set ON OFF ON OFF
Dominant Off=0 SET LATCH 1 ON
ON ON ON OFF LATCH 1 OFF
OFF OFF Previous Previous SETTING
State State
LATCH 1 SET:
OFF ON OFF ON
Off=0 RESET
842005A1.CDR
Figure 5–36: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N=1 to 16) AND LOGIC

5 SETTINGS 5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to Setting Group designations 1 to 6.
The performance of these elements is defined by the active Setting Group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the
user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (e.g. altered power system configuration,
season of the year). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the Control Ele-
ments section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter.
5.5.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6)
# SETTING GROUP 1 # LINE PICKUP

See page 5-74.
# #
# DISTANCE
MESSAGE See page 5-76.
#
# POWER SWING
# DETECT
# LOAD ENCROACHMENT
#
# PHASE CURRENT
#
MESSAGE
# NEUTRAL CURRENT
#
See page 5-113. 5
# GROUND CURRENT
#
# NEGATIVE SEQUENCE
# CURRENT
# BREAKER FAILURE
#
# VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
#
Each of the six Setting Group menus is identical. SETTING GROUP 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active
if no other group is active (see the Control Elements section for additional details).

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5.5.3 LINE PICKUP
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" LINE PICKUP
# LINE PICKUP LINE PICKUP Range: Disabled, Enabled

LINE PICKUP SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE IOC LINE Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
LINE PICKUP UV PKP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.700 pu
LINE END OPEN PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.150 s
LINE END OPEN RESET Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.090 s
LINE PICKUP OV PKP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.040 s
AR CO-ORD BYPASS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Enabled
AR CO-ORD PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
5 MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.045 s
AR CO-ORD RESET Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.005 s
TERMINAL OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR ACCELERATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
LINE PICKUP BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
LINE PICKUP Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
LINE PICKUP Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The Line Pickup feature uses a combination of undercurrent and undervoltage to identify a line that has been de-energized
(line end open). Alternately, the user may assign a FlexLogic™ operand to the TERMINAL OPEN setting that specifies the ter-
minal status. Three instantaneous overcurrent elements are used to identify a previously de-energized line that has been
closed onto a fault. Faults other than close-in faults can be identified satisfactorily with the Distance elements.
Co-ordination features are included to ensure satisfactory operation when high speed ‘automatic reclosure (AR)’ is
employed. The AR CO-ORD DELAY setting allows the overcurrent setting to be below the expected load current seen after
reclose. Co-ordination is achieved by all of the LINE PICKP UV elements resetting and blocking the trip path before the AR
CO-ORD DELAY times out. The AR CO-ORD BYPASS setting is normally enabled. It is disabled if high speed autoreclosure is
implemented.
The line pickup protection incorporates Zone 1 extension capability. When the line is being re-energized from the local ter-
minal, pickup of an overreaching Zone 2 or excessive phase current within six power cycles after the autorecloser issues a
close command results in the LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP FlexLogic™ operand. Configure the LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP operand to
perform a trip action if the intent is apply Zone 1 extension.

The Zone 1 extension philosophy used here normally operates from an under-reaching zone, and uses an overreaching
distance zone when reclosing the line with the other line end open. The AR ACCELERATE setting is provided to achieve Zone
1 extension functionality if external autoreclosure is employed. Another Zone 1 extension approach is to permanently apply
an overreaching zone, and reduce the reach when reclosing. This philosophy can be programmed via the Autoreclose
scheme.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING LINE PICKUP UV PKP
SETTING
LINE PICKUP TERMINAL OPEN: SETTING
FUNCTION:
Off=0 LINE PICKUP OV
Disabled=0 PKP DELAY:
Enabled=1 t PKP
OR t RST=0
SETTING
AND
LINE PICKUP SETTINGS
BLOCK: SETTING
LINE END OPEN
Off=0 PICKUP DELAY:
LINE PICKUP UV PKP:
LINE END OPEN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING RUN RESET DELAY: LINE PICKUP LEO PKP
LINE PICKUP SIGNAL VAG or VAB < setting t PKP (LEO=Line End Open)
SOURCE: VBG or VBC < setting AND OR t RST
VAG VAB VCG or VCA < setting SETTINGS
VBG VBC AND AR CO-ORD
PICKUP DELAY:
VCG VCA SETTING
IA IA < 0.05 pu AR CO-ORD RESET
IB IB < 0.05 pu DELAY:
AND
IC IC < 0.05 pu t PKP
AND t RST
SETTING
PHASE IOC
LINE PICKUP:
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
IA > PICKUP AND
SETTING OR LINE PICKUP OP
IB > PICKUP OR
LINE PICKUP PKP
AR CO-ORD BYPASS: IC > PICKUP
LINE PICKUP DPO
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
5
AND
GND DIST Z2 PKP
OR
PH DIST Z2 PKP
SETTING OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR ACCELERATE:
AND LINE PICKUP RCL TRIP
Off=0
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
6 cycles
AR CLOSE BKR1 LINE PICKUP I< A
AR CLOSE BKR2 LINE PICKUP I< B
D60 and L90 only LINE PICKUP I< C
837000AC.CDR
Figure 5–37: LINE PICKUP SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.4 DISTANCE
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" DISTANCE
# DISTANCE DISTANCE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

# SOURCE: SRC 1
MEMORY Range: 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DURATION: 10 cycles
FORCE SELF-POLAR: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
# PHASE DISTANCE Z1
#
# PHASE DISTANCE Z2
#
# PHASE DISTANCE Z3
#
# PHASE DISTANCE Z4
#
# PHASE DISTANCE Z5
#
5 MESSAGE
# GROUND DISTANCE Z1
#
See page 5–85.
#
#
#
#
Three common settings (DISTANCE SOURCE, MEMORY DURATION, and FORCE SELF-POLAR) and ten menus for five zones of
phase and ground distance protection are available. The DISTANCE SOURCE identifies the Signal Source for all distance
functions. The Mho distance functions use a dynamic characteristic: the positive-sequence voltage – either memorized or
actual – is used as a polarizing signal. The memory voltage is also used by the built-in directional supervising functions
applied for both the Mho and Quad characteristics.
The MEMORY DURATION setting specifies the length of time a memorized positive-sequence voltage should be used in the
distance calculations. After this interval expires, the relay checks the magnitude of the actual positive-sequence voltage. If
it is higher than 10% of the nominal, the actual voltage is used, if lower – the memory voltage continues to be used.
The memory is established when the positive-sequence voltage stays above 80% of its nominal value for five power system
cycles. For this reason it is important to ensure that the nominal secondary voltage of the VT is entered correctly under the
SETTINGS " SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE BANK menu.
Set MEMORY DURATION long enough to ensure stability on close-in reverse three-phase faults. For this purpose, the maxi-
mum fault clearing time (breaker fail time) in the substation should be considered. On the other hand, the MEMORY DURA-
TION cannot be too long as the power system may experience power swing conditions rotating the voltage and current
phasors slowly while the memory voltage is static, as frozen at the beginning of the fault. Keeping the memory in effect for
too long may eventually lead to incorrect operation of the distance functions.

The distance zones can be forced to become self-polarized through the FORCE SELF-POLAR setting. Any user-selected con-
dition (FlexLogic™ operand) can be configured to force self-polarization. When the selected operand is asserted (logic 1),
the distance functions become self-polarized regardless of other memory voltage logic conditions. When the selected oper-
and is de-asserted (logic 0), the distance functions follow other conditions of the memory voltage logic as shown below.
UPDATE MEMORY SETTING

SETTING
RUN MEMORY DURATION:
DISTANCE SOURCE:
V_1 < 1.15 pu
V_A, V_RMS_A V_RMS- V < V_RMS/8 0
AND tRST
5 cy
V_B, V_RMS_B V_RMS- V < V_RMS/8 AND 0 S Q
AND
V_C, V_RMS_C V_RMS- V < V_RMS/8
Use V_1 mem
V_1 V_1 > 0.8 pu
OR
IA IA < 0.05 pu
AND Use V_1
IB IB < 0.05 pu OR R
IC IC < 0.05 pu AND
V_1 < 0.1 pu
SETTING
FORCE SELF-POLAR:
Off=0 827842A5.CDR
Figure 5–38: MEMORY VOLTAGE LOGIC
b) PHASE DISTANCE
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" DISTANCE !" PHASE DISTANCE Z1(Z5)
# PHASE DISTANCE Z1 PHS DIST Z1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 DIR:
Forward
Range: Forward, Reverse, Non-directional
5
PHS DIST Z1 Range: Mho, Quad
MESSAGE
SHAPE: Mho
PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3,
MESSAGE Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11
CONNECTION: None
PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3,
MESSAGE Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11
CONNECTION: None
PHS DIST Z1 Range: 0.02 to 250.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
REACH: 2.00 ohms
PHS DIST Z1 Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RCA: 85°
PHS DIST Z1 REV Range: 0.02 to 250.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
REACH: 2.00 ohms
PHS DIST Z1 REV Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
REACH RCA: 85°
MESSAGE
COMP LIMIT: 90°
MESSAGE
DIR RCA: 85°
MESSAGE
DIR COMP LIMIT: 90°
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RGT BLD: 10.00 ohms
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD Range: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RGT BLD RCA: 85°

PHS DIST Z1 QUAD Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE
LFT BLD: 10.00 ohms
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD Range: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LFT BLD RCA: 85°
PHS DIST Z1 Range: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SUPV: 0.200 pu
PHS DIST Z1 VOLT Range: 0.000 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
LEVEL: 0.000 pu
PHS DIST Z1 Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
PHS DIST Z1 BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHS DIST Z1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHS DIST Z1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase mho distance function uses a dynamic 100% memory-polarized mho characteristic with additional reactance,
directional, and overcurrent supervising characteristics. The phase quadrilateral distance function is comprised of a reac-
tance characteristic, right and left blinders, and 100% memory-polarized directional and current supervising characteristics.
When set to “Non-directional”, the mho function becomes an offset mho with the reverse reach controlled independently
5 from the forward reach, and all the directional characteristics removed. When set to “Non-directional”, the quadrilateral
function applies a reactance line in the reverse direction instead of the directional comparators. Refer to Chapter 8 for addi-
tional information.
Five zones of phase distance protection are provided. Each zone is configured individually through its own setting menu. All
of the settings can be independently modified for each of the zones except:
1. The SIGNAL SOURCE setting (common for the phase distance elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS !"
GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" DISTANCE).
2. The MEMORY DURATION setting (common for the phase distance elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS !"
GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" DISTANCE).
The common distance settings described earlier must be properly chosen for correct operation of the phase distance ele-
ments. Although all five zones can be used as either instantaneous elements (pickup [PKP] and dropout [DPO] FlexLogic™
operands) or time-delayed elements (operate [OP] FlexLogic™ operands), only Zone 1 is intended for the instantaneous
under-reaching tripping mode. Additional details may be found in Chapter 8: Theory of Operation.
Ensure that the PHASE VT SECONDARY VOLTAGE setting (see the SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS !"
VOLTAGE BANK menu) is set correctly to prevent improper operation of associated memory action.
WARNING
• PHS DIST Z1 DIR: All five zones are reversible. The forward direction is defined by the PHS DIST Z1 RCA setting,
whereas the reverse direction is shifted 180° from that angle. The non-directional zone spans between the forward
reach impedance defined by the PHS DIST Z1 REACH and PHS DIST Z1 RCA settings, and the reverse reach impedance
defined by PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH and PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA as illustrated below.
• PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE: This setting selects the shape of the phase distance function between the mho and quadrilat-
eral characteristics. The selection is available on a per-zone basis. The two characteristics and their possible varia-
tions are shown in the following figures.

COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT
H
REAC
DIR COMP LIMIT
DIR RCA
RCA
837720A1.CDR
Figure 5–39: DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
COMP LIMIT
REACH
5
RCA
REV REACH
EACH
RCA
REV R
837800A1-X1.CDR
Figure 5–40: NON-DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
COMP LIMIT
COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT

REACH
DIR COMP LIMIT
DIR RCA
LFT BLD RCA RCA RGT BLD RCA
R
-LFT BLD RGT BLD
837721A1.CDR
Figure 5–41: DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC

COMP LIMIT
COMP LIMIT
REACH
R
-LFT BLD RGT BLD
REV REACH
REV REACH
RCA
COMP LIMIT
COMP LIMIT
837800A1-X2.CDR
Figure 5–42: NON-DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
5 X RCA
COMP LIMIT
= 80o
= 90o
X RCA
COMP LIMIT
= 80o
= 90o
DIR RCA = 80o DIR RCA = 80o
DIR COMP LIMIT = 90o DIR COMP LIMIT = 60o
H
H
REAC
REAC
R R
X RCA = 90o X RCA = 80o

COMP LIMIT = 90o COMP LIMIT = 60o
DIR COMP LIMIT = 90o DIR COMP LIMIT = 60o
REACH
H
REAC
R R
837722A1.CDR
Figure 5–43: MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC SAMPLE SHAPES

RCA = 80o RCA = 80o

X DIR COMP LIMIT = 90o X DIR COMP LIMIT = 60o
RGT BLD RCA = 80o RGT BLD RCA = 80o
LFT BLD RCA = 80o LFT BLD RCA = 80o
H
REAC
REAC
R R
RCA = 90o RCA = 80o

X DIR COMP LIMIT = 90o X DIR COMP LIMIT = 60o
RGT BLD RCA = 90o RGT BLD RCA = 80o
LFT BLD RCA = 90o LFT BLD RCA = 80o
H
REACH
REAC
R R
5
837723A1.CDR
Figure 5–44: QUADRILATERAL DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC SAMPLE SHAPES

• PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION: The phase distance elements can be applied to look through a three-phase
delta-wye or wye-delta power transformer. In addition, VTs and CTs could be located independently from one another
at different windings of the transformer. If the potential source is located at the correct side of the transformer, this set-
ting shall be set to “None”.
This setting specifies the location of the voltage source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction
of the zone. The following figure illustrates the usage of this setting. In section (a), Zone 1 is looking through a trans-
former from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to “Dy11”. In section (b), Zone 4 is
looking through a transformer from the wye into the delta winding. Therefore, the Z4 setting shall be set to “Yd1”. The
zone is restricted by the potential point (location of the VTs) as illustrated in Figure (e).
• PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION: This setting specifies the location of the current source with respect to the
involved power transformer in the direction of the zone. In section (a) of the following figure, Zone 1 is looking through
a transformer from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to “Dy11”. In section (b), the
CTs are located at the same side as the read point. Therefore, the Z4 setting shall be set to “None”.
See Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for more details, and Chapter 9: Application of Settings for information on how to
calculate distance reach settings in applications involving power transformers.

(a) (b)
delta wye, 330o lag delta wye, 330o lag
Z4 Z4
Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Yd1

Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z1 Z1
Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None

Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
(c) (e)
delta wye, 330o lag
L1 L2
Z4 Zone 4
Zone 1
Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None
Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Yd1 ZL1 ZT ZL2
5 Z1
Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11

Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Figure 5–45: APPLICATIONS OF THE PH DIST XFMR VOL/CUR CONNECTION SETTINGS

• PHS DIST Z1 REACH: This setting defines the zone reach for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-direc-
tional applications, this setting defines the forward reach of the zone. The reverse reach impedance in non-directional
applications is set independently. The reach impedance is entered in secondary ohms. The reach impedance angle is
entered as the PHS DIST Z1 RCA setting.
Zone 1 is characterized by transient overreach of less than 5% under source impedance ratios of up to 30. When set-
ting an under-reaching Zone 1 for direct tripping and under-reaching pilot schemes (DUTT, PUTT) other factors should
be also considered as per rules of distance relaying. In non-directional applications, this 5% transient accuracy applies
to the forward reach only.
• PHS DIST Z1 RCA: This setting specifies the characteristic angle (similar to the ‘maximum torque angle’ in previous
technologies) of the phase distance characteristic for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional appli-
cations, this setting defines the angle of the forward reach impedance. The reverse reach impedance in the non-direc-
tional applications is set independently. The setting is an angle of reach impedance as shown in Mho and Quadrilateral
Distance Characteristic figures. This setting is independent from PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA, the characteristic angle of an
extra directional supervising function.
• PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH: This setting defines the reverse reach of the zone set to non-directional (PHS DIST Z1 DIR
setting). The value must be entered in secondary ohms. This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to
“Forward” or “Reverse”.
• PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA: This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if the zone is set to
non-directional (PHS DIST Z1 DIR setting). This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to “Forward” or
“Reverse”.
• PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: This setting shapes the operating characteristic. In particular, it produces the lens-type
characteristic of the mho function and a tent-shaped characteristic of the reactance boundary of the quadrilateral func-
tion. If the mho shape is selected, the same limit angle applies to both the mho and supervising reactance compara-
tors. In conjunction with the mho shape selection, the setting improves loadability of the protected line. In conjunction
with the quadrilateral characteristic, this setting improves security for faults close to the reach point by adjusting the
reactance boundary into a tent-shape.

• PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA: This setting selects the characteristic angle (or ‘maximum torque angle’) of the directional
supervising function. If the mho shape is applied, the directional function is an extra supervising function as the
dynamic mho characteristic is itself directional. In conjunction with the quadrilateral shape, this setting defines the only
directional function built into the phase distance element. The directional function uses the memory voltage for polar-
ization. This setting typically equals the distance characteristic angle PHS DIST Z1 RCA.
• PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: Selects the comparator limit angle for the directional supervising function.
• PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: This setting defines the right blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along
the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral Distance Characteristic figures). The angular position
of the blinder is adjustable with the use of the PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the
quadrilateral characteristic and should be set giving consideration to the maximum load current and required resistive
coverage.
• PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the right blinder of the quadrilateral
characteristic (see the Quadrilateral Distance Characteristic figures).
• PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: This setting defines the left blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along the
resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral Distance Characteristic figure). The angular position of the
blinder is adjustable with the use of the PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the quadri-
lateral characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current.
• PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the left blinder of the quadrilateral
characteristic (see the Quadrilateral Distance Characteristic figures).
• PHS DIST Z1 SUPV: The phase distance elements are supervised by the magnitude of the line-to-line current (fault
loop current used for the distance calculations). For convenience, 3 is accommodated by the pickup (i.e., before
being used, the entered value of the threshold setting is multiplied by 3 ).
If the minimum fault current level is sufficient, the current supervision pickup should be set above maximum full load
current preventing maloperation under VT fuse fail conditions. This requirement may be difficult to meet for remote 5
faults at the end of Zones 2 through 5. If this is the case, the current supervision pickup would be set below the full load
current, but this may result in maloperation during fuse fail conditions.
Zone 1 is sealed-in with the current supervision.
• PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: This setting is relevant for applications on series-compensated lines, or in general, if
series capacitors are located between the relaying point and a point where the zone shall not overreach. For plain
(non-compensated) lines, set to zero. Otherwise, the setting is entered in per unit of the phase VT bank configured
under the DISTANCE SOURCE. Effectively, this setting facilitates dynamic current-based reach reduction. In non-direc-
tional applications (PHS DIST Z1 DIR set to “Non-directional”), this setting applies only to the forward reach of the non-
directional zone. See Chapters 8 and 9 for information on calculating this setting for series compensated lines.
• PHS DIST Z1 DELAY: This setting allows the user to delay operation of the distance elements and implement stepped
distance protection. The distance element timers for Zones 2 through 5 apply a short dropout delay to cope with faults
located close to the zone boundary when small oscillations in the voltages and/or currents could inadvertently reset the
timer. Zone 1 does not need any drop out delay since it is sealed-in by the presence of current.
• PHS DIST Z1 BLK: This setting enables the user to select a FlexLogic™ operand to block a given distance element.
VT fuse fail detection is one of the applications for this setting.

AND
OR
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

AND
PHS DIST Z1
OR OR PH DIST Z1 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DELAY:
PH DIST Z1 PKP AB t PKP

0
PH DIST Z1 PKP BC t PKP AND

0
OR
PH DIST Z1 PKP CA t PKP
0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 OP AB

AND
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 OP BC

AND
PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA PH DIST Z1 OP CA

AND
OPEN POLE OP *
NOTE: * D60 Only. Other UR models apply regular current seal-in for Z1. 837017A6.CDR
Figure 5–46: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1 OP SCHEME
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 DELAY:

0 AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z2 PKP AB
5
20 ms t PKP
OR PH DIST Z2 OP AB
0
SETTING

PH DIST Z2 PKP BC
20 ms t PKP
OR PH DIST Z2 OP BC
0
SETTING

PH DIST Z2 PKP CA
20 ms t PKP
OR PH DIST Z2 OP CA
0
OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIST Z2 OP
837020A6.CDR
Figure 5–47: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 2 TO ZONE 5 OP SCHEME

SETTINGS
PHS DIST Z1 DIR:
PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE:
PHS DIST Z1 XFMR
VOL CONNECTION:
PHS DIST Z1 XFMR
SETTINGS CUR CONNECTION:
PHS DIST Z1 REACH:
PHS DIST Z1 FUNCTION:
PHS DIST Z1 RCA:
Disable=0 PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH:
Enable=1 PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA:
PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT:
SETTING PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA:
AND
PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT:
PHS DIST Z1 BLK:
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD:
Off=0 PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA:
QUAD ONLY
PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD:
SETTING PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA:
PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL:
DISTANCE SOURCE:
RUN
IA-IB
A-B ELEMENT FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
IB-IC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IC-IA AND PH DIST Z1 PKP AB
OPEN POLE BLK AB
VT CONNECTION RUN
WYE DELTA PH DIST Z1 DPO AB
B-C ELEMENT
D60 ONLY
VAG-VBG VAB
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VBG-VCG VBC AND PH DIST Z1 PKP BC
OPEN POLE BLK BC
VCG-VAG VCA RUN
V_1 PH DIST Z1 DPO BC
C-A ELEMENT
I_1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
MEMORY AND PH DIST Z1 PKP CA
OPEN POLE BLK CA
V_1 > 0.80pu PH DIST Z1 DPO CA

1 CYCLE
OR
1 CYCLE
I_1 > 0.025pu OR PH DIST Z1 PKP
SETTING
PHS DIST Z1
SUPV: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RUN
5
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB
IA - IB > 3 PICKUP
RUN
PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC
IB - IC > 3 PICKUP
RUN
PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA
IC - IA > 3 PICKUP 837002AG.CDR
Figure 5–48: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1 TO ZONE 5 SCHEME LOGIC
c) GROUND DISTANCE
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" DISTANCE !" GROUND DISTANCE Z1(Z5)
# GROUND DISTANCE Z1 GND DIST Z1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

GND DIST Z1 DIR: Range: Forward, Reverse, Non-directional
MESSAGE
Forward
GND DIST Z1 Range: Mho, Quad
MESSAGE
SHAPE: Mho
GND DIST Z1 Range: 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
Z0/Z1 MAG: 2.70
GND DIST Z1 Range: –90 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
Z0/Z1 ANG: 0°
GND DIST Z1 Range: 0.00 to 7.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
ZOM/Z1 MAG: 0.00
GND DIST Z1 Range: –90 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ZOM/Z1 ANG: 0°
GND DIST Z1 Range: 0.02 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
REACH: 2.00 Ω
GND DIST Z1 Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RCA: 85°

GND DIST Z1 REV Range: 0.02 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE
REACH: 2.00 Ω
GND DIST Z1 REV Range: 30 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
REACH RCA: 85°
GND DIST Z1 POL Range: Zero-seq, Neg-seq
MESSAGE
CURRENT: Zero-seq
GND DIST Z1 NON- Range: –40.0 to 40.0° in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
HOMOGEN ANG: 0.0°
MESSAGE
COMP LIMIT: 90°
MESSAGE
DIR RCA: 85°
MESSAGE
DIR COMP LIMIT: 90°
GND DIST Z1 QUAD Range: 0.02 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RGT BLD: 10.00 Ω
GND DIST Z1 QUAD Range: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RGT BLD RCA: 85°
GND DIST Z1 QUAD Range: 0.02 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
LFT BLD: 10.00 Ω
5 MESSAGE
GND DIST Z1 QUAD Range: 60 to 90° in steps of 1
LFT BLD RCA: 85°
GND DIST Z1 Range: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SUPV: 0.200 pu
GND DIST Z1 VOLT Range: 0.000 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
LEVEL: 0.000 pu
GND DIST Z1 Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY:0.000 s
GND DIST Z1 BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
GND DIST Z1 Range: Self-Rest, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-Reset
GND DIST Z1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The ground mho distance function uses a dynamic 100% memory-polarized mho characteristic with additional reactance,
directional, current, and phase selection supervising characteristics. The ground quadrilateral distance function is com-
posed of a reactance characteristic, right and left blinders, and 100% memory-polarized directional, overcurrent, and phase
selection supervising characteristics.
When set to non-directional, the mho function becomes an offset mho with the reverse reach controlled independently from
the forward reach, and all the directional characteristics removed. When set to non-directional, the quadrilateral function
applies a reactance line in the reverse direction instead of the directional comparators.
The reactance supervision for the mho function uses the zero-sequence current for polarization. The reactance line of the
quadrilateral function uses either zero-sequence or negative-sequence current as a polarizing quantity. The selection is
controlled by a user setting and depends on the degree of non-homogeneity of the zero-sequence and negative-sequence
equivalent networks.
The directional supervision uses memory voltage as polarizing quantity and both zero- and negative-sequence currents as
operating quantities.

The phase selection supervision restrains the ground elements during double-line-to-ground faults as they – by principles
of distance relaying – may be inaccurate in such conditions. Ground distance Zones 2 through 5 apply additional zero-
sequence directional supervision. See Chapter 8 for additional details.
Five zones of ground distance protection are provided. Each zone is configured individually through its own setting menu.
All of the settings can be independently modified for each of the zones except:
1. The SIGNAL SOURCE setting (common for both phase and ground elements for all five zones as entered under the SET-
TINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" DISTANCE menu).
2. The MEMORY DURATION setting (common for both phase and ground elements for all five zones as entered under the
SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" DISTANCE menu).
The common distance settings noted at the start of the Distance section must be properly chosen for correct operation of
the ground distance elements.
Although all five zones can be used as either instantaneous elements (pickup [PKP] and dropout [DPO] FlexLogic™ signals)
or time-delayed elements (operate [OP] FlexLogic™ signals), only Zone 1 is intended for the instantaneous under-reaching
tripping mode.
Ensure that the PHASE VT SECONDARY VOLTAGE (see the SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE
BANK menu) is set correctly to prevent improper operation of associated memory action.
WARNING
• GND DIST Z1 DIR: All five zones are reversible. The forward direction is defined by the GND DIST Z1 RCA setting and
the reverse direction is shifted by 180° from that angle. The non-directional zone spans between the forward reach
impedance defined by the GND DIST Z1 REACH and GND DIST Z1 RCA settings, and the reverse reach impedance defined
by the GND DIST Z1 REV REACH and GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA settings.
• GND DIST Z1 SHAPE: This setting selects the shape of the ground distance characteristic between the mho and
quadrilateral characteristics. The selection is available on a per-zone basis. 5
The directional and non-directional quadrilateral ground distance characteristics are shown below. The directional and
non-directional mho ground distance characteristics are the same as those shown for the phase distance element in
the previous sub-section.
X
"+" NON-HOMOGEN. ANG
"-" NON-HOMOGEN. ANG
COMP LIMIT COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT

REACH
DIR COMP LIMIT
DIR RCA
R
-LFT BLD RGT BLD
837769A1.CDR
Figure 5–49: DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL GROUND DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC

X
REACH
R
-LFT BLD RGT BLD
RE V REACH
REV REACH
RCA

837770A1.CDR
Figure 5–50: NON-DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL GROUND DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC

• GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG: This setting specifies the ratio between the zero-sequence and positive-sequence imped-
5 ance required for zero-sequence compensation of the ground distance elements. This setting is available on a per-
zone basis, enabling precise settings for tapped, non-homogeneous, and series compensated lines.
• GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG: This setting specifies the angle difference between the zero-sequence and positive-
sequence impedance required for zero-sequence compensation of the ground distance elements. The entered value is
the zero-sequence impedance angle minus the positive-sequence impedance angle. This setting is available on a per-
zone basis, enabling precise values for tapped, non-homologous, and series-compensated lines.
• GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 MAG: The ground distance elements can be programmed to apply compensation for the zero-
sequence mutual coupling between parallel lines. If this compensation is required, the ground current from the parallel
line (3I_0) measured in the direction of the zone being compensated must be connected to the ground input CT of the
CT bank configured under the DISTANCE SOURCE. This setting specifies the ratio between the magnitudes of the mutual
zero-sequence impedance between the lines and the positive-sequence impedance of the protected line. It is impera-
tive to set this setting to zero if the compensation is not to be performed.
• GND DIST Z1 ZOM/Z1 ANG: This setting specifies the angle difference between the mutual zero-sequence imped-
ance between the lines and the positive-sequence impedance of the protected line.
• GND DIST Z1 REACH: This setting defines the reach of the zone for the forward and reverse applications. In non-
directional applications, this setting defines the forward reach of the zone. The reverse reach impedance in non-direc-
tional applications is set independently. The angle of the reach impedance is entered as the GND DIST Z1 RCA setting.
The reach impedance is entered in secondary ohms.
• GND DIST Z1 RCA: This setting specifies the characteristic angle (similar to the ‘maximum torque angle’ in previous
technologies) of the ground distance characteristic for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional
applications this setting defines the forward reach of the zone. The reverse reach impedance in the non-directional
applications is set independently. This setting is independent from the GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA setting (the characteristic
angle of an extra directional supervising function).
The relay internally performs zero-sequence compensation for the protected circuit based on the values
entered for GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG and GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG, and if configured to do so, zero-sequence com-
NOTE
pensation for mutual coupling based on the values entered for GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1 MAG and GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1
ANG (see Chapter 8 for details). The GND DIST Z1 REACH and GND DIST Z1 RCA should, therefore, be entered in
terms of positive sequence quantities.

• GND DIST Z1 REV REACH: This setting defines the reverse reach of the zone set to non-directional (GND DIST Z1 DIR
setting). The value must be entered in secondary ohms. This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to
“Forward” or “Reverse”.
• GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA: This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if the zone is set to
non-directional (GND DIST Z1 DIR setting). This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to “Forward” or
“Reverse”.
• GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT: This setting applies only if the GND DIST Z1 SHAPE is set to “Quad” and controls the
polarizing current used by the reactance comparator of the quadrilateral characteristic. Either the zero-sequence or
negative-sequence current could be used. Refer to Chapters 8 and 9 for additional information. In general, a variety of
system conditions must be examined to select an optimum polarizing current. This setting becomes less relevant when
the resistive coverage and zone reach are set conservatively. Also, this setting is more relevant in lower voltage appli-
cations such as on distribution lines or cables, as compared with high-voltage transmission lines. This setting applies
to both the Z1 and reverse reactance lines if the zone is set to non-directional.
• GND DIST Z1 NON-HOMOGEN ANG: This setting applies only if the GND DIST Z1 SHAPE is set to “Quad” and provides
a method to correct the angle of the polarizing current of the reactance comparator for non-homogeneity of the zero-
sequence or negative-sequence networks. Refer to Chapters 8 and 9 for additional information. In general, a variety of
system conditions must be examined to select this setting. In many applications this angle is used to reduce the reach
at high resistances in order to avoid overreaching under far-out reach settings and/or when the sequence networks are
greatly non-homogeneous. This setting applies to both the forward and reverse reactance lines if the zone is set to
non-directional.
• GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: This setting shapes the operating characteristic. In particular, it enables a lens-shaped
characteristic of the mho function and a tent-shaped characteristic of the quadrilateral function reactance boundary. If
the mho shape is selected, the same limit angle applies to mho and supervising reactance comparators. In conjunction
with the mho shape selection, this setting improves loadability of the protected line. In conjunction with the quadrilat-
eral characteristic, this setting improves security for faults close to the reach point by adjusting the reactance boundary 5
into a tent-shape.
• GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA: Selects the characteristic angle (or ‘maximum torque angle’) of the directional supervising
function. If the mho shape is applied, the directional function is an extra supervising function, as the dynamic mho
characteristic itself is a directional one. In conjunction with the quadrilateral shape selection, this setting defines the
only directional function built into the ground distance element. The directional function uses memory voltage for polar-
ization.
• GND DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: This setting selects the comparator limit angle for the directional supervising function.
• GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: This setting defines the right blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along
the resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral Distance Characteristic figure). The angular position of
the blinder is adjustable with the use of the GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the
quadrilateral characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current and required resistive
coverage.
• GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the right blinder of the quadrilateral
characteristic (see the Quadrilateral Distance Characteristic figure).
• GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: This setting defines the left blinder position of the quadrilateral characteristic along the
resistive axis of the impedance plane (see the Quadrilateral Distance Characteristic figure). The angular position of the
blinder is adjustable with the use of the GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA setting. This setting applies only to the quadri-
lateral characteristic and should be set with consideration to the maximum load current.
• GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: This setting defines the angular position of the left blinder of the quadrilateral
characteristic (see the Quadrilateral Distance Characteristic figure).
• GND DIST Z1 SUPV: The ground distance elements are supervised by the magnitude of the neutral (3I_0) current.
The current supervision pickup should be set above the maximum unbalance current under maximum load conditions
preventing maloperation due to VT fuse failure.
Zone 1 is sealed in with the current supervision.
• GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: This setting is relevant for applications on series-compensated lines, or in general, if
series capacitors are located between the relaying point and a point for which the zone shall not overreach. For plain
(non-compensated) lines, this setting shall be set to zero. Otherwise, the setting is entered in per unit of the VT bank
configured under the DISTANCE SOURCE. Effectively, this setting facilitates dynamic current-based reach reduction. In

non-directional applications (GND DIST Z1 DIR set to “Non-directional”), this setting applies only to the forward reach of
the non-directional zone. See Chapter 8 and 9 for additional details and information on calculating this setting value for
applications on series compensated lines.
• GND DIST Z1 DELAY: This setting enables the user to delay operation of the distance elements and implement a
stepped distance backup protection. The distance element timer applies a short drop out delay to cope with faults
located close to the boundary of the zone when small oscillations in the voltages and/or currents could inadvertently
reset the timer.
• GND DIST Z1 BLK: This setting enables the user to select a FlexLogic™ operand to block the given distance element.
VT fuse fail detection is one of the applications for this setting.
SETTINGS
GND DIST Z1 DIR:
GND DIST Z1 SHAPE:
GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 MAG:
GND DIST Z1 Z0/Z1 ANG:
GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1 MAG:
GND DIST Z1 Z0M/Z1 ANG:
GND DIST Z1 REACH:
SETTINGS GND DIST Z1 RCA:
GND DIST Z1 REV REACH
GND DIST Z1 FUNCTION:
GND DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA
Disable=0 GND DIST Z1 POL CURRENT
Enable=1 GND DIST Z1 NON-HOMOGEN ANG
GND DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT:
SETTING GND DIST Z1 DIR RCA:
AND
GND DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT:
GND DIST Z1 BLK:
GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD:
Off=0 GND DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: QUAD ONLY
GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD:
SETTING GND DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA:
5 DISTANCE SOURCE:
IA
GND DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL:
RUN
A ELEMENT FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

IB
IC AND GND DIST Z1 PKP A
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VT CONNECTION RUN
OPEN POLE OP ΦA
WYE DELTA GND DIST Z1 DPO A
B ELEMENT
VAG-VBG VAB
D60 ONLY
VBG-VCG VBC AND GND DIST Z1 PKP B

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VCG-VAG VCA RUN
OPEN POLE OP ΦB
I_2 GND DIST Z1 DPO B
C ELEMENT
I_0
V_1 AND GND DIST Z1 PKP C
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
I_1 MEMORY
OPEN POLE OP ΦC
IN GND DIST Z1 DPO C
V_1 > 0.80pu
1 CYCLE
OR OR GND DIST Z1 PKP
1 CYCLE
I_1 > 0.025pu
SETTING
GND DIST Z1
SUPV:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RUN
GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN
IN PICKUP 837007AC.CDR
Figure 5–51: GROUND DISTANCE Z1 SCHEME LOGIC

SETTINGS
GND DIST Z2 DIR:
GND DIST Z2 SHAPE:
GND DIST Z2 Z0/Z2 MAG:
GND DIST Z2 Z0/Z2 ANG:
GND DIST Z2 Z0M/Z1 MAG:
GND DIST Z2 Z0M/Z1 ANG:
GND DIST Z2 REACH:
SETTINGS GND DIST Z2 RCA:
GND DIST Z2 REV REACH
GND DIST Z2 FUNCTION:
GND DIST Z2 REV REACH RCA
Disable=0 GND DIST Z2 POL CURRENT
Enable=1 GND DIST Z2 NON-HOMOGEN ANG
GND DIST Z2 COMP LIMIT:
SETTING GND DIST Z2 DIR RCA:
AND
GND DIST Z2 DIR COMP LIMIT:
GND DIST Z2 BLK:
GND DIST Z2 VOLT LEVEL:
Off=0 GND DIST Z2 QUAD RGT BLD:
GND DIST Z2 QUAD RGT BLD RCA:
QUAD ONLY
SETTING GND DIST Z2 QUAD LFT BLD:
GND DIST Z2 QUAD LFT BLD RCA:
DISTANCE SOURCE:
RUN
IA
A ELEMENT FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
IB
IC AND GND DIST Z2 PKP A
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VT CONNECTION RUN
OPEN POLE OP ΦA
WYE DELTA GND DIST Z2 DPO A
B ELEMENT
VAG-VBG VAB
D60 ONLY
VBG-VCG VBC AND GND DIST Z2 PKP B
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VCG-VAG VCA RUN
OPEN POLE OP ΦB
I_2 GND DIST Z2 DPO B
C ELEMENT
I_0
V_1 AND GND DIST Z2 PKP C
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
I_1 MEMORY
OPEN POLE OP ΦC
IN GND DIST Z2 DPO C
V_1 > 0.80pu
1 CYCLE
OR OR GND DIST Z2 PKP
1 CYCLE
I_1 > 0.025pu
SETTING
GND DIST Z2
5
SUPV:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RUN
IN PICKUP GND DIST Z2 SUPN IN
GND DIST Z2 DIR SUPN
OR
OPEN POLE OP*
NOTE: *D60 only 837011AE.CDR
Figure 5–52: GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 2 TO ZONE 5 SCHEME LOGIC
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING GND DIST Z1 OP A

GND DIST Z1 OP B
GND DIST Z1
AND GND DIST Z1 OP C
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DELAY:
OR
t PKP
GND DIST Z1 PKP A
0
t PKP
GND DIST Z1 PKP B
0
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
t PKP
GND DIST Z1 PKP C OR OR GND DIST Z1 OP
0
GND DIST Z1 SUPN IN

AND
OPEN POLE OP * AND
OR
NOTE: * D60 Only. Other UR models apply regular current seal-in for Z1. 837018A5.CDR
Figure 5–53: GROUND DISTANCE Z1 OP SCHEME

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GND DIST Z2 DELAY:

GND DIST Z2 PKP A
20 ms t PKP
OR GND DIST Z2 OP A
0
SETTING

GND DIST Z2 PKP B
20 ms t PKP
OR GND DIST Z2 OP B
0
SETTING

GND DIST Z2 PKP C
20 ms t PKP
OR GND DIST Z2 OP C
0
GND DIST Z2 OP
837019A6.CDR
Figure 5–54: GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 2 TO ZONE 5 OP SCHEME

GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION:
A dual (zero- and negative-sequence) memory-polarized directional supervision applied to the ground distance protection
elements has been shown to give good directional integrity. However, a reverse double-line-to-ground fault can lead to a
maloperation of the ground element in a sound phase if the zone reach setting is increased to cover high resistance faults.
5 Ground distance Zones 2 through 5 use an additional ground directional supervision to enhance directional integrity. The
element’s directional characteristic angle is used as a ‘maximum torque angle’ together with a 90° limit angle.
The supervision is biased toward operation in order to avoid compromising the sensitivity of ground distance elements at
low signal levels. Otherwise, the reverse fault condition that generates concern will have high polarizing levels so that a cor-
rect reverse fault decision can be reliably made. The supervision for Zones 2, 3, and 5 is removed during open pole condi-
tions.
V_0 > 5 Volts
SETTING
DISTANCE SOURCE:
RUN
V_0 ZERO SEQ
DIRECTIONAL AND GND DIST Z2 DIR
I_0
t PKP SUPN
t RST
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP CO-ORDINATING TIME
Pickup 4.5 cycles, Reset 1.0 cycle 837009A6.CDR
Figure 5–55: GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.5 POWER SWING DETECT
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" POWER SWING DETECT
# POWER SWING POWER SWING Range: Disabled, Enabled

# DETECT FUNCTION: Disabled
POWER SWING Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
POWER SWING Range: Mho Shape, Quad Shape
MESSAGE
SHAPE: Mho Shape
POWER SWING Range: Two Step, Three Step
MESSAGE
MODE: Two Step
POWER SWING Range: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SUPV: 0.600 pu
POWER SWING FWD Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
REACH: 50.00 Ω
POWER SWING QUAD FWD Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
REACH MID: 60.00 Ω
POWER SWING QUAD FWD Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
REACH OUT: 70.00 Ω
POWER SWING FWD Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RCA: 75° 5
POWER SWING REV Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
REACH: 50.00 Ω
POWER SWING QUAD REV Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
REACH MID: 60.00 Ω
POWER SWING QUAD REV Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
REACH OUT: 70.00 Ω
POWER SWING REV Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RCA: 75°
POWER SWING OUTER Range: 40 to 140° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LIMIT ANGLE: 120°
POWER SWING MIDDLE Range: 40 to 140° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LIMIT ANGLE: 90°
POWER SWING INNER Range: 40 to 140° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LIMIT ANGLE: 60°
POWER SWING OUTER Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RGT BLD: 100.00 Ω
POWER SWING OUTER Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
LFT BLD: 100.00 Ω
POWER SWING MIDDLE Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RGT BLD: 100.00 Ω
POWER SWING MIDDLE Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
LFT BLD: 100.00 Ω
POWER SWING INNER Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
RGT BLD: 100.00 Ω

POWER SWING INNER Range: 0.10 to 500.00 Ω in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE
LFT BLD: 100.00 Ω
POWER SWING PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY 1: 0.030 s
POWER SWING RESET Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY 1: 0.050 s
MESSAGE
DELAY 2: 0.017 s
MESSAGE
DELAY 3: 0.009 s
MESSAGE
DELAY 4: 0.017 s
POWER SWING SEAL-IN Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.400 s
POWER SWING TRIP Range: Early, Delayed
MESSAGE
MODE: Delayed
POWER SWING BLK: Range: Flexlogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
POWER SWING Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-Reset
5 MESSAGE
POWER SWING Range: Disabled, Enabled
EVENTS: Disabled
The Power Swing Detect element provides both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The element mea-
sures the positive-sequence apparent impedance and traces its locus with respect to either two or three user-selectable
operating characteristic boundaries. Upon detecting appropriate timing relations, the blocking and/or tripping indication is
given through FlexLogic™ operands. The element incorporates an adaptive disturbance detector. This function does not
trigger on power swings, but is capable of detecting faster disturbances – faults in particular – that may occur during power
swings. Operation of this dedicated disturbance detector is signaled via the POWER SWING 50DD operand.
The Power Swing Detect element asserts two outputs intended for blocking selected protection elements on power swings:
POWER SWING BLOCK is a traditional signal that is safely asserted for the entire duration of the power swing, and POWER
SWING UN/BLOCK is established in the same way, but resets when an extra disturbance is detected during the power swing.
The POWER SWING UN/BLOCK operand may be used for blocking selected protection elements if the intent is to respond to
faults during power swing conditions.
Different protection elements respond differently to power swings. If tripping is required for faults during power swing condi-
tions, some elements may be blocked permanently (using the POWER SWING BLOCK operand), and others may be blocked
and dynamically unblocked upon fault detection (using the POWER SWING UN/BLOCK operand).
The operating characteristic and logic figures should be viewed along with the following discussion to develop an under-
standing of the operation of the element.
The Power Swing Detect element operates in three-step or two-step mode:
• Three-step operation: The power swing blocking sequence essentially times the passage of the locus of the positive-
sequence impedance between the outer and the middle characteristic boundaries. If the locus enters the outer charac-
teristic (indicated by the POWER SWING OUTER FlexLogic™ operand) but stays outside the middle characteristic (indi-
cated by the POWER SWING MIDDLE FlexLogic™ operand) for an interval longer than POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1, the
power swing blocking signal (POWER SWING BLOCK FlexLogic™ operand) is established and sealed-in. The blocking
signal resets when the locus leaves the outer characteristic, but not sooner than the POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1 time.
• Two-step operation: If the 2-step mode is selected, the sequence is identical, but it is the outer and inner characteris-
tics that are used to time the power swing locus.
The Out-of-Step Tripping feature operates as follows for three-step and two-step Power Swing Detection modes:

• Three-step operation: The out-of-step trip sequence identifies unstable power swings by determining if the imped-
ance locus spends a finite time between the outer and middle characteristics and then a finite time between the middle
and inner characteristics. The first step is similar to the power swing blocking sequence. After timer POWER SWING
PICKUP DELAY 1 times out, Latch 1 is set as long as the impedance stays within the outer characteristic.
If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the middle char-
acteristic but stays outside the inner characteristic for a period of time defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2, Latch
2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic. If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance
stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the inner characteristic and stays there for a period of time
defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3, Latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic;
the element is now ready to trip.
If the "Early" trip mode is selected, the POWER SWING TRIP operand is set immediately and sealed-in for the interval set
by the POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY. If the "Delayed" trip mode is selected, the element waits until the impedance locus
leaves the inner characteristic, then times out the POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 and sets Latch 4; the element is now
ready to trip. The trip operand is set later, when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic.
• Two-step operation: The 2-step mode of operation is similar to the 3-step mode with two exceptions. First, the initial
stage monitors the time spent by the impedance locus between the outer and inner characteristics. Second, the stage
involving the POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 timer is bypassed. It is up to the user to integrate the blocking (POWER
SWING BLOCK) and tripping (POWER SWING TRIP) FlexLogic™ operands with other protection functions and output con-
tacts in order to make this element fully operational.
The element can be set to use either lens (mho) or rectangular (quad) characteristics as illustrated below. When set to
“Mho”, the element applies the right and left blinders as well. If the blinders are not required, their settings should be set
high enough to effectively disable the blinders.
X
5
R
TE
OU
ACH
E
DL
FWD RE
ID
M
R
NE
IN
FW
LE
DR
NG
CA
E ITA
GL LIM
AN LE
RE
IT DD R
MI
VR
LIM
CA
ER
INN
H
REV REAC
OUTER LIMIT ANGLE
827843A2.CDR
Figure 5–56: POWER SWING DETECT MHO OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

842734A1.CDR
Figure 5–57: EFFECTS OF BLINDERS ON THE MHO CHARACTERISTICS
INNER LFT BL
D INNER RGT BL
D
MIDDLE LFT BL
ACH OUT
ACH MID
D MIDDLE RGT
BLD
OUTER LFT BL
D OUTER RGT BL
D
QUAD FWD RE
QUAD FWD RE
FWD REACH
FWD RCA
R
CH MID
REV REACH
H OUT
QUAD REV REA
AC
QUAD REV RE
842735A1.CDR
Figure 5–58: POWER SWING DETECT QUAD OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

The FlexLogic™ output operands for the Power Swing Detect element are described below:
• The POWER SWING OUTER, POWER SWING MIDDLE, POWER SWING INNER, POWER SWING TMR2 PKP, POWER SWING TMR3
PKP, and POWER SWING TMR4 PKP FlexLogic™ operands are auxiliary operands that could be used to facilitate testing
and special applications.
• The POWER SWING BLOCK FlexLogic™ operand shall be used to block selected protection elements such as distance
functions.

• The POWER SWING UN/BLOCK FlexLogic™ operand shall be used to block those protection elements that are intended
to be blocked under power swings, but subsequently unblocked should a fault occur after the power swing blocking
condition has been established.
• The POWER SWING 50DD FlexLogic™ operand indicates that an adaptive disturbance detector integrated with the ele-
ment has picked up. This operand will trigger on faults occurring during power swing conditions. This includes both
three-phase and single-pole-open conditions.
• The POWER SWING INCOMING FlexLogic™ operand indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus (the
locus enters the inner characteristic).
• The POWER SWING OUTGOING FlexLogic™ operand indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus (the
locus leaving the outer characteristic). This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only
after pre-defined number of unstable power swings.
• The POWER SWING TRIP FlexLogic™ operand is a trip command.
The settings for the Power Swing Detect element are described below:
• POWER SWING FUNCTION: This setting enables/disables the entire Power Swing Detection element. The setting
applies to both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions.
• POWER SWING SOURCE: The source setting identifies the Signal Source for both blocking and tripping functions.
• POWER SWING SHAPE: This setting selects the shapes (either “Mho” or “Quad”) of the outer, middle and, inner char-
acteristics of the power swing detect element. The operating principle is not affected. The “Mho” characteristics use the
left and right blinders.
• POWER SWING MODE: This setting selects between the 2-step and 3-step operating modes and applies to both
power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The 3-step mode applies if there is enough space between the
maximum load impedances and distance characteristics of the relay that all three (outer, middle, and inner) character-
istics can be placed between the load and the distance characteristics. Whether the spans between the outer and mid- 5
dle as well as the middle and inner characteristics are sufficient should be determined by analysis of the fastest power
swings expected in correlation with settings of the power swing timers.
The 2-step mode uses only the outer and inner characteristics for both blocking and tripping functions. This leaves
more space in heavily loaded systems to place two power swing characteristics between the distance characteristics
and the maximum load, but allows for only one determination of the impedance trajectory.
• POWER SWING SUPV: A common overcurrent pickup level supervises all three power swing characteristics. The
supervision responds to the positive sequence current.
• POWER SWING FWD REACH: This setting specifies the forward reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner
quad characteristic. For a simple system consisting of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be higher
than the sum of the line and remote source positive-sequence impedances. Detailed transient stability studies may be
needed for complex systems in order to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the
POWER SWING FWD RCA setting.
• POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: This setting specifies the forward reach of the middle quad characteristic.
The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the
shape setting is “Mho”.
• POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: This setting specifies the forward reach of the outer quad characteristic.
• POWER SWING FWD RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the forward reach impedance for the mho characteris-
tics, angles of all the blinders, and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quad characteristics.
• POWER SWING REV REACH: This setting specifies the reverse reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner
quad characteristic. For a simple system of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be higher than the
positive-sequence impedance of the local source. Detailed transient stability studies may be needed for complex sys-
tems to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING REV RCA setting for
“Mho”, and the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting for “Quad”.
• POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the middle quad characteristic.

• POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the outer quad characteristic.
• POWER SWING REV RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the reverse reach impedance for the mho characteris-
tics. This setting applies to mho shapes only.
• POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the outer power swing characteristic. The convention
depicted in the Power Swing Detect Characteristic diagram should be observed: values greater than 90° result in an
‘apple’ shaped characteristic; values less than 90° result in a lens shaped characteristic. This angle must be selected
in consideration of the maximum expected load. If the maximum load angle is known, the outer limit angle should be
coordinated with a 20° security margin. Detailed studies may be needed for complex systems to determine this setting.
This setting applies to mho shapes only.
• POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the middle power swing detect characteristic. It is rele-
vant only for the 3-step mode. A typical value would be close to the average of the outer and inner limit angles. This
setting applies to mho shapes only.
• POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the inner power swing detect characteristic. The inner
characteristic is used by the out-of-step tripping function: beyond the inner characteristic out-of-step trip action is defi-
nite (the actual trip may be delayed as per the TRIP MODE setting). Therefore, this angle must be selected in consider-
ation to the power swing angle beyond which the system becomes unstable and cannot recover.
The inner characteristic is also used by the power swing blocking function in the 2-step mode. In this case, set this
angle large enough so that the characteristics of the distance elements are safely enclosed by the inner characteristic.
This setting applies to mho shapes only.
• POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER RGT BLD: These settings specify the resistive reach of the right
blinder. The blinder applies to both “Mho” and “Quad” characteristics. Set these value high if no blinder is required for
5 the “Mho” characteristic.
• POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER LFT BLD: These settings specify the resistive reach of the left blinder.
Enter a positive value; the relay automatically uses a negative value. The blinder applies to both “Mho” and “Quad”
characteristics. Set this value high if no blinder is required for the “Mho” characteristic.
• POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1: All the coordinating timers are related to each other and should be set to detect
the fastest expected power swing and produce out-of-step tripping in a secure manner. The timers should be set in
consideration to the power swing detect characteristics, mode of power swing detect operation and mode of out-of-
step tripping. This timer defines the interval that the impedance locus must spend between the outer and inner charac-
teristics (2-step operating mode), or between the outer and middle characteristics (3-step operating mode) before the
power swing blocking signal is established. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the imped-
ance locus to travel between the two selected characteristics during the fastest expected power swing. This setting is
relevant for both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping.
• POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1: This setting defines the dropout delay for the power swing blocking signal. Detec-
tion of a condition requiring a Block output sets Latch 1 after PICKUP DELAY 1 time. When the impedance locus leaves
the outer characteristic, timer POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1 is started. When the timer times-out the latch is reset. This
setting should be selected to give extra security for the power swing blocking action.
• POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2: Controls the out-of-step tripping function in the 3-step mode only. This timer
defines the interval the impedance locus must spend between the middle and inner characteristics before the second
step of the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for
the impedance locus to travel between the two characteristics during the fastest expected power swing.
• POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3: Controls the out-of-step tripping function only. It defines the interval the imped-
ance locus must spend within the inner characteristic before the last step of the out-of-step tripping sequence is com-
pleted and the element is armed to trip. The actual moment of tripping is controlled by the TRIP MODE setting. This time
delay is provided for extra security before the out-of-step trip action is executed.
• POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 4: Controls the out-of-step tripping function in “Delayed” trip mode only. This timer
defines the interval the impedance locus must spend outside the inner characteristic but within the outer characteristic
before the element is armed for the delayed trip. The delayed trip occurs when the impedance leaves the outer charac-
teristic. This time delay is provided for extra security and should be set considering the fastest expected power swing.

• POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY: The out-of-step trip FlexLogic™ operand (POWER SWING TRIP) is sealed-in for the
specified period of time. The sealing-in is crucial in the delayed trip mode, as the original trip signal is a very short
pulse occurring when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic after the out-of-step sequence is completed.
• POWER SWING TRIP MODE: Selection of the “Early” trip mode results in an instantaneous trip after the last step in
the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed. The Early trip mode will stress the circuit breakers as the currents at
that moment are high (the electromotive forces of the two equivalent systems are approximately 180° apart). Selection
of the “Delayed” trip mode results in a trip at the moment when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic.
Delayed trip mode will relax the operating conditions for the breakers as the currents at that moment are low. The
selection should be made considering the capability of the breakers in the system.
• POWER SWING BLK: This setting specifies the FlexLogic™ operand used for blocking the out-of-step function only.
The power swing blocking function is operational all the time as long as the element is enabled. The blocking signal
resets the output POWER SWING TRIP operand but does not stop the out-of-step tripping sequence.
SETTINGS
POWER SWING POWER SWING OUTER
SHAPE: LIMIT ANGLE:
POWER SWING FWD POWER SWING MIDDLE
REACH: LIMIT ANGLE:
POWER SWING QUAD POWER SWING INNER
FWD REACH MID: LIMIT ANGLE:
POWER SWING QUAD POWER SWING OUTER
FWD REACH OUT: RGT BLD:
POWER SWING FWD POWER SWING OUTER
RCA: LFT BLD:
SETTING POWER SWING REV POWER SWING MIDDLE
POWER SWING REACH: RGT BLD:
FUNCTION: POWER SWING QUAD REV POWER SWING MIDDLE
REACH MID: LFT BLD:
5
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1 POWER SWING QUAD REV POWER SWING INNER
REACH OUT: RGT BLD:
SETTING POWER SWING REV POWER SWING INNER
RCA: LFT BLD:
POWER SWING SOURCE:
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
V_1 OUTER IMPEDANCE
AND POWER SWING OUTER
I_1 REGION
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
MIDDLE IMPEDANCE
AND POWER SWING MIDDLE
REGION
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
INNER IMPEDANCE
AND POWER SWING INNER
REGION
SETTING
POWER SWING
SUPV:
RUN
I_1 > PICKUP

827840A3.CDR
Figure 5–59: POWER SWING DETECT SCHEME LOGIC (1 of 3)
SETTING
POWER SWING FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
TIMER
Enabled = 1
0
SETTING 10 cycles
POWER SWING SOURCE: RUN TIMER

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
AND
I_0 | |I_0| - |I_0'|| > K_0

POWER SWING 50DD
4 cycles
OR
I_1 | |I_1| - |I_1'|| > K_1
I_2 | |I_2| - |I_2'|| > K_2
I_0, I_1, I_2 - present values

I_0', I_1', I_2' - half-a-cycle old values
K_0, K_2 - three times the average change over last power cycle 842008A1.CDR
K_1 - four times the average change over last power cycle

POWER SWING OUTER
POWER SWING MIDDLE
POWER SWING INNER
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING SETTINGS
POWER SWING
POWER SWING MODE:
DELAY 1 PICKUP:
POWER SWING
3-step
AND DELAY 1 RESET:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
tPKP
S Q1 POWER SWING BLOCK
tRST
POWER SWING UN/BLOCK
AND L1 S Q5
2-step FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
L5
R POWER SWING 50DD
R
OR
OR
SETTING
POWER SWING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
DELAY 2 PICKUP:
POWER SWING TMR2 PKP
tPKP
AND S Q2
0
L2
R
3-step
2-step
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING POWER SWING TMR3 PKP
POWER SWING
DELAY 3 PICKUP: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
5
tPKP POWER SWING INCOMING
AND S Q3
0
L3 SETTING
R
POWER SWING TRIP
MODE:
SETTING SETTING
POWER SWING POWER SWING
DELAY 4 PICKUP: Early
SEAL-IN DELAY:
tPKP 0
AND S Q4 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0 tRST
L4 AND POWER SWING TRIP
R AND
Delayed

NOTE: POWER SWING TMR4 PKP
POWER SWING BLK:
L1 AND L4 LATCHES ARE SET DOMINANT
L2, L3 AND L5 LATCHES ARE RESET DOMINANT Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
POWER SWING OUTGOING
827841A4.CDR

5.5.6 LOAD ENCROACHMENT
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" LOAD ENCROACHMENT
# LOAD ENCROACHMENT LOAD ENCROACHMENT Range: Disabled, Enabled

LOAD ENCROACHMENT Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
LOAD ENCROACHMENT Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MIN VOLT: 0.250 pu
LOAD ENCROACHMENT Range: 0.02 to 250.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
REACH: 1.00 Ω
LOAD ENCROACHMENT Range: 5 to 50° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ANGLE: 30°
LOAD ENCROACHMENT Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PKP DELAY: 0.000 s
LOAD ENCROACHMENT Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
RST DELAY: 0.000 s
LOAD ENCRMNT BLK: Range: Flexlogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
LOAD ENCROACHMENT Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset 5
LOAD ENCROACHMENT Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The Load Encroachment element responds to the positive-sequence voltage and current and applies a characteristic
shown in the figure below.
X
ANGLE
–REACH REACH
R
ANGLE
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
OPERATE
OPERATE
827846A1.CDR
Figure 5–62: LOAD ENCROACHMENT CHARACTERISTIC

The element operates if the positive-sequence voltage is above a settable level and asserts its output signal that can be
used to block selected protection elements such as distance or phase overcurrent. The following figure shows an effect of
the Load Encroachment characteristics used to block the Quad distance element.

837731A1.CDR
Figure 5–63: LOAD ENCROACHMENT APPLIED TO DISTANCE ELEMENT

• LOAD ENCROACHMENT MIN VOLT: This setting specifies the minimum positive-sequence voltage required for oper-
ation of the element. If the voltage is below this threshold a blocking signal will not be asserted by the element. When
selecting this setting one must remember that the D60 measures the phase-to-ground sequence voltages regardless
of the VT connection.
The nominal VT secondary voltage as specified under PATH: SYSTEM SETUP !" AC INPUTS ! VOLTAGE BANK X1 !"
PHASE VT SECONDARY is the p.u. base for this setting.
5 • LOAD ENCROACHMENT REACH: This setting specifies the resistive reach of the element as shown in the Load
Encroachment Characteristic diagram. This setting should be entered in secondary ohms and be calculated as the
positive-sequence resistance seen by the relay under maximum load conditions and unity power factor.
• LOAD ENCROACHMENT ANGLE: This setting specifies the size of the blocking region as shown on the Load
Encroachment Characteristic diagram and applies to the positive sequence impedance.
SETTING
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1 SETTINGS
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
SETTING REACH:
SETTINGS
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
LOAD ENCRMNT BLK:
ANGLE: LOAD ENCROACHMENT
Off=0 RUN PKP DELAY:
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
LOAD ENCHR PKP
RST DELAY:
SETTING SETTING LOAD ENCHR DPO
Load Encroachment t PKP
LOAD ENCROACHMENT LOAD ENCROACHMENT t RST LOAD ENCHR OP
SOURCE: MIN VOLT: Characteristic
Pos Seq Voltage (V_1) V_1 > Pickup
Pos Seq Current (I_1)
827847A2.CDR
Figure 5–64: LOAD ENCROACHMENT SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.7 PHASE CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" PHASE CURRENT
# PHASE CURRENT # PHASE TOC1

See page 5–108.
# #
# PHASE TOC2
#
# PHASE IOC1
#
# PHASE IOC2
#
# PHASE
# DIRECTIONAL 1
# PHASE
# DIRECTIONAL 2
b) INVERSE TOC CHARACTERISTICS

The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I2t stan-
dard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices. If however, none of these curve
shapes is adequate, FlexCurves™ may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics. The Definite Time
curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required. 5
Table 5–9: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES
IEEE IEC GE TYPE IAC OTHER
IEEE Extremely Inv. IEC Curve A (BS142) IAC Extremely Inv. I2t
IEEE Very Inverse IEC Curve B (BS142) IAC Very Inverse FlexCurves™ A, B, C, and D
IEEE Moderately Inv. IEC Curve C (BS142) IAC Inverse Recloser Curves
IEC Short Inverse IAC Short Inverse Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with
the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional
to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal ‘energy capacity’ memory variable. When this variable indi-
cates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capac-
ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the
variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: “Instantaneous” and “Timed”. The Instan-
taneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity
directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical relays. With this setting, the energy capacity variable is decremented according to the
equation provided.
Graphs of standard time-current curves on 11” × 17” log-log graph paper are available upon request from
the GE Multilin literature department. The original files are also available in PDF format on the enerVista CD
NOTE
and the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.

IEEE CURVES:
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications
for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae:
A tr
---------------------------------- + B ---------------------------------
-
I - p
T = TDM ×  --------------- , T = TDM ×  ---------------- 2 – 1
I (EQ 5.5)
 I pickup – 1
RESET
 I pickup
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
A, B, p = constants, TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”),
tr = characteristic constant
Table 5–10: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE A B P TR
IEEE Extremely Inverse 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02000 4.85
Table 5–11: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE
5 0.5
1.0
11.341
22.682
4.761
9.522
1.823
3.647
1.001
2.002
0.648
1.297
0.464
0.927
0.355
0.709
0.285
0.569
0.237
0.474
0.203
0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE VERY INVERSE
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068

IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These
are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K tr
--------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
-
T = TDM × ( I ⁄ I pickup ) E – 1 , T RESET = TDM × ( I ⁄ I 2 (EQ 5.6)
pickup ) – 1
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting, K, E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5–12: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE K E TR
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve B (BS142) 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve C (BS142) 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040 0.500
Table 5–13: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC CURVE A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10
0.20
1.719
3.439
1.003
2.006
0.630
1.260
0.498
0.996
0.428
0.856
0.384
0.767
0.353
0.706
0.330
0.659
0.312
0.623
0.297
0.594
5
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC CURVE B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC CURVE C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC SHORT TIME
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518

IAC CURVES:
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
 B D E  tr
T = TDM ×  A + ------------------------------ + -------------------------------------2- + -------------------------------------3- , T RESET = TDM × -------------------------------
- (EQ 5.7)
 ( I ⁄ I ) – C ( ( I ⁄ I ) – C ) ( ( I ⁄ I ) – C )  2
pkp pkp pkp ( I ⁄ I pkp ) – 1
where: T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, Ipkp = Pickup Current setting, A to E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5–14: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE A B C D E TR
IAC Extreme Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 –1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 –0.4180 0.1947 0.990
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 –0.0010 0.0221 0.222
Table 5–15: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
5 1.0
2.0
3.398
6.796
1.498
2.997
0.606
1.212
0.356
0.711
0.246
0.491
0.186
0.372
0.149
0.298
0.124
0.248
0.106
0.212
0.093
0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC VERY INVERSE
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC INVERSE
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC SHORT INVERSE
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493

I2t CURVES:
The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae:
100 100
-------------------------- ----------------------------
T = TDM ×  ---------------
I  2 , T RESET = TDM ×  I  – 2
- ---------------- (EQ 5.8)
 I pickup   I pickup 
where: T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting;
TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 5–16: I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.01 0.44 0.25 0.11 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01
0.10 4.44 2.50 1.11 0.63 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10
1.00 44.44 25.00 11.11 6.25 4.00 2.78 2.04 1.56 1.23 1.00
10.00 444.44 250.00 111.11 62.50 40.00 27.78 20.41 15.63 12.35 10.00
100.00 4444.4 2500.0 1111.1 625.00 400.00 277.78 204.08 156.25 123.46 100.00
600.00 26666.7 15000.0 6666.7 3750.0 2400.0 1666.7 1224.5 937.50 740.74 600.00
FLEXCURVES™:
The custom FlexCurves™ are described in detail in the FlexCurves™ section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the
FlexCurves™ are derived from the formulae:
I
T = TDM × FlexCurve Time at  ----------------
I
when  ---------------- ≥ 1.00 (EQ 5.9)
5
I pickup I pickup
I I
T RESET = TDM × FlexCurve Time at  ---------------- when  ---------------- ≤ 0.98 (EQ 5.10)
I pickup I pickup
where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
DEFINITE TIME CURVE:
The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base
definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instanta-
neous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.
T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup (EQ 5.11)
T RESET = – TDM in seconds (EQ 5.12)
where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting

I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
RECLOSER CURVES:
The D60 uses the FlexCurve™ feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. Please refer to the FlexCurve™
section in this chapter for additional details.

c) PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51P)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) ! PHASE CURRENT ! PHASE TOC1(2)
# PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE TOC1 Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
INPUT: Phasor
PHASE TOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE TOC1 Range: See Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
PHASE TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
PHASE TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
RESET: Instantaneous
PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
RESTRAINT: Disabled
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
5 PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or
be used as a simple Definite Time element. The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor
magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to the Inverse TOC Curves Character-
istic sub-section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time
accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instan-
taneous” and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is accom-
plished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve (see
the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as ‘Mvr’ times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage restraint feature
is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.

Multiplier for Pickup Current

1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Phase-Phase Voltage ÷ VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage
818784A4.CDR
Figure 5–65: PHASE TOC VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-A :
Off=0
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-B:
5
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
PHASE TOC1 INPUT:
BLOCK-C:
PHASE TOC1
Off=0 PICKUP:
PHASE TOC1
SETTING CURVE:
PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1
SOURCE: TD MULTIPLIER:
IA
PHASE TOC1
IB RESET: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IC AND RUN PHASE TOC1 A PKP
IA PICKUP
Seq=ABC Seq=ACB PHASE TOC1 A DPO
RUN MULTIPLY INPUTS
t PHASE TOC1 A OP
VAB VAC Set
Calculate Multiplier Set Pickup AND RUN PHASE TOC1 B PKP
RUN
Multiplier-Phase A IB PICKUP
Set PHASE TOC1 B DPO
VBC VBA Set Pickup
Calculate Multiplier t PHASE TOC1 B OP
RUN
Multiplier-Phase B
Set AND RUN PHASE TOC1 C PKP
VCA VCB IC PICKUP
Calculate Multiplier Set Pickup PHASE TOC1 C DPO
Multiplier-Phase C
t PHASE TOC1 C OP
SETTING OR PHASE TOC1 PKP
PHASE TOC1 VOLT
RESTRAINT: OR PHASE TOC1 OP
Enabled
AND PHASE TOC1 DPO
827072A4.CDR
Figure 5–66: PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

d) PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50P)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) ! PHASE CURRENT ! PHASE IOC 1(2)
# PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
5 PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
Definite Time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
SETTING SETTING SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC
PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 OPERANDS
FUNCTION: PICKUP: PICKUPDELAY: PHASE IOC1 A PKP
Enabled = 1 AND RUN PHASE IOC1 RESET
Disabled = 0 DELAY: PHASE IOC1 A DPO
IA ≥ PICKUP tPKP
SETTING tRST PHASE IOC1 B PKP
AND RUN
PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 B DPO
SOURCE: tPKP
IB ≥ PICKUP
IA tRST PHASE IOC1 C PKP
AND RUN
IB
tPKP PHASE IOC1 C DPO
IC
IC ≥ PICKUP tRST
PHASE IOC1 A OP
SETTING PHASE IOC1 B OP

PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-A: PHASE IOC1 C OP
Off = 0
OR PHASE IOC1 PKP
SETTING OR PHASE IOC1 OP

PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-B:
AND PHASE IOC1 DPO
Off = 0
SETTING
827033A6.VSD
PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-C:
Off = 0
Figure 5–67: PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

e) PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67P)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) ! PHASE CURRENT ! PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1(2)
# PHASE PHASE DIR 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

# DIRECTIONAL 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE DIR 1 Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ECA: 30
PHASE DIR POL V1 Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 0.700 pu
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
WHEN V MEM EXP: No
PHASE DIR 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE DIR 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase directional elements (one for each of phases A, B, and C) determine the phase current flow direction for steady
state and fault conditions and can be used to control the operation of the phase overcurrent elements via the BLOCK inputs
of these elements. 5
S
UT 0
TP
OU
–90°
VAG (Unfaulted) Fault angle

set at 60° Lag
VPol
VAG(Faulted) IA
ECA
set at 30°
VBC
VBC
VCG VBG +90°
Phasors for Phase A Polarization:
VPol = VBC × (1/_ECA) = polarizing voltage

IA = operating current
ECA = Element Characteristic Angle at 30° 827800A2.CDR
Figure 5–68: PHASE A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION

This element is intended to apply a block signal to an overcurrent element to prevent an operation when current is flowing
in a particular direction. The direction of current flow is determined by measuring the phase angle between the current from
the phase CTs and the line-line voltage from the VTs, based on the 90° or ‘quadrature’ connection. If there is a requirement
to supervise overcurrent elements for flows in opposite directions, such as can happen through a bus-tie breaker, two
phase directional elements should be programmed with opposite ECA settings.

To increase security for three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage, a ‘voltage memory’
feature is incorporated. This feature stores the polarizing voltage the moment before the voltage collapses, and uses it to
determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid for one second after the voltage has collapsed.
The main component of the phase directional element is the phase angle comparator with two inputs: the operating signal
(phase current) and the polarizing signal (the line voltage, shifted in the leading direction by the characteristic angle, ECA).
The following table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional control:
PHASE OPERATING POLARIZING SIGNAL Vpol
SIGNAL
ABC PHASE SEQUENCE ACB PHASE SEQUENCE
A Angle of IA Angle of VBC × (1∠ECA) Angle of VCB × (1∠ECA)
B Angle of IB Angle of VCA × (1∠ECA) Angle of VAC × 1∠ECA)
C Angle of IC Angle of VAB × (1∠ECA) Angle of VBA × (1∠ECA)
MODE OF OPERATION:
• When the function is “Disabled”, or the operating current is below 5% × CT nominal, the element output is “0”.
• When the function is “Enabled”, the operating current is above 5% × CT nominal, and the polarizing voltage is above
the set threshold, the element output is dependent on the phase angle between the operating and polarizing signals:
– The element output is logic “0” when the operating current is within polarizing voltage ±90°.
– For all other angles, the element output is logic “1”.
• Once the voltage memory has expired, the phase overcurrent elements under directional control can be set to block or
trip on overcurrent as follows:
– When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to “Yes”, the directional element will block the operation of any phase
5 overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires.
– When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to “No”, the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements
under directional control when voltage memory expires.
In all cases, directional blocking will be permitted to resume when the polarizing voltage becomes greater than the ‘polariz-
ing voltage threshold’.
SETTINGS:
• PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting is used to select the source for the operating and polarizing signals.
The operating current for the phase directional element is the phase current for the selected current source. The polar-
izing voltage is the line voltage from the phase VTs, based on the 90° or ‘quadrature’ connection and shifted in the
leading direction by the element characteristic angle (ECA).
• PHASE DIR 1 ECA: This setting is used to select the element characteristic angle, i.e. the angle by which the polariz-
ing voltage is shifted in the leading direction to achieve dependable operation. In the design of the UR-series elements,
a block is applied to an element by asserting logic 1 at the blocking input. This element should be programmed via the
ECA setting so that the output is logic 1 for current in the non-tripping direction.
• PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD: This setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase
angle measurement is reliable. The setting is based on VT accuracy. The default value is "0.05 pu".
• PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP: This setting is used to select the required operation upon expiration of
voltage memory. When set to "Yes", the directional element blocks the operation of any phase overcurrent element
under directional control, when voltage memory expires; when set to "No", the directional element allows tripping of
phase overcurrent elements under directional control.
The Phase Directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse
fault, the element needs some time – in the order of 8 ms – to establish a blocking signal. Some protection
NOTE
elements such as instantaneous overcurrent may respond to reverse faults before the blocking signal is
established. Therefore, a coordination time of at least 10 ms must be added to all the instantaneous protec-
tion elements under the supervision of the Phase Directional element. If current reversal is of a concern, a
longer delay – in the order of 20 ms – may be needed.

SETTING
PHASE DIR 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
AND
PHASE DIR 1
BLOCK:
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING PHASE DIR 1 ECA:
PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE: I 0.05 pu AND RUN 0

IA Vpol
1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Seq=ABC Seq=ACB I OR PH DIR1 BLK
SETTING
VBC VCB
PHASE DIR 1 POL V
THRESHOLD: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR PH DIR1 BLK A
-Use V when V Min
-Use V memory when
V < Min MEMORY TIMER
1 cycle
V MINIMUM
1 sec
AND
SETTING USE ACTUAL VOLTAGE
PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC

WHEN V MEM EXP:
USE MEMORIZED VOLTAGE
No
Yes
5
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE B LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A PH DIR1 BLK B
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE C LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A PH DIR1 BLK C
827078A6.CDR
Figure 5–69: PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC
5.5.8 NEUTRAL CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" NEUTRAL CURRENT
# NEUTRAL CURRENT # NEUTRAL TOC1

See page 5–114.
# #
# NEUTRAL TOC2
#
# NEUTRAL IOC1
#
# NEUTRAL IOC2
#
# NEUTRAL
# DIRECTIONAL 1
# NEUTRAL
# DIRECTIONAL 2

b) NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51N)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" NEUTRAL CURRENT ! NEUTRAL TOC1(2)
# NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
INPUT: Phasor
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: See OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
5 NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The Neutral Time Overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current
or be used as a simple Definite Time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3Io from the phase
currents and may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the
application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to the Inverse TOC Curve Character-
istics section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator
will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and
the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
SETTINGS
NEUTRAL TOC1
SETTING INPUT:
NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC1
FUNCTION: PICKUP:
Disabled = 0 NEUTRAL TOC1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
NEUTRAL TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
NEUTRAL TOC 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
RESET: NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL TOC1
AND RUN IN ≥ PICKUP NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
SOURCE:
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
IN t
I
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0 827034A3.VSD
Figure 5–70: NEUTRAL TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

c) NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50N)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" NEUTRAL CURRENT !" NEUTRAL IOC1(2)
# NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a
Definite Time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency pha-
sor calculated from the phase currents. A “positive-sequence restraint” is applied for better performance. A small portion 5
(6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming
the operating quantity of the element as follows:
I op = 3 × ( I_0 – K ⋅ I_1 ) where K = 1 ⁄ 16 (EQ 5.13)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents
resulting from:
• system unbalances under heavy load conditions
• transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults
• switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of
pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
I op = 0.9375 ⋅ I injected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: I op = 3 × I injected ).
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION: SETTINGS
Disabled=0 NEUTRAL IOC1

SETTING PICKUP DELAY :
Enabled=1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL IOC1
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP: NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
RESET DELAY :
SETTING NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
AND RUN tPKP
tRST NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK: 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
Off=0
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:

827035A4.CDR
I_0
Figure 5–71: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

d) NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67N)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) ! NEUTRAL CURRENT !" NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1(2)
# NEUTRAL NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

# DIRECTIONAL OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: Voltage, Current, Dual
MESSAGE
POLARIZING: Voltage
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL Range: Calculated V0, Measured VX
MESSAGE
VOLT: Calculated V0
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP Range: Calculated 3I0, Measured IG
MESSAGE
CURR: Calculated 3I0
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS- Range: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SEQ RESTRAINT: 0.063
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: 0.00 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
OFFSET: 0.00 Ω
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD Range: –90 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ECA: 75° Lag
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LIMIT ANGLE: 90°
5 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD Range: 0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.050 pu
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LIMIT ANGLE: 90°
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV Range: 0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.050 pu
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are two Neutral Directional Overcurrent protection elements available. The element provides both forward and
reverse fault direction indications the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD and NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV operands, respectively. The output
operand is asserted if the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direc-
tion is seen as “forward or “reverse”, respectively (directional unit).
The overcurrent unit responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of the either the neutral current calcu-
lated from the phase currents or the ground current. There are two separate pickup settings for the forward- and reverse-
looking functions, respectively. If set to use the calculated 3I_0, the element applies a “positive-sequence restraint” for bet-
ter performance: a small user-programmable portion of the positive–sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the
zero-sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity.
I op = 3 × ( I_0 – K × I_1 ) (EQ 5.14)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents
resulting from:
• System unbalances under heavy load conditions.

• Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults.
• Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.
pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
Iop = (1 – K) × Iinjected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: Iop = 3 × Iinjected).
The positive-sequence restraint is removed for low currents. If the positive-sequence current is below 0.8 pu, the restraint is
removed by changing the constant K to zero. This facilitates better response to high-resistance faults when the unbalance
is very small and there is no danger of excessive CT errors as the current is low.
The directional unit uses the zero-sequence current (I_0) or ground current (IG) for fault direction discrimination and may
be programmed to use either zero-sequence voltage ("Calculated V0" or "Measured VX"), ground current (IG), or both for
polarizing. The following tables define the neutral directional overcurrent element.
Table 5–17: QUANTITIES FOR "CALCULATED 3I0" CONFIGURATION

DIRECTIONAL UNIT
OVERCURRENT UNIT
POLARIZING MODE DIRECTION COMPARED PHASORS
Forward –V_0 + Z_offset × I_0 I_0 × 1∠ECA
Voltage
Reverse –V_0 + Z_offset × I_0 –I_0 × 1∠ECA
Forward IG I_0
Current
Reverse IG –I_0
–V_0 + Z_offset × I_0 I_0 × 1∠ECA Iop = 3 × (|I_0| – K × |I_1|) if |I1| > 0.8 pu
Forward or Iop = 3 × (|I_0|) if |I1| ≤ 0.8 pu
IG I_0
Dual
–V_0 + Z_offset × I_0 –I_0 × 1∠ECA 5
Reverse or
IG –I_0
Table 5–18: QUANTITIES FOR "MEASURED IG" CONFIGURATION

DIRECTIONAL UNIT
OVERCURRENT UNIT
POLARIZING MODE DIRECTION COMPARED PHASORS
Forward –V_0 + Z_offset × IG/3 IG × 1∠ECA
Voltage Iop = |IG|
Reverse –V_0 + Z_offset × IG/3 –IG × 1∠ECA
1
where: V_0 = --- ( VAG + VBG + VCG ) = zero sequence voltage ,
3
1 1
I_0 = --- IN = --- ( IA + IB + IC ) = zero sequence current ,
3 3
ECA = element characteristic angle and IG = ground current
When NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT is set to “Measured VX”, one-third of this voltage is used in place of V_0. The following
figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element.
The figure below shows the voltage-polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with:
ECA = 90° (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic)
FWD LA = 80° (forward limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation)
REV LA = 80° (reverse limit angle = the ± angular limit with the ECA for operation)
The element incorporates a current reversal logic: if the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power system
cycle, the prospective forward indication will be delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is designed to emu-
late an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals will result in faster directional discrimi-
nation bringing more security to the element operation.
The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and therefore,
should be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as compared to the forward-
looking function and should be used for the blocking direction. This allows for better protection coordination.

The above bias should be taken into account when using the neutral directional overcurrent element to directionalize other
protection elements.
REV LA FWD LA
line –3V_0 line line
VAG
(reference)
REV Operating FWD Operating

Region Region
LA
LA
3I_0 line
ECA
ECA line
–ECA line
–3I_0 line LA
VCG LA
VBG
5 REV LA
line
3V_0 line
FWD LA
line
827805A1.CDR
Figure 5–72: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL VOLTAGE-POLARIZED CHARACTERISTICS

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit.
– If “Voltage” polarizing is selected, the element uses the zero-sequence voltage angle for polarization. The user
can use either the zero-sequence voltage V_0 calculated from the phase voltages, or the zero-sequence voltage
supplied externally as the auxiliary voltage Vx, both from the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE.
The calculated V_0 can be used as polarizing voltage only if the voltage transformers are connected in Wye. The
auxiliary voltage can be used as the polarizing voltage provided SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE BANK
!" AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION is set to “Vn” and the auxiliary voltage is connected to a zero-sequence voltage
source (such as open delta connected secondary of VTs).
The zero-sequence (V_0) or auxiliary voltage (Vx), accordingly, must be higher than 0.02 pu nominal voltage to be
validated as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given.
– If “Current” polarizing is selected, the element uses the ground current angle connected externally and configured
under NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE for polarization. The Ground CT must be connected between the ground and neutral
point of an adequate local source of ground current. The ground current must be higher than 0.05 pu to be vali-
dated as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given.
For a choice of current polarizing, it is recommended that the polarizing signal be analyzed to ensure that a known
direction is maintained irrespective of the fault location. For example, if using an autotransformer neutral current
as a polarizing source, it should be ensured that a reversal of the ground current does not occur for a high-side
fault. The low-side system impedance should be assumed minimal when checking for this condition. A similar sit-
uation arises for a Wye/Delta/Wye transformer, where current in one transformer winding neutral may reverse
when faults on both sides of the transformer are considered.
– If "Dual" polarizing is selected, the element performs both directional comparisons as described above. A given
direction is confirmed if either voltage or current comparators indicate so. If a conflicting (simultaneous forward
and reverse) indication occurs, the forward direction overrides the reverse direction.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when "Voltage" or "Dual"
polarizing mode is set. The polarizing voltage can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage calculated
from the phase voltages ("Calculated V0") or supplied externally as an auxiliary voltage ("Measured VX").

• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: This setting indicates whether the 3I_0 current calculated from the phase currents, or
the ground current shall be used by this protection. This setting acts as a switch between the neutral and ground
modes of operation (67N and 67G). If set to “Calculated 3I0” the element uses the phase currents and applies the pos-
itive-sequence restraint; if set to “Measured IG” the element uses ground current supplied to the ground CT of the CT
bank configured as NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE. Naturally, it is not possible to use the ground current as an operating
and polarizing signal simultaneously. Therefore, “Voltage” is the only applicable selection for the polarizing mode under
the “Measured IG” selection of this setting.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-SEQ RESTRAINT: This setting controls the amount of the positive-sequence restraint. Set
to 0.063 for backward compatibility with firmware revision 3.40 and older. Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set
higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary appli-
cation for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines. See
the Chapter 9 for information on how to calculate this setting. In regular applications, the offset impedance ensures
proper operation even if the zero-sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small. If this is the intent, the offset
impedance shall not be larger than the zero-sequence impedance of the protected circuit. Practically, it shall be several
times smaller. See Chapter 8 for additional details. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary ohms.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting defines the characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction in the
"Voltage" polarizing mode. The "Current" polarizing mode uses a fixed ECA of 0°. The ECA in the reverse direction is
the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180°.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit
angle for the forward direction.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the
forward direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a ‘positive-sequence
restraint’ technique for the “Calculated 3I0” mode of operation.
5
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit
angle for the reverse direction.
• NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the
reverse direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a ‘positive-sequence
restraint’ technique for the “Calculated 3I0” mode of operation.

SETTING
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
PICKUP:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP
CURR:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-

SETTING SEQ RESTRAINT:
RUN
NEUTRAL DIR OC1
FUNCTION: 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
Disabled=0 OR
Enabled=1 IG PICKUP AND
SETTING
AND SETTINGS
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK: AND
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
ECA:
Off=0
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LIMIT ANGLE:
SETTING AND NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
SOURCE: LIMIT ANGLE:
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL NEUTRAL DIR OC1

VOLT: OFFSET:
RUN
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP
CURR:
FWD
OR
Measured VX
Calculated V_0 } FWD
-3V_0 AND
1.25 cy
Zero Seq Crt (I_0)
Ground Crt (IG) } REV
3I_0 REV
1.5 cy
Voltage Polarization
SETTING IG 0.05 pu AND RUN

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
POLARIZING:
5
Voltage OR Current Polarization
Current OR
REV
Dual OR
NOTE:
1) CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH
THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO
AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE SETTING
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
2) GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION PICKUP:
AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP
3) POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT IS NOT APPLIED WHEN CURR: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
I_1 IS BELOW 0.8pu NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-
SEQ RESTRAINT:
RUN
3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP 827077AB.CDR
OR
IG PICKUP
Figure 5–73: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT LOGIC

5.5.9 GROUND CURRENT
a) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" GROUND CURRENT ! GROUND TOC1(2)
# GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
GROUND TOC1 Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
INPUT: Phasor
GROUND TOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
GROUND TOC1 Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
GROUND TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
GROUND TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
5
TARGET: Self-reset
GROUND TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple
Definite Time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the funda-
mental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available; “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to
the Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve Characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel
may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46
NOTE
times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
SETTINGS
GROUND TOC1
SETTING INPUT:
GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION: PICKUP:
Disabled = 0 GROUND TOC1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
GROUND TOC 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
RESET: GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1
AND RUN IG ≥ PICKUP GROUND TOC1 DPO
SOURCE:
GROUND TOC1 OP
IG t
I
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
BLOCK:
827036A3.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–74: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

b) GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50G)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" GROUND CURRENT !" GROUND IOC1(2)
# GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
GROUND IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
GROUND IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
GROUND IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The Ground IOC element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a Definite Time ele-
5 ment. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING GROUND IOC1 PKP
GROUND IOC1
GROUND IOIC DPO
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0 SETTINGS GROUND IOC1 OP
Enabled = 1 GROUND IOC1 PICKUP

SETTING DELAY:
GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 RESET
SETTING
PICKUP: DELAY:
GROUND IOC1
AND RUN tPKP
SOURCE:
IG
IG ≥ PICKUP tRST
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
BLOCK:
827037A4.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–75: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel
may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46
NOTE
times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.

5.5.10 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT
# NEGATIVE SEQUENCE # NEG SEQ TOC1

See page 5–124.
# CURRENT #
# NEG SEQ TOC2
#
# NEG SEQ IOC1
#
# NEG SEQ IOC2
#
# NEG SEQ DIR OC1
#
# NEG SEQ DIR OC2
#

b) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51_2)

PATH: SETTINGS " GROUPED ELEMENTS !" SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT ! NEG SEQ TOC1(2)
# NEG SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEG SEQ TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEG SEQ TOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
NEG SEQ TOC1 Range: see OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
NEG SEQ TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
NEG SEQ TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEG SEQ TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEG SEQ TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
5 The negative sequence time overcurrent element may be used to determine and clear unbalance in the system. The input
for calculating negative sequence current is the fundamental phasor value.
Two methods of resetting operation are available; “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to the Inverse TOC Characteristics
sub-section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator
SETTING
NEG SEQ TOC1 INPUT:
NEG SEQ TOC1 PICKUP:

SETTING
NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE:
NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNCTION:
Disabled=0 NEG SEQ TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER:

Enabled=1
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEG SEQ TOC1 RESET:
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP
SETTING
AND RUN NEG SEQ < PICKUP NEG SEQ TOC1 DPO
NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK: NEG SEQ TOC1 OP
Off=0
t
SETTING
NEG SEQ TOC1 SOURCE:
Neg Seq 827057A4.CDR
Figure 5–76: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

c) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50_2)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT !" NEG SEQ OC1(2)
# NEG SEQ IOC1 NEG SEQ IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEG SEQ IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEG SEQ IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
NEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
NEG SEQ IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
NEG SEQ IOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEG SEQ IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEG SEQ IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional
delay or as a Definite Time function. The element responds to the negative-sequence current fundamental frequency pha-
sor magnitude (calculated from the phase currents) and applies a “positive-sequence” restraint for better performance: a 5
small portion (12.5%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the negative-sequence current magni-
tude when forming the operating quantity:
I op = I_2 – K ⋅ I_1 where K = 1 ⁄ 8 (EQ 5.15)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative-sequence cur-
rents resulting from:
• system unbalances under heavy load conditions
• transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during three-phase faults
• fault inception and switch-off transients during three-phase faults
pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single phase injection:
I op = 0.2917 ⋅ I injected ; three phase injection, opposite rotation: I op = I injected ).
SETTING
NEG SEQ IOC1 FUNCTION: SETTING
Disabled=0 NEG SEQ IOC1

SETTING PICKUP DELAY:
Enabled=1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEG SEQ IOC1
NEG SEQ IOC1 PICKUP: NEG SEQ IOC1 PKP
RESET DELAY:
SETTING NEG SEQ IOC1 DPO
AND RUN tPKP
tRST NEG SEQ IOC1 OP
NEG SEQ IOC1 BLOCK: I_2 - K I_1 PICKUP
Off=0
SETTING
NEG SEQ IOC1 SOURCE:
I_2 827058A5.CDR
Figure 5–77: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

d) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67_2)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT !" NEG SEQ DIR OC1(2)
# NEG SEQ DIR OC1 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 Range: 0.00 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
OFFSET: 0.00 Ω
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 Range: Neg Sequence, Zero Sequence
MESSAGE
TYPE: Neg Sequence
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POS- Range: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
SEQ RESTRAINT: 0.125
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD Range: 0 to 90° Lag in steps of 1
MESSAGE
ECA: 75° Lag
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LIMIT ANGLE: 90°
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD Range: 0.05 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.05 pu
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV Range: 40 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LIMIT ANGLE: 90°
5 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV Range: 0.05 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.05 pu
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are two Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent protection elements available. The element provides both for-
ward and reverse fault direction indications through its output operands NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD and NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV,
respectively. The output operand is asserted if the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent
unit) and the fault direction is seen as ‘forward’ or ‘reverse’, respectively (directional unit).
The overcurrent unit of the element essentially responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of either
the negative-sequence or zero-sequence current as per user selection. The zero-sequence current should not be mistaken
with the neutral current (factor 3 difference).
A ‘positive-sequence restraint’ is applied for better performance: a small user-programmable portion of the positive–
sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the negative- or zero-sequence current magnitude, respectively, when
forming the element operating quantity.
I op = I_2 – K × I_1 or I op = I_0 – K × I_1 (EQ 5.16)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative- and zero-
sequence currents resulting from:
• System unbalances under heavy load conditions.
• Transformation errors of Current Transformers (CTs).
• Fault inception and switch-off transients.

The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pick-up accuracy and response time (multiple of
pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay:
• single-phase injection: Iop = 1/3 × (1 – K) × Iinjected
• three-phase pure zero- or negative-sequence injection, respectively: Iop = Iinjected.
• the directional unit uses the negative-sequence current and voltage for fault direction discrimination
The following table defines the Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent element.
OVERCURRENT UNIT DIRECTIONAL UNIT
MODE OPERATING CURRENT DIRECTION COMPARED PHASORS
Negative-Sequence Iop = |I_2| – K × I_1| Forward –V_2 + Z_offset × I_2 I_2 × 1∠ECA
Reverse –V_2 + Z_offset × I_2 –(I_2 × 1∠ECA)
Zero-Sequence Iop = |I_0| – K × |I_1| Forward –V_2 + Z_offset × I_2 I_2 × 1∠ECA
Reverse –V_2 + Z_offset × I_2 –(I_2 × 1∠ECA)
The negative-sequence voltage must be higher than 1 V secondary in order to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If
the polarizing signal is not validated neither forward nor reverse indication is given. The following figure explains the usage
of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element.
The figure below shows the phase angle comparator characteristics for a Phase A to ground fault, with settings of:
ECA = 75° (Element Characteristic Angle = centerline of operating characteristic)
FWD LA = 80° (Forward Limit Angle = ± the angular limit with the ECA for operation)
REV LA = 80° (Reverse Limit Angle = ± the angular limit with the ECA for operation)
The element incorporates a current reversal logic: if the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power system
cycle, the prospective forward indication will be delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is designed to emu-
late an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals will result in faster directional discrimi-
5
nation bringing more security to the element operation.
–V_2 line
REV FWD
LA LA VAG (reference)
REV Operating
Region
LA
ECA line
LA ECA
I_2 line
–I_2 line LA
FWD Operating
Region
–ECA line
LA
VCG VBG
REV FWD
LA LA
V_2 line 827806A2.CDR
Figure 5–78: NEG SEQ DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS

The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and therefore,
should be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as compared to the forward-
looking function and should be used for the blocking direction. This allows for better protection coordination. The above
bias should be taken into account when using the Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent element to ‘directionalize’
other protection elements.

• NEG SEQ DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary applica-
tion for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines (see
the Application of Settings chapter for information on how to calculate this setting). In regular applications, the offset
impedance ensures proper operation even if the negative-sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small. If this is
the intent, the offset impedance shall not be larger than the negative-sequence impedance of the protected circuit.
Practically, it shall be several times smaller. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary ohms. See the Theory
of Operation chapter for additional details.
• NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE: This setting selects the operating mode for the overcurrent unit of the element. The
choices are “Neg Sequence” and “Zero Sequence”. In some applications it is advantageous to use a directional nega-
tive-sequence overcurrent function instead of a directional zero-sequence overcurrent function as inter-circuit mutual
effects are minimized.
• NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POS-SEQ RESTRAINT: This setting controls the amount of the positive-sequence restraint. Set
to 0.063 (in “Zero Sequence” mode) or 0.125 (in “Neg Sequence” mode) for backward compatibility with firmware revi-
sion 3.40 and older. Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance
are expected.
• NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting select the element characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction.
The element characteristic angle in the reverse direction is the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180°.
• NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit
angle for the forward direction.
• NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit in the forward direc-
tion. Upon NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE selection, this pickup threshold applies to zero- or negative-sequence current. When
selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a ‘positive-sequence restraint’ technique.
• NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit
5 angle for the reverse direction.
• NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit in the reverse direc-
tion. Upon NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE selection, this pickup threshold applies to zero- or negative-sequence current. When
selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a ‘positive-sequence restraint’ technique.
SETTING
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD
PICKUP:
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POS-
SEQ RESTRAINT:
AND RUN
I_0 - K I_1 PICKUP
OR
AND RUN
SETTING I_2 - K I_1 PICKUP AND
NEG SEQ DIR OC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0 SETTINGS
Enabled=1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD
ECA: AND NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD
SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD
AND
LIMIT ANGLE:
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 BLK:
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV
Off=0 LIMIT ANGLE:
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 1.25 cy
SETTING OFFSET: AND
1.5 cy
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 RUN FWD
SOURCE: FWD
Neg Seq Voltage (V_2) REV.
Neg Seq Seq Crt (I_2)
Zero Seq Seq Crt (I_0) V_2 pol REV
Voltage Polarization
SETTING SETTING
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV

TYPE: PICKUP:
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV
Neg Sequence NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POS-
SEQ RESTRAINT:
Zero Sequence OR
AND RUN
I_2 - K I_1 PICKUP
827091A4.CDR
AND RUN
I_0 - K I_1 PICKUP
Figure 5–79: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC1 SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.11 BREAKER FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" BREAKER FAILURE ! BREAKER FAILURE 1(2)
# BREAKER FAILURE 1 BF1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

# Disabled
BF1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

MESSAGE
3-Pole
BF1 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2

MESSAGE
SRC 1
BF1 USE AMP SUPV: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 USE SEAL-IN: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 PH AMP SUPV Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 N AMP SUPV Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu 5
BF1 USE TIMER 1: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Yes
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
Yes
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
Yes
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 BKR POS1 φA/3P: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BKR POS2 φA/3P: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BF1 PH AMP HISET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 N AMP HISET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 PH AMP LOSET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu

BF1 N AMP LOSET Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
BF1 LOSET TIME Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 TRIP DROPOUT Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BF1 TARGET Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
BF1 EVENTS Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
BF1 PH A INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
Off
BF1 PH B INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
BF1 PH C INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
BF1 BKR POS1 φB Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
BF1 BKR POS1 φC Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
5 MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS2 φB Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
BF1 BKR POS2 φC Range: FlexLogic™ operand

Off
There are 2 identical Breaker Failure menus available, numbered 1 and 2.

In general, a breaker failure scheme determines that a breaker signaled to trip has not cleared a fault within a definite time,
so further tripping action must be performed. Tripping from the breaker failure scheme should trip all breakers, both local
and remote, that can supply current to the faulted zone. Usually operation of a breaker failure element will cause clearing of
a larger section of the power system than the initial trip. Because breaker failure can result in tripping a large number of
breakers and this affects system safety and stability, a very high level of security is required.
Two schemes are provided: one for three-pole tripping only (identified by the name "3BF") and one for three pole plus sin-
gle-pole operation (identified by the name "1BF"). The philosophy used in these schemes is identical. The operation of a
breaker failure element includes three stages: initiation, determination of a breaker failure condition, and output.
INITIATION STAGE:
A FlexLogic™ operand representing the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker must be selected to initiate the
scheme, except for the D60 relay were this is already programmed as a Trip Output (the protection trip signal does not
include other breaker commands that are not indicative of a fault in the protected zone). The initiating signal should be
sealed-in if primary fault detection can reset before the breaker failure timers have finished timing. The seal-in is supervised
by current level, so it is reset when the fault is cleared. If desired, an incomplete sequence seal-in reset can be imple-
mented by using the initiating operand to also initiate a FlexLogic™ timer, set longer than any breaker failure timer, whose
output operand is selected to block the breaker failure scheme.
Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision. It is particularly important in any application to
decide if a current-supervised initiate is to be used. The use of a current-supervised initiate results in the breaker failure ele-
ment not being initiated for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it, which may be the case for trans-
former faults. For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the BF1 PH
AMP SUPV PICKUP or the BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP setting, a current supervised initiate should not be used. This feature
should be utilized for those situations where coordinating margins may be reduced when high speed reclosing is used.
Thus, if this choice is made, fault levels must always be above the supervision pickup levels for dependable operation of

the breaker fail scheme. This can also occur in breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations where the first breaker closes
into a fault; the protection trips and attempts to initiate breaker failure for the second breaker, which is in the process of
closing, but does not yet have current flowing through it.
When the scheme is initiated, it immediately sends a trip signal to the breaker initially signaled to trip (this feature is usually
described as Re-Trip). This reduces the possibility of widespread tripping that results from a declaration of a failed breaker.
DETERMINATION OF A BREAKER FAILURE CONDITION:
The schemes determine a breaker failure condition via three ‘paths’. Each of these paths is equipped with a time delay,
after which a failed breaker is declared and trip signals are sent to all breakers required to clear the zone. The delayed
paths are associated with Breaker Failure Timers 1, 2, and 3, which are intended to have delays increasing with increasing
timer numbers. These delayed paths are individually enabled to allow for maximum flexibility.
Timer 1 logic (Early Path) is supervised by a fast-operating breaker auxiliary contact. If the breaker is still closed (as indi-
cated by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued. Operation of the
breaker auxiliary switch indicates that the breaker has mechanically operated. The continued presence of current indicates
that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit.
Timer 2 logic (Main Path) is not supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact. If fault current is detected after the delay interval,
an output is issued. This path is intended to detect a breaker that opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault current; the
logic therefore does not use a breaker auxiliary contact.
The Timer 1 and 2 paths provide two levels of current supervision, Hi-set and Lo-set, that allow the supervision level to
change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after
resistor insertion. The Hi-set detector is enabled after timeout of Timer 1 or 2, along with a timer that will enable the Lo-set
detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between Hi-set and Lo-set is the expected breaker opening time. Both
current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small multiples of the pickup value. The overcurrent detectors
are required to operate after the breaker failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fast resetting overcurrent detec-
tors. 5
Timer 3 logic (Slow Path) is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact and a control switch contact used to indicate that the
breaker is in/out of service, disabling this path when the breaker is out of service for maintenance. There is no current level
check in this logic as it is intended to detect low magnitude faults and it is therefore the slowest to operate.
OUTPUT:
The outputs from the schemes are:
• FlexLogic™ operands that report on the operation of portions of the scheme
• FlexLogic™ operand used to re-trip the protected breaker
• FlexLogic™ operands that initiate tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The trip output can be sealed-in for an
adjustable period.
• Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared
• Illumination of the faceplate Trip LED (and the Phase A, B or C LED, if applicable)
MAIN PATH SEQUENCE:
ACTUAL CURRENT MAGNITUDE

FAILED INTERRUPTION
0
AMP CALCULATED CURRENT MAGNITUDE
CORRECT INTERRUPTION
Rampdown
0
PROTECTION OPERATION BREAKER INTERRUPTING TIME
(ASSUMED 1.5 cycles) (ASSUMED 3 cycles)
MARGIN BACKUP BREAKER OPERATING TIME
(Assumed 2 Cycles) (Assumed 3 Cycles)
BREAKER FAILURE TIMER No. 2 (±1/8 cycle)

INITIATE (1/8 cycle)
BREAKER FAILURE CURRENT DETECTOR PICKUP (1/8 cycle)

BREAKER FAILURE OUTPUT RELAY PICKUP (1/4 cycle)
FAULT cycles
OCCURS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
827083A6.CDR
Figure 5–80: BREAKER FAILURE MAIN PATH SEQUENCE

SETTINGS:
• BF1 MODE: This setting is used to select the breaker failure operating mode: single or three pole.
• BF1 USE AMP SUPV: If set to "Yes", the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above
the supervision pickup level.
• BF1 USE SEAL-IN: If set to "Yes", the element will only be sealed-in if current flowing through the breaker is above the
supervision pickup level.
• BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that will initiate 3-pole tripping of the breaker.
• BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the phase current initiation and seal-in supervision level.
Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. It can be set as low as
necessary (lower than breaker resistor current or lower than load current) - Hiset and Loset current supervision will
guarantee correct operation.
• BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the neutral current initiate and seal-in supervision level. Gener-
ally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. Neutral current supervision is
used only in the three phase scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid only for three-pole tripping
schemes.
• BF1 USE TIMER 1: If set to "Yes", the Early Path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status-1 to
open, from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit, plus a safety margin.
• BF1 USE TIMER 2: If set to "Yes", the Main Path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 2 is set to the expected opening time of the breaker, plus a safety margin. This
safety margin was historically intended to allow for measuring and timing errors in the breaker failure scheme equip-
5 ment. In microprocessor relays this time is not significant. In D60 relays, which use a Fourier transform, the calculated
current magnitude will ramp-down to zero one power frequency cycle after the current is interrupted, and this lag
should be included in the overall margin duration, as it occurs after current interruption. The Breaker Failure Main Path
Sequence diagram below shows a margin of two cycles; this interval is considered the minimum appropriate for most
applications.
Note that in bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be
significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.
• BF1 USE TIMER 3: If set to "Yes", the Slow Path is operational.
• BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 3 is set to the same interval as Timer 2, plus an increased safety margin.
Because this path is intended to operate only for low level faults, the delay can be in the order of 300 to 500 ms.
• BF1 BKR POS1 φA/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker early-type
auxiliary switch contact (52/a). When using 1-Pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected
breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This is normally a non-multiplied Form-A contact. The contact
may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φA/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact (52/a). When using 1-Pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected breaker auxil-
iary switch contact on pole A. This may be a multiplied contact.
• BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker In-Ser-
vice/Out-of-Service switch set to the Out-of-Service position.
• BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
• BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
Neutral current supervision is used only in the three pole scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid
only for 3-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current).

• BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current). This setting is valid only for 3-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion.
• BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed-in. This
timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the breaker failure ele-
ment sends a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a Transfer Trip
signal on longer than the "reclaim" time.
• BF1 PH A INITIATE / BF1 PH B INITIATE / BF 1 PH C INITIATE: These settings select the FlexLogic™ operand to ini-
tiate phase A, B, or C single-pole tripping of the breaker and the phase A, B, or C portion of the scheme, accordingly.
This setting is only valid for 1-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS1 φB / BF1 BKR POS 1 φC: These settings select the FlexLogic™ operand to represents the protected
breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on poles B or C, accordingly. This contact is normally a non-multiplied Form-
A contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time. This setting is valid only for
1-pole breaker failure schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φB: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact on pole B (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. This setting is valid only for 1-pole breaker failure
schemes.
• BF1 BKR POS2 φC: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type
auxiliary switch contact on pole C (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. For single-pole operation, the scheme has
the same overall general concept except that it provides re-tripping of each single pole of the protected breaker. The
approach shown in the following single pole tripping diagram uses the initiating information to determine which pole is
supposed to trip. The logic is segregated on a per-pole basis. The overcurrent detectors have ganged settings. This
setting is valid only for 1-pole breaker failure schemes. 5
Upon operation of the breaker failure element for a single pole trip command, a 3-pole trip command should be given
via output operand BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP.

In D60 Only
From Trip Output
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
TRIP PHASE C
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP 3-POLE
TRIP PHASE A
SETTING
BF1 FUNCTION:
Enable=1
Disable=0
SETTING AND
BF1 BLOCK :
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 PH A INITIATE:
OR
Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA

SETTING OR
OR
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE : AND
Off=0 Initiated Ph A
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
SETTING
BF1 USE SEAL-IN:
5 YES=1
NO=0
AND
AND
SEAL-IN PATH
SETTING OR
BF1 USE AMP SUPV:
YES=1
NO=0 OR
OR
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND (Initiated)
SETTING
OR
BF1 PH B INITIATE : OR BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB
AND
Off=0 AND
SEAL-IN PATH
Initiated Ph B
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
OR
SETTING OR
BF1 PH C INITIATE : FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC
Off=0
AND
SETTING AND
SETTING SEAL-IN PATH
BF1 PH AMP SUPV
BF1 SOURCE : PICKUP : Initiated Ph C
RUN TO SHEET 2 OF 2
IA IA PICKUP
RUN
IB IB PICKUP OR
RUN
IC IC PICKUP
} TO SHEET 2 OF 2
(827070.CDR)
827069A5.CDR
Figure 5–81: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE [INITIATE] (Sheet 1 of 2)

FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
(Initiated)
SETTING
SETTING
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP
BF1 USE TIMER 1: DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
YES=1 AND 0 BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP

NO=0
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS1 A/3P:
Off=0 AND
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
Initiated Ph A
OR
SETTING SETTING
BF1 USE TIMER 2: BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP
DELAY: AND
NO=0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
YES=1 AND 0
BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS1 B:
Off=0 AND
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2 OR
Initiated Ph B
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS1 C:
AND
5
Off=0 AND
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2 OR
Initiated Ph C
AND
SETTING
BF1 PH AMP HISET
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
PICKUP:
(827069.CDR)
RUN
IA IA PICKUP
RUN
IB IB PICKUP
RUN
IC IC PICKUP
SETTING SETTING
BF1 LOSET TIME SETTING
BF1 USE TIMER 3: DELAY: BF1 TRIP DROPOUT
YES=1 DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
NO=0 0 BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
OR
0
SETTING SETTING
BF1 BKR POS2 A/3P: 0 BF1 PH AMP LOSET
PICKUP :
RUN
Off=0 IA PICKUP
SETTING RUN
IB PICKUP
SETTING BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP RUN
IC PICKUP
DELAY:
BF1 BKR POS2 B:
AND 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off=0 BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS2 C:
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON:
Off=0 827070A4.CDR
Figure 5–82: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE [TIMERS] (Sheet 2 of 2)

Figure 5–83: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE [INITIATE] (Sheet 1 of 2)

Figure 5–84: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE [TIMERS] (Sheet 2 of 2)

5.5.12 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
# VOLTAGE ELEMENTS # PHASE

See page 5–139.
# # UNDERVOLTAGE1
# PHASE
# UNDERVOLTAGE2
# PHASE
# OVERVOLTAGE1
# NEUTRAL OV1
#
# NEG SEQ OV
#
# AUXILIARY UV1
#
# AUXILIARY OV1
#
These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as:
Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the drawn
5 current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used to either
cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay.
Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operating an
output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be used to block
the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements.
Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its
normal source to a standby or emergency power source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a Definite Time delay characteristic. The Definite Time curve oper-
ates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to
600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay
characteristic. The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below.
D=5.0 2.0 1.0
D 20.0
T = ---------------------------------
-
V 
 1 – ------------------ 18.0
 V pickup 16.0
14.0
Time (seconds)
where: T = Operating Time 12.0

D = Undervoltage Delay Setting 10.0
(D = 0.00 operates instantaneously) 8.0
V = Secondary Voltage applied to the relay 6.0
Vpickup = Pickup Level 4.0
At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the 2.0
UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting. 0.0

NOTE 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
% of V pickup
Figure 5–85: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

b) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27P)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ! PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(2)
# PHASE PHASE UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

# UNDERVOLTAGE1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE UV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE UV1 MODE: Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
MESSAGE
Phase to Ground
PHASE UV1 Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE UV1 Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
CURVE: Definite Time
PHASE UV1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE UV1 MINIMUM Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
PHASE UV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE UV1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled 5
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage
(phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for Wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for Delta VT connection) or as a Definite
Time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting
selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage
below which the element is blocked (a setting of “0” will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
SETTING SETTING
PHASE UV1 PHASE UV1
FUNCTION: PICKUP:
Disabled = 0 PHASE UV1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
PHASE UV1
SETTING DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
PHASE UV1 AND RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP PHASE UV1 A PKP
BLOCK: t PHASE UV1 A DPO
Off = 0 PHASE UV1 A OP
V
SETTING
SETTING AND RUN VBG or VBC< PICKUP PHASE UV1 B PKP
PHASE UV1
t PHASE UV1 B DPO
PHASE UV1 SOURCE: MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
PHASE UV1 B OP
VAG or VAB < Minimum
Source VT = Delta V
VBG or VBC < Minimum
VAB AND RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP PHASE UV1 C PKP
}
VCG or VCA < Minimum
VBC t PHASE UV1 C DPO
VCA PHASE UV1 C OP
Source VT = Wye V
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING OR PHASE UV1 PKP
PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

VAG VAB OR PHASE UV1 OP
VBG VBC
VCG VCA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND PHASE UV1 DPO
827039AB.CDR
Figure 5–86: PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

c) PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59P)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS !" PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1
# PHASE PHASE OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

# OVERVOLTAGE1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE OV1 Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE OV1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE OV1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE OV1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase overvoltage element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a Definite
5 Time element. The input voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage, either measured directly from Delta-connected VTs or as
calculated from phase-to-ground (Wye) connected VTs. The specific voltages to be used for each phase are shown below.
SETTING
PHASE OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING SETTING
PHASE OV1 PHASE OV1
BLOCK: PICKUP:
Off = 0 PHASE OV1
CURVE:
PHASE OV1
DELAY:
RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP
AND t
V
RUN VBG or VBC < PICKUP
t
V
SETTING RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP
t
PHASE OV1 SOURCE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Source VT = Delta V PHASE OV1 A PKP
VAB PHASE OV1 A DPO
}
VBC PHASE OV1 A OP
VCA
Source VT = Wye PHASE OV1 B PKP
PHASE OV1 B DPO
PHASE OV1 B OP
SETTING
PHASE OV1 MODE: PHASE OV1 C PKP

PHASE OV1 C DPO
Phase Phase PHASE OV1 C OP
to Ground to Phase
VAG VAB
VBG VBC FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VCG VCA OR PHASE OV1 PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR PHASE OV1 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND PHASE OV1 DPO
827066A5.CDR
Figure 5–87: PHASE OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

d) NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59N)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS !" NEUTRAL OV1
# NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.300 pu
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The Neutral Overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetrical system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to
the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from
the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase voltage channels entered under SETTINGS !" SYSTEM 5
SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE BANK ! PHASE VT SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to
be Wye connected.
SETTING
NEUTRAL OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
Enabled=1
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: SETTING
SETTING
AND RUN NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET
Off=0 DELAY :
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
3V_0 < Pickup tPKP
SETTING tRST NEUTRAL OV1 OP
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
ZERO SEQ VOLT (V_0)
827848A1.CDR
Figure 5–88: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

e) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59_2)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS !" NEG SEQ OV
# NEG SEQ OV NEG SEQ OV Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEG SEQ OV SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEG SEQ OV Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.300 pu
NEG SEQ OV PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.50 s
NEG SEQ OV RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.50 s
NEG SEQ OV BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEG SEQ OV Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEG SEQ OV Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The negative sequence overvoltage element may be used to detect loss of one or two phases of the source, a reversed
5 phase sequence of voltage, or a non-symmetrical system voltage condition.
SETTING
NEG SEQ OV
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
SETTING
Enabled = 1
NEG SEQ OV PICKUP: SETTINGS
SETTING NEG SEQ OV PICKUP
AND RUN DELAY:
NEG SEQ OV BLOCK: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEG SEQ OV RESET
NEG SEQ OV PKP
DELAY:
Off = 0 NEG SEQ OV DPO
t PKP
t RST NEG SEQ OV OP
SETTING
V_2 or 3 * V_2 >
= PKP
NEG SEQ OV SIGNAL
SOURCE:
Source VT=Wye Source VT=Delta
V_2 3 * V_2 827839A2.CDR
Figure 5–89: NEG SEQ OV SCHEME LOGIC

f) AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27X)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS !" AUXILIARY UV1
# AUXILIARY UV1 AUX UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

AUX UV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
AUX UV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.700 pu
AUX UV1 CURVE: Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
Definite Time
AUX UV1 DELAY: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
1.00 s
AUX UV1 MINIMUM: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
AUX UV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AUX UV1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
AUX UV1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
5
This element is intended for monitoring undervoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The AUX UV1 PICKUP selects the
voltage level at which the time undervoltage element starts timing. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage
channel entered under SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS !" VOLTAGE BANK X5 !" AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY
is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
The AUX UV1 DELAY setting selects the minimum operating time of the auxiliary undervoltage element. Both AUX UV1 PICKUP
and AUX UV1 DELAY settings establish the operating curve of the undervoltage element. The auxiliary undervoltage element
can be programmed to use either Definite Time Delay or Inverse Time Delay characteristics. The operating characteristics
and equations for both Definite and Inverse Time Delay are as for the Phase Undervoltage element.
The element resets instantaneously. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is
blocked.
SETTING
AUX UV1
FUNCTION: SETTING
Disabled=0
AUX UV1 PICKUP:
Enabled=1
AUX UV1 CURVE:

SETTING
AUX UV1 BLOCK: AUX UV1 DELAY:

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off=0 AND RUN Vx < Pickup AUX UV1 PKP
AUX UV1 DPO
SETTING
SETTING t AUX UV1 OP
AUX UV1 MINIMUM
AUX UV1 SIGNAL VOLTAGE:
SOURCE:
AUX VOLT Vx Vx < Minimum
V
827849A2.CDR
Figure 5–90: AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

g) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59X)

PATH: SETTINGS !" GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" VOLTAGE ELEMENTS !" AUXILIARY OV1
# AUXILIARY OV1 AUX OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

AUX OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
AUX OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.300 pu
AUX OV1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
AUX OV1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
AUX OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AUX OV1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
AUX OV1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. A typical application for this element
5 is monitoring the zero-sequence voltage (3V_0) supplied from an open-corner-delta VT connection. The nominal secondary
voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SYSTEM SETUP ! AC INPUTS "! VOLTAGE BANK X5 "! AUXILIARY VT
X5 SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
SETTING
AUX OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
Enabled=1
AUX OV1 PICKUP: SETTING
SETTING
AND RUN AUX OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
AUX OV1 BLOCK:
AUX OV1 RESET
Off=0 DELAY :
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Vx < Pickup tPKP
SETTING tRST AUX OV1 OP
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: AUX OV1 PKP
AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)
827836A2.CDR
Figure 5–91: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

5 SETTINGS 5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the
beginning of this chapter for further information.
5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS ! SETTINGS GROUPS
# SETTING GROUPS SETTING GROUPS Range: Disabled, Enabled

SETTING GROUPS BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SETTING GROUP Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The Setting Groups menu controls the activation/deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED ELE-
MENTS settings menu. The faceplate ‘Settings in Use’ LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized
LED) is in service. 5
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic™ parameter is set to
"On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the
breaker being open.
Each GROUP n ACTIVATE ON setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand which, when set, will make the particular setting group
active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time – the high-
est-numbered group which is activated by its GROUP n ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered
groups. There is no “activate on” setting for Group 1 (the default active group), because Group 1 automatically becomes
active if no other group is active.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic™ equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default
settings group. The following FlexLogic™ equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications
(e.g. VIRTUAL INPUT 1) or from a local contact input (e.g. H7a) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests
from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The assigned VIR-
TUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the “On” state of a particular settings group.
Figure 5–92: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC™ CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5.6.3 SELECTOR SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" SELECTOR SWITCH ! SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
# SELECTOR SWITCH 1 SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

# Disabled
SELECTOR 1 FULL Range: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RANGE: 7
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: Range: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
5.0 s
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 ACK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
5 MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore
MESSAGE
MODE: Restore
SELECTOR 1 TARGETS: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The Selector Switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a
time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The 3-bit control input allows setting
the selector to the position defined by a 3-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after time-
out or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory.
Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current 3-bit word (user setting).
Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; e.g. the 3-bit control input being out of range.
• SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through avail-
able positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (Position 1). When using a direct 3-bit
control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is
within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by
setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in
the following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is “Time-out”, the setting specifies the required period of

inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEP-
UP MODE is “Acknowledge”, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is
re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT
timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set.
• SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new
position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1
FULL RANGE) to the first (Position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every
50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1:
POS Z CHNG INITIATED target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for
the time specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out
(“Time-out” mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (“Acknowledge” mode).
When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically,
a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input.
• SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the
selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and
does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to “Acknowledge”,
the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the
acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change
and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under “Acknowledge” mode of
operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the
last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a 3-bit control input of the selector. The 3-bit control word
pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention: 5
A2 A1 A0 POSITION
0 0 0 rest
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 7
The “rest” position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the
3-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Time-out”, the pre-selected position is applied
in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the 3-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Acknowl-
edge”, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the 3-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2) lock-
out mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the 3-bit control input is inactive; once the 3-bit control
sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the selector
changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not
require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to “Acknowledge”, the selector changes its posi-
tion only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a
pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT
ALARM FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
• SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the 3-bit control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic™ operand. This setting is active only under the
“Acknowledge” mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR
TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the 3-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and 3-bit control
input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly).

• SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies behavior of the element on power up of the relay. When set
to “Restore”, the last selector position, stored in non-volatile memory, is restored after powering up the relay. When set
to “Synchronize”, the selector sets to the current 3-bit control input after powering up the relay. This operation does not
wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When powering up, the rest position (0, 0, 0) and the out-of-range 3-bit
control words are also ignored, the output is set to Position 0 (no output operand selected), and an alarm is established
(SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM). If the position restored from memory is out-of-range, Position 0 (no output operand
selected) is applied and an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
• SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:
EVENT NAME DESCRIPTION

SELECTOR 1 POS Z Selector 1 changed its position to Z.
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been
confirmed before the time out.
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the 3-bit control input has not been confirmed
before the time out.
The following figures illustrate the operation of the Selector Switch. In these diagrams, “T” represents a time-out setting.
pre-existing changed to 4 with changed to 1 with changed to 2 with a changed to 7 with

position 2 a pushbutton a 3-bit input pushbutton a 3-bit input
STEP-UP
T T
5 3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
T T
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842737A1.CDR
Figure 5–93: TIME-OUT MODE

pre-existing changed to 4 with changed to 1 with changed to 2 with

position 2 a pushbutton a 3-bit input a pushbutton
STEP-UP
ACK
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
3BIT ACK
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
5
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842736A1.CDR
Figure 5–94: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE

APPLICATION EXAMPLE
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control Setting Groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting
groups are to be controlled from both User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 and from an external device via Contact Inputs 1
through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded 3-bit word to the external device and SCADA via out-
put contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of the
control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the 3-bit control input.
Make the following changes to Setting Group Control in the SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUPS menu:
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: “Enabled” GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 4"
SETTING GROUPS BLK: “Off” GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 2" GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 3"
Make the following changes to Selector Switch element in the SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" SELECTOR SWITCH !
SELECTOR SWITCH 1 menu to assign control to User Programmable Pushbutton 1 and Contact Inputs 1 through 3:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: “Enabled” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: “CONT IP 1 ON”
SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: “4” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: “CONT IP 2 ON”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: “Time-out” SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: “CONT IP 3 ON”
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: “5.0 s” SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON” SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: “Off”
SELECTOR 1 ACK: “Off” SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: “Synchronize”
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the Selector Switch element by making the following
changes in the SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"
5 OUTPUT H2 OPERATE:
OUTPUT H3 OPERATE:
“SELECTOR 1 BIT 1"
“SELECTOR 1 BIT 2"
Finally, assign configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT
SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:

PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
The logic for the selector switch is shown below:
SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE:
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE:
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE:
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: ACTUAL VALUE

SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 POSITION
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE:
Enabled = 1 RUN
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off step up SELECTOR 1 POS 1
2
SELECTOR 1 ACK: 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2
3
Off acknowledge SELECTOR 1 POS 3
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: 4
SELECTOR 1 POS 4
Off on SELECTOR 1 POS 5
3-bit control in
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: 7 5

SELECTOR 1 POS 6
Off 6
SELECTOR 1 POS 7
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
3-bit
Off
acknowledge 3-bit position out SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
OR
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
842012A1.CDR
Figure 5–95: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC

5.6.4 TRIP OUTPUT
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" TRIP OUTPUT
# TRIP OUTPUT TRIP MODE: Range: Disabled, 3 Pole Only, 3 Pole & 1 Pole
# Disabled
TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
↓
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
5
TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-2: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-6: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
TRIP FORCE 3-POLE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
TRIP PILOT PRIORITY: Range: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.000 s
REVERSE FAULT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV Range: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
FAULTS: 0.000 s
BKR ΦA OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR ΦB OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR ΦC OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
TRIP EVENTS: Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
Disabled

This element is primarily used to collect trip requests from protection elements and other inputs to generate output oper-
ands to initiate trip operations. Three pole trips will only initiate reclosure if programmed to do so, whereas single pole trips
will always automatically initiate reclosure. The TRIP 3-POLE and TRIP 1-POLE output operands can also be used as inputs
to a FlexLogic™ OR gate to operate the faceplate Trip indicator LED.
THREE POLE OPERATION:
In applications where single pole tripping is not required this element provides a convenient method of collecting inputs to
initiate tripping of circuit breakers, the reclose element and breaker failure elements.
SINGLE POLE OPERATION:
This element must be used in single pole operation applications.
NOTE
In these applications this element is used to:

• determine if a single pole operation should be performed
• collect inputs to initiate three pole tripping, the recloser and breaker failure elements
• collect inputs to initiate single pole tripping, the recloser and breaker failure elements
• assign a higher priority to pilot aided scheme outputs than to exclusively local inputs.
This element works in association with other D60 elements (see Chapter 8 for a complete description of single pole opera-
tions) that must be programmed and in-service for successful operation. The necessary elements are: Recloser, Breaker
Control, Open Pole Detector, and Phase Selector. The recloser must also be in the “Reset” state before a single pole trip
can be issued. Outputs from this element are also directly connected as initiate signals to the breaker failure elements.
At least one internal protection element or digital input representing detection of a fault must be available as an input to this
5 element. In pilot-aided scheme applications (DUTT, PUTT, POTT, Hybrid POTT, and Directional Blocking) a timer can be
used to delay the output decision until data from a remote terminal is received from communications facilities, to prevent a
three pole operation where a single pole operation is permitted.
• TRIP MODE: This setting is used to select the required mode of operation. If selected to “3 Pole Only” outputs for all
three phases are always set simultaneously. If selected to “3 Pole & 1 Pole” outputs for all three phases are set simul-
taneously unless the phase selector or a pilot aided scheme determines the fault is single-phase-to-ground. If the fault
is identified as being AG, BG or CG only the operands for the faulted phase will be asserted.
• TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-1(6): This setting is used to select an operand representing a fault condition that is not desired to
initiate a single pole operation, e.g. phase undervoltage. Use a FlexLogic OR-gate if more than six inputs are required.
• TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-1(6): Selects an operand representing a fault condition that is desired to initiate a single pole trip-
and-reclose if the fault is single phase to ground, e.g. distance Zone 1. Use a FlexLogic™ OR-gate if more than six
inputs are required. The inputs do not have to be phase-specific as the phase selector determines the fault type.
The AR FORCE 3-P TRIP operand is asserted by the autorecloser 1.5 cycles after single-pole reclosing is initiated. This
operand calls for a three-pole trip if any protection element configured under TRIP 1-POLE INPUT remains picked-up. The
Open Pole Detector provides blocking inputs to distance elements, and therefore the latter will reset immediately after
the TRIP 1-POLE operand is asserted. For other protection elements used in single-pole tripping, the user must ensure
they will reset immediately after tripping, otherwise the fact that they are still picked up will be detected as an evolving
fault and the relay will trip three-poles. For example, if high-set phase instantaneous overcurrent is used (TRIP 1-POLE
INPUT X: “PHASE IOC1 OP”), then OPEN POLE OP ΦA shall be used for blocking Phase A of the Instantaneous Overcur-
rent element. In this way, after tripping Phase A, the Phase A Instantaneous Overcurrent element is forced to reset.
Phases B and C are still operational and can detect an evolving fault as soon as 8 ms after tripping Phase A. Neutral
and negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent elements shall be blocked from the OPEN POLE BLK N operand
unless the pickup setting is high enough to prevent pickup during single-pole reclosing.
• TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-1(6): Selects an operand representing a fault condition that is desired to initiate three pole
reclosing, e.g. Phase Distance Zone 1. Use a FlexLogic™ OR-gate if more than six inputs are required.
• TRIP FORCE 3-POLE: Selects an operand that will force an input selected for single pole operation to produce a three
pole operation. The AR DISABLED FlexLogic™ operand is the recommended value for this setting. Power system con-
figurations or conditions which require such operations may be considered as well.

• REVERSE FAULT: This setting should be used to guarantee accuracy of single-pole tripping under evolving external to
internal faults. When a close-in external fault occurs, the relay is biased toward very fast operation on a following inter-
nal fault. This is primarily due to depressed voltages and elevated currents in response to the first, external fault. The
phase selector may exhibit some time lag compared to the main protection elements. This may potentially result in a
spurious three-pole operation on a single-line-to-ground internal fault. Delaying tripping on internal faults that follow
detection of reverse faults solves the problem.
As long as the operand indicated under this setting is asserted the trip action will be delayed by TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV
FAULTS time. Typically this operand should combine reverse zone indications (such as Zone 4 pickup) with a half-cycle
pickup delay, and 2-cycle dropout delay. This setting should be used only in single-pole tripping applications, when
evolving faults are of importance, and slightly delayed operation on evolving faults could be traded for enhanced accu-
racy of single-pole tripping.
• TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV FAULTS: This setting should be used in conjunction with the REVERSE FAULT setting (see
above). Typically this value should be set around half a power system cycle. This setting should be used only in single-
pole tripping applications, when evolving faults are of importance, and slightly delayed operation on evolving faults
could be traded for enhanced accuracy of single-pole tripping.
• TRIP COMM DELAY: This setting is used to set an interval equal to the inter-relay channel communications time, plus
an appropriate margin, during which outputs are not asserted. This delay permits fault identification information from a
remote terminal to be used instead of local data only.

SETTING
TRIP MODE:
Disabled
3 Pole Only
OR
3 Pole and 1 Pole
SETTING 3P FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

OR TRIP FORCE 3-POLE
TRIP FORCE 3-POLE:
Off
From Open Pole
TIMER
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
2 cycles AND
OPEN POLE OP OR
0
From Recloser
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
From Line Pickup Element
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
LINE PICKUP OP
From Pilot Aided Schemes
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DUTT TRIP 3P
PUTT TRIP 3P
AND
POTT TRIP 3P OR
HYBRID POTT TRIP 3P
DIR BLOCK TRIP 3P
SETTINGS
TRIP 3-POLE INPUT-1:
Off
… …
OR
AND
OR
Off
SETTINGS AND

AND
Off
… …
SETTING
AND
OR TRIP PILOT
PRIORITY:
SETTING
Off AND
0 TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV FAULTS:
From Phase Selector
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE SELECT MULTI-P OR S
OR L TRIP PHASE A
PHASE SELECT VOID AND
5
R
From Phase Selector
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND OR TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV FAULTS:
PHASE SELECT AG 0
0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR S
AND OR L TRIP PHASE B
PHASE SELECT BG 0 AND
R
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND OR TRIP DELAY ON EVOLV FAULTS:
PHASE SELECT CG 0
From Pilot Aided Schemes
0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OR S
DUTT TRIP A
OR
{ ONLY 1 OF 3 CAN
BE ASSERTED AND
R
L TRIP PHASE C
PUTT TRIP A
POTT TRIP A OR S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
HYBRID POTT TRIP A L TRIP 3-POLE
DIR BLOCK TRIP A AND R
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
DUTT TRIP B
AND TRIP 1-POLE
PUTT TRIP B XOR
POTT TRIP B OR
HYBRID POTT TRIP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
DIR BLOCK TRIP B AND TRIP AR INIT 3-POLE
20 ms
837025AA.CDR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DUTT TRIP C
PUTT TRIP C
POTT TRIP C OR
HYBRID POTT TRIP C
DIR BLOCK TRIP C
SETTING
REVERSE FAULT:
Off
SETTING
BKR FA OPEN:
Off
From Open Pole
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE BKR FA OP
SETTING
BKR FB OPEN:
Off
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE BKR FB OP
SETTING
BKR FC OPEN:
Off
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE BKR FC OP
SETTINGS
Off
… …
OR
Off
Figure 5–96: TRIP OUTPUT SCHEME LOGIC

5.6.5 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" SYNCHROCHECK ! SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)
# SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHK1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

# Disabled
SYNCHK1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SRC 1
SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SRC 2
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT Range: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DIFF: 10000 V
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE Range: 0 to 100° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DIFF: 30°
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ Range: 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DIFF: 1.00 Hz
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ Range: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
HYSTERESIS: 0.06 Hz
SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE Range: None, LV1 and DV2, DV1 and LV2, DV1 or DV2,
MESSAGE
SELECT: LV1 and DV2 DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 and DV2
5
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
SYNCHK1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
SYNCHK1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The are two identical synchrocheck elements available, numbered 1 and 2.

The synchronism check function is intended for supervising the paralleling of two parts of a system which are to be joined
by the closure of a circuit breaker. The synchrocheck elements are typically used at locations where the two parts of the
system are interconnected through at least one other point in the system.
Synchrocheck verifies that the voltages (V1 and V2) on the two sides of the supervised circuit breaker are within set limits
of magnitude, angle and frequency differences. The time that the two voltages remain within the admissible angle differ-
ence is determined by the setting of the phase angle difference ∆Φ and the frequency difference ∆F (slip frequency). It can
be defined as the time it would take the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2 × ∆Φ at a frequency equal
to the frequency difference ∆F. This time can be calculated by:
1
T = -------------------------------
- (EQ 5.17)
360°
------------------ × ∆F
2 × ∆Φ
where: ∆Φ = phase angle difference in degrees; ∆F = frequency difference in Hz.

As an example; for the default values (∆Φ = 30°, ∆F = 0.1 Hz), the time while the angle between the two voltages will be
less than the set value is:
1 1
T = ------------------------------- - = 1.66 sec.
- = ------------------------------------------ (EQ 5.18)
360° 360°
------------------ × ∆F ------------------- × 0.1 Hz
2 × ∆Φ 2 × 30°
If one or both sources are de-energized, the synchrocheck programming can allow for closing of the circuit breaker using
undervoltage control to by-pass the synchrocheck measurements (Dead Source function).
• SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V1 (see NOTES below).
• SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V2, which must not be the same as used for the
V1 (see NOTES below).
• SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF: This setting selects the maximum primary voltage difference in ‘kV’ between the two
sources. A primary voltage magnitude difference between the two input voltages below this value is within the permis-
sible limit for synchronism.
• SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF: This setting selects the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two
sources. An angular difference between the two input voltage phasors below this value is within the permissible limit
for synchronism.
• SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: This setting selects the maximum frequency difference in ‘Hz’ between the two sources.
A frequency difference between the two input voltage systems below this value is within the permissible limit for syn-
chronism.
• SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS: This setting specifies the required hysteresis for the maximum frequency differ-
ence condition. The condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 MAX
FREQ DIFF. Once the Synchrocheck element has operated, the frequency difference must increase above the SYNCHK1
5 MAX FREQ DIFF + SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS sum to drop out (assuming the other two conditions, voltage and
angle, remain satisfied).
• SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: This setting selects the combination of dead and live sources that will by-pass
synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages (V1 or/and V2)
are below the maximum voltage threshold. A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level. Six
options are available:
None: Dead Source function is disabled
LV1 and DV2: Live V1 and Dead V2
DV1 and LV2: Dead V1 and Live V2
DV1 or DV2: Dead V1 or Dead V2
DV1 Xor DV2: Dead V1 exclusive-or Dead V2 (one source is Dead and the other is Live)
DV1 and DV2: Dead V1 and Dead V2
• SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V1 in 1 ‘pu’. Below this
magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Dead” or de-energized.
• SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Below this
magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Dead” or de-energized.
• SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V1 in ‘pu’. Above this mag-
nitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Live” or energized.
• SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Above this mag-
nitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Live” or energized.

NOTES ON THE SYNCHROCHECK FUNCTION:

1. The selected Sources for synchrocheck inputs V1 and V2 (which must not be the same Source) may include both a
three-phase and an auxiliary voltage. The relay will automatically select the specific voltages to be used by the synch-
rocheck element in accordance with the following table.
NO. V1 OR V2 V2 OR V1 AUTO-SELECTED AUTO-SELECTED VOLTAGE

(SOURCE Y) (SOURCE Z) COMBINATION
SOURCE Y SOURCE Z
1 Phase VTs and Phase VTs and Phase Phase VAB
Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT
2 Phase VTs and Phase VT Phase Phase VAB
Auxiliary VT
3 Phase VT Phase VT Phase Phase VAB
4 Phase VT and Auxiliary VT Phase Auxiliary V auxiliary
Auxiliary VT (as set for Source z)
5 Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT Auxiliary Auxiliary V auxiliary
(as set for selected sources)
The voltages V1 and V2 will be matched automatically so that the corresponding voltages from the two Sources will be
used to measure conditions. A phase to phase voltage will be used if available in both sources; if one or both of the
Sources have only an auxiliary voltage, this voltage will be used. For example, if an auxiliary voltage is programmed to
VAG, the synchrocheck element will automatically select VAG from the other Source. If the comparison is required on a
specific voltage, the user can externally connect that specific voltage to auxiliary voltage terminals and then use this
"Auxiliary Voltage" to check the synchronism conditions.
If using a single CT/VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage, ensure that only the auxiliary voltage 5
is programmed in one of the Sources to be used for synchrocheck.
Exception: Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye con-
nected auxiliary voltage.
NOTE
2. The relay measures frequency and Volts/Hz from an input on a given Source with priorities as established by the con-
figuration of input channels to the Source. The relay will use the phase channel of a three-phase set of voltages if pro-
grammed as part of that Source. The relay will use the auxiliary voltage channel only if that channel is programmed as
part of the Source and a three-phase set is not.

SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SYNCHK1 FUNCTION: SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN
Enable=1 SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN
Disable=0 SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX
SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX
SETTING AND
SYNCHK1 BLOCK: SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SYNC1 DEAD S OP
Off=0
SELECT: SYNC1 DEAD S DPO
None
AND
LV1 and DV2
AND
DV1 and LV2

AND
DV1 or DV2
AND OR
DV1 Xor DV2

AND
DV1 and DV2

AND
SETTING
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1
MAX VOLT:
V1 Max
XOR
SETTING
SYNCHK1 DEAD V2
MAX VOLT: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OR
V2 Max OR SYNC1 CLS OP
SYNC1 CLS DPO
SETTING
SYNCHK1 LIVE V1
MIN VOLT:
AND
V1 Min
SETTING
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2
5
MIN VOLT:
AND
V2 Min
SETTING
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT
SETTING CALCULATE
DIFF:
SYNCHK1 V1 SIGNAL Magnitude V1 Calculate
V Max
SOURCE: Angle 1 I V1-V2 I= V
SRC 1 Frequency F1 ACTUAL VALUE SETTING
SYNC1: V AND
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE
DIFF:
Calculate
Max
I 1- 2 I=
ACTUAL VALUE SETTING IN SYNCH 1
SYNC1: SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIFF: SYNC1 SYNC OP
SETTING CALCULATE
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ SYNC1 SYNC DPO
SYNCHK1 V2 SIGNAL Magnitude V2
HYSTERESIS:
SOURCE: Angle 2 Calculate
F Max
SRC 2 Frequency F2 I F1-F2 I= F
ACTUAL VALUE
SYNC1: F 827076AA.CDR
Figure 5–97: SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC

5.6.6 AUTORECLOSE
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" AUTORECLOSE ! AUTORECLOSE
# AUTORECLOSE AR FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

# Disabled
AR MODE: Range: 1 & 3 Pole, 1 Pole, 3 Pole-A, 3 Pole-B
MESSAGE
1 & 3 Pole
AR MAX NUMBER OF Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
SHOTS: 2
AR BLOCK BKR1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1: Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
0.10 s
AR BKR MAN CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR BLK TIME UPON MAN Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
CLS: 10.00 s
AR 1P INIT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR 3P INIT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off 5
AR 3P TD INIT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR MULTI-P FAULT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR ONE POLE OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 3 POLE OPEN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1: Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
0.50 s
MESSAGE
1.20 s
MESSAGE
2.00 s
MESSAGE
4.00 s
AR EXTEND DEAD T 1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR DEAD TIME 1 Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
EXTENSION: 0.50 s
AR RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR RESET TIME: Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
60.00 s

AR BKR CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
AR BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR PAUSE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TIME: 5.00 s
AR BLOCK BKR2: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AR CLOSE TIME BKR2: Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
0.10 s
AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
No
AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1: Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
No
AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION: Range: Continue, Lockout
MESSAGE
Continue
AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION: Range: Continue, Lockout
MESSAGE
Continue
5 MESSAGE
AR 1-P DEAD TIME: Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
1.00 s
AR BKR SEQUENCE: Range: 1, 2, 1&2, 1–2, 2–1
MESSAGE
1-2
AR TRANSFER TIME: Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
4.00 s
AR EVENT: Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The autoreclose scheme is intended for use on transmission lines with circuit breakers operated in both the single pole and
three pole modes, in one or two breaker arrangements. The autoreclose scheme provides four programs with different
operating cycles, depending on the fault type. Each of the four programs can be set to trigger up to two reclosing attempts.
The second attempt always performs three pole reclosing and has an independent dead time delay.
When used in two breaker applications, the reclosing sequence is selectable. The reclose signal can be sent to one
selected breaker only, to both breakers simultaneously or to both breakers in sequence (one breaker first and then, after a
delay to check that the reclose was successful, to the second breaker). When reclosing in sequence, the first breaker
should reclose with either the 1-Pole or 3-Pole dead time according to the fault type and reclose mode; the second breaker
should follow the successful reclosure of the first breaker. When reclosing simultaneously, for the first shot both breakers
should reclose with either the 1-Pole or 3-Pole dead time, according to the fault type and the reclose mode.
The signal used to initiate the autoreclose scheme is the trip output from protection. This signal can be single pole tripping
for single phase faults and three phase tripping for multiphase faults. The autoreclose scheme has five operating states.
STATE CHARACTERISTICS
Enabled Scheme is permitted to operate
Disabled Scheme is not permitted to operate
Reset Scheme is permitted to operate and shot count is reset to 0
Reclose In Progress Scheme has been initiated but the reclose cycle is not finished (successful or not)
Lockout Scheme is not permitted to operate until reset received

AR PROGRAMS:
The autorecloser provides four programs that can cause from one to four reclose attempts (shots). After the first shot, all
subsequent recloses will always be three-pole. If the maximum number of shots selected is “1” (only one reclose attempt)
and the fault is persistent, after the first reclose the scheme will go to Lockout upon another Initiate signal.
For the 3-pole reclose programs (modes 3 and 4), an AR FORCE 3-P FlexLogic™ operand is set. This operand can be used
in connection with the tripping logic to cause a three-pole trip for single-phase faults.
Table 5–19: AUTORECLOSE PROGRAMS

MODE AR MODE FIRST SHOT SECOND SHOT THIRD SHOT FOURTH SHOT
SINGLE- MULTI- SINGLE- MULTI- SINGLE- MULTI- SINGLE- MULTI-
PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE
FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT
1 1 & 3 POLE 1 POLE 3 POLE 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or
LO LO LO LO LO LO
2 1 POLE 1 POLE LO 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or
LO LO LO LO LO LO
3 3 POLE-A 3 POLE LO 3 POLE or LO 3 POLE or LO 3 POLE or LO
LO LO LO
4 3 POLE-B 3 POLE 3 POLE 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or 3 POLE or
LO LO LO LO LO LO
The four autoreclose modes are described below:

1. “1 & 3 Pole”: In this mode, the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer for the first shot if the autoreclose is sin-
gle-phase initiated, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer if the autoreclose is three-pole initiated, and the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2
timer if the autoreclose is three-phase time delay initiated. If two or more shots are enabled, the second, third, and
fourth shots are always three-pole and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers. 5
2. “1 Pole”: In this mode, the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME for the first shot if the fault is single phase. If the
fault is three-phase or a three-pole trip on the breaker occurred during the single-pole initiation, the scheme goes to
lockout without reclosing. If two or more shots are enabled, the second, third, and fourth shots are always three-pole
and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers.
3. “3 Pole-A”: In this mode, the autorecloser is initiated only for single phase faults, although the trip is three pole. The
autorecloser uses the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 for the first shot if the fault is single phase. If the fault is multi phase the
scheme will go to Lockout without reclosing. If two or more shots are enabled, the second, third, and fourth shots are
always three-phase and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers.
4. “3 Pole-B”: In this mode, the autorecloser is initiated for any type of fault and starts the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 for the first
shot. If the initiating signal is AR 3P TD INIT the scheme starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 for the first shot. If two or more shots
are enabled, the second, third, and fourth shots are always three-phase and start the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2(4) timers.
BASIC RECLOSING OPERATION:
Reclosing operation is determined primarily by the AR MODE and AR BKR SEQUENCE settings. The reclosing sequences are
started by the initiate inputs. A reclose initiate signal will send the scheme into the reclose-in-progress (RIP) state, asserting
the AR RIP FlexLogic™ operand. The scheme is latched into the RIP state and resets only when an AR CLS BKR 1 (autore-
close breaker 1) or AR CLS BKR 2 (autoreclose breaker 2) operand is generated or the scheme goes to the Lockout state.
The dead time for the initial reclose operation will be determined by either the AR 1-P DEAD TIME, AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1, or AR
3-P DEAD TIME 2 setting, depending on the fault type and the mode selected. After the dead time interval the scheme will
assert the AR CLOSE BKR 1 or AR CLOSE BKR 2 operands, as determined by the sequence selected. These operands are
latched until the breaker closes or the scheme goes to Reset or Lockout.
There are three initiate programs: single pole initiate, three pole initiate and three pole, time delay initiate. Any of these
reclose initiate signals will start the reclose cycle and set the reclose-in-progress (AR RIP) operand. The reclose-in-progress
operand is sealed-in until the Lockout or Reset signal appears.
The three-pole initiate and three-pole time delay initiate signals are latched until the CLOSE BKR1 OR BKR2 or Lockout or
Reset signal appears.

AR PAUSE:
The pause input offers the possibility of freezing the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This may be done
when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected such as out-of step or loss of guard fre-
quency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. The pause signal blocks all three dead timers. When the ‘pause’ signal
disappears the autoreclose cycle is resumed by initiating AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2.
This feature can be also used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a reclose is not desirable until the
transformer is removed from the line. In this case, the reclose scheme is ‘paused’ until the transformer is disconnected. The
AR PAUSE input will force a three-pole trip through the 3-P DEADTIME 2 path.
EVOLVING FAULTS:
1.25 cycles after the single pole dead time has been initiated, the AR FORCE 3P TRIP operand is set and it will be reset only
when the scheme is reset or goes to Lockout. This will ensure that when a fault on one phase evolves to include another
phase during the single pole dead time of the auto-recloser the scheme will force a 3 pole trip and reclose.
RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR ONE BREAKER:
• Permanent Fault: Consider Mode 1, which calls for 1-Pole or 3-Pole Time Delay 1 for the first reclosure and 3-Pole
Time Delay 2 for the second reclosure, and assume a permanent fault on the line. Also assume the scheme is in the
Reset state. For the first single-phase fault the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer will be started, while for the first multi-phase fault
the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer will be started. If the AR 3P TD INIT signal is high, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 will be started for
the first shot.
If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to “1”, upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again
detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the AR SHOT COUNT >0 oper-
and that will set the AR FORCE 3P operand. Because the shot counter has reached the maximum number of shots per-
mitted the scheme is sent to the Lockout state.
5 If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to “2”, upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again
detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the AR SHOT COUNT >0 oper-
and that will set the AR FORCE 3P operand. After the second reclose the shot counter is set to 2. Upon reclosing, the
fault is again detected by protection, the breaker is tripped three-pole, and reclose is initiated again. Because the shot
counter has reached the maximum number of shots permitted the scheme is sent to the lockout state.
• Transient Fault: When a reclose output signal is sent to close the breaker the reset timer is started. If the reclosure
sequence is successful (there is no initiating signal and the breaker is closed) the reset timer will time out returning the
scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to "0" making it ready for a new reclose cycle.
RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR TWO BREAKERS:
• Permanent Fault: The general method of operation is the same as that outlined for the one breaker applications
except for the following description, which assumes AR BKR SEQUENCE is “1-2” (reclose Breaker 1 before Breaker 2)
The signal output from the dead time timers passes through the breaker selection logic to initiate reclosing of Breaker
1. The Close Breaker 1 signal will initiate the Transfer Timer. After the reclose of the first breaker the fault is again
detected by the protection, the breaker is tripped three pole and the autoreclose scheme is initiated. The Initiate signal
will stop the transfer timer. After the 3-P dead time times out the Close Breaker 1 signal will close first breaker again
and will start the transfer timer. Since the fault is permanent the protection will trip again initiating the autoreclose
scheme that will be sent to Lockout by the SHOT COUNT = MAX signal.
• Transient Fault: When the first reclose output signal is sent to close Breaker 1, the reset timer is started. The close
Breaker 1 signal initiates the transfer timer that times out and sends the close signal to the second breaker. If the reclo-
sure sequence is successful (both breakers closed and there is no initiating signal) the reset timer will time out, return-
ing the scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to 0. The scheme will be ready for a new reclose cycle.
AR BKR1(2) RECLS FAIL:
If the selected sequence is “1–2” or “2–1” and after the first or second reclose attempt the breaker fails to close, there are
two options. If the AR BKR 1(2) FAIL OPTION is set to “Lockout”, the scheme will go to lockout state. If the AR BKR 1(2) FAIL
OPTION is set to “Continue”, the reclose process will continue with Breaker 2. At the same time the shot counter will be
decreased (since the closing process was not completed).

SCHEME RESET AFTER RECLOSURE:

When a reclose output signal is sent to close either breaker 1 or 2 the reset timer is started. If the reclosure sequence is
successful (there is no initiating signal and the breakers are closed) the reset timer will time out, returning the scheme to
the reset state, with the shot counter set to 0, making it ready for a new reclose cycle.
In two breaker schemes, if one breaker is in the out-of-service state and the other is closed at the end of the reset time, the
scheme will also reset. If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the out-of-service state, is open
the scheme will be sent to Lockout.
The reset timer is stopped if the reclosure sequence is not successful: an initiating signal present or the scheme is in Lock-
out state. The reset timer is also stopped if the breaker is manually closed or the scheme is otherwise reset from lockout.
LOCKOUT:
When a reclose sequence is started by an initiate signal the scheme moves into the reclose-in-progress state and starts the
incomplete sequence timer. The setting of this timer determines the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose
shot. If a close breaker 1 or 2 signal is not present before this time expires, the scheme goes to “Lockout”.
There are four other conditions that can take the scheme to the Lockout state, as shown below:
• Receipt of ‘Block’ input while in the reclose-in-progress state
• The reclosing program logic: when a 3P Initiate is present and the autoreclose mode is either 1 Pole or 3Pole-A (3 pole
autoreclose for single pole faults only)
• Initiation of the scheme when the count is at the maximum allowed
• If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the out-of-service state, is open the scheme will be
sent to Lockout. The scheme will be also sent to Lockout if one breaker fails to reclose and the setting AR BKR FAIL
OPTION is set to “Lockout”.
Once the Lockout state is set it will be latched until one or more of the following occurs: 5
• The scheme is intentionally reset from Lockout, employing the Reset setting of the Autorecloser;
• The Breaker(s) is(are) manually closed from panel switch, SCADA or other remote control through the AR BRK MAN
CLOSE setting;
• 10 seconds after breaker control detects that breaker(s) were closed.

BREAKER OPEN BEFORE FAULT:
A logic circuit is provided that inhibits the Close Breaker 1(2) output if a reclose initiate (RIP) indicator is not present within
30 ms of the Breaker Any Phase Open input. This feature is intended to prevent reclosing if one of the breakers was open
in advance of a reclose initiate input to the recloser. This logic circuit resets when the breaker is closed.
TRANSFER RECLOSE WHEN BREAKER IS BLOCKED:
1. When the reclosing sequence 1-2 is selected and Breaker 1 is blocked (AR BKR1 BLK operand is set) the reclose signal
can be transferred direct to the Breaker 2 if AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2 is set to “Yes”. If set to “No”, the scheme will be sent to
Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
2. When the reclosing sequence 2-1 is selected and Breaker 2 is blocked (AR BKR2 BLK operand is set) the reclose signal
can be transferred direct to the Breaker 1 if AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1 is set to “Yes”. If set to “No” the scheme will be sent to
Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
FORCE 3-POLE TRIPPING:
The reclosing scheme contains logic that is used to signal trip logic that three-pole tripping is required for certain conditions.
This signal is activated by any of the following:
• Autoreclose scheme is paused after it was initiated.
• Autoreclose scheme is in the Lockout state.
• Autoreclose mode is programmed for three-pole operation
• The shot counter is not at 0, i.e. the scheme is not in the reset state. This ensures a second trip will be three-pole when
reclosing onto a permanent single phase fault.
• 1.25 cycles after the single-pole reclose is initiated by the AR 1P INIT signal.

ZONE 1 EXTENT:
The Zone 1 extension philosophy here is to apply an overreaching zone permanently as long as the relay is ready to
reclose, and reduce the reach when reclosing. Another Zone 1 extension approach is to operate normally from an under-
reaching zone, and use an overreaching distance zone when reclosing the line with the other line end open. This philoso-
phy could be programmed via the Line Pickup scheme.
The “Extended Zone 1" is 0 when Autoreclose is in Lockout or Disabled and 1 when Autoreclose is in Reset.
1. When "Extended Zone 1" is 0, the distance functions shall be set to normal underreach Zone 1 setting.
2. When "Extended Zone 1" is 1, the distance functions may be set to Extended Zone 1 Reach, which is an overreaching
setting.
3. During a reclose cycle, "Extended Zone 1" goes to 0 as soon as the first CLOSE BREAKER signal is issued (AR SHOT
COUNT > 0) and remains 0 until the recloser goes back to Reset.
USE OF SETTINGS:
The single-phase autoreclose settings are described below.
• AR MODE: This setting selects the Autoreclose operating mode, which functions in conjunction with signals received
at the initiation inputs as described previously.
• AR MAX NUMBER OF SHOTS: This setting specifies the number of reclosures that can be attempted before reclo-
sure goes to Lockout when the fault is permanent.
• AR BLOCK BKR1: This input selects an operand that will block the reclose command for Breaker 1. This condition
can be for example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker
and a half arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic™.
• AR CLOSE TIME BKR1:This setting represents the closing time for the Breaker 1 from the moment the “Close” com-
5 mand is sent to the moment the contacts are closed.
• AR BKR MAN CLOSE: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that represents manual close command to a
breaker associated with the autoreclose scheme.
• AR BLK TIME UPON MAN CLS: The autoreclose scheme can be disabled for a programmable time delay after an
associated circuit breaker is manually commanded to close, preventing reclosing onto an existing fault such as
grounds on the line. This delay must be longer than the slowest expected trip from any protection not blocked after
manual closing. If the autoreclose scheme is not initiated after a manual close and this time expires the autoreclose
scheme is set to the Reset state.
• AR 1P INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that is intended to initiate single-pole autoreclosure.
• AR 3P INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that is intended to initiate three-pole autoreclosure, first timer
(AR 3P DEAD TIME 1) that can be used for a high-speed autoreclosure.
• AR 3P TD INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand intended to initiate three-pole autoreclosure. second timer
(AR 3P DEAD TIME 2) can be used for a time-delay autoreclosure.
• AR MULTI-P FAULT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that indicates a multi-phase fault. The operand value
should be zero for single-phase to ground faults.
• BKR ONE POLE OPEN: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand which indicates that the breaker(s) has opened
correctly following a single phase to ground fault and the autoreclose scheme can start timing the single pole dead
time (for 1-2 reclose sequence for example, Breaker 1 should trip single pole and Breaker 2 should trip 3 pole).
The scheme has a pre-wired input that indicates breaker(s) status.
• BKR 3 POLE OPEN: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand which indicates that the breaker(s) has opened three
pole and the autoreclose scheme can start timing the three pole dead time. The scheme has a pre-wired input that indi-
cates breaker(s) status.
• AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1: This is the dead time following the first three pole trip. This intentional delay can be used for a
high-speed three-pole autoreclose. However, it should be set longer than the estimated de-ionizing time following the
three-pole trip.
• AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2: This is the dead time following the second three-pole trip or initiated by the AR 3P TD INIT input.
This intentional delay is typically used for a time delayed three-pole autoreclose (as opposed to high speed three-pole
autoreclose).

• AR 3-P DEAD TIME 3(4): These settings represent the dead time following the third(fourth) three-pole trip.
• AR EXTEND DEAD T 1: This setting selects an operand that will adapt the duration of the dead time for the first shot
to the possibility of non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends. Typically this is the operand set when the communi-
cation channel is out of service
• AR DEAD TIME 1 EXTENSION: This timer is used to set the length of the dead time 1 extension for possible non-
simultaneous tripping of the two ends of the line.
• AR RESET: This setting selects the operand that forces the autoreclose scheme from any state to Reset. Typically this
is a manual reset from lockout, local or remote.
• AR RESET TIME: A reset timer output resets the recloser following a successful reclosure sequence. The setting is
based on the breaker time which is the minimum time required between successive reclose sequences.
• AR BKR CLOSED: This setting selects an operand that indicates that the breaker(s) are closed at the end of the reset
time and the scheme can reset.
• AR BLOCK: This setting selects the operand that blocks the Autoreclose scheme (it can be a sum of conditions such
as: time delayed tripping, breaker failure, bus differential protection, etc.). If the block signal is present before autore-
close scheme initiation the AR DISABLED FlexLogic™ operand will be set. If the block signal occurs when the scheme
is in the RIP state the scheme will be sent to Lockout.
• AR PAUSE: The pause input offers the ability to freeze the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This
may be done when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected such as out-of step or
loss of guard frequency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. When the ‘pause’ signal disappears the autore-
close cycle is resumed. This feature can also be used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a
reclose is not desirable until the it is disconnected from the line. In this situation, the reclose scheme is ‘paused’ until
the transformer is disconnected.
• AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME: This timer is used to set the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot. It
is started whenever a reclosure is initiated and is active until the CLOSE BKR1 or CLOSE BKR2 signal is sent. If all con-
5
ditions allowing a breaker closure are not satisfied when this time expires, the scheme goes to “Lockout”. The mini-
mum permissible setting is established by the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 timer setting. Settings beyond this will determine the
‘wait’ time for the breaker to open so that the reclose cycle can continue and/or for the AR PAUSE signal to reset and
allow the reclose cycle to continue and/or for the AR BKR1(2) BLK signal to disappear and allow the AR CLOSE BKR1(2)
signal to be sent.
• AR BLOCK BKR2: This input selects an operand that will block the reclose command for Breaker 2. This condition
can be for example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker
and a half arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic™.
• AR BKR2 MNL CLOSE: This setting selects an operand asserted when Breaker 2 is manually commanded to close.
• AR CLOSE TIME BKR2: This setting represents the closing time for the Breaker 2 from the moment the ‘Close’ com-
mand is sent to the moment the contacts are closed.
• AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 1-2
and Breaker 1 is blocked. When set to “Yes” the closing command will be transferred direct to Breaker 2 without wait-
ing the transfer time. When set to “No” the closing command will be blocked by the AR BKR1 BLK signal and the
scheme will be sent to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
• AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2-1
and Breaker 2 is blocked. When set to “Yes” the closing command will be transferred direct to Breaker 1 without wait-
ing the transfer time. When set to “No”, the closing command will be blocked by the AR BKR2 BLK signal and the
scheme will be sent to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
• AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 1-
2 and Breaker 1 has failed to close. When set to “Continue” the closing command will be transferred to Breaker 2
which will continue the reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme will reset) or unsuccessful (the scheme will go to
Lockout). When set to “Lockout” the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose Breaker 2.
• AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2-
1 and Breaker 2 has failed to close. When set to “Continue” the closing command will be transferred to Breaker 1
which will continue the reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme will reset) or unsuccessful (the scheme will go to
Lockout). When set to “Lockout” the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose Breaker 1.

• AR 1-P DEAD TIME: Set this intentional delay longer than the estimated de-ionizing time after the first single-pole trip.
• AR BREAKER SEQUENCE: This setting selects the breakers reclose sequence: Select “1” for reclose breaker 1 only,
“2” for reclose breaker 2 only, “1&2” for reclose both breakers simultaneously, “1-2” for reclose breakers sequentially;
Breaker 1 first, and “2-1” for reclose breakers sequentially; Breaker 2 first.
• AR TRANSFER TIME: The transfer time is used only for breaker closing sequence 1-2 or 2-1, when the two breakers
are reclosed sequentially. The transfer timer is initiated by a close signal to the first breaker. The transfer timer trans-
fers the reclose signal from the breaker selected to close first to the second breaker. The time delay setting is based on
the maximum time interval between the autoreclose signal and the protection trip contact closure assuming a perma-
nent fault (unsuccessful reclose). Therefore, the minimum setting is equal to the maximum breaker closing time plus
the maximum line protection operating time plus a suitable margin. This setting will prevent the autoreclose scheme
from transferring the close signal to the second breaker unless a successful reclose of the first breaker occurs.
For correct operation of the autoreclose scheme, the Breaker Control feature must be enabled and config-
ured properly. When the breaker reclose sequence is “1-2” or “2-1” the breaker that will reclose second in
NOTE
sequence (Breaker 2 for sequence 1-2 and Breaker 1 for sequence 2-1) must be configured to trip three-
pole for any type of fault.

SETTING
AR FUNCTION:
Enable=1
Disable=0
D60, L90 Relay Only
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LINE PICKUP OP
GE Multilin
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR ENABLED
SETTING AR DISABLED
OR
5 SETTINGS
AR INITIATE
AR BLOCK:
(To page 2, Reset AR TRANSFER TIMER)
Off = 0
S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING Latch AR RIP
R 1.25 cycle To: AR FORCE 3P TRIP
AR BKR MAN CLOSE: SETTING AND S
AR BLK TIME UPON MAN Latch (Evolving fault)
Off = 0 0
CLS :
OR R
BKR MANUAL CLOSE:
0
(From sheet 3)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING AND AR 1-P RIP
LO
AR 1P INIT: SETTING
SETTING
AR EXTEND DEAD TIME
Off = 0
AR 1-P DEAD TIME: 1: AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR Off = 0
TRIP 1-POLE OR AND 0
SETTING
SETTING OR
AR DEAD TIME 1
EXTENSION:
AR 3P INIT: AR 3-P/1 RIP
OR 0
Off = 0
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR S
AND AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1:
TRIP AR INIT 3-POLE Latch
D60 Relay Only From Trip Output

R
AND AR 3-P/2 RIP
SETTING 0
OR
AR 3P TD INIT: SETTING
AND
Off = 0 OR AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2:
To pg. 1
SETTING AND 0 CLOSE (to page 2)

OR
BKR ONE POLE OPEN:
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
OR AR 3-P/3 RIP
BKR ONE POLE OPEN

SETTING
AND
From sheet 3
SETTING AR 3-P DEAD TIME 3:
BKR 3 POLE OPEN:

AND 0
To pg. 2
Off = 0
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR 3 POLE OPEN
OR AR 3-P/4 RIP
S

RESET OR AND
Latch
CLOSE BKR1 OR BKR2 SETTING
OR R
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR 3-P DEAD TIME 4:
AR SHOT COUNT>0
AND 0
SETTING AND To pg. 3
From Sheet 2
AR PAUSE BKR FAIL TO RECLS
(from sheet 2)
Off = 0 827089AK.CDR
SHOT COUNT = MAX AND
SETTING
AND
AR M0DE:
AND
1 Pole SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
3 Pole - A AR INCOMPLETE SEQ. OR AR LO
Figure 5–98: SINGLE-POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 3)

OR
3 Pole -B TIMER:
1 & 3 Pole
OR 0
D60 Relay Only From Phase Selector AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND OR
PHASE SELECT MULTI-P
0
SETTING 5ms
AND
OR
AR MULTI-P FAULT:
RESET (to sheet 2)
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR AR FORCE 3P TRIP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
AR RESET: Evolving fault
AR DISABLED
Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
OR AR ZONE 1 EXTENT
BKR CLOSED 10s
AND
From Sheet 3
5-167
5
5
5-168
30ms TO
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND BKR 1 MNL OPEN SHEET 3
BREAKER 1 OPEN AND 0
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
AR BKR 1 BLK
AR BLOCK BKR 1:
OR
Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OOS
SETTING
SETTING AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1: AND

AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2:
2ms
No = 0
AND
AND S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING Latch AR CLOSE BKR 1
R
AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION:
AND
LO OR
Continue=0
To sheet 3 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ACTUAL VALUES
SETTING AND BREAKER 1 CLOSED AR SHOT COUNT: 0 (1,2,3,4)

From bkr control
AR BKR SEQUENCE: OR LO
AND SETTING
1 OR AR MAX NO OF SHOTS: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

AND
2 Sh=4 AR SHOT CNT=4
1&2 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Sh=3 AR SHOT CNT=3
1-2 OR AR SHOT CNT>0
OR Increm Shot Sh=2 AR SHOT CNT=2
OR AND Counter
2-1 Sh=1 AR SHOT CNT=1
AND Decrem Shot
OR Sh=0
Counter
SHOT COUNT=MAX
OR Reset Count Sh=Max
CLOSE BKR 1 OR BKR 2

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
AR RIP OR AND OR TO
OR AR TRANSFER TIME: BKR FAIL TO RECLS SHEET 1
AR INITIATE (To LO)
S
FROM
Latch AND OR
SHEET 1 0ms
OR R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR LO AND
RESET
CLOSE
SETTING
LO
AND

AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1:
AND
No = 0
AND S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Latch AR CLOSE BKR 2
AND
SETTING R
LO
AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR SETTING
Continue=0 AND BREAKER 2 CLOSED AR CLOSE TIME BKR 2: AND

From bkr control
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 2ms

BREAKER 2 OOS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR BKR 2 BLK
SETTING
AR BLOCK BKR 2: BKR CLOSED (from page 3)

OR
OR AND 827090AB.CDR
Off=0 SETTING

30ms AR RESET TIME:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR
AND
BREAKER 2 OPEN AND
AND 0 AND 0
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING
OR AR RESET
AR BKR CLOSED:
Off=0
RESET
(From Sheet 1)
TO
BKR 2 MNL OPEN SHEET 3
5 SETTINGS
GE Multilin
}
}
BKR 1 MNL OPEN
}
From sheet 2
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR
From BREAKER 1 OOS

Breaker Control
Scheme FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OOS
}
OR
BKR 2 MNL OPEN
1
2
From sheet 2 1&2
1-2
2-1
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
BKR MANUAL CLOSE

OR
(To sheet 1)
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 MNL CLS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
5
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
AND
BKR CLOSED
OR (To sheet 1 and 2)
OR
From
Breaker Control
Scheme
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 2 OPEN
OR BKR 3 POLE OPEN
(To sheet 1)
OR
OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 2 ONE P OPEN
OR AND
OR BKR ONE POLE OPEN
(To sheet 1)
OR
OR
AND
OR
AND
827833A9.CDR

5
5-170
1ST SHOT 2ND SHOT
F R
A T PROT E
T
U R T TRIP BKR S
L I T PROT RESET E
T P T
PREFAULT
AR 1P INIT
AR RIP
1-P DEAD TIME
AR 1-P RIP
1.25 cycle
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
CLOSE
AR CLOSE BKR1
T CLOSE BKR1 T CLOSE BKR1
AR RESET TIME
RESET TIME
AR SHOT COUNT > 0
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
T TRIP BKR T PROT RESET

T PROT
AR 3P INIT
3-P/2 DEAD TIME
AR 3P/2 RIP
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
Figure 5–101: EXAMPLE RECLOSING SEQUENCE

AR CLOSE BKR2
T CLOSE BKR2
TRANSFER TIME
AR TRANSFER TIME
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ. TIME

842703A4.CDR
5 SETTINGS
GE Multilin
5.6.7 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" DIGITAL ELEMENTS ! DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(16)
# DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Dig Element 1
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 16 identical Digital Elements available, numbered 1 to 16. A Digital Element can monitor any FlexLogic™ oper-
and and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital ele- 5
ment settings include a ‘name’ which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected
FlexLogic™ operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to be monitored by the Digital Element.
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0".
• DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to “0”.
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0 SETTINGS
Enabled = 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
SETTING PICKUP DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
NAME: RESET DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 DIG ELEM 01 DPO
AND RUN tPKP
INPUT: DIG ELEM 01 PKP
Off = 0 DIG ELEM 01 OP
INPUT = 1 tRST
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
BLOCK:
827042A1.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–102: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC

CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS:
Some versions of the digital input modules include an active Voltage Monitor circuit connected across Form-A contacts.
The Voltage Monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see Technical Specifications for Form-A).
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above a threshold (see Technical Specifications for Form-A), the Flex-
Logic™ operand "Cont Op # VOn" will be set. (# represents the output contact number). If the output circuit has a high
resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and the FlexLogic™ operand
"Cont Op # VOff" will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the cir-
cuits in which Form-A contacts are inserted.

EXAMPLE 1: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING

In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip oper-
ation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the Voltage Monitor connected across the trip output contact
detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resis-
tance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the
breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must
include the breaker position.
DC+
UR Relay - Form-A
H1a
I = Current Monitor I
H1b
V = Voltage Monitor V
H1c
52a
Trip
Coil
5 827073A1.vsd
Figure 5–103: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1

DC–
Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name, e.g.
“Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status. Using the
contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, e.g. “Cont Ip 1" and will be set “ON” when the breaker is closed.
Using Digital Element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit, the settings will be:
# DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

# FUNCTION: Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
MESSAGE
Bkr Trip Cct Out
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
MESSAGE
Cont Op 1 VOff
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.200 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.100 s
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
MESSAGE
Cont Ip 1 Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Enabled
The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance
alarms.
NOTE

EXAMPLE 2: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING

If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to
maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the fig-
ure below). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure below) across the auxiliary contact in the trip
circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position – the BLOCK setting is
selected to “Off”. In this case, the settings will be:
# DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

# FUNCTION: Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
MESSAGE
Bkr Trip Cct Out
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
MESSAGE
Cont Op 1 VOff
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.200 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.100 s
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
MESSAGE
Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 5
EVENTS: Enabled
DC+
Table 5–20: VALUES OF RESISTOR ‘R’
UR Relay - Form-A
POWER RESISTANCE POWER
H1a SUPPLY (V DC) (OHMS) (WATTS)
I = Current Monitor I
24 1000 2
H1b
30 5000 2
V = Voltage Monitor V
H1c 48 10000 2
110 25000 5
52a By-pass
R 125 25000 5
Resistor
250 50000 5
Trip
Coil
827074A1.vsd
DC–
Figure 5–104: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2

5.6.8 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" DIGITAL COUNTERS ! COUNTER 1(8)
# COUNTER 1 COUNTER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

COUNTER 1 NAME: Range: 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Counter 1
COUNTER 1 UNITS: Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 PRESET: Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

MESSAGE
0
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
0
COUNTER 1 UP: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
5 MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from
Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an
external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
• COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted.
The units label will appear in the corresponding Actual Values status.
• COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case
where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
• COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic™ output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the set
value.
• COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to –2,147,483,648.
• COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is
received when the accumulated value is at the limit of –2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to
+2,147,483,647.
• COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are
blocked.

• CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will
be set to the preset value in the following situations:
1. When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled
and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).
2. When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO
PRESET changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).
3. When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value
1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the
value 0, the counter will be set to 0).
• COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for setting the count to either “0” or the preset value depending
on the state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.
• COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to “0”.
• COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated
value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is
interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
SETTINGS
Enabled = 1
COUNTER 1 NAME:
SETTING
COUNTER 1 UP:
AND COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
RUN
5
Off = 0 SETTING
FLEXLOGIC
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: OPERANDS
SETTING
CALCULATE Count more than Comp. COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 DOWN: VALUE Count equal to Comp. COUNTER 1 EQL
Off = 0 Count less than Comp. COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off = 0 SET TO PRESET VALUE
SETTING SET TO ZERO

ACTUAL VALUE
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET: COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING AND ACTUAL VALUES

COUNTER 1 RESET:
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
Off = 0
OR STORE DATE & TIME Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
827065A1.VSD
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
Figure 5–105: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC

5.6.9 MONITORING ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS
# MONITORING # BREAKER 1
See below.
# ELEMENTS # ARCING CURRENT
# BREAKER 2
MESSAGE See below.
# ARCING CURRENT
# BREAKER
# FLASHOVER 1
# BREAKER
# FLASHOVER 2
# VT FUSE FAILURE 1
#
# VT FUSE FAILURE 2
#
# OPEN POLE
#
b) BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
5 PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS ! BREAKER 1(4) ARCING CURRENT
# BREAKER 1 BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: Disabled, Enabled

# ARCING CURRENT FUNCTION: Disabled
BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
BKR 1 ARC AMP INIT-A: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 ARC AMP INIT-B: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 ARC AMP INIT-C: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT: Range: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1
MESSAGE
1000 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 ARC AMP BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are four identical Breaker Arcing Current features available for each breaker. This element calculates an estimate of
the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the current squared passing through the breaker
contacts as an arc. These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase and compared to a pro-
grammed threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set an output operand to “1”. The
accumulated value for each phase can be displayed as an actual value.

The operation of the scheme is shown in the following logic diagram. The same output operand that is selected to operate
the output relay used to trip the breaker, indicating a tripping sequence has begun, is used to initiate this feature. A time
delay is introduced between initiation and the starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the
breaker before the contacts have parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary
relays and the breaker mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, the interval between change-of-state of the
operand (from 0 to 1) and contact separation should be measured for the specific installation. Integration of the measured
current continues for 100 ms, which is expected to include the total arcing period.
• BKR 1(4) ARC AMP INIT-A(C): Select the same output operands that are configured to operate the output relays used
to trip the breaker. In three-pole tripping applications, the same operand should be configured to initiate arcing current
calculations for poles A, B and C of the breaker. In single-pole tripping applications, per-pole tripping operands should
be configured to initiate the calculations for the poles that are actually tripped.
• BKR 1(4) ARC AMP DELAY: This setting is used to program the delay interval between the time the tripping sequence
is initiated and the time the breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current.
• BKR 1(4) ARC AMP LIMIT: Selects the threshold value above which the output operand is set.
Breaker
Contacts Arc
Initiate Part Extinguished
Total Area =
Breaker
Arcing
Current
(kA·cycle)
5
Programmable
Start Delay 100 ms
Start Stop
Integration Integration
Figure 5–106: ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AND SETTING
AMP FUNCTION:
Disabled=0 BREAKER 1 ARCING
Enabled=1 AMP DELAY: 100 ms
OR 0 0
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP BLOCK: AND
Off=0
SETTINGS
OR
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INT-A:
Off=0
BREAKER 1 ARCING AND
AMP INT-B:
Off=0
BREAKER 1 ARCING AND
AMP INT-C:
Off=0
AND
SETTING
RUN
BREAKER 1 ARCING Add to SETTING
Integrate
AMP SOURCE: Accumulator BREAKER 1 ARCING
IA RUN IA2 -Cycle Select
AMP LIMIT: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
2
IB Integrate IB2 -Cycle Highest KA * Cycle Limit BKR1 ARC OP
IC IC 2 -Cycle Value BKR1 ARC DPO
RUN
Integrate Set All To Zero
COMMAND
CLEAR BREAKER 1 ACTUAL VALUE
ARCING AMPS: BKR 1 ARCING AMP A
NO=0 BKR 1 ARCING AMP B
YES=1 BKR 1 ARCING AMP C
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME A
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME B
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME C
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME
Figure 5–107: BREAKER ARCING CURRENT SCHEME LOGIC

c) BREAKER FLASHOVER
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS ! BREAKER FLASHOVER 1(2)
# BREAKER BKR 1 FLSHOVR Range: Disabled, Enabled

# FLASHOVER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SRC: SRC 1
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2 Range: None, SRC 1, SRC 2
MESSAGE
SRC: SRC 1
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD A: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD B: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 STATUS CLSD C: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR V PKP: Range: 0.000 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.850 pu
BKR 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V Range: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PKP: 1000 V
BKR 1 FLSHOVR AMP Range: 0.000 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PKP: 0.600 pu
5 BKR 1 FLSHOVR PKP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.100 s
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV A: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV B: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR SPV C: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BKR 1 FLSHOVR TAR- Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
GET: Self-reset
BKR 1 FLSHOVR Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The detection of the breaker flashover is based on the following condition:

1. Breaker open,
2. Voltage drop measured from either side of the breaker during the flashover period,
3. Voltage difference drop, and
4. Measured flashover current through the breaker.
Furthermore, the scheme is applicable for cases where either one or two sets of three-phase voltages are available across
the breaker.

THREE VT BREAKER FLASHOVER APPLICATION

When only one set of VTs is available across the breaker, the BRK FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC setting should be “None”. To detect
an open breaker condition in this application, the scheme checks if the per-phase voltages were recovered (picked up), the
status of the breaker is open (contact input indicating the breaker status is off), and no flashover current is flowing. A con-
tact showing the breaker status must be provided to the relay. The voltage difference will not be considered as a condition
for open breaker in this part of the logic.
Voltages must be present prior to flashover conditions. If the three VTs are placed after the breaker on the
line (or feeder), and the downstream breaker is open, the measured voltage would be zero and the flash-
NOTE
over element will not be initiated.
The flashover detection will reset if the current drops back to zero, the breaker closes, or the selected FlexLogic™ operand
for supervision changes to high. Using supervision through the BRK FLSHOVR SPV setting is recommended by selecting a
trip operand that will not allow the flashover element to pickup prior to the trip.
The flashover detection can be used for external alarm, re-tripping the breaker, or energizing the lockout relay.
Consider the following configuration:
Bus
CTs Breaker
Line/Feeder
Bus VTs
842746A1.CDR
The source 1 (SRC1) phase currents are feeder CTs and phase voltages are bus VTs, and Contact Input 1 is set as Breaker
5
52a contact. The conditions prior to flashover detection are:
1. 52a status = 0
2. VAg, VBg, or VCg is greater than the pickup setting
3. IA, IB, IC = 0; no current flows through the breaker
4. ∆VA is greater than pickup (not applicable in this scheme)
The conditions at flashover detection are:
1. 52a status = 0
2. VAg, VBg, or VCg is lower than the pickup setting
3. IA, IB, or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker
4. ∆VA is greater than pickup (not applicable in this scheme)
SIX VT BREAKER FLASHOVER APPLICATION
The per-phase voltage difference approaches zero when the breaker is closed. The is well below any typical minimum
pickup voltage. Select the level of the BRK 1(2) FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP setting to be less than the voltage difference measured
across the breaker when the close or open breaker resistors are left in service. Prior to flashover, the voltage difference is
larger than BRK 1(2) FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP (applies to either the difference between two live voltages per phase or when the
voltage from one side of the breaker has dropped to zero – line de-energized), at least one per-phase voltage is larger than
the BRK 1(2) FLSHOVR V PKP setting, and no current flows through the breaker poles. During breaker flashover, the per-
phase voltages from both sides of the breaker drops below the pickup value defined by the BRK 1(2) FLSHOVR V PKP setting,
the voltage difference drops below the pickup setting, and flashover current is detected. These flashover conditions initiate
FlexLogic™ pickup operands and start the BRK 1(2) FLSHOVR PKP DELAY timer.
This application do not require detection of breaker status via a 52a contact, as it uses a voltage difference larger than the
BRK 1(2) FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP setting. However, monitoring the breaker contact will ensure scheme stability.

Consider the following configuration:
Bus
CTs Breaker
Line/Feeder
Bus VTs
842746A1.CDR
The source 1 (SRC1) phase currents are CTs and phase voltages are bus VTs. The source 2 (SRC2) phase voltages are
bus VTs. Contact Input 1 is set as Breaker 52a contact (optional).
The conditions prior to flashover detection are:
1. ∆VA is greater than pickup
2. VAg, VBg, or VCg is greater than the pickup setting
3. IA, IB, IC = 0; no current flows through the breaker
4. 52a status = 0 (optional)
The conditions at flashover detection are:
1. ∆VA is less than pickup
2. VAg, VBg, or VCg is lower than the pickup setting
5 3.
4.
IA, IB, or IC is greater than the pickup current flowing through the breaker
52a status = 0 (optional)
The element is operational only when phase-to-ground voltages are connected to relay terminals. The
flashover element will not operate if delta voltages are applied.
NOTE
The Breaker Flashover settings are described below.

• BRK FLSHOVR SIDE 1 SRC: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide three-phase voltages and three-
phase currents from one side of the current breaker. The source selected as a setting and must be configured with
breaker phase voltages and currents, even if only 3 VTs are available across the breaker.
• BRK FLSHOVR SIDE 2 SRC: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide another set of three phase volt-
ages whenever six (6) VTs are available across the breaker.
• BRK STATUS CLSD A(C): These settings specify FlexLogic™ operands to indicate the open status of the breaker. A
separate FlexLogic™ operand can be selected to detect individual breaker pole status and provide flashover detection.
The recommended setting is 52a breaker contact or another operand defining the breaker poles open status.
• BRK FLSHOVR V PKP: This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltages from both sides of the breaker. If 6
VTs are available, opening the breaker leads to two possible combinations – live voltages from only one side of the
breaker, or live voltages from both sides of the breaker. Either case will set the scheme ready for flashover detection
upon detection of voltage above the selected value. Set BRK FLSHOVR V PKP to 85 to 90% of the nominal voltage.
• BRK FLSHOVR DIFF V PKP: This setting specifies a pickup level for the phase voltage difference when two VTs per
phase are available across the breaker. The pickup voltage difference should be below the monitored voltage differ-
ence when close or open breaker resistors are left in service. The setting is selected as primary volts difference
between the sources.
• BRK FLSHOVR AMP PKP: This setting specifies the normal load current which can flow through the breaker.
Depending on the flashover protection application, the flashover current can vary from levels of the charging current
when the line is de-energized (all line breakers open), to well above the maximum line (feeder) load (line/feeder con-
nected to load).
• BRK FLSHOVR SPV A(C): This setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand (per breaker poll) that supervises the opera-
tion of the element per phase. Supervision can be provided by operation of other protection elements, breaker failure,
and close and trip commands. A 6-cycle time delay applies after the selected FlexLogic™ operand resets.

• BRK FLSHOVR PKP DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay to operate after a pickup condition is detected.
SETTINGS
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV A:

0
FlexLogic operand: Off=1
6 cycle
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV B: Phase B
logic
FlexLogic operand: Off=1
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SUPV C: Phase C

logic FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FlexLogic operand: Off=1 BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP B OR BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP
SETTING
SETTING BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP C BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO
BREAKER FLASHOVER
FUNCTION: BRK 1 FLSHOVR V PKP:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Enable=1
AND RUN BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO A
Block: OFF=0
VA > PKP BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO B
0 AND BRK 1 FLSHOVR DPO C
OR SET
5 cycle
dominant
Va > PKP Phase C logic
Phase B logic
RESET
SETTINGS
5 cycle
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD A:
0 OR
SET SETTING
RUN dominant
BRK 1 FLSHOVR PKP
FlexLogic operand: On=1
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD B: Phase B tPKP
logic 0 BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP A
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FlexLogic operand: On=1
Phase B logic BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP B OR BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP
BRK 1 STATUS CLSD C: Phase C RESET
logic OR Phase C logic BRK 1 FLSHOVR OP C
SETTINGS RUN
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 1 FlexLogic operand: On=1
SRC:
SRC 1, SRC 2, … , SRC 6 SETTING
VA
BRK 1 FLSHOVR AMP PKP:
VB
VC RUN
IA IA > PKP
IB
AND
IC
SETTINGS
SETTING
BRK 1 FLSHOVR SIDE 2
SRC: BRK 1 FLSHOVR DIFF V
PKP:
SRC 1, SRC 2, … , SRC 6, none
RUN
Va ∆VA > PKP
∆VA = | VA - Va |
5
Vb
Vc 842018A1.CDR
Figure 5–108: BREAKER FLASHOVER SCHEME LOGIC
d) VT FUSE FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS !" VT FUSE FAILURE 1(2)
# VT FUSE FAILURE 1 VT FUSE FAILURE 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

Every signal source includes a fuse failure scheme.

The VT fuse failure detector can be used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that may operate incorrectly for a full or
partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that might be blocked (via the BLOCK
input) are distance, voltage restrained overcurrent, and directional current.
There are two classes of fuse failure that may occur:
Class A: Loss of one or two phases.
Class B: Loss of all three phases.
Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of Class A failures is a significant level of negative
sequence voltage, whereas an indication of Class B failures is when positive sequence current is present and there is an
insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. These noted indications of fuse failure could also be present when faults
are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is pro-
vided. Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it will be sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears.
An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized; positive
sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels.
The VT FUSE FAILURE 1(2) FUNCTION setting enables/disables the fuse failure feature for each source.

AND
Reset-dominant
OR SET
FAULT
AND LATCH
SETTING
RESET
VT FUSE FAILURE
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
AND
COMPARATORS
SOURCE 1
RUN
V_2 V_2 > 0.25 p.u.
RUN OR
V_1 V_1 < 0.05 p.u. OR SET
AND FUSE
RUN FAIL
I_1 I_1 > 0.075 p.u.
RUN
V_1 < 0.7 p.u. 2 CYCLES AND
AND
RUN 20 CYCLES
I_1 < 0.05 p.u. FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND LATCH SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP
SRC1 50DD OP SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
D60 only
AND
OR RESET
Reset-dominant
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS
827093AG.CDR
Figure 5–109: VT FUSE FAIL SCHEME LOGIC

5 e) OPEN POLE DETECTOR
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" MONITORING ELEMENTS !" OPEN POLE
# OPEN POLE OPEN POLE FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

# Disabled
OPEN POLE BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OPEN POLE VOLTAGE Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
SUPV: Disabled
OPEN POLE CURRENT Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PKP: 0.050 pu
OPEN POLE LINE XC1: Range: 300.0 to 9999.9 Ω in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
9999.9 Ω
OPEN POLE LINE XC0: Range: 300.0 to 9999.9 Ω in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
9999.9 Ω
OPEN POLE REM CURR Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PKP: 0.050 pu
OPEN POLE TARGET: Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
OPEN POLE EVENTS: Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
The open pole detector is intended to identify an open pole of the line circuit breaker. The scheme monitors the breakers
auxiliary contacts, current in the circuit and optionally voltage on the line. The scheme generates output operands used to
block the phase selector and some specific protection elements, thus preventing maloperation during the dead time of a
single pole autoreclose cycle or any other open pole conditions. The scheme declares an open pole at the moment a sin-
gle-pole trip is issued.

In two breaker and breaker and a half applications, an open pole condition is declared when:
• both breakers have an open pole on the same phase or
• the current on the line drops below a threshold or
• the current and voltage on the line drop below a threshold.
The Open Pole feature uses signals defined by the GROUPED ELEMENTS ! SETTING GROUP 1(6) !" DISTANCE ! DISTANCE
SOURCE setting. Voltage supervision can be used only with wye VTs on the line side of the breaker(s).
The OPEN POLE CURRENT PICKUP setting establishes the current threshold below which an open pole is declared.
The OPEN POLE LINE XC1 setting specifies positive-sequence reactance of the entire line. If shunt reactors are applied, this
value should be a net capacitive reactance of the line and the reactors installed between the line breakers. The value is
entered in secondary ohms. This setting is relevant if open pole condition at the remote end of the line is to be sensed and
utilized by the relay ().
The OPEN POLE LINE XC0 setting specifies zero-sequence reactance of the entire line. If shunt reactors are applied, this
value should be a net capacitive reactance of the line and the reactors installed between the line breakers. The value shall
be entered in secondary ohms. This setting is relevant if open pole condition at the remote end of the line is to be sensed
and utilized by the relay (OPEN POLE REM OP FlexLogic™ operand).
The OPEN POLE REM CURR PKP setting specifies pickup level for the remote-end current estimated by the relay as the local
current compensated by the calculated charging current. The latter is calculated based on the local voltages and the capac-
itive reactances of the line. This setting is relevant if open pole condition at the remote end of the line is to be sensed and
utilized by the relay (OPEN POLE REM OP FlexLogic™ operand).
For convenience, the position of the breaker poles defined in the Breaker Control feature and available as FlexLogic™
operand BREAKER 1/2 ΦA CLSD through BREAKER 1/2 ΦC CLSD and BREAKER 1/2 OOS are used by the Open Pole feature.
For correct operation of the Open Pole Detector, the Breaker Control, Trip Output, and Single Pole Autoreclose features
must be enabled and configured properly. When used in configuration with only one breaker, the BREAKER 2 FUNCTION 5
should be “Enabled” and the BREAKER 2 OUT OF SV setting should be “On” (see the Breaker Control section earlier in this
Chapter for additional details).

SETTING
OPEN POLE
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
AND
OPEN POLE BLOCK:
SETTING
Off = 0 OPEN POLE CURRENT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PKP:
XOR OPEN POLE BLK N
RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0.5 cycle
TRIP PHASE A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
IA < PKP AND 0 OPEN POLE OP ΦA
AND OR 20 ms
IB < PKP
IC < PKP
AND
From
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Trip TRIP PHASE B
0.5 cycle
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Output 0
AND 0 OPEN POLE OP ΦB
SETTINGS AND OR 20 ms
OPEN POLE VOLTAGE
SUPV: AND
Disabled = 0
AND RUN
Enabled = 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0.5 cycle
VAG > 0.7 pu TRIP PHASE C
DISTANCE SOURCE: 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VBG > 0.7 pu 0
IA AND AND OPEN POLE OP ΦC
VCG > 0.7 pu OR 20 ms
IB
IC AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
VAG
OR OPEN POLE BLK AB
VBG
From Breaker Control Logic
VCG
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR OPEN POLE BLK BC
SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD
OPEN POLE LINE XC1: OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR OPEN POLE BLK CA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE LINE XC0:
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD
Charging OR OPEN POLE OP
Current FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Calculations BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
To Trip Output
OR OPEN POLE BKR ΦA OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Scheme
Charging BREAKER 1 OOS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Current
Calculations OPEN POLE BKR ΦB OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 ΦA CLSD
OPEN POLE BKR ΦC OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 ΦB CLSD
5
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 ΦC CLSD
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OOS
SETTING
OPEN POLE REM
CURR PKP:
RUN
2 cycles
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
2 cycles
IA REM < PKP OPEN POLE REM OP ΦA
2 cycles
IB REM < PKP OPEN POLE REM OP ΦB
2 cycles
IC REM < PKP OPEN POLE REM OP ΦC
2 cycles
2 cycles 837024AB.CDR
Figure 5–110: OPEN POLE DETECTOR LOGIC
5.6.10 PILOT SCHEMES
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" PILOT SCHEMES
# PILOT SCHEMES # DUTT SCHEME

See below.
# #
# PUTT SCHEME
#
# POTT SCHEME
#
# HYBRID POTT SCHEME
#
# BLOCKING SCHEME
#
This menu allows the selection and the setting up (see the following sub-menus) of a protection signaling scheme. See
also, the section on Protection Signaling Schemes in the Chapter 9: Application of Settings.

b) DIRECT UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (DUTT)

PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" PILOT SCHEMES ! DUTT SCHEME
# DUTT SCHEME DUTT SCHEME Range: Disabled, Enabled

DUTT SEAL-IN Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.010 s
DUTT NO OF COMM Range: 1, 2, or 4
MESSAGE
BITS: 1
DUTT RX1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
DUTT SCHEME TARGET: Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
DUTT SCHEME EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
5
This scheme uses an under-reaching Zone 1 distance element to key a transfer trip signal(s) to the remote end(s), where
on receipt, the DUTT pilot scheme operates without additional protection supervision. For proper operation of the scheme
the Zone 1 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured, and set per rules of distance relaying.
In single-pole tripping applications, the scheme uses local fault type identification provided by the Phase Selector together
with information received from the remote terminal(s). The latter may be coded into one, two or four bits over the communi-
cations channel.
The scheme generates output operands (DUTT TX1 through DUTT TX4) that are used to transmit the direct under-reaching
signals to the remote end(s). Choices of communications channel include remote inputs/outputs and telecommunications
interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operands should be assigned to operate output con-
tacts connected to assert the individual bits at the interface.
To make the scheme a fully operational stand-alone feature, the scheme output operands must be configured to interface
with other relay functions, output contacts in particular. Typically, the output operands should be programmed to initiate a
trip, breaker fail, and autoreclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application. When used in conjunction
with the Trip Output, the scheme is pre-configured to initiate trip, breaker fail, and single-pole autoreclose actions.
• DUTT SEAL-IN DELAY: The output FlexLogic™ operand (DUTT OP) is produced according to the DUTT scheme logic.
A seal-in time delay is applied to this operand for coping with noisy communication channels such as a power line car-
rier. The DUTT SEAL-IN DELAY is a minimum guaranteed duration of the DUTT OP pulse. As this operand activates the
Trip Table of the DUTT scheme, the trip operands DUTT TRIP A, B, C and 3P are sealed-in for the same period of time.
• DUTT NO OF COMM BITS: This setting specifies the number of bits available on the communications channel. With
only one bit available, the scheme sends the direct under-reaching transfer trip command on bit no.1 (DUTT TX1 oper-
and) and responds to the direct trip command received on bit no. 1 (DUTT RX1 setting). The scheme uses only local
fault type identification provided by the Phase Selector to assert the output operands DUTT TRIP A, B, C and 3P (see
Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for details on the use of communication channels).
• DUTT RX1 through DUTT RX4: These settings allow the user to select the FlexLogic™ operands that represent the
receive signals for the scheme. Typically input contacts interfacing with a signaling system are used.

The DUTT scheme requires a secure and dependable signaling system. For this reason, a series/parallel combination
of receive signal "contacts" is often used. This is accomplished by using a multi-bit communications system to transmit
redundant copies of the TX signal (often via different paths) and building appropriate security logic (such as series
(AND gate) or 2-out-of-3 voting logic) with FlexLogic™. The DUTT RX1(4) settings should be associated with the final
(secure) TX signals.
In single-bit applications, DUTT RX1 must be used. In two-bit applications, DUTT RX1 and DUTT RX2 must be used. In
four-bit applications, DUTT RX1, DUTT RX2, DUTT RX3, and DUTT RX4 must be used. In multi-terminal applications, the RX
signals from two or more remote terminals should be connected through OR gates in the FlexLogic™ and the resulting
signals should be configured as the DUTT RX inputs.
SETTING
DUTT SCHEME
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1 DUTT NO OF COMM
BITS:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AND RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

PH DIST Z1 PKP DUTT TX1
OR
GND DIST Z1 PKP DUTT TX2
TRANSMIT TABLE DUTT TX3
Phase
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS Selector DUTT TX4
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
OPEN POLE OP
SETTINGS
DUTT NO OF COMM
BITS: SETTINGS
DUTT SEAL-IN
DUTT RX1: DELAY:
5
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0 0
AND t RST DUTT OP
DUTT RX2:
Off = 0
DUTT RX3: OR
DUTT NO OF COMM
BITS:
Off = 0
RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DUTT RX4:
RX DUTT TRIP A
Off = 0 DUTT TRIP B
TRIP TABLE DUTT TRIP C
Phase
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS Selector DUTT TRIP 3P
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
837012AA.CDR
OPEN POLE OP
Figure 5–111: DUTT SCHEME LOGIC

c) PERMISSIVE UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (PUTT)

PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" PILOT SCHEMES !" PUTT SCHEME
# PUTT SCHEME PUTT SCHEME Range: Disabled, Enabled

PUTT RX PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
PUTT SEAL-IN Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.010 s
PUTT NO OF COMM Range: 1, 2, or 4
MESSAGE
BITS: 1
PUTT RX1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
PUTT SCHEME TARGET: Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
PUTT SCHEME EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled 5
MESSAGE
Disabled
This scheme uses an under-reaching Zone 1 distance element to key a transfer trip signal(s) to the remote terminal(s)
where it is supervised by an over-reaching Zone 2 distance element. For proper operation, the Zone 1 and 2 phase and
ground distance elements must be enabled, configured, and set per rules of distance relaying.
with information received from the remote terminal(s). The scheme generates output operands (PUTT TX1 through PUTT
TX4) that are used to transmit the signal to the remote end(s). Choices of communications channel include remote inputs/
outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operands should be
assigned to operate output contacts connected to assert the individual bits at the interface.
To make the scheme a fully operational stand-alone feature, the scheme output operands must be configured to interface
with other relay functions, output contacts in particular. Typically, the output operands should be programmed to initiate a
trip, breaker fail, and autoreclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application. When used in conjunction
with the Trip Output element, the scheme is pre-configured to initiate trip, breaker fail and single-pole autoreclose actions.
• PUTT RX PICKUP DELAY: This setting enables the relay to cope with spurious receive signals. This delay should be
set longer than the longest spurious TX signal that can be received simultaneously with the zone 1 pickup. The
selected delay will increase the response time of the scheme.
• PUTT SEAL-IN DELAY: The output FlexLogic™ operand (PUTT OP) is produced according to the PUTT scheme logic.
A seal-in time delay is applied to this operand for coping with noisy communication channels such as a power line car-
rier. The PUTT SEAL-IN DELAY is a minimum guaranteed duration of the PUTT OP pulse. As this operand activates the
trip table of the PUTT scheme, the trip operands PUTT TRIP A, B, C and 3P are sealed-in for the same period of time.
• PUTT NO OF COMM BITS: This setting specifies the number of bits of the communications channel available for the
scheme. The transmit codes and trip table of the PUTT scheme are identical as those for the direct under-reaching
transfer trip scheme. Please refer to Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for more information.
• PUTT RX1 through PUTT RX4: These settings allow the user to select the FlexLogic™ operands that represent the
receive signals for the scheme. Typically input contacts interfacing with a signaling system are used. In single-bit appli-
cations, PUTT RX1 must be used. In two-bit applications, PUTT RX1 and PUTT RX2 must be used. In four-bit applica-
tions, PUTT RX1, PUTT RX2, PUTT RX3, and PUTT RX4 must be used. In multi-terminal applications, the RX signals from

two or more remote terminals should be connected through OR gates in the FlexLogic™ and the resulting signals
should be configured as the PUTT RX inputs.
SETTING
PUTT SCHEME
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTINGS
PUTT NO OF COMM
BITS: SETTINGS
PUTT RX1: PUTT RX PICKUP

DELAY: SETTINGS
Off = 0 tPKP
AND PUTT SEAL-IN
0 DELAY:
PUTT RX2:
0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0 AND t RST PUTT OP
PUTT RX3: OR
Off = 0
PUTT RX4:
Off = 0
PUTT NO OF COMM
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BITS:
PH DIST Z2 PKP RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OR
GND DIST Z2 PKP RX PUTT TRIP A
PUTT TRIP B
Phase TRIP TABLE
PUTT TRIP C
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS Selector
PUTT TRIP 3P
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
5 OPEN POLE OP
PUTT NO OF COMM
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BITS:
PH DIST Z1 PKP AND RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OR
GND DIST Z1 PKP PUTT TX1
PUTT TX2
Phase TRANSMIT TABLE
PUTT TX3
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS Selector
PUTT TX4
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
OPEN POLE OP 837013AA.CDR
Figure 5–112: PUTT SCHEME LOGIC

d) PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (POTT)

PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" PILOT SCHEMES !" POTT SCHEME
# POTT SCHEME POTT SCHEME Range: Disabled, Enabled

POTT PERMISSIVE Range: Disabled, Enabled, Custom
MESSAGE
ECHO: Disabled
POTT ECHO COND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
POTT RX PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
TRANS BLOCK PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.020 s
TRANS BLOCK RESET Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.090 s
ECHO DURATION: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.100 s
ECHO LOCKOUT: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.250 s
LINE END OPEN PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.050 s
POTT SEAL-IN Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 5
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.010 s
GND DIR O/C FWD: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
POTT NO OF COMM Range: 1, 2, or 4
MESSAGE
BITS: 1
POTT RX1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
POTT SCHEME TARGET: Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-Reset
POTT SCHEME EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
This scheme is intended for two-terminal line applications only. The scheme uses an over-reaching Zone 2 distance ele-
ment to essentially compare the direction to a fault at both terminals of the line. Ground directional overcurrent functions
available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone 2 distance element to key the scheme and initiate its opera-
tion. This provides increased coverage for high-resistance faults.
For proper operation, the Zone 2 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set per rules of
distance relaying. The Line Pickup element should be enabled, configured and set properly to detect line-end-open/weak-
infeed conditions. If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, config-
ured and set accordingly.

with information received from the remote terminal. The scheme generates output operands (POTT TX1 through POTT TX4)
that are used to transmit the signal to the remote end. Choices of communications channel include remote inputs/outputs
and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operands should be assigned
to operate output contacts connected to assert the individual bits at the interface.
To make the scheme fully operational as a stand-alone feature, the scheme output operands must be configured to inter-
face with other relay functions, output contacts in particular. Typically, the output operands should be programmed to initiate
a trip, breaker fail, and autoreclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.
When used in conjunction with the Trip Output element, the scheme is pre-configured to initiate trip, breaker fail, and single-
pole autoreclose actions.
• POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO: If this setting is set to “Enabled”, the scheme sends a permissive echo signal to the
remote end(s) using a pre-programmed logic (see the following logic diagram). If set to “Custom”, the echo signal is
sent if a condition selected via the POTT ECHO COND setting is satisfied. The echo is sent only once and then the logic
locks out for the time specified by the ECHO LOCKOUT. The duration of the echo pulse is settable as ECHO DURATION.
Operation of the overreaching protection elements (Distance Zone 2 or GND DIR O/C FWD setting) inhibits the echo.
• POTT ECHO COND: This setting specifies a user-selected echo condition and applies only if the HYB POTT PERMIS-
is set to “Custom”.
SIVE ECHO
• POTT RX PICKUP DELAY: This setting enables the relay to cope with spurious receive signals. The delay should be
set longer than the longest spurious TX signal that can be received simultaneously with the Zone 2 pickup. The
selected delay will increase the response time of the scheme.
• TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the POTT
scheme for coping with the exposure of a ground directional overcurrent function (if used) to current reversal condi-
tions. The transient blocking mechanism applies to the ground overcurrent path only as the reach settings for the Zone
5 2 distance functions is not expected to be long for two-terminal applications, and the security of the distance functions
is not endangered by the current reversal conditions.
Upon receiving the POTT RX signal, the transient blocking mechanism allows the RX signal to be passed and aligned
with the GND DIR O/C FWD indication only for a period of time set by TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY. After that the ground
directional overcurrent path will be virtually disabled for a period of time specified as TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY.
The TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY should be long enough to give the selected ground directional overcurrent function
time to operate, but not longer than the fastest possible operation time of the protection system that can create current
reversal conditions within the reach of the selected ground directional overcurrent function.
This setting should take into account the POTT RX PICKUP DELAY. The POTT RX signal is shaped for aligning with the
ground directional indication as follows: the original RX signal is delayed by the POTT RX PICKUP DELAY, then terminated
at TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY after the pickup of the original POTT TX signal, and eventually locked-out for TRANS
BLOCK RESET DELAY.
• TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the POTT scheme
for coping with the exposure of a ground directional overcurrent function (if used) to current reversal conditions (see
the TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY). This delay should be selected long enough to cope with transient conditions includ-
ing not only current reversals but also spurious negative- and zero-sequence currents occurring during breaker opera-
tions. The breaker failure time of the surrounding protection systems within the reach of the ground directional function
used by the POTT scheme may be considered to make sure that the ground directional function is not jeopardized dur-
ing delayed breaker operations.
• ECHO DURATION: This setting defines the guaranteed and exact duration of the echo pulse. The duration does not
depend on the duration and shape of the received RX signal. This setting enables the relay to avoid a permanent lock-
up of the transmit/receive loop.
• ECHO LOCKOUT: This setting defines the lockout period for the echo logic after sending the echo pulse.
• LINE END OPEN PICKUP DELAY: This setting defines the pickup value for validation of the line end open conditions
as detected by the Line Pickup logic through the LINE PICKUP LEO PKP FlexLogic™ operand. The validated line end
open condition is a requirement for the POTT scheme to return a received echo signal (if the echo feature is enabled).
This value should take into account the principle of operation and settings of the Line Pickup element.
• POTT SEAL-IN DELAY: The output FlexLogic™ operand (POTT OP) is produced according to the POTT scheme logic.
A seal-in time delay is applied to this operand for coping with noisy communication channels. The POTT SEAL-IN DELAY

defines a minimum guaranteed duration of the POTT OP pulse. As this operand activates the trip table of the POTT
scheme, the trip operands POTT TRIP A, B, C and 3P are sealed-in for the same period of time.
• GND DIR O/C FWD: This setting defines the FlexLogic™ operand (if any) of a protection element that is used in addi-
tion to the Zone 2 for identifying faults on the protected line, and thus, for keying the communication channel and initi-
ating operation of the scheme. Good directional integrity is the key requirement for an over-reaching forward-looking
protection element used as GND DIR O/C FWD. Even though any FlexLogic™ operand could be used as GND DIR O/C
FWD allowing the user to combine responses of various protection elements, or to apply extra conditions through Flex-
Logic™ equations, this extra signal is primarily meant to be the output operand from either the Negative-Sequence
Directional Overcurrent or Neutral Directional Overcurrent. Both of these elements have separate forward (FWD) and
reverse (REV) output operands. The forward indication should be used (NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD or NEUTRAL DIR OC1
FWD).
• POTT NO OF COMM BITS: This setting specifies the number of bits of the communications channel available for the
scheme. The transmit codes and Trip Tables of the POTT scheme are the same as those for the permissive under-
reaching transfer trip scheme. Please refer to the description of the PUTT scheme for more information.
• POTT RX1 through POTT RX4: These settings allow the user to select the FlexLogic™ operands that represent the
receive signals for the scheme. Typically input contacts interfacing with a signaling system are used. In single-bit appli-
cations, POTT RX1 must be used. In two-bit applications, POTT RX1 and POTT RX2 must be used. In four-bit applications,
POTT RX1, POTT RX2, POTT RX3, and POTT RX4 must be used.
SETTING
POTT SCHEME
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AND

AND
5
PH DIST Z2 PKP
OR
GND DIST Z2 PKP
SETTINGS
SETTING POTT SEAL-IN
DELAY:
GND DIR O/C FWD: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR 0 POTT OP
AND t RST
Off = 0
SETTINGS POTT NO OF COMM

BITS:
POTT NO OF COMM SETTINGS
BITS: RUN
POTT RX PICKUP
DELAY: AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Phase
POTT RX1: POTT TRIP A
t PKP Selector
AND RX TRIP TABLE
Off = 0 0 POTT TRIP B
POTT TRIP C
POTT RX2: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS POTT TRIP 3P
SETTINGS
Off = 0 AR FORCE 3P TRIP
TRANS BLOCK PICKUP AND
DELAY: OPEN POLE OP
POTT RX3: OR
TRANS BLOCK RESET
Off = 0 DELAY: POTT NO OF COMM
t PKP BITS:
POTT RX4: t RST OR RUN
Off = 0
0
100 msec
SETTING TRANSMIT TABLE
POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO:
Disabled SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

Off
LINE END OPEN PICKUP POTT TX1
DELAY: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POTT TX2
Enabled AND RUN
LINE PICKUP LEO PKP
t PKP ECHO DURATION: POTT TX3
0 AND POTT TX4
SETTING ECHO LOCKOUT:
Echo duration and lockout logic ECHO TABLE

POTT ECHO COND:
Custom RX
Off = 0
Phase
Selector
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR FORCE 3P TRIP 837014AD.CDR
OPEN POLE OP
Figure 5–113: POTT SCHEME LOGIC

e) HYBRID PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP

PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" PILOT SCHEMES !" HYBRID POTT SCHEME
# HYBRID POTT SCHEME HYB POTT SCHEME Range: Disabled, Enabled

HYB POTT PERMISSIVE Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
ECHO: Disabled
HYB POTT ECHO COND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
HYB POTT WEAK Range: Disabled, Enabled, Custom
MESSAGE
INFEED: Enabled
HYB POTT W/I COND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
HYB POTT RX PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.020 s
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.090 s
ECHO DURATION: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.100 s
5 ECHO LOCKOUT: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.250 s
HYB POTT SEAL-IN Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.010 s
MESSAGE
Off
GND DIR O/C REV: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
HYB POTT NO OF COMM Range: 1, 2, or 4
MESSAGE
BITS: 1
HYB POTT RX1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
HYB POTT SCHEME Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-Reset
HYB POTT EVENT: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
Generally, this scheme uses an overreaching Zone 2 distance element to essentially compare the direction to a fault at all
terminals of the line. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the D60 can be used in conjunction with the Zone
2 distance element to key the scheme and initiate operation. This increases the coverage for high-resistance faults.

The scheme is intended for three-terminal applications and for weak-infeed conditions. As a long reach of the overreaching
distance element may be required for three-terminal applications, transient blocking logic is provided for both distance and
ground directional overcurrent elements. In order to cope with weak-infeed conditions an echo feature is made available.
By default the scheme uses the reverse-looking Zone 4 distance element to identify reverse faults. Additionally, reverse-
looking ground directional overcurrent functions can be used in conjunction with the Zone 4.
For proper operation, the Zone 2 and 4 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set per rules
of distance relaying. The Line Pickup element should be enabled, configured and set properly to detect line-end-open/
weak-infeed and undervoltage conditions. If used by the scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s)
must be enabled, configured, and set accordingly.
with information received from the remote terminal. The scheme generates output operands (HYBRID POTT TX1 through
HYBRID POTT TX4) that are used to transmit the signal to the remote terminal(s). Choices of communications channel
include remote inputs/outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output
operand should be assigned to operate an output contact connected to key the transmitter at the interface. When used with
telecommunications facilities the output operands should be assigned to operate output contacts connected to assert the
individual bits at the interface.
When used in conjunction with the Trip Output element, the scheme is pre-configured to initiate trip, breaker fail and single-
• HYB POTT PERMISSIVE ECHO: If set to “Enabled”, the scheme sends a permissive echo signal to the remote end(s)
using a pre-programmed logic (refer to the logic diagram below). If set to “Custom”, the echo signal is sent if a condi-
tion selected via the HYB POTT ECHO COND setting is satisfied. The echo is sent only once and then the logic locks out 5
for the time specified by the ECHO LOCKOUT setting. The duration of the echo pulse is settable as ECHO DURATION.
Operation of the overreaching protection elements (distance zone 2 or GND DIR O/C FWD setting) inhibits the echo.
• HYB POTT ECHO COND: This setting specifies a user-selected echo condition and applies only if the HYB POTT PER-
is set to “Custom”.
MISSIVE ECHO
• HYB POTT WEAK INFEED: If this setting is set to “Enabled”, the scheme activates both the keying and operating
paths using a pre-programmed weak infeed logic (refer to the logic diagram below). If this setting is set to “Custom”,
the weak infeed condition is to be specified by the user via the HYB POTT W/I COND setting.
• HYB POTT W/I COND: This setting specifies user-selected weak infeed condition and applies only if the HYB POTT
WEAK INFEED is set to “Custom”.
• HYB POTT RX PICKUP DELAY: This setting enables the relay to cope with spurious received signals. The delay
should be set longer than the longest spurious TX signal that can be received simultaneously with the Zone 2 pickup.
The selected delay will increase the response time of the scheme.
• TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the Hybrid POTT
scheme for coping with the exposure of both the over-reaching Zone 2 and ground directional overcurrent function to
current reversal conditions.
The transient blocking logic applies to both operate (trip) and send (transmit) paths. Identifying the fault as a reverse
fault prevents the scheme from both operating and keying the channel. If the reverse fault condition prevails for TRANS
BLOCK PICKUP DELAY, the blocking operation will be extended by the transient blocking timer for TRANS BLOCK RESET
DELAY. This allows riding through current reversal conditions.
However, if distance Zone 1 picks up during the transient blocking condition, the blocking action is removed. This is to
cope with evolving faults when an external fault is followed by an internal fault. Without the Zone 1 feedback, the trip
would be delayed unnecessarily.
The TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY should not be longer than the fastest possible trip time for faults on an adjacent line
so that extended blocking action could be established. This should take into account the pickup time of the reverse-
looking elements of the scheme.
The delay defined by this setting should not be too short in order to avoid locking up a spurious reverse fault indication
that can occur during internal fault conditions.

• TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the Hybrid POTT
scheme for coping with the exposure of the overreaching protection functions to current reversal conditions (see also
the TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY).
This delay should be selected long enough to cope with transient conditions including not only current reversals but
also spurious negative- and zero-sequence currents occurring during breaker operations (in the case when Neutral
Directional or Negative-Sequence Directional overcurrent functions are used). The breaker failure time of the sur-
rounding protection systems within the reach of the ground directional function used by the Hybrid POTT scheme
should be considered to make sure that the ground directional function is not jeopardized during delayed breaker oper-
ations.
• ECHO DURATION: This setting defines the guaranteed and exact duration of the echo pulse. The duration is not
dependent on the duration and shape of received RX signals. This setting enables the relay to avoid a permanent lock-
up of the transmit/receive loop.
• ECHO LOCKOUT: This setting defines the lockout period for the echo logic after sending the echo pulse. This enables
the relay to avoid oscillations of the echo pulses during an autoreclosure dead-time after clearing an internal fault.
• POTT SEAL-IN DELAY: The output FlexLogic™ operand (HYB POTT OP) is produced according to the Hybrid POTT
scheme logic. The POTT SEAL-IN DELAY defines a minimum guaranteed duration of the HYB POTT OP pulse. As this
operand runs the trip table of the Hybrid POTT scheme, the trip operands HYB POTT TRIP A, B, C and 3P are sealed-in
for the same period of time.
• GND DIR O/C FWD: This setting defines the FlexLogic™ operand (if any) of a protection element that is used in addi-
tion to Zone 2 for identifying faults on the protected line, and thus, for keying the communication channel and initiating
operation of the scheme (both through the transient blocking logic). Good directional integrity is the key requirement for
an over-reaching forward-looking protection element used as GND DIR O/C FWD.
Even though any FlexLogic™ operand could be used as GND DIR O/C FWD enabling the user to combine responses of
5 various protection elements or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic™ equations, this extra signal is primarily
meant to be the output operand from either the Negative-Sequence Directional or Neutral Directional Overcurrent ele-
ments. Both these elements have separate forward (FWD) and reverse (REV) output operands. The forward indication
should be used (NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD).
The selected protection element (or elements in combination) should be coordinated with the selection of GND DIR O/C
REV. For all the forward external faults seen by an element used as GND DIR O/C FWD at one end of the line, the reverse-
looking element used as GND DIR O/C REV at the other end should pickup and provide a blocking signal.
• GND DIR O/C REV: This setting defines the FlexLogic™ operand (if any) of a protection element used in addition to
Zone 4 for identifying reverse faults, and thus, for stopping the transmit signal and initiating the transient blocking timer.
Good directional integrity is the key requirement for a reverse-looking protection element used as GND DIR O/C REV.
Even though any FlexLogic™ operand could be used as GND DIR O/C REV enabling the user to combine responses of
various protection elements or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic™ equations, this extra signal is primarily
meant to be the output operand from either the Negative Sequence Directional or Neutral Directional Overcurrent ele-
ment. Both these elements have separate forward (FWD) and reverse (REV) output operands. The reverse indication
should be used (NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV).
FWD. For all the forward external faults seen by an element used as GND DIR O/C FWD at one end of the line, the
reverse-looking element used as GND DIR O/C REV at the other end should pickup and provide a blocking signal.
• HYB POTT NO OF COMM BITS: This setting specifies the number of bits of the communications channel available for
the scheme. The transmit codes and trip table of the Hybrid POTT scheme are the same as those for the permissive
under-reaching transfer trip scheme. Please refer to the description of the PUTT scheme for more information.
• HYB POTT RX1 through HYB POTT RX4: These settings allow the user to select the FlexLogic™ operands that rep-
resent the receive signals for the scheme. Typically input contacts interfacing with a signaling system are used. In sin-
gle-bit applications, HYB POTT RX1 must be used. In two-bit applications, HYB POTT RX1 and HYB POTT RX2 must be
used. In four-bit applications, HYB POTT RX1, HYB POTT RX2, HYB POTT RX3, and HYB POTT RX4 must be used.

SETTING SETTING
HYB POTT WEAK
GND DIR O/C FWD:
INFEED:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OR
PH DIST Z2 PKP
GND DIST Z2 PKP
Disabled
Off OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LINE PICKUP LEO PKP
OPEN POLE OP Enabled
AND
LINE PICKUP UV PKP
SETTING
SETTING
HYB POTT W/I COND:
HYB POTT SEAL-IN
Custom
Off = 0 DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND 0
AND HYB POTT OP
SETTING t RST
HYB POTT SCHEME
FUNCTION: HYB POTT NO OF
Disabled=0 COMM BITS:
Enabled=1 RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Phase
SETTINGS Selector HYB POTT TRIP A
SETTING
RX HYB POTT TRIP B
HYB POTT NO OF HYB POTT RX PICKUP TRIP TABLE
COMM BITS: HYB POTT TRIP C
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS HYB POTT TRIP 3P
HYB POTT RX1: t PKP AR FORCE 3P TRIP
AND
0 OPEN POLE OP
Off = 0
HYB POTT RX2:
Off = 0 0
HYB POTT RX3:
Off = 0
OR
100 msec
5
SETTING
HYB POTT RX4:
HYB POTT SETTINGS
Off = 0 PERMISSIVE ECHO:
ECHO DURATION:
Disabled HYB POTT NO OF
Off
ECHO LOCKOUT: COMM BITS:
AND RUN
Echo duration and
Enabled AND lockout logic
SETTING AND
HYB POTT ECHO COND: ECHO TABLE

Custom
Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
HYB POTT TX1
SETTINGS HYB POTT TX2
SETTING RUN
TRANS BLOCK PICKUP AND
HYB POTT TX3
GND DIR O/C REV: DELAY: OR HYB POTT TX4
RX
TRANS BLOCK RESET
Off = 0
DELAY: Phase
t PKP Selector TRANSMIT TABLE
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OR OR
t RST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z4 PKP
GND DIST Z4 PKP AR FORCE 3P TRIP
PH DIST Z1 PKP OPEN POLE OP
GND DIST Z1 PKP 837015AE.CDR
Figure 5–114: HYBRID POTT SCHEME LOGIC

f) DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING

PATH: SETTINGS !" CONTROL ELEMENTS !" PILOT SCHEMES !" BLOCKING SCHEME
# BLOCKING SCHEME BLOCKING SCHEME Range: Disabled, Enabled

BLOCK RX CO-ORD PKP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.010 s
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.030 s
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.090 s
BLOCK SCHEME SEAL-IN Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.010 s
MESSAGE
Off
GND DIR O/C REV: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
BLOCK SCHEME NO OF Range: 1, 2, or 4
MESSAGE
COMM BITS: 1
BLOCK SCHEME RX1: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
5 BLOCK SCHEME RX2: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
Off
BLOCK SCHEME EVENT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
Generally, the scheme compares the direction to a fault at all terminals of the line. Unlike the permissive schemes, the
absence of a blocking signal permits operation of the scheme. Consequently, the scheme is biased toward dependability
and requires an "on/off" type of signaling.
By default this scheme uses only a forward-looking over-reaching Zone 2 distance element to identify forward faults.
Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone 2 distance element
to increase the coverage for high-resistance faults. Also by default, only a reverse-looking Zone 4 distance element to iden-
tify reverse faults. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone
4 distance element for better time and sensitivity coordination.
For proper operation, the Zone 2 and 4 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set per rules
of distance relaying. If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, con-
figured and set accordingly.
with information received from the remote terminal.
The scheme generates output operands (DIR BLOCK TX INIT and DIR BLOCK TX1 STOP through DIR BLOCK TX4 STOP) that
control the transmission of signals to the remote end(s). When used with telecommunications facilities the output operands
should be assigned to operate output contacts connected to key the transmitter at the interface.
The output operand from the scheme (DIR BLOCK A, B, C and 3P) must be configured to interface with other relay functions,
output contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be pro-
grammed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and autoreclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.

When used in conjunction with the Trip Output element, the scheme is pre-configured to initiate trip, breaker fail, and single-
• BLOCK RX CO-ORD PKP DELAY: This setting defines a delay for the forward-looking protection elements used by
the scheme for coordination with the blocking response from the remote end(s). This setting should include both the
response time of the protection elements used to establish a blocking signal and the total transmission time of that sig-
nal including the relay communications equipment interfacing and the communications channel itself.
• TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the Blocking
scheme for coping with the exposure of both the over-reaching Zone 2 and ground directional overcurrent function to
current reversal conditions.
The transient blocking logic applies to the send path only. Identifying the fault as a reverse fault establishes the block-
ing signal. If the reverse fault condition prevails for TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY, the blocking operation will be
extended by the transient blocking timer for TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY. This allows riding through current reversal
conditions. However, if Zone 1 picks up during the transient blocking condition, the blocking action is removed. This is
done to cope with evolving faults when an external fault is followed by an internal fault. Without the Zone 1 feedback,
the trip would be unnecessarily delayed.
The TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY should not be longer than the fastest possible trip time for faults on an adjacent line
so that the extended blocking action could be established. This should take into account the pickup time of the reverse-
looking elements of the scheme. The delay defined by this setting should not be too short in order to avoid locking up a
spurious reverse fault indication that can occur during internal fault conditions.
• TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY: This setting defines a transient blocking mechanism embedded in the Blocking
scheme for coping with the exposure of the overreaching protection functions to current reversal conditions (see also 5
the TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY).
This delay should be selected long enough to cope with transient conditions including not only current reversals but
also spurious negative and zero-sequence currents occurring during breaker operations (in the case when Neutral
Directional or Negative Sequence Directional overcurrent functions are used). Breaker failure time of the surrounding
protection systems within the reach of the ground directional function used by the Blocking scheme should be consid-
ered to make sure that the ground directional function is not jeopardized during delayed breaker operations.
• BLOCK SCHEME SEAL-IN DELAY: The output FlexLogic™ operand (DIR BLOCK OP) is produced according to the
Blocking scheme logic. The BLOCK SCHEME SEAL-IN DELAY defines a minimum guaranteed duration of the DIR BLOCK
OP pulse. As this operand runs the Trip Table of the Blocking scheme, the trip operands DIR BLOCK TRIP A, B, C and 3P
are sealed-in for the same period of time.
• GND DIR O/C FWD: This setting defines the FlexLogic™ operand (if any) of a protection element used in addition to
zone 2 for identifying faults on the protected line, and thus, for initiating operation of the scheme. Good directional
integrity is the key requirement for an over-reaching forward-looking protection element used as GND DIR O/C FWD.
Even though any FlexLogic™ operand could be used as GND DIR O/C FWD enabling the user to combine responses of
meant to be the output operand from either the Negative-Sequence Directional or Neutral Directional Overcurrent ele-
ments. Both these elements have separate forward (FWD) and reverse (REV) output operands.
The forward indication should be used (NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD). The selected protection ele-
ment (or elements in combination) should be coordinated with the selection of GND DIR O/C REV. For all the forward
external faults seen by an element used as GND DIR O/C FWD at one end of the line, the reverse-looking element used
as GND DIR O/C REV at the other end should pickup and provide a blocking signal.
• GND DIR O/C REV: This setting defines the FlexLogic™ operand (if any) of a protection element that is used in addi-
tion to zone 4 for identifying reverse faults, and thus, for initiating the blocking signal. Either reverse-looking directional
or non-directional overcurrent protection element may be used as GND DIR O/C REV.
Even though any FlexLogic™ operand could be used as GND DIR O/C REV, enabling the user to combine responses of
meant to be the output operand from either the Negative Sequence Directional, Neutral Directional, or a non-direc-
tional instantaneous overcurrent element.

FWD. For all the forward external faults seen by an element used as GND DIR O/C FWD at one end of the line, the
reverse-looking element used as GND DIR O/C REV at the other end should pickup and provide a blocking signal.
• BLOCK SCHEME NO OF COMM BITS: This setting specifies the number of bits of the communications channel avail-
able for the scheme. With only one bit available, the scheme sends the blocking signal by asserting the DIR BLOCK TX
INIT FlexLogic™ operand. This operand should be used to start the channel (set the blocking signal). On internal faults,
the scheme removes the blocking signal by asserting the DIR BLOCK TX1 FlexLogic™ operand.
For tripping the scheme responds to lack of the blocking signal on Bit 1 (BLOCK SCHEME RX1 setting). The scheme uses
only local fault type identification provided by the Phase Selector to assert the output operands DUTT TRIP A, B, C and
3P. Please refer to Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for more information on communications.
To take advantage of the four-bit blocking scheme, the blocking signals should be initiated from a disturbance detector.
This can be accomplished by using both 50DD and DIR BLOCK TX INIT to assert the blocking signal. Subsequently, spe-
cific bits will be de-asserted by the scheme based on the phase selection providing the peer relay with more informa-
tion on the fault type. Otherwise, the peer relay issues a three-pole trip upon receiving the bit pattern (0, 0, 0, 0).
• BLOCK SCHEME RX1 through BLOCK SCHEME RX4: These settings allow the user to select the FlexLogic™ oper-
ands that represent the receive signals for the scheme. Typically input contacts interfacing with a signaling system are
used. In single-bit applications, BLOCK SCHEME RX1 must be used. In two-bit applications, BLOCK SCHEME RX1 and
BLOCK SCHEME RX2 must be used. In four-bit applications, BLOCK SCHEME RX1, BLOCK SCHEME RX2, BLOCK SCHEME
RX3, and BLOCK SCHEME RX4 must be used.
SETTING
BLOCKING SCHEME
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
5
Enabled=1
BLOCKING RX CO-ORD PKP
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PH DIST Z2 PKP AND t PKP
0
GND DIST Z2 PKP
SETTING OR
GND DIR O/C FWD:

SETTING
Off = 0
BLOCK SCHEME
SEAL-IN DELAY:
0
SETTING AND t RST DIR BLOCK OP
BLOCK SCHEME NO OF
COMM BITS: BLOCK SCHEME NO OF BLOCK SCHEME NO OF
COMM BITS: COMM BITS:
BLOCKING SCHEME RX1:
RUN RUN
Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Phase
Selector DIR BLOCK TRIP A
RX TRIP TABLE DIR BLOCK TRIP B
Off = 0 TRIP TABLE DIR BLOCK TRIP C
PATTERN RECEIVED FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIR BLOCK TRIP 3P
BLOCKING SCHEME RX3: (See Chapter 8) AR FORCE 3P TRIP
Off = 0 OPEN POLE OP
Off = 0 BLOCK SCHEME NO OF

COMM BITS:
AND RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Phase
Selector DIR BLOCK TX1 STOP
SETTING RX TRANSMIT TABLE DIR BLOCK TX2 STOP
DIR BLOCK TX3 STOP
GND DIR O/C REV. FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIR BLOCK TX4 STOP
Off = 0 AR FORCE 3P TRIP
AND
OPEN POLE OP
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SETTINGS
PH DIST Z4 PKP
TRANS BLOCK PICKUP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
GND DIST Z4 PKP DELAY:
OR DIR BLOCK TX INIT
TRANS BLOCK RESET
DELAY:
t PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS t RST
OR
PH DIST Z1 PKP
OR 837016AB.CDR
GND DIST Z1 PKP
Figure 5–115: DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING SCHEME LOGIC

5 SETTINGS 5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.7INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS ! CONTACT INPUTS
# CONTACT INPUTS
#
# CONTACT INPUT H5a

#
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
Cont Ip 1
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

MESSAGE
DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
↓
# CONTACT INPUT xxx

#
# CONTACT INPUT
# THRESHOLDS
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
5
Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
↓
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group
of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which
contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CON-
TACT IP X On” (Logic 1) FlexLogic™ operand corresponds to contact input “X” being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corre-
sponds to contact input “X” being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to
overcome ‘contact bouncing’ conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maxi-
mum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT
INPUT EVENTS is set to “Enabled”, every change in the contact input state will trigger an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below.
The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a user-
settable debounce time in order for the D60 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set
at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (de-
bounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic™ operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the con-
tact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic™ equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic™ operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the fig-
ure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well
as FlexLogic™ equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS
The FlexLogic™ operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one
protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs
just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of
the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a
delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is
below 1msec.
For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a con-
tact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic™ operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 µs accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce
timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic™ operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change.
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
VOLTAGE
INPUT
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
6
2 1 3 5
Time stamp of the first
5
TM
Time stamp of the first At this time, the The FlexLogic scan corresponding to the
At this time, the new
scan corresponding to new (HIGH) operand is going to new validated state is
(LOW) contact state is
the new validated state is contact state is be asserted at this logged in the SOE record
validated
logged in the SOE record validated protection pass
7
RAW CONTACT
The FlexLogicTM
operand is going to be
STATE
de-asserted at this
protection pass
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
4
The FlexLogicTM operand
DEBOUNCE TIME
The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the
SCAN TIME (user setting)
changes reflecting the validated contact state
FLEXLOGICTM
(0.5 msec) validated contact state

OPERAND
PROTECTION PASS
(8 times a cycle controlled by the
frequency tracking mechanism)
842709A1.cdr
Figure 5–116: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING
Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value should be selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V
sources and 166 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in
the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed (52b)"
CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.

5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" VIRTUAL INPUTS !
# VIRTUAL INPUT 1 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID: Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
TYPE: Latched
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
# VIRTUAL INPUT 2
As above for Virtual Input 1
#
↓ ↓
# VIRTUAL INPUT 32
As above for Virtual Input 1
#
# UCA SBO TIMER UCA SBO TIMEOUT: Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1

# 30 s
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (COMMANDS
menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to OFF = 0 unless the appropriate input sig-
5
nal is received. Virtual input states are preserved through a control power loss.
If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to "Disabled", the input will be forced to 'OFF' (Logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter
the input. If set to "Enabled", the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic™ operands
in response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: Self-Reset and Latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is "Self-Reset", when the input signal
transits from OFF = 0 to ON = 1, the output operand will be set to ON = 1 for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic™ equa-
tions and then return to OFF = 0. If set to "Latched", the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state
as the most recent received input, ON =1 or OFF = 0.
The "Self-Reset" operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic™
equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic™ equation, it will
NOTE
likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic™ timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
The Select-Before-Operate timer sets the interval from the receipt of an Operate signal to the automatic de-selection of the
virtual input, so that an input does not remain selected indefinitely (used only with the UCA Select-Before-Operate feature).
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1 S
AND
Latch
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1”
SETTING
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0” R VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
AND
SETTING (Flexlogic Operand)
OR
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched AND
Self - Reset 827080A2.CDR
Figure 5–117: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC

5.7.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" CONTACT OUTPUTS ! CONTACT OUTPUT H1
# CONTACT OUTPUT H1 CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

# Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Enabled
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis
which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs.
An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic™
operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic™ operand may be used to
SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
EXAMPLE:
The trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A contacts (see the
Trip Circuit Example in the Digital Elements section). The monitor will set a flag (see the Specifications for Form-A). The
name of the FlexLogic™ operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the name of the
5 flag; e.g. ‘Cont Op 1 IOn’ or ‘Cont Op 1 IOff’.

In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper-
ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the
trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping
circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called "trip seal-in".
This can be realized in the UR using the ‘Cont Op 1 IOn’ FlexLogic™ operand to seal-in the Contact Output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: “Cont Op 1"
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic™ operand
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: “Cont Op 1 IOn”
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: “Enabled”
5.7.4 LATCHING OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" LATCHING OUTPUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a
# LATCHING OUTPUT H1a ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

# OUTPUT H1a L-Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1a RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1a TYPE: Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant
MESSAGE
Operate-dominant
OUTPUT H1a EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled

The D60 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such
they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and pop-
ulates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware
before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic™).
The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all
latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching con-
tacts when replacing a module.
Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabili-
ties for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test error is
declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic™ operand, event, and target message.
• OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand to operate the ‘close coil’ of the contact. The
relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off),
any activity of the OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and
RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
• OUTPUT H1a RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand to operate the ‘trip coil’ of the contact. The relay
will seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any
activity of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET
inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
• OUTPUT H1a TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the
OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to
“Operate-dominant” and will open if set to “Reset-dominant”.
Application Example 1:
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The 5
following settings should be applied.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUT !" LATCHING OUT-
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”

OUTPUT H1a RESET: “PUSHBUTTON 2 ON”
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUT-
TONS !" USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset” PUSHBUTTON 2 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s” PUSHBTN 2 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s”
A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while
the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed
after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a and LATCHING OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1” OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”

OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2” OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO1”
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not
operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. There-
fore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such
as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the con-
trol inputs as shown in the next application example.
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement
this functionality as described below:

Write the following FlexLogic™ equation (enerVista UR Setup example shown):
Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a and LATCHING OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1” OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”

OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO4” OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO3”
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1
is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
PUTS ! LATCHING OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2”
5.7.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ! VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(64)
# VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

# Virt Op 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 64 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic™. If not assigned, the output will be forced to ‘OFF’ (Logic
0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the
FlexLogic™ equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic™ and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings
would be programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip"
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"

5.7.6 REMOTE DEVICES
a) REMOTE I/O OVERVIEW

Remote inputs and outputs, which are a means of exchanging information regarding the state of digital points between
remote devices, are provided in accordance with the Electric Power Research Institute’s (EPRI) UCA2 “Generic Object Ori-
ented Substation Event (GOOSE)” specifications.
The UCA2 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet com-
munications facilities. For UR relays, Ethernet communications is provided only on the type 9G and 9H ver-
NOTE
sions of the CPU module.
The sharing of digital point state information between GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to FlexLogic™ to
allow distributed FlexLogic™ by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In
addition to digital point states, GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other information
required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data from only those mes-
sages that have originated in selected devices.
GOOSE messages are designed to be short, high priority and with a high level of reliability. The GOOSE message structure
contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The UCA specification provides 32 “DNA” bit
pairs, which are status bits representing pre-defined events. All remaining bit pairs are “UserSt” bit pairs, which are status
bits representing user-definable events. The UR implementation provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs.
The UCA2 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and
receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when the state of
any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the “default update” time) if a change-of-state has not occurred.
The transmitting device also sends a “hold time” which is set to three times the programmed default time, which is required
by the receiving device.
Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the
identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the mes-
5
sage “hold” time for the device. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to the “hold” time interval,
and if it has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communi-
cating, so it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. This mechanism allows a
receiving device to fail to detect a single transmission from a remote device which is sending messages at the slowest pos-
sible rate, as set by its “default update” timer, without reverting to use of the programmed default states. If a message is
received from a remote device before the “hold” time expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained
in the message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where ‘Offline’ indicates ‘non-communicat-
ing’, can be displayed.
The GOOSE facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs.
b) LOCAL DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING GOOSE MESSAGES

In a UR relay, the device ID that identifies the originator of the message is programmed in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP
!" INSTALLATION !" RELAY NAME setting.
c) REMOTE DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR RECEIVING GOOSE MESSAGES

PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE DEVICES ! REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
# REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

# Remote Device 1
Sixteen Remote Devices, numbered from 1 to 16, can be selected for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be pro-
grammed to capture messages from only those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific
remote devices by entering (bottom row) the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.

5.7.7 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE INPUTS ! REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
# REMOTE INPUT 1 REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE: Range: 1 to 16 inclusive

# Remote Device 1
REMOTE IN 1 BIT Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32
MESSAGE
PAIR: None
REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
STATE: Off
REMOTE IN 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
Remote Inputs which create FlexLogic™ operands at the receiving relay, are extracted from GOOSE messages originating
in remote devices. The relay provides 32 remote inputs, each of which can be selected from a list consisting of 64 selec-
tions: DNA-1 through DNA-32 and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the UCA2 specifi-
cations and is presented in the UCA2 DNA Assignments table in the Remote Outputs section. The function of UserSt inputs
is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic™ operand whose state is represented in the GOOSE message. A user
must program a DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic™ operand.
Remote Input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local
use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above.
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE selects the number (1 to 16) of the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously
assigned to the remote device via the setting REMOTE DEVICE NN ID (see the Remote Devices section). REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR
5 selects the specific bits of the GOOSE message required.
The REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or
the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “On” value defaults the input to Logic 1.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Off” value defaults the input to Logic 0.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 1.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
• Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 0.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
For additional information on the GOOSE specification, refer to the Remote Devices section in this chapter
and to Appendix C: UCA/MMS Communications.
NOTE

5.7.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS
a) DNA BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS ! REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1(32) BIT PAIR
# REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA- 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand

# DNA- 1 BIT PAIR Off
DNA- 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
Remote Outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic™ operands inserted into GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote
devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ oper-
and. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted.
Table 5–21: UCA DNA2 ASSIGNMENTS

DNA DEFINITION INTENDED FUNCTION LOGIC 0 LOGIC 1
1 OperDev Trip Close
2 Lock Out LockoutOff LockoutOn
3 Initiate Reclosing Initiate remote reclose sequence InitRecloseOff InitRecloseOn
4 Block Reclosing Prevent/cancel remote reclose sequence BlockOff BlockOn
5 Breaker Failure Initiate Initiate remote breaker failure scheme BFIOff BFIOn
6 Send Transfer Trip Initiate remote trip operation TxXfrTripOff TxXfrTripOn
7 Receive Transfer Trip Report receipt of remote transfer trip command RxXfrTripOff RxXfrTripOn
8 Send Perm Report permissive affirmative TxPermOff TxPermOn 5
9 Receive Perm Report receipt of permissive affirmative RxPermOff RxPermOn
10 Stop Perm Override permissive affirmative StopPermOff StopPermOn
11 Send Block Report block affirmative TxBlockOff TxBlockOn
12 Receive Block Report receipt of block affirmative RxBlockOff RxBlockOn
13 Stop Block Override block affirmative StopBlockOff StopBlockOn
14 BkrDS Report breaker disconnect 3-phase state Open Closed
15 BkrPhsADS Report breaker disconnect phase A state Open Closed
16 BkrPhsBDS Report breaker disconnect phase B state Open Closed
17 BkrPhsCDS Report breaker disconnect phase C state Open Closed
18 DiscSwDS Open Closed
19 Interlock DS DSLockOff DSLockOn
20 LineEndOpen Report line open at local end Open Closed
21 Status Report operating status of local GOOSE device Offline Available
22 Event EventOff EventOn
23 Fault Present FaultOff FaultOn
24 Sustained Arc Report sustained arc SustArcOff SustArcOn
25 Downed Conductor Report downed conductor DownedOff DownedOn
26 Sync Closing SyncClsOff SyncClsOn
27 Mode Report mode status of local GOOSE device Normal Test
28→32 Reserved
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see the Remote I/O Overview in the Remote Devices sec-
tion.
NOTE

b) USERST BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS ! REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1(32) BIT PAIR
# REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR Off
UserSt- 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
Remote Outputs 1 to 32 originate as GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the mes-
sage must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ operand. The setting above is used to select the
operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.
The following setting represents the time between sending GOOSE messages when there has been no change of state of
any selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" UCA/MMS PROTOCOL set-
tings menu.
DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1
TIME: 60 s
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see the Remote I/O Overview in the Remote Devices sec-
tion.
NOTE
5.7.9 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" RESETTING
5 # RESETTING RESET OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# Off
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once
set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition
has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic™ latches) to the reset
state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button, a remote device via a communications channel,
or any programmed operand.
When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic™ operands are created. These operands, which are
stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each cre-
ate the RESET OP FlexLogic™ operand. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The setting
shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.
5.7.10 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
a) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" DIRECT INPUTS ! DIRECT INPUT 1(32)
# DIRECT INPUT 1 DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: 1 to 16

# DEVICE ID: 1
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: 1 to 32
MESSAGE
BIT NUMBER: 1
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
DEFAULT STATE: Off
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
These settings specify how the Direct Input information is processed. The DIRECT INPUT DEVICE ID represents the source of
this Direct Input. The specified Direct Input is driven by the device identified here.

The DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER is the bit number to extract the state for this Direct Input. Direct Input x is driven by the bit
identified here as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the Direct Output Number of the sending device.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE represents the state of the Direct Input when the associated Direct Device is offline. The
following choices are available:
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “On” value defaults the input to Logic 1.
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Off” value defaults the input to Logic 0.
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
• Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
b) DIRECT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" INPUTS/OUTPUTS !" DIRECT OUTPUTS ! DIRECT OUTPUT 1(32)
# DIRECT OUTPUT 1 DIRECT OUT 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

# Off
DIRECT OUTPUT 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The DIR OUT 1 OPERAND is the FlexLogic™ operand that determines the state of this Direct Output.
c) APPLICATION EXAMPLES 5
The examples introduced in the Product Setup section for Direct I/Os are continued below to illustrate usage of the Direct
Inputs and Outputs.
EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING I/O CAPABILITIES OF A D60 RELAY
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of program-
mable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series
IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional I/Os and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via
single-channel digital communication cards as shown below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
Figure 5–118: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT I/OS

Assume Contact Input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings should be applied (Direct Input 5
and bit number 12 are used, as an example):
UR IED 1: DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = “2” UR IED 2: DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND = “Cont Ip 1 On”
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = “12”
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON.
EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure below.

UR IED 1 BLOCK
UR IED 2 UR IED 3 UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5–119: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

Assume that Phase IOC1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1 would trip the bus upon
detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay.
The following settings should be applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to sent the blocking signal and Direct Inputs
7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals):
UR IED 2: DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 1: DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2"

DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3"
5 DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3"

DIRECT INPUT 8 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability

DIRECT INPUT 9 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT INPUT 9
ON. Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to “On”), or to trip
the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to “Off”).
EXAMPLE 2: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5–120: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION

Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown
below. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.

TX1 RX1 RX2

UR IED 1 UR IED 2
RX1 TX1 TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5–121: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN-LOOP CONFIGURATION

In the above architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a ‘bridge’. The fol-
lowing settings should be applied:
UR IED 1: DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from IED 3)
UR IED 3: DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from IED 1) 5
UR IED 2: DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1"
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" (forward a message from 1 to 3)
DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6" (forward a message from 3 to 1)
Signal flow between the three IEDs is shown in the figure below:
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
DIRECT INPUT 6 DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 3 DIRECT INPUT 5

DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
842717A1.CDR
Figure 5–122: SIGNAL FLOW FOR DIRECT I/O EXAMPLE 3

In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, Direct
Inputs 5 and 6 should be ANDed in FlexLogic™ and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT
RX1 setting).

5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O 5 SETTINGS
5.8TRANSDUCER I/O 5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TRANSDUCER I/O !" DCMA INPUTS ! DCMA INPUT H1(W8)
# DCMA INPUT H1 DCMA INPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

DCMA INPUT H1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DCMA Ip 1
DCMA INPUT H1 Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
UNITS: µA
DCMA INPUT H1 Range: 0 to –1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, –1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA,
MESSAGE 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA
DCMA INPUT H1 MIN Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0.000
DCMA INPUT H1 MAX Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0.000
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital for-
mat for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common
transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are con-
tained in Chapter 3.
Before the dcmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
5 and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
dcmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels
with the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H.
The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled”. If “Disabled”, no actual values are created for the chan-
nel. An alphanumeric “ID” is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the
programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, °C, megawatts, etc. This ID is
also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The
DCMA INPUT H1 RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
The DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in
primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250°C; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1
MIN VALUE value is “0” and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE value is “250”. Another example would be a watts transducer with
a span from –20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE value would be “–20” and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX
VALUE value “180”. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.

5 SETTINGS 5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5.8.2 RTD INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TRANSDUCER I/O !" RTD INPUTS ! RTD INPUT H1(W8)
# RTD INPUT H1 RTD INPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

RTD INPUT H1 ID: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
RTD Ip 1
RTD INPUT H1 TYPE: Range: 100Ω Nickel, 10Ω Copper, 100Ω Platinum,
MESSAGE 120Ω Nickel
100Ω Nickel
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external Resistance Temperature Detectors and convert these
signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in
common use. Specific hardware details are contained in Chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of
a type 5C transducer module installed in slot H.
The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled”. If “Disabled”, there will not be an actual value created for
the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual values. It is also 5
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the
type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.
Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements™ feature.
In FlexElements™, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100°C. For example, a trip level of 150°C is achieved by setting
the operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement™ operands are available to FlexLogic™ for further interlocking or to operate an
output contact directly.
5.8.3 DCMA OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TRANSDUCER I/O !" DCMA OUTPUTS ! DCMA OUTPUT H1(W8)
# DCMA OUTPUT H1 DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
# SOURCE: Off
DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
MESSAGE
RANGE: –1 to 1 mA
DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MIN VAL: 0.000 pu
DCMA OUTPUT H1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MAX VAL: 1.000 pu
Hardware and software is provided to generate dcmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Specific hard-
ware details are contained in Chapter 3. The dcmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or
CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown below.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the
relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner used
for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as
the channel number.
Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an exam-
ple for channel M5 is shown).

The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently re-
scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE. The follow-
ing equation is applied:
 I min if x < MIN VAL


I out =  I max if x > MAX VAL (EQ 5.19)

 k ( x – MIN VAL ) + I min otherwise
where: x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting

Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE setting
k is a scaling constant calculated as:
I max – I min
k = ------------------------------------------------
- (EQ 5.20)
MAX VAL – MIN VAL
The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, e.g. when MAX VAL – MIN
VAL< 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.
Imax
OUTPUT CURRENT
5
Imin
DRIVING SIGNAL
MIN VAL MAX VAL 842739A1.CDR
Figure 5–123: DCMA OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC

The dcmA output settings are described below.
• DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values
(FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as
sources driving dcmA outputs. Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of FlexAnalog parameters.
• DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: This setting allows selection of the output range. Each dcmA channel may be set inde-
pendently to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available.
• DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current (see the following
examples). The setting is entered in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexEle-
ment™ base units.
• DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This
setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current (see the following
examples). The setting is entered in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexEle-
ment™ base units.
Three application examples are described below.
EXAMPLE 1:
A three phase active power on a 13.8 kV system measured via UR-series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the dcmA H1
output of the range of –1 to 1 mA. The following settings are applied on the relay: CT ratio = 1200:5, VT secondary 115, VT
connection is delta, and VT ratio = 120. The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0.90. The
power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20% overload compared to the nominal.

5 SETTINGS 5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
The nominal three-phase power is:
P = 3 × 13.8 kV × 0.8 kA × 0.9 = 17.21 MW (EQ 5.21)
The three-phase power with 20% overload margin is:

P max = 1.2 × 17.21 MW = 20.65 MW (EQ 5.22)
The base unit for power (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
P BASE = 115 V × 120 × 1.2 kA = 16.56 MW (EQ 5.23)
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
20.65 MW = – 1.247 pu, maximum power = 20.65 MW- = 1.247 pu
minimum power = –------------------------------ -------------------------- (EQ 5.24)
16.56 MW 16.56 MW
The following settings should be entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: “SRC 1 P”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: “–1 to 1 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: “–1.247 pu”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VALL “1.247 pu”
With the above settings, the output will represent the power with the scale of 1 mA per 20.65 MW. The worst-case error for
this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ± 0.005 × ( 1 – ( – 1 ) ) × 20.65 MW = ± 0.207 MW
• ±1% of reading error for the active power at power factor of 0.9
For example at the reading of 20 MW, the worst-case error is 0.01 × 20 MW + 0.207 MW = 0.407 MW. 5
EXAMPLE 2:
The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to 20 mA.
The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current should be monitored from 0 A upwards, allow-
ing for 50% overload.
The phase current with the 50% overload margin is:
I max = 1.5 × 4.2 kA = 6.3 kA (EQ 5.25)
The base unit for current (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
I BASE = 5 kA (EQ 5.26)
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
minimum current = 0 kA- = 0 pu, maximum current = 6.3 kA- = 1.26 pu

----------- ---------------- (EQ 5.27)
5 kA 5 kA
DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE: “SRC 1 Ia RMS”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 RANGE: “4 to 20 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 MIN VAL: “0.000 pu”
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ± 0.005 × ( 20 – 4 ) × 6.3 kA = ± 0.504 kA
• ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal
For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025 × 4.2 kA, 0.001 × 5 kA) + 0.504 kA = 0.515 kA.
EXAMPLE 3:
A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via Source 2 is to be monitored by the dcmA H3 output with a
range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection setting is
“Delta”. The voltage should be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal.

The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are:

400 kV 400 kV
V min = 0.7 × ------------------- = 161.66 kV, V max = 1.1 × ------------------- = 254.03 kV (EQ 5.28)
3 3
The base unit for voltage (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
V BASE = 0.0664 kV × 6024 = 400 kV (EQ 5.29)
The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are:
minimum voltage = 161.66 kV- = 0.404 pu, maximum voltage = 254.03 kV- = 0.635 pu
-------------------------- -------------------------- (EQ 5.30)
400 kV 400 kV
DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE: “SRC 2 V_1 mag”
DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE: “0 to 1 mA”
The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence quantities
scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in “Delta” (refer to the Metering Conventions section
in Chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings. Consequently the settings required in
this example differ from naturally expected by the factor of 3 .
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ± 0.005 × ( 1 – 0 ) × 254.03 kV = ± 1.27 kV
5 • ±0.5% of reading
For example, under nominal conditions, the positive-sequence reads 230.94 kV and the worst-case error is
0.005 x 230.94 kV + 1.27 kV = 2.42 kV.

5 SETTINGS 5.9 TESTING
5.9TESTING 5.9.1 TEST MODE
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING ! TEST MODE
## SETTINGS TEST MODE Range: Disabled, Enabled

## TESTING FUNCTION: Disabled
TEST MODE INITIATE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
On
The relay provides test settings to verify that functionality using simulated conditions for contact inputs and outputs. The
Test Mode is indicated on the relay faceplate by a flashing Test Mode LED indicator.
To initiate the Test mode, the TEST MODE FUNCTION setting must be “Enabled” and the TEST MODE INITIATE setting must be
set to Logic 1. In particular:
• To initiate Test Mode through relay settings, set TEST MODE INITIATE to “On”. The Test Mode starts when the TEST MODE
FUNCTION setting is changed from “Disabled” to “Enabled”.
• To initiate Test Mode through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic™ operand (pushbutton, digital input,
communication-based input, or a combination of these), set TEST MODE FUNCTION to “Enabled” and set TEST MODE INI-
TIATE to the desired operand. The Test Mode starts when the selected operand assumes a Logic 1 state.
When in Test Mode, the D60 remains fully operational, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection
and control elements, FlexLogic™, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally.
The only difference between the normal operation and the Test Mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The
former can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational; the latter can be forced to open, close, freeze,
or remain fully operational. The response of the digital input and output contacts to the Test Mode is programmed individu-
ally for each input and output using the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs test functions described in the fol- 5
lowing sections.
5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING !" FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
# FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont Ip 1 Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

# INPUTS :Disabled
FORCE Cont Ip 2 Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
MESSAGE
:Disabled
↓
FORCE Cont Ip xx Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

MESSAGE
:Disabled
The relay digital inputs (contact inputs) could be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode in the following ways:
• If set to “Disabled”, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can
be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the
test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence.
• If set to “Open”, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
• If set to “Closed”, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
The Force Contact Inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once
enabled, the relay is placed into Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test
Mode LED will be On, indicating that the relay is in Test Mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as “Dis-
abled”, “Open”, or “Closed”. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.

5.9 TESTING 5 SETTINGS
5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS !" TESTING !" FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
# FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont Op 1 Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

# OUTPUTS :Disabled
FORCE Cont Op 2 Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
MESSAGE
:Disabled
↓
FORCE Cont Op xx Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

MESSAGE
:Disabled
The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode.
If set to “Disabled”, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is Logic 1 and will
resets when its control operand is Logic 0. If set to “Energize”, the output will close and remain closed for the entire duration
of the Test Mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to “De-energize”,
the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of the status of the operand con-
figured to control the output contact. If set to “Freeze”, the output retains its position from before entering the Test Mode,
regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact.
These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Sec-
ond, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided.
Example 1: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
5 The Test Mode should be initiated from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as
“Latched” (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, Digital Input 1
should remain operational, Digital Inputs 2 and 3 should open, and Digital Input 4 should close. Also, Contact Output 1
should freeze, Contact Output 2 should open, Contact Output 3 should close, and Contact Output 4 should remain fully
operational. The required settings are shown below.
To enable User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS !"
TESTING ! TEST MODE menu:
TEST MODE FUNCTION: “Enabled” and TEST MODE INITIATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
Make the following changes to configure the Contact I/Os. In the SETTINGS !" TESTING !" FORCE CONTACT INPUTS and
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS menus, set:
FORCE Cont Ip 1: “Disabled”, FORCE Cont Ip 2: “Open”, FORCE Cont Ip 3: “Open”, and FORCE Cont Ip 4: “Closed”
FORCE Cont Op 1: “Freeze”, FORCE Cont Op 2: “De-energized”, FORCE Cont Op 3: “Open”, and FORCE Cont Op 4: “Disabled”
Example 2: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or through Remote Input 1

The Test should be initiated locally from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or remotely through Remote Input 1. Both the
pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as “Latched”. The required settings are shown below.
Set the User Programmable Pushbutton as latching by changing SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS ! USER PUSHBUTTON 1 ! PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION to “Latched”. To enable either Pushbutton 1 or Remote
Input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS !" TESTING ! TEST MODE menu:
TEST MODE FUNCTION: “Enabled” and TEST MODE INITIATE: “VO1”

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
## ACTUAL VALUES # CONTACT INPUTS

See page 6-3.
## STATUS #
# VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 6-3.
#
# REMOTE INPUTS
See page 6-3.
#
# CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 6-4.
#
# VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 6-4.
#
# AUTORECLOSE
See page 6-4.
#
# REMOTE DEVICES
See page 6-4.
# STATUS
# REMOTE DEVICES
See page 6-5.
# STATISTICS
# DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 6-5.
#
# SELECTOR SWITCHES
See page 6-5.
#
# FLEX STATES
See page 6-5.
#
# ETHERNET
See page 6-6.
6
#
# DIRECT INPUTS
See page 6-6.
#
# DIRECT DEVICES
See page 6-7.
# STATUS
## ACTUAL VALUES # SOURCE SRC 1

See page 6-11.
## METERING #
# SOURCE SRC 2
#
# SOURCE SRC 3
#
# SOURCE SRC 4
#
# SYNCHROCHECK
See page 6-13.
#
# TRACKING FREQUENCY
See page 6-14.
#
# FLEXELEMENTS
See page 6-14.
#

6.1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES
# TRANSDUCER I/O
See page 6-14.
# DCMA INPUTS
# TRANSDUCER I/O
See page 6-14.
# RTD INPUTS
## ACTUAL VALUES # FAULT REPORTS

See page 6-15.
## RECORDS #
# EVENT RECORDS
See page 6-17.
#
# OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 6-17.
#
# DATA LOGGER
See page 6-17.
#
# MAINTENANCE
See page 6-18.
#
## ACTUAL VALUES # MODEL INFORMATION

See page 6-19.
## PRODUCT INFO #
# FIRMWARE REVISIONS
See page 6-19.
#

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 STATUS
6.2STATUS
For status reporting, ‘On’ represents Logic 1 and ‘Off’ represents Logic 0.
NOTE
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS ! CONTACT INPUTS
# CONTACT INPUTS Cont Ip 1

# Off
↓
↓
Cont Ip xx
MESSAGE
Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
input. For example, ‘Cont Ip 1’ refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the contact input.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" VIRTUAL INPUTS
# VIRTUAL INPUTS Virt Ip 1

# Off
↓
↓
Virt Ip 32
MESSAGE
Off
The present status of the 32 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual 6
input. For example, ‘Virt Ip 1’ refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the dis-
play indicates the logic state of the virtual input.
6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE INPUTS
# REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 Range: On, Off

# STATUS: Off
↓
↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 Range: On, Off

MESSAGE
STATUS: Off
The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here.

The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be “Offline” in which
case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.

6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" CONTACT OUTPUTS
# CONTACT OUTPUTS Cont Op 1

# Off
↓
Cont Op xx
MESSAGE
Off
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
output. For example, ‘Cont Op 1’ refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of
the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
For Form-A outputs, the state of the voltage(V) and/or current(I) detectors will show as: Off, VOff, IOff, On,
VOn, and/or IOn. For Form-C outputs, the state will show as Off or On.
NOTE
6.2.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
# VIRTUAL OUTPUTS Virt Op 1

# Off
↓
Virt Op 64
MESSAGE
Off
The present state of up to 64 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
output. For example, ‘Virt Op 1’ refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic™ equation for that output.
6 6.2.6 AUTORECLOSE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" AUTORECLOSE
# AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSE Range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4

# SHOT COUNT: 0
The automatic reclosure shot count is shown here.
6.2.7 REMOTE DEVICES
a) STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
# REMOTE DEVICES All REMOTE DEVICES Range: Yes, No

# STATUS ONLINE: No
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Range: Online, Offline
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Range: Online, Offline

MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
The present state of up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indi-
cates whether or not all programmed Remote Devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one
required Remote Device is not online.

b) STATISTICS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS ! REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
# REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1

# StNum: 0
REMOTE DEVICE 1
MESSAGE
SqNum: 0
Statistical data (2 types) for up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here.

The StNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at
least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented
whenever a GOOSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4,294,967,295 is incremented.
6.2.8 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! DIGITAL COUNTERS !" DIGITAL COUNTERS ! DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
# DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 ACCUM:

# Counter 1 0
Counter 1 FROZEN:
MESSAGE
0
Counter 1 FROZEN:
MESSAGE
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Counter 1 MICROS:
MESSAGE
0
The present status of the 8 digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter name,
includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date/time stamp
for the frozen count. The Counter n MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.
6.2.9 SELECTOR SWITCHES

6
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" SELECTOR SWITCHES
# SELECTOR SWITCHES SELECTOR SWITCH 1 Range: Current Position / 7

# POSITION: 0/7
SELECTOR SWITCH 2 Range: Current Position / 7
MESSAGE
POSITION: 0/7
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the
actual value.
6.2.10 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" FLEX STATES
# FLEX STATES PARAM 1: Off Range: Off, On

# Off
↓
PARAM 256: Off Range: Off, On

MESSAGE
Off
There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.

6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.11 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" ETHERNET
# ETHERNET ETHERNET PRI LINK Range: Fail, OK

# STATUS: OK
ETHERNET SEC LINK Range: Fail, OK
MESSAGE
STATUS: OK
6.2.12 DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT INPUTS
# DIRECT INPUTS AVG MSG RETURN

# TIME CH1: 0 ms
UNRETURNED MSG
MESSAGE
COUNT CH1: 0
CRC FAIL COUNT
MESSAGE
CH1: 0
AVG MSG RETURN
MESSAGE
TIME CH2: 0 ms
UNRETURNED MSG
MESSAGE
COUNT CH2: 0
CRC FAIL COUNT
MESSAGE
CH2: 0
DIRECT INPUT 1:
MESSAGE
On
6 ↓
DIRECT INPUT 32:

MESSAGE
On
The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input/output
ring configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last 10
messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules.
The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that do not
make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the
direct output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts may indicate
on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or the relay(s). The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL COUNT
values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command.
The DIRECT INPUT x values represent the state of the x-th direct input.

6.2.13 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES ! STATUS !" DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
# DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE 1

# STATUS STATUS: Offline
DIRECT DEVICE 2
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
↓
DIRECT DEVICE 8
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
These actual values represent the state of Direct Devices 1 through 8.

6.3 METERING 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3METERING 6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS
a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING POWER AND ENERGY

The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR-series relays.
PER IEEE CONVENTIONS

Generator
PARAMETERS AS SEEN
G BY THE UR RELAY
Voltage +Q
VCG
WATTS = Positive IC
PF = Lead PF = Lag
VARS = Positive
PF = Lag IA
VAG -P +P
Current
IB IA
PF = Lag PF = Lead
UR RELAY
VBG -Q
M LOAD
- 1
Inductive Resistive S=VI
Generator
VCG
+Q
Voltage
PF = Lead PF = Lag
WATTS = Positive
IA
VARS = Negative IC
PF = Lead VAG -P +P
IA
Current
PF = Lag PF = Lead
IB
UR RELAY
VBG -Q
S=VI
6
LOAD
- 2
Resistive
Inductive Resistive
M LOAD
VCG +Q
Voltage
PF = Lead PF = Lag
IB
IA
WATTS = Negative
VAG
VARS = Negative -P +P
PF = Lag
IA
IC PF = Lag PF = Lead
Current
VBG
-Q
UR RELAY
G S=VI
- 3
Generator
Resistive
LOAD
VCG
+Q
Voltage IB
PF = Lead PF = Lag
WATTS = Negative IA
VARS = Positive VAG -P +P
PF = Lead
IC
IA
Current
PF = Lag PF = Lead
VBG -Q
UR RELAY
G 827239AC.CDR
S=VI
- 4
Generator
Figure 6–1: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 METERING
b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES

All phasors calculated by UR-series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that
maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected
by the SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM !" FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting
defines a particular Source to be used as the reference.
The relay will first determine if any “Phase VT” bank is indicated in the Source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is
used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any “Aux VT” bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage
channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this
hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include “Phase CT” bank and “Ground CT” bank.
If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The
phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to
more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
-270o
-225o -315o
positive
angle
direction
-180o 0o
UR phase angle
reference
-135o -45o
-90o 827845A1.CDR
6
Figure 6–2: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION
c) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

The UR-series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage,
and symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase
angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument
transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages.
For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common refer-
ence as described in the previous sub-section.
WYE-Connected Instrument Transformers:
• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
1 1
V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG ) V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
3 3
1 2 1 2
V_1 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG ) V_1 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG )
3 3
1 2 1 2
V_2 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG ) V_2 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG )
3 3
The above equations apply to currents as well.

DELTA-Connected Instrument Transformers:

• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
V_0 = N/A V_0 = N/A

1 ∠– 30 ° 1 ∠30° 2
2
V_1 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA ) V_1 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA )
3 3 3 3
1 ∠ 30° 1 ∠– 30 ° 2
2
V_2 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA ) V_2 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA )
3 3 3 3
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to
zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation.
Table 6–1: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V * VT RELAY INPUTS, SEC. V SYMM. COMP, SEC. V
CONN.
VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5AC F6AC F7AC V0 V1 V2
13.9 76.2 79.7 84.9 138.3 85.4 WYE 13.9 76.2 79.7 19.5 56.5 23.3
∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–313° ∠–97° ∠–241° ∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–192° ∠–7° ∠–187°
UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2 84.9 138.3 85.4 DELTA 84.9 138.3 85.4 N/A 56.5 23.3
can be determined) ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠–54° ∠–234°
* The power system voltages are phase-referenced – for simplicity – to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a
relative matter. It is important to remember that the UR displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS
!" SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM !" FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
SYSTEM VOLTAGES SYMMETRICAL

COMPONENTS
UR phase angle
6
reference
1
UR phase angle
A
reference
WYE VTs
C
B
0
2
U
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
le
A U
1
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
DELTA VTs le
C
B
2
827844A1.CDR
Figure 6–3: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

6.3.2 SOURCES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING ! SOURCE SRC 1 !
Because energy values are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing CT or VT characteristics.
NOTE
# PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000

# SRC 1 b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ia:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ib:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ic:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS In:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR In:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0° 6
SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
# GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ig:

# SRC 1 0.000 A
SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
# PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vag:

# SRC 1 0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vcg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:

MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 RMS Vab:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbc:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vca:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
# AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vx:

# SRC 1 0.000 V
6 SRC 1 PHASOR Vx:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
# POWER SRC 1 REAL POWER

# SRC 1 3φ: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
3φ: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 var

SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

MESSAGE
3φ: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
3φ: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φa: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φb: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φc: 1.000
# ENERGY SRC 1 POS WATTHOUR:

# SRC 1 0.000 Wh
SRC 1 NEG WATTHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 Wh
SRC 1 POS VARHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 varh
SRC 1 NEG VARHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 varh
6
# FREQUENCY SRC 1 FREQUENCY:
# SRC 1 0.00 Hz
Four identical Source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the
user for the associated source (see SETTINGS !" SYSTEM SETUP !" SIGNAL SOURCES).
SOURCE FREQUENCY is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a
Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration
(see the SYSTEM SETUP !" POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The
final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and
transients.
6.3.3 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" SYNCHROCHECK ! SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)
# SYNCHROCHECK 1 SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA

# VOLT: 0.000 V
SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA
MESSAGE
PHASE: 0.0°
SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA
MESSAGE
FREQ: 0.00 Hz
The Actual Values menu for Synchrocheck 2 is identical to that of Synchrocheck 1. If a synchrocheck function setting is
"Disabled", the corresponding actual values menu item will not be displayed.

6.3.4 TRACKING FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" TRACKING FREQUENCY
# TRACKING FREQUENCY TRACKING FREQUENCY:

# 60.00 Hz
The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on configuration of the reference source. The
TRACKING FREQUENCY is based upon positive sequence current phasors from all line terminals and is synchronously
adjusted at all terminals. If currents are below 0.125 pu, then the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is used.
6.3.5 FLEXELEMENTS™
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" FLEXELEMENTS ! FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
# FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1
# OpSig: 0.000 pu
The operating signals for the FlexElements™ are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units.
Table 6–2: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS

BREAKER ARCING AMPS BASE = 2000 kA2 × cycle
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C)
dcmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100°C
SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
6 SOURCE ENERGY
(SRC X Positive and Negative
Watthours); (SRC X Positive and
EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
Negative Varhours)
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SYNCHROCHECK VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and –IN inputs
(Max Delta Volts)
6.3.6 TRANSDUCER I/O
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS ! DCMA INPUT xx
# DCMA INPUT xx DCMA INPUT xx

# 0.000 mA
Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel ID
and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" METERING !" TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS ! RTD INPUT xx
# RTD INPUT xx RTD INPUT xx

# -50 °C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel ID
and the bottom line as the value.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS
6.4RECORDS 6.4.1 FAULT REPORTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS ! FAULT REPORTS ! FAULT REPORT 1(15)
NO FAULTS TO REPORT
or
# FAULT REPORT 1 FAULT 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
# LINE ID: SRC 1
FAULT 1 DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD
MESSAGE
2000/08/11
FAULT 1 TIME: Range: HH:MM:SS.ssssss
MESSAGE
00:00:00.000000
FAULT 1 TYPE: where applicable
MESSAGE
ABG
FAULT 1 LOCATION where applicable
MESSAGE
00.0 km
FAULT 1 RECLOSE where applicable
MESSAGE
SHOT: 0
The latest 15 fault reports can be stored. The most recent fault location calculation (when applicable) is displayed in this
menu, along with the date and time stamp of the event which triggered the calculation. See the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT
SETUP !" FAULT REPORTS ! FAULT REPORT 1 menu for assigning the source and trigger for fault calculations. Refer to the
COMMANDS !" CLEAR RECORDS menu for manual clearing of the fault reports and to the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !"
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu for automated clearing of the fault reports.
Fault type determination is required for calculation of fault location – the algorithm uses the angle between the negative and
positive sequence components of the relay currents. To improve accuracy and speed of operation, the fault components of
the currents are used, i.e., the pre-fault phasors are subtracted from the measured current phasors. In addition to the angle
relationships, certain extra checks are performed on magnitudes of the negative and zero-sequence currents. 6
The single-ended fault location method assumes that the fault components of the currents supplied from the local (A) and
remote (B) systems are in phase. The figure below shows an equivalent system for fault location.
Local distance to fault Remote

Bus Bus
ZA IA mZ (1 – m)Z IB ZB
EA VF RF EB
VA VB
Figure 6–4: EQUIVALENT SYSTEM FOR FAULT LOCATION

The following equations hold true for this equivalent system.
VA = m ⋅ Z ⋅ IA + RF ⋅ ( IA + IB ) (EQ 6.1)
where: m = sought pu distance to fault, Z = positive sequence impedance of the line.

The currents from the local and remote systems can be parted between their fault (F) and pre-fault load (pre) components:
I A = I AF + I Apre (EQ 6.2)

6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
and neglecting shunt parameters of the line:

I B = I BF – I Apre (EQ 6.3)
Inserting the IA and IB equations into the VA equation and solving for the fault resistance yields:
VA – m ⋅ Z ⋅ IA
R F = ----------------------------------- (EQ 6.4)
I BF
I AF ⋅  1 + ------- -
 I AF
Assuming the fault components of the currents, IAF and IBF are in phase, and observing that the fault resistance, as imped-
ance, does not have any imaginary part gives:
VA – m ⋅ Z ⋅ IA
Im  ----------------------------------- = 0 (EQ 6.5)
I AF
where: Im() represents the imaginary part of a complex number. Solving the above equation for the unknown m creates the
following fault location algorithm:
Im ( V A ⋅ I AF∗ )
m = ---------------------------------------
- (EQ 6.6)
Im ( Z ⋅ I A ⋅ I AF∗ )
where * denotes the complex conjugate and:

I AF = I A – I Apre (EQ 6.7)
Depending on the fault type, appropriate voltage and current signals are selected from the phase quantities before applying
the two equations above (the superscripts denote phases, the subscripts denote stations):
A A
• For AG faults: V A = V A , I A = I A + K 0 ⋅ I 0A
B B
• For BG faults: V A = V A , I A = I A + K 0 ⋅ I 0A
C BC
• For CG faults: V A = V A , I A = I A + K 0 ⋅ I 0A
A B A B
• For AB and ABG faults: V A = V A – V A , IA = IA – IA
6 •
B
For BC and BCG faults: V A = V A – V A ,
C
IA = IA – IA
B C
C A C A
• For CA and CAG faults: V A = V A – V A , I A = I A – I A
where K0 is the zero sequence compensation factor (for the first six equations above)
• For ABC faults, all three AB, BC, and CA loops are analyzed and the final result is selected based upon consistency of
the results
The element calculates the distance to the fault (with m in miles or kilometers) and the phases involved in the fault.
SETTING
FAULT REPORT
TRIG:
Off=0
SETTING
AND RUN
FAULT REPORT
SOURCE: ACTUAL VALUES
0 FAULT REPORT #
SRC X 50DD OP
3 SEC
IA DATE
IB TIME
FAULT FAULT TYPE
IC LOCATOR
3I_0 FAULT LOCATION
VA FAULT# RECLOSE SHOT
VB
VC
SHOT # FROM
AUTO RECLOSURE
827094A4.CDR
Figure 6–5: FAULT LOCATOR SCHEME

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 RECORDS
6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" EVENT RECORDS
# EVENT RECORDS EVENT: XXXX

# RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
↓
EVENT: 3 EVENT 3
MESSAGE
POWER ON DATE: 2000/07/14
EVENT: 2 EVENT 3
MESSAGE
POWER OFF TIME: 14:53:00.03405
EVENT: 1
MESSAGE Date and Time Stamps
EVENTS CLEARED
The Event Records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological
order from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new
record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated
with the event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS " CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records.
6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" OSCILLOGRAPHY
# OSCILLOGRAPHY FORCE TRIGGER? Range: No, Yes

# No
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
MESSAGE
0
AVAILABLE RECORDS:
MESSAGE
0
6
CYCLES PER RECORD:
MESSAGE
0.0
LAST CLEARED DATE:
MESSAGE
2000/07/14 015:40:16
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The
‘cycles per record’ value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillogra-
phy section of Chapter 5 for further details.
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting "Yes" to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS !"
CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing the oscillography records.
6.4.4 DATA LOGGER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" DATA LOGGER
# DATA LOGGER OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:

# 2000/01/14 13:45:51
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME:
MESSAGE
2000/01/14 15:21:19
The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME is the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It will be static until the log gets full,
at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate. The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME is the time the most recent sam-
ples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling rate. If Data Logger channels are defined, then both values are static.
Refer to the COMMANDS !" CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records.

6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4.5 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" RECORDS !" MAINTENANCE ! BREAKER 1(4)
# BREAKER 1 BKR 1 ARCING AMP φA:

# 0.00 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 ARCING AMP φB:
MESSAGE
0.00 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 ARCING AMP φC:
MESSAGE
0.00 kA2-cyc
MESSAGE
φA: 0 ms
MESSAGE
φB: 0 ms
MESSAGE
φC: 0 ms
BKR 1 OPERATING
MESSAGE
TIME: 0 ms
There is an identical menu for each of the breakers. The BKR 1 ARCING AMP values are in units of kA2-cycles. Refer to the
COMMANDS !" CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing breaker arcing current records. The BREAKER OPERATING TIME is
defined as the slowest operating time of breaker poles that were initiated to open.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" PRODUCT INFO ! MODEL INFORMATION
# MODEL INFORMATION ORDER CODE LINE 1: Example code shown

# D60-E00-HCL-F8F-H6H
ORDER CODE LINE 2:
MESSAGE
ORDER CODE LINE 3:

MESSAGE
ORDER CODE LINE 4:

MESSAGE
SERIAL NUMBER:
MESSAGE
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS

MESSAGE
000000000000
MANUFACTURING DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
0
OPERATING TIME:
MESSAGE
0:00:00
The product order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date/time of manufacture, and operating time are shown
here.
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES !" PRODUCT INFO !" FIRMWARE REVISIONS
# FIRMWARE REVISIONS D60 Line Relay Range: 0.00 to 655.35

Revision number of the application firmware.
6
# REVISION: 4.00
MODIFICATION FILE Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)
MESSAGE Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.
NUMBER: 0
BOOT PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35
MESSAGE Revision number of the boot program firmware.
REVISION: 1.13
FRONT PANEL PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35
MESSAGE Revision number of faceplate program firmware.
REVISION: 0.08
COMPILE DATE: Range: Any valid date and time.
MESSAGE Date and time when product firmware was built.
2003/11/20 04:55:16
BOOT DATE: Range: Any valid date and time.
MESSAGE Date and time when the boot program was built.
2003/11/20 16:41:32
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been
installed.

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU
COMMANDS
"
## COMMANDS
MESSAGE
## VIRTUAL INPUTS
## COMMANDS
MESSAGE
## CLEAR RECORDS
## COMMANDS
MESSAGE
## SET DATE AND TIME
## COMMANDS
MESSAGE
## RELAY MAINTENANCE
The Commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from
unauthorized access via the Command Password; see the Password Security section of Chapter 5. The following flash
message appears after successfully command entry:
COMMAND
EXECUTED
PATH: COMMANDS " COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
## COMMANDS Virt Ip 1 Range: Off, On

## VIRTUAL INPUTS Off
↓
↓
Virt Ip 32 Range: Off, On

MESSAGE
Off 7
The states of up to 32 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The
second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a logical state ‘Off’ (0) or ‘On’ (1).
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
PATH: COMMANDS " COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
## COMMANDS CLEAR FAULT REPORTS? Range: No, Yes

## CLEAR RECORDS No
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS? Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR DATA LOGGER? Range: No, Yes
No

7.1 COMMANDS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
CLEAR BREAKER 1 Range: No, Yes

ARCING AMPS? No
CLEAR BREAKER 2 Range: No, Yes
ARCING AMPS? No
CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED Range: No, Yes
ACCESS? No
CLEAR DIRECT I/O Range: No, Yes
COUNTERS? No Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
CLEAR ALL RELAY Range: No, Yes

RECORDS? No
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the Event Records. Data is cleared by changing a com-
mand setting to “Yes” and pressing the key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to “No”.
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS " SET DATE AND TIME
## COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME: (YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)

## SET DATE AND TIME 2000/01/14 13:47:03
The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B signal is not in use. The time setting is
based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The
new time will take effect at the moment the key is clicked.
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS " RELAY MAINTENANCE
## COMMANDS PERFORM LAMPTEST? Range: No, Yes

## RELAY MAINTENANCE No
UPDATE ORDER CODE? Range: No, Yes
No
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands are activated by changing a command setting
7 to “Yes” and pressing the key. The command setting will then automatically revert to “No”.
The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE
ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to
match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown.
UPDATING...
PLEASE WAIT
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER
CODE NOT UPDATED message will be shown.

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2 TARGETS
7.2TARGETS 7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
TARGETS
"
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
MESSAGE Example shown.
LATCHED
DIGITAL ELEMENT 16: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
MESSAGE Example shown.
LATCHED
MESSAGE
↓
↓
The status of any active targets will be displayed in the Targets menu. If no targets are active, the display will read No
Active Targets:
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES
When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that mes-
sage. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer
times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the tar-
get message.
The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a tar-
get message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed.
Table 7–1: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS

PRIORITY ACTIVE STATUS DESCRIPTION
1 OP element operated and still picked up
2 PKP element picked up and timed out
3 LATCHED element had operated but has dropped out
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed. 7
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS
The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and
minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a
target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the
RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.
Major self-test errors also result in the following:
• the critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized
• all other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation
• the faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off
• a RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded
Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. Refer to the settings in the User-Programmable Self-Tests section in
Chapter 5 for additional details.

7.2 TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
Table 7–2: MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

SELF-TEST ERROR LATCHED DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM HOW OFTEN THE WHAT TO DO
MESSAGE TARGET TEST IS PERFORMED
MESSAGE?
DSP ERRORS: Yes CT/VT module with digital signal Every 1/8th of a cycle. Cycle the control power (if the problem
A/D Calibration, A/D processor may have a problem. recurs, contact the factory).
Interrupt, A/D Reset, Inter
DSP Rx, Sample Int, Rx
Interrupt, Tx Interrupt, Rx
Sample Index, Invalid
Settings, Rx Checksum
DSP ERROR: Yes One or more DSP modules in a Rev. C DSP needs to be replaced Contact the factory
INVALID REVISION multiple DSP unit has Rev. C with a Rev. D DSP.
hardware
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH No Configuration of modules does not On power up; thereafter, the Check all modules against the order
with 2nd-line detail match the order code stored in the backplane is checked for missing code, ensure they are inserted
CPU. cards every 5 seconds. properly, and cycle control power (if
problem persists, contact factory).
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN No FlexLogic™ equations do not Event driven; whenever Flex- Finish all equation editing and use self
with 2nd-line detail compile properly. Logic™ equations are modified. test to debug any errors.
LATCHING OUTPUT No Discrepancy in the position of a Every 1/8th of a cycle. The latching output module failed.
ERROR latching contact between firmware Replace the Module.
and hardware has been detected.
PROGRAM MEMORY Yes Error was found while checking Once flash is uploaded with new Contact the factory.
Test Failed Flash memory. firmware.
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED No Settings indicate the unit is not On power up. Contact the factory.
calibrated.
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED No PRODUCT SETUP !" On power up and whenever the Program all settings (especially those
INSTALLATION setting indicates RELAY PROGRAMMED setting is under PRODUCT SETUP !"
relay is not in a programmed state. altered. INSTALLATION).
Table 7–3: MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

SELF-TEST ERROR LATCHED DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM HOW OFTEN THE WHAT TO DO
MESSAGE TARGET TEST IS PERFORMED
MESSAGE
BATTERY FAIL Yes Battery is not functioning. Monitored every 5 seconds. Reported Replace the battery.
after 1 minute if problem persists.
DIRECT RING BREAK No Direct input/output settings Every second. Check direct input/output configuration
configured for a ring, but the and/or wiring.
connection is not in a ring.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF No A direct device is configured but Every second. Check direct input/output configuration
not connected. and/or wiring.
EEPROM DATA Yes The non-volatile memory has been On power up only. If this message appears after an order
ERROR corrupted. code update is preformed, press the
RESET key to clear target message. In
other cases, contact the factory.
IRIG-B FAILURE No A bad IRIG-B input signal has been Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal Ensure the IRIG-B cable is connected,
7 detected is received. check cable functionality (i.e. look for

physical damage or perform continuity
test), ensure IRIG-B receiver is
functioning, and check input signal level
(it may be less than specification). If
none of these apply, contact the factory.
LATCHING OUT Yes Latching output failure. Event driven. Contact the factory.
ERROR
LOW ON MEMORY Yes Memory is close to 100% capacity. Monitored every 5 seconds. Contact the factory.
PRI ETHERNET FAIL Yes Primary Ethernet connection failed. Monitored every 2 seconds Check connections.
PROTOTYPE Yes A prototype version of the firmware On power up only. Contact the factory.
FIRMWARE is loaded.
REMOTE DEVICE OFF No One or more GOOSE devices are Event driven – occurs when a device Check GOOSE setup.
not responding. programmed to receive GOOSE
messages stops receiving. Every 1 to
60 s, depending on GOOSE packets.
SEC ETHERNET FAIL Yes Sec. Ethernet connection failed. Monitored every 2 seconds Check connections.
SNTP FAILURE No SNTP server not responding. 10 to 60 seconds. Check SNTP configuration and/or
network connections.
SYSTEM EXCEPTION Yes Abnormal restart from modules Event driven. Contact the factory.
being removed/inserted when
powered-up, abnormal DC supply,
or internal relay failure.
WATCHDOG ERROR No Some tasks are behind schedule. Event driven. Contact the factory.

8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS
8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1DISTANCE ELEMENTS 8.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The distance elements use memory voltage for polarization. Additional supervising functions – different for ground and
phase distance zones – complement a classical mho characteristic to enhance directional integrity and reach accuracy:
• To avoid overreaching during resistive faults under heavy pre-fault load conditions, the ground distance elements uti-
lize a load-adaptive (zero-sequence polarized) reactance characteristic to supervise the base mho characteristic.
• Both negative and zero-sequence currents are compared with the memory voltage to enhance directional integrity of
the ground distance elements.
• It is well known that ground distance elements – as per the principle of distance relaying – may have limited accuracy
during double-line-to-ground faults. In order to prevent maloperation in such cases the ground elements are blocked by
an extra “fault-type comparator” that utilizes the phase angle between the negative- and zero-sequence currents.
• The phase distance elements use reactance and memory polarized directional characteristics to supervise the mho
characteristic.
• Both ground and phase distance elements have the current supervision functions built-in.
The quadrilateral distance characteristic uses the reactance, directional, and current supervising functions as described
above. Right and left blinders adjustable as to both the resistive and angular positions complete the characteristic.
More information regarding the distance characteristics is found in the Distance Characteristics section. An example of
analysis of the steady-state operation of the distance elements is found in the Distance Elements Analysis section.
The relay provides four zones of distance protection. All zones are identical in terms of settings. However, Zone 1 has extra
adaptive mechanisms built-in to enhance the transient reach accuracy even when the voltage signals are supplied from
poor quality voltage sources such as Capacitive Voltage Transformers (CVTs). Ground Zones 2 through 5, in turn, have an
extra zero-sequence directional supervision implemented for their time-delayed operation after the memory expires. Con-
sequently, Zone 1 is recommended as an underreaching element, and Zones 2 through 5 are recommended as overreach-
ing elements and for time-delayed tripping.
The relay uses offset ground directional overcurrent functions as an optional supplement of the ground distance protection
for pilot-aided schemes. The elements are described in more details in the Ground Directional Overcurrent section.
The relay provides for an adaptive distance reach control to cope with the overreaching and sub-synchronous oscillations
when applied to, or in a near vicinity of series compensated lines. More details can be found in the Application on Series
Compensated Lines section.
The distance elements use phase angle comparators to shape their characteristics as described in the Distance Character-
istics section. The voltage and current phasors are estimated using optimized techniques as explained in the next section.
8.1.2 PHASOR ESTIMATION
The relay samples its input AC signals at 64 samples per power system cycle. A fast and accurate frequency tracking
mechanism ensures accurate filtering and phasor estimation during off-nominal frequency conditions.
The phasor estimation process for both currents and voltages is based on the commonly used Fourier algorithm. Due to a
different nature of signal distortions in the current and voltage signals digital pre-filtering algorithms have been, however,
designed and optimized separately for the current and voltage channels. 8
The current signals are pre-filtered using an improved digital MIMIC filter. The filter removes effectively the DC compo-
nent(s) guaranteeing transient overshoot below 2% regardless of the initial magnitude and time constant of the dc compo-
nent(s). The filter has significantly better frequency response for higher frequencies as compared with a classical MIMIC
filter. This was possible without introducing any significant phase delay thanks to the high sampling rate used by the relay.
The voltage signals are pre-filtered using a special digital filter designed to cope with CVT transients. The patented filter
combines filtering and memory actions enabling the relay to cope with CVT noise under high Source Impedance Ratios
(SIRs). The filter controls underestimation of the fault voltage magnitude to less than 1% of the nominal and prevents cer-
tain phase angle anomalies that can be encountered under heavy CVT noise and high SIRs.

8.1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8.1.3 DISTANCE CHARACTERISTICS
a) DEFINITIONS
The relay shapes its distance characteristics using phase angle comparators and voltage and current phasors estimated as
described in the previous section.
The following definitions pertain to all of the distance functions:
IA, IB, IC phase A, B, and C current phasors
IG ground current from a parallel line
VA, VB, VC phase A to ground, phase B to ground, and phase C to ground voltage phasors
()_1 positive-sequence phasor of () derived from the phase quantities
()_2 negative-sequence phasor of () derived from the phase quantities
()_0 zero-sequence phasor of () derived from the phase quantities
()M memorized value of ()
Z reach impedance (REACH ∠ RCA)
ZREV reverse reach impedance for non-directional applications (REV REACH ∠ REV REACH RCA + 180°)
ZD directional characteristic impedance (1 ∠ DIR RCA)
ZR right blinder characteristic impedance: ZR = RGT BLD × sin (RGT BLD RCA) × 1∠ (RGT BLD RCA – 90°)
ZL left blinder characteristic impedance: ZL = LFT BLD × sin (LFT BLD RCA) × 1∠ (LFT BLD RCA + 90°)
K0 zero-sequence compensating factor: K0 = (Z0/Z1 MAG ∠ Z0/Z1 ANG) – 1
K0M mutual zero-sequence compensating factor: K0M = 1/3 x Z0M/Z1 MAG ∠ Z0M/Z1 ANG
Θ non-homogeneity angle setting (NON-HOMOGEN ANG)
b) DIRECTIONAL MHO CHARACTERISTIC

The dynamic 100% memory polarized mho characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between:
AB phase element: (IA – IB) × Z – (VA – VB) and (VA – VB)_1M
BC phase element: (IB – IC) × Z – (VB – VC) and (VB – VC)_1M
CA phase element: (IC – IA) × Z – (VC – VA) and (VC – VA)_1M
A ground element: IA × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VA and VA_1M
B ground element: IB × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VB and VB_1M
C ground element: IC × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VC and VC_1M
The limit angle of the comparator is adjustable enabling the user to shape the characteristic as a mho or a lens as shown in
the figures below.The memory-polarized mho characteristic has an excellent directional integrity built-in as explained in the
Memory Polarization section.
X Reach setting X Reach setting
Comparator angle setting < 90
8
Comparator angle setting= 90
R 837715A2.CDR R 837714A2.CDR
MHO CHARACTERISTIC LENS CHARACTERISTIC
Figure 8–1: MHO AND LENS CHARACTERISTICS

c) NON-DIRECTIONAL MHO CHARACTERISTIC

The non-directional mho characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between:
AB phase element: (IA – IB) × Z – (VA – VB) and (VA – VB) – (IA – IB) × ZREV
BC phase element: (IB – IC) × Z – (VB – VC) and (VB – VC) – (IB – IC) × ZREV
CA phase element: (IC – IA) × Z – (VC – VA) and (VC – VA) – (IC – IA) × ZREV
A ground element: IA × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VA
and VA – (IA × ZREV + I_0 × K0 × ZREV + IG × K0M × ZREV)
B ground element: IB × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VB
and VB – (IB × ZREV + I_0 × K0 × ZREV + IG × K0M × ZREV)
C ground element: IC × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VC
and VC – (IC × ZREV + I_0 × K0 × ZREV + IG × K0M × ZREV)
d) MHO REACTANCE CHARACTERISTIC FOR DIRECTIONAL APPLICATIONS

The reactance characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between:
AB phase element: (IA – IB) × Z – (VA – VB) and (IA – IB) × Z
BC phase element: (IB – IC) × Z – (VB – VC) and (IB – IC) × Z
CA phase element: (IC – IA) × Z – (VC – VA) and (IC – IA) × Z
A ground element: IA × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VA and I_0 × Z
B ground element: IB × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VB and I_0 × Z
C ground element: IC × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VC and I_0 × Z
If the mho characteristic is selected, the limit angle of the comparator is adjustable concurrently with the limit angle of the
mho characteristic, resulting in a tent shape complementing the lens characteristic being effectively applied.
e) QUADRILATERAL REACTANCE CHARACTERISTIC FOR DIRECTIONAL APPLICATIONS

The quadrilateral reactance characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between:
AB phase element: (IA – IB) × Z – (VA – VB) and (IA – IB) × Z
BC phase element: (IB – IC) × Z – (VB – VC) and (IB – IC) × Z
CA phase element: (IC – IA) × Z – (VC – VA) and (IC – IA) × Z
A ground element: IA × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VA and (j × I_0 or j × I_2A) × ejΘ
B ground element: IB × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VB and (j × I_0 or j × I_2B) × ejΘ
C ground element: IC × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VC and (j × I_0 or j × I_2C) × ejΘ
The ground elements are polarized from either zero-sequence or negative-sequence current as per user-settings to maxi-
mize performance in non-homogenous systems. The polarizing current is additionally shifted by the user-selectable non-
homogeneity correction angle.
f) REVERSE QUADRILATERAL REACTANCE CHARACTERISTIC FOR NON-DIRECTIONAL APPLICATIONS

The reverse quadrilateral reactance characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between:
AB phase element: (IA – IB) × ZREV – (VA – VB) and (IA – IB) × ZREV 8
BC phase element: (IB – IC) × ZREV – (VB – VC) and (IB – IC) × ZREV
CA phase element: (IC – IA) × ZREV – (VC – VA) and (IC – IA) × ZREV
A ground element: IA × Z + I_0 × K0 × ZREV + IG × K0M × ZREV – VA and (j × I_0 or j × I_2A) × ej(180 + Θ)
B ground element: IB × Z + I_0 × K0 × ZREV + IG × K0M × ZREV – VB and (j × I_0 or j × I_2B) × ej(180 + Θ)
C ground element: IC × Z + I_0 × K0 × ZREV + IG × K0M × ZREV – VC and (j × I_0 or j × I_2C) × ej(180 + Θ)
The ground elements are polarized from either zero-sequence or negative-sequence current as per user-settings to maxi-
mize performance in non-homogenous systems. The polarizing current is additionally shifted by the user-selectable non-
homogeneity correction angle.

g) DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC
The directional characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between:
AB phase element: (IA – IB) × ZD and (VA – VB)_1M
BC phase element: (IB – IC) × ZD and (VB – VC)_1M
CA phase element: (IC – IA) × ZD and (VC – VA)_1M
A ground element: I_0 × ZD and VA_1M
IA_2 × ZD and VA_1M
B ground element: I_0 × ZD and VB_1M
IB_2 × ZD and VB_1M
C ground element: I_0 × ZD and VC_1M
IC_2 × ZD and VC_1M
The characteristic and limit angles of the directional comparator are adjustable independently from the mho and reactance
comparators. The directional characteristic improves directional integrity of the distance functions.
h) RIGHT BLINDER
The right blinder characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between the following signals:
AB phase element: (IA – IB) × ZR – (VA – VB) and (IA – IB) × ZR
BC phase element: (IB – IC) × ZR – (VB – VC) and (IB – IC) × ZR
CA phase element: (IC – IA) × ZR – (VC – VA) and (IC – IA) × ZR
A ground element: IA × ZR + I_0 × K0 × ZR + IG × K0M × ZR – VA and IA × ZR + I_0 × K0 × ZR + IG × K0M × ZR
B ground element: IB × ZR + I_0 × K0 × ZR + IG × K0M × ZR – VB and IB × ZR + I_0 × K0 × ZR + IG × K0M × ZR
C ground element: IC × ZR + I_0 × K0 × ZR + IG × K0M × ZR – VC and IC × ZR + I_0 × K0 × ZR + IG × K0M × ZR
The blinders apply to the Quad characteristic only.
i) LEFT BLINDER
The left blinder characteristic is achieved by checking the angle between the following signals:
AB phase element: (IA – IB) × ZL – (VA – VB) and (IA – IB) × ZL
BC phase element: (IB – IC) × ZL – (VB – VC) and (IB – IC) × ZL
CA phase element: (IC – IA) × ZL – (VC – VA) and (IC – IA) × ZL
A ground element: IA × ZL + I_0 × K0 × ZL + IG × K0M × ZL – VA and IA × ZL + I_0 × K0 × ZL + IG × K0M × ZL
B ground element: IB × ZL + I_0 × K0 × ZL + IG × K0M × ZL – VB and IB × ZL + I_0 × K0 × ZL + IG × K0M × ZL
C ground element: IC × ZL + I_0 × K0 × ZL + IG × K0M × ZL – VC and IC × ZL + I_0 × K0 × ZL + IG × K0M × ZL
The blinders apply to the Quad characteristic only.
j) FAULT-TYPE CHARACTERISTIC
The fault-type characteristic applies to ground elements only and is achieved by checking the angle between:
8 A ground element:
B ground element:
I_0
I_0
and
and
IA_2;
IB_2
C ground element: I_0 and IC_2
The limit angle of the comparator is not adjustable and equals 50°. The fault-type characteristic is intended to block the
ground distance elements during double-line-to-ground faults.
k) ZERO-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC

The extra zero-sequence characteristic applies to ground Zones 2 to 4 only and is achieved by checking angles between:
A ground element: I_0 × ZD and –V_0
B ground element: I_0 × ZD and –V_0
C ground element: I_0 × ZD and –V_0

The limit angle of the comparator is not adjustable and equals 90°. The zero-sequence directional characteristic improves
directional integrity for time-delayed operations after the memory expires.
l) OVERCURRENT SUPERVISION
The overcurrent supervision responds to the following currents:
AB phase element: (IA – IB) / 3
BC phase element: (IB – IC) / 3
CA phase element: (IC – IA) / 3
A, B, C ground element: 3 × I_0
The following tables summarize the characteristics of the distance elements
Table 8–1: DIRECTIONAL MHO PHASE DISTANCE FUNCTIONS

CHARACTERISTIC COMPARATOR INPUTS LIMIT ANGLE
Variable mho I×Z–V V_1M COMP LIMIT
Reactance I×Z–V I×Z COMP LIMIT
Directional I × ZD V_1M DIR COMP LIMIT
Table 8–2: DIRECTIONAL MHO GROUND DISTANCE FUNCTIONS

Variable mho I×Z–V V_1M COMP LIMIT
Reactance I×Z–V I_0 × Z COMP LIMIT
Directional I_0 × ZD V_1M DIR COMP LIMIT
Fault-type I_0 I_2 50° (removed during open pole conditions)
Zero-sequence I_0 × ZD –V_0 90° (Zones 2, 3 and 4 only; removed for
Zones 2 and 3 during open pole conditions)
Table 8–3: DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE FUNCTIONS

Reactance I×Z–V I×Z COMP LIMIT
Directional I × ZD V_1M DIR COMP LIMIT
Right Blinder I × ZR – V I × ZR 90°
Left Blinder I × ZL – V I × ZL 90°
Table 8–4: DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL GROUND DISTANCE FUNCTIONS

Reactance I×Z–V j × I_0 × ejΘ or j × I_2 × ejΘ COMP LIMIT
Directional I_2 × ZD V_1M DIR COMP LIMIT 8
Zero-sequence I_0 × ZD –V_0 90° (Zones 2, 3, and 4 only; removed for
Zones 2 and 3 during open pole conditions)
Table 8–5: NON-DIRECTIONAL MHO PHASE DISTANCE FUNCTIONS

Offset mho I×Z–V I × ZREV – V COMP LIMIT

Table 8–6: NON-DIRECTIONAL MHO GROUND DISTANCE FUNCTIONS

Offset mho I×Z–V I × ZREV – V COMP LIMIT
Table 8–7: NON-DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL PHASE DISTANCE FUNCTIONS

Forward Reactance I×Z–V I×Z COMP LIMIT
Reverse Reactance I × ZREV – V I × ZREV COMP LIMIT
Table 8–8: NON-DIRECTIONAL QUADRILATERAL GROUND DISTANCE FUNCTIONS

Forward Reactance I×Z–V j × I_0 × ejΘ or j × I_2 × ejΘ COMP LIMIT
Reverse Reactance I × ZREV – V –j × I_0 × ejΘ or –j × I_2 × ejΘ COMP LIMIT
8.1.4 MEMORY POLARIZATION
All distance functions use memory polarization. The positive-sequence voltage – either memorized or actual – is used as a
polarizing signal. The memory is established when the positive-sequence voltage remains above 80% of its nominal value
for five power system cycles. The memory voltage is a three-cycle old voltage.
Once established, the memory is applied for the user-specified time interval. The memory timer is started when the voltage
drops below 80% of nominal. After the memory expires, the relay checks the magnitude of the actual positive-sequence
voltage. If it is higher than 10% of nominal, the actual voltage is used; if lower, the memory voltage continues to be used.
The memory-polarized mho has an extra directional integrity built-in as illustrated below. The self-polarized mho character-
istic is shifted in the reverse direction for a forward fault by an amount proportional to the source impedance, and in the for-
ward direction for a reverse fault.
Memory-polarized mho
(Reverse fault)
Memory-polarized mho
8
Self-polarized mho (Forward fault)
837719A1.CDR
Figure 8–2: DYNAMIC SHIFT OF THE MHO CHARACTERISTIC

The same desirable effect of memory polarization applies to the directional comparator of the quadrilateral characteristic.

Memory-
polarized
(Reverse fault)
Self-polarized
Memory-
polarized
837724A1.CDR
(Forward fault)
Figure 8–3: DYNAMIC SHIFT OF THE MEMORY-POLARIZED DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC

Mutual zero-sequence compensation may raise concerns regarding directional integrity on reverse faults in the situation
when the relay gets ‘overcompensated’. This problem does not affect the D60 because its ground distance elements use
zero-sequence and negative-sequence currents in extra directional comparators. Both the currents are from the protected
line and are not affected by any compensation as the latter applies only to the reach defining comparators: the mho, reac-
tance and blinder characteristics.
8.1.5 DISTANCE ELEMENTS ANALYSIS
a) DESCRIPTION
This subsection shows how to analyze the operation of the distance elements in steady states using the results of short cir-
cuit studies. All quantities are secondary ohms, volts, and amperes. Ground phase A and phase AB distance elements are
analyzed.
Assume the following settings have been entered:
Phase Rotation: ABC Non-Homogeneity Correction Angle: 3°
Right Blinder Reach: 10 Ω Directional RCA: 88°
Nominal Secondary Voltage: 69.28 V Z0/Z1 Magnitude: 4.55
Right Blinder RCA: 88° Overcurrent supervision: 3 A
Distance Reach: 14 Ω Z0/Z1 Angle: –12°
Left Blinder Reach: 5 Ω Distance Comparator limit angle: 75°
Distance RCA: 88° Z0M/Z1 Magnitude: 0
Left Blinder RCA: 88° Directional Comparator limit angle: 75°
Polarizing Current: Zero-sequence
Assume the following signals are injected to the relay:
8
VA = 64.71 V ∠0.0° (pre-fault) IA = 4.47 A ∠–107.8°
VA = 25.43 V ∠–19.9° IB = 2.92 A ∠68.9°
VB = 80.22 V ∠–133.5° IC = 2.93 A ∠–51.1°
VC = 77.33 V ∠135.7°
Based on the entered setting the relay calculates:
K0 = 3.58 ∠–15.2° ZD = 1 Ω ∠88°
K0M= 0 ZR = 9.99 Ω ∠2°
Z = 14.00 Ω ∠88° ZL = 4.99 Ω ∠178°
For the assumed steady-state injection the relay calculates:
VA_1 = 58.83 V ∠–2.1° VA_1M = 64.71 V ∠0.0°

I_0 = 1.37 A ∠–68.2°

IA_2 = 1.37 A ∠–68.1°
–V_0 = 29.18 V ∠8.4°
(VA–VB)_1 = 93.35 V ∠32.0°
(VA–VB)_1M = 112.08 V ∠30.0°
IA–IB = 7.39 A ∠–109.1°
b) MHO PHASE A TO GROUND ELEMENT (BEFORE MEMORY EXPIRES)

IA × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IA × K0M × Z – VA = 103.33 V ∠–3.9°
VA_1M = 64.71 V ∠0.0°
IA_2 × ZD = 1.37 V ∠19.8°
I_0 × Z = 19.11 V ∠19.8°
I_0 × ZD = 1.37 V ∠19.8°
• Overcurrent supervision: | 3 × I_0 | = 4.09 A > 3 A
• Mho difference angle = | –3.9° – 0° | = 3.9° < 75°
• Reactance difference angle = | –3.9° – 19.8° | = 23.7° < 75°
• Zero-sequence directional difference angle = | 19.8° – 0.0° | = 19.8° < 75°
• Negative-sequence directional difference angle = | 19.8° – 0.0° | = 19.8° < 75°
• Fault-type comparator difference angle = | 19.8° – 19.8° | = 0.0° < 50°
All four comparators and the overcurrent supervision are satisfied.
The MHO phase A ground element will operate for this fault.
c) MHO PHASE A TO GROUND ELEMENT (AFTER MEMORY EXPIRES)

After the memory expires, the relay checks the actual positive-sequence voltage and compares it with 10% of the nominal
voltage:
| VA_1 | = 58.83 V > 0.1 × 69.28 V
After the memory expires the relay will use the actual voltage for polarization.
IA × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VA = 103.33 V ∠–3.9°
VA_1 = 58.83 V ∠–2.1°
IA_2 × ZD = 1.37 V ∠19.8°
I_0 × Z = 19.11 V ∠19.8°
I_0 × ZD = 1.37 V ∠19.8°
• Mho difference angle = | –3.9° – (–2.1°) | = 1.8° < 75°
8 •
•
Zero-sequence directional difference angle = | 19.8° – (–2.1°) | = 21.9° < 75°
Negative-sequence directional difference angle = | 19.8° – (–2.1°) | = 21.9° < 75°
All four comparators and the overcurrent supervision are satisfied.
The Zone 1 MHO phase A ground element will operate for this fault.
• Zero-sequence directional difference angle for Zones 2 through 4 (phase A) = | 19.8° – 8.4° | = 11.4° < 90°.
Zones 2 through 4 phase A ground elements will pick-up, time-out and operate.

d) MHO AB PHASE ELEMENT

(IA – IB) × Z – (VA – VB) = 88.65 V ∠–78.7°
(VA – VB)_1M = 112.08 V ∠30.0°
(IA – IB) × Z = 103.50 V ∠–21.2°
(IA – IB) × ZD = 7.39 V ∠–21.2°
• Overcurrent supervision: | (IA – IB) / 3 | = 4.27 A > 3 A
• Mho difference angle = | –78.7° – 30.0° | = 108.7° > 75°
• Reactance difference angle = | –78.7° – (–21.2°) | = 57.5° < 75°
• Directional difference angle = | –21.2° – 30.0° | = 51.2° < 75°
The mho comparator is not satisfied.
The MHO AB phase element will not operate for this fault.
Repeating the above analysis one concludes that out of the six distance elements only the ground element in phase A will
operate for this fault.
e) QUAD PHASE A TO GROUND ELEMENT (BEFORE MEMORY EXPIRES)

IA × Z + I_0 × K0 × Z + IG × K0M × Z – VA = 103.33 V ∠–3.9°
VA_1M = 64.71 V ∠0.0°
j × I_0 × ej3Θ = 1.34 A ∠24.8°
IA_2 × ZD = 1.37 V ∠19.8°
I_0 × ZD = 1.37 V ∠19.8°
IA × ZR + I_0 × K0 × ZR + IG × K0M × ZR – VA= 87.6 V ∠–109.2°
IA × ZR + I_0 × K0 × ZR = 91.5 V ∠–93.0°
IA × ZL + I_0 × K0 × ZL + IG × K0M × ZL– VA= 57.0 V ∠108.7°
IA × ZL + I_0 × K0 × ZL = 45.8 V ∠82.9°
• Zero-sequence difference angle = | –19.8° – 0.0° | = 19.8° < 75°
• Negative-sequence directional difference angle = | –19.8° – 0.0° | = 19.8° < 75°
• Right blinder difference angle = | –93.0° – (–109.2°) | = 16.2° < 90°
• Left blinder difference angle = | 82.9° – 108.7° | = 25.8° < 90°
All six comparators and the overcurrent supervision are satisfied.
The Quad Phase A ground element will operate for this fault.

8.2 PHASE DISTANCE APPLIED TO POWER TRANSFORMERS 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8.2PHASE DISTANCE APPLIED TO POWER TRANSFORMERS 8.2.1 DESCRIPTION
As a Wye-Delta transformer introduces discontinuity for the zero-sequence circuit, the ground distance protection cannot
be applied, except special circumstances, to respond to faults behind the transformer.
The phase distance elements, however, could be developed so that both accurate reach and correct fault phase identifica-
tion is retained for faults behind the power transformer as seen from the relaying point. Without appropriate compensation,
the relay's reach would depend on a type of fault, creating considerable difficulties in applying the relay.
The D60 provides for any location of the VTs and CTs with respect to the involved power transformer and the direction of
any given zone.
In the following equations, the VT and CT locations are referenced as “None” if the transformer is not present between the
CT/VT and the intended reach point. Otherwise, the location is to be selected as a type of a transformer as seen from the
VT/CT position towards the intended reach point. The following figure explains the adopted rules.
(a) (b)
delta wye, 330o lag delta wye, 330o lag
Z4 Z4
Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Yd1

Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z1 Z1
Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None

Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
(c) (e)
delta wye, 330o lag
L1 L2
Z4 Zone 4
Zone 1
Z4 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None
Z4 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Yd1 ZL1 ZT ZL2
8 Z1
Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11

Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Figure 8–4: APPLICATIONS OF THE “PHS DIST XFMR VOL/CUR CONNECTION” SETTINGS

8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.2 PHASE DISTANCE APPLIED TO POWER TRANSFORMERS
Table 8–9: PHASE DISTANCE INPUT SIGNALS FOR DELTA-WYE TRANSFORMERS

TRANSFORMER LOOP CURRENT VOLTAGE
CONNECTION TRANSFORMATION TRANSFORMATION
None AB IA – IB V AB
BC IB – IC V BC
CA IC – IA V CA
Dy1 AB 1-
3I A ------ ( V AB – V CA )
3
BC 1-
3I B ------ ( V BC – V AB )
3
CA 1-
3I C ------ ( V CA – V BC )
3
Dy3 AB 1
I AB_21P = – 3I C V AB_21P = ------- ( V BC – V CA )
3
BC 1
I BC_21P = – 3I A V BC_21P = ------- ( V CA – V AB )
3
CA 1
I CA_21P = – 3I B V CA_21P = ------- ( V AB – V BC )
3
Dy5 AB 1
I AB_21P = – 3I B V AB_21P = ------- ( V BC – V AB )
3
BC 1
I BC_21P = – 3I C V BC_21P = ------- ( V CA – V BC )
3
CA 1
I CA_21P = – 3I A V CA_21P = ------- ( V AB – V CA )
3
Dy7 AB 1
I AB_21P = – 3I A V AB_21P = ------- ( V CA – V AB )
3
BC 1
I BC_21P = – 3I B V BC_21P = ------- ( V AB – V BC )
3
CA 1
I CA_21P = – 3I C V CA_21P = ------- ( V BC – V CA )
3
Dy9 AB 1
I AB_21P = – 3I C V AB_21P = ------- ( V CA – V BC )
3 8
BC 1
I BC_21P = – 3I A V BC_21P = ------- ( V AB – V CA )
3
CA 1
I CA_21P = – 3I B V CA_21P = ------- ( V BC – V AB )
3
Dy11 AB 1
I AB_21P = – 3I B V AB_21P = ------- ( V AB – V BC )
3
BC 1
I BC_21P = – 3I C V BC_21P = ------- ( V BC – V CA )
3
CA 1
I CA_21P = – 3I A V CA_21P = ------- ( V CA – V AB )
3

Table 8–10: PHASE DISTANCE INPUT SIGNALS FOR WYE-DELTA TRANSFORMERS

TRANSFORMER LOOP CURRENT VOLTAGE
CONNECTION TRANSFORMATION TRANSFORMATION
Yd1 AB 1
I AB_21P = ------- ( 2I A – I B – I C ) V AB_21P = 3V A
3
BC 1
I BC_21P = ------- ( 2I B – I A – I C ) V BC_21P = 3V B
3
CA 1
I CA_21P = ------- ( 2I C – I A – I B ) V CA_21P = 3V C
3
Yd3 AB 1
I AB_21P = ------- ( I A + I B – 2I C ) V AB_21P = – 3V C
3
BC 1
I BC_21P = ------- ( I B + I C – 2I A ) V BC_21P = – 3V A
3
CA 1
I CA_21P = ------- ( I A + I C – 2I B ) V CA_21P = – 3V B
3
Yd5 AB 1
I AB_21P = ------- ( 2I B – I A – I C ) V AB_21P = 3V B
3
BC 1
I BC_21P = ------- ( 2I C – I A – I B ) V BC_21P = 3V C
3
CA 1
I CA_21P = ------- ( 2I A – I B – I C ) V CA_21P = 3V A
3
Yd7 AB 1
I AB_21P = ------- ( I B + I C – 2I A ) V AB_21P = – 3V A
3
BC 1
I BC_21P = ------- ( I A + I C – 2I B ) V BC_21P = – 3V B
3
CA 1
I CA_21P = ------- ( I A + I B – 2I C ) V CA_21P = – 3V C
3
Yd9 AB 1
I AB_21P = ------- ( 2I C – I A – I B ) V AB_21P = 3V C
3
BC 1
I BC_21P = ------- ( 2I A – I B – I C ) V BC_21P = 3V A
3
CA 1 V CA_21P = 3V B
8 I CA_21P = ------- ( 2I B – I A – I C )
3
Yd11 AB 1
I AB_21P = ------- ( I A + I C – 2I B ) V AB_21P = – 3V B
3
BC 1
I BC_21P = ------- ( I A + I B – 2I C ) V BC_21P = – 3V C
3
CA 1
I CA_21P = ------- ( I B + I C – 2I A ) V CA_21P = – 3V A
3

8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.2 PHASE DISTANCE APPLIED TO POWER TRANSFORMERS
Equations from the “Current Transformation” and “Voltage Transformation” columns are used to derive inputs to the three
(AB, BC, and CA) phase distance elements. For example, if the CTs are located at the delta side of the Delta-Wye 11 trans-
former, and a given zone is set to look through the transformer into the system connected to the Wye winding, the CT loca-
tion setting for that zone shall be set to Dy11 and the relay would use – 3I B instead of a traditional I A – I B for the AB
phase distance element.
The current supervision pickup setting applies to the currents specified in the “Current Transformation” columns.
A distance zone originates at the location of the VTs (regardless of the location of the CTs). For more information on set-
tings please refer to Chapter 9: Application of Settings.
8.2.2 EXAMPLE
Consider the system shown below:
150 MVA, 10%

13.8kV/315kV
delta wye, 330° lag
AB
ZL = 30.11Ω∠85°
H X
VT = 13.8kV/120V VT = 315kV/120V
CT = 8000:5 CT = 300:5
0.688Ω∠85°
2.57Ω∠88.4°
837727A2.CDR
Figure 8–5: SAMPLE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Normally, in order to respond to the fault shown in the figure, a distance relay shall be applied at the relaying point X. The
relay input signals at this location are shown in the following table.
INPUT PRIMARY SECONDARY

VA 100.4 kV ∠–7.32° 38.25 V ∠–7.32°
VB 97.23 kV ∠–53.4° 37.04 V ∠–53.4°
VC 181.8 kV ∠–150.0° 69.26 V ∠–150.0°
IA 1.288 kA ∠–27.6° 21.47 A ∠–27.6°
IB 1.288 kA ∠152.4° 21.47 A ∠152.4° 8
IC 0 0
If installed at the location X, the relay would use the following input signals for its phase AB distance element:
V = VAB = 77.402 kV ∠57.5° primary or 29.49 V ∠57.5° secondary
I = IA – IB = 2.576 kA ∠–27.6° primary or 42.93 A ∠–27.6° secondary
And consequently it would see an apparent impedance of:
Zapp = V / I = 30.05 Ω ∠85° primary or 0.687 Ω ∠85° secondary

If applied at location H, the relay sees the following input signals:
INPUT PRIMARY SECONDARY

VA 7.584 kV ∠–5.59° 69.95 V ∠–5.59°
VB 6.269 kV ∠–120.1° 54.52 V ∠–120.1°
VC 7.751 kV ∠125.5° 65.84 V ∠125.5°
IA 16.976 kA ∠–27.6° 10.61 A ∠–27.6°
IB 33.952 kA ∠152.4° 21.22 A ∠152.4°
IC 16.976 kA ∠–27.6° 10.61 A ∠–27.6°
The relay is set as follows:

XFMR VOL CONNECTION = “Dy11”
XFMR CUR CONNECTION = “Dy11”
Consequently, the following signals are applied to the phase AB distance element:
1
V = ------- V AB – V BC = 10.861 kV ∠59.9° primary or 94.45 V ∠59.9° secondary (EQ 8.1)
3
I = – 3I B = 58.860 kA ∠– 27.6° primary or 36.75 A ∠– 27.6° secondary (EQ 8.2)
This results in the following apparent impedance:

94.45 kV ∠59.9°- = 2.570 Ω ∠87.5° secondary
Z app = V
---- = --------------------------------------------- (EQ 8.3)
I 36.75 kA ∠– 27.6 °
The above value is a correct measure of the distance from the VT location to the fault. For relay location 2, this certainly
includes the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer:
2
10 ( 13.8 kV )
Z T ( at 13.8 kV ) = ---------- × ---------------------------- = 0.127Ω ∠90°
100 150 MVA
(EQ 8.4)
13.8 2
Z L ( at 13.8 kV ) = 30.11 ×  ----------- = 0.05779Ω ∠85°
 315 
Thus, 0.127 Ω ∠90° + 0.05779 Ω ∠85° = 0.1847 Ω ∠88.4° primary side or 2.569 Ω ∠88.4° on the secondary side.
The above example illustrates how the relay maintains correct reach for fault behind power transformers. When installed at
X, the relay shall be set to 0.687 Ω ∠85° secondary in order to reach to the fault shown in the figure. When installed at H,
the relay shall be set to 2.569 Ω ∠88.4° to ensure exactly same coverage.
See Chapter 9: Application of Settings for more information on setting calculations.

8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.3 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
8.3GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT 8.3.1 DESCRIPTION
Consider the negative-sequence directional overcurrent element. As illustrated below, the negative-sequence voltage could
be low during internal fault conditions.
(a) (b)
S_op
S_pol
V_2 -V_2 I_2 x Z
V_2 ECA
UR I_2
(c) (d)
I_2 x Z S_pol S_op
-V_2 -V_2 V_2

V_2 >
I_2 * Z_2line ECA
I_2
UR
Figure 8–6: OFFSET IMPEDANCE AUGMENTATION

In order to ensure operation of the element under such circumstances the angle comparator uses a polarizing voltage aug-
mented by the negative-sequence current as per following equations:
• Forward-looking element: S_pol = – V_2 + I_2 × Z_offset × 1 ∠ECA
S_op = I_2 × 1 ∠ECA
• Reverse-looking element: S_pol = – V_2 + I_2 × Z_offset × 1 ∠ECA

S_op = – I_2 × 1 ∠ECA
where: ECA = forward ECA angle (maximum torque angle); Z_offset = offset impedance
The effect of the augmentation for forward and reverse fault is shown in the figures above. As long as the offset impedance
is not higher than the negative-sequence line impedance the element will ensure correct and fast fault direction identifica-
tion for both forward and reverse faults. The same principle applies to the neutral directional overcurrent element.
8.3.2 EXAMPLE
Consider relay input signals as in the Distance Elements Analysis section and assume an offset impedance of 4 Ω and
ECA and limit angles of 88° and 90°, respectively. The relay calculates the following negative-sequence quantities:
V_2 = 6.39 V ∠–159.6°; I_2 = 1.37 A ∠–68.1°; I_1 = 2.94 A ∠–144.2°
and the following signals for the directional unit of the negative-sequence directional overcurrent element: 8
• Forward-looking element: S_pol = 11.87 V ∠20.2°
S_op = 1.37 V ∠20.2°
• Reverse-looking element: S_pol = 11.87 V ∠20.2°

S_op = 1.37 V ∠– 160.0 °
After comparing the angles, a solid forward indication is given.
Assume further the pickup setting of 0.25 A for both forward and reverse directions, and the “Negative-sequence” mode
setting entered for the overcurrent unit of the element. The relay calculates the operating signal using the positive-
sequence restraint:
I_op = |I_2| – |I_1| / 8 = 1.003 A > 0.25 A.
The overcurrent unit will pickup and the element will operate in the forward direction.

8.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
8.4SERIES COMPENSATED LINES 8.4.1 DESCRIPTION
Faults on or in a close vicinity of series compensated lines may create problems for distance protection:
• Voltage and/or current inversion may lead to false direction discrimination by directional elements. This may potentially
include both a failure to operate on a forward in-zone fault as well as misoperation on a reverse fault. Both distance
and overcurrent directional elements can be affected.
• Series-capacitors and their overvoltage protection equipment (air gaps and/or Metal-Oxide Varistors) have a steady-
state overreaching effect on the apparent impedance seen by the relay - a forward fault may appear much closer to the
relay as compared with the actual fault location. The apparent impedance may be shifted towards the relay by as much
as the total reactance of the series capacitors placed between the potential source of the relay and the fault point. This
extreme steady-state overreach happens during low-current faults when the air-gaps do not flashover or the MOVs do
not conduct any significant current.
• In addition to the above steady-state overreach effect; sub-synchronous oscillations in both currents and voltages may
cause significant transient overreach.
Distance protection elements of the D60 deal with the problem of voltage inversion by using 100% memory polarized direc-
tional comparators. As the memory duration is set longer that the slowest fault clearing time for reverse faults, it is guaran-
teed that the distance element would not pick-up on reverse faults should the voltage inversion happen.
At the same time, it is guaranteed that the distance elements would pick-up for all forward faults regardless of any voltage
inversion as long as the memory voltage is used. Before the memory expires the relay would respond to any fault on the
protected line. Stepped distance backup zones operate after the memory voltage expires. But the backup protection
responds to distant faults that do not cause any inversion of the positive-sequence voltage. As a result, the time-delayed
stepped-distance zones are guaranteed to operate.
Distance protection elements of the D60 deal with the problem of current inversion by using a multi-input-comparator
approach as described in the Distance Characteristics subsection. Should the current inversion happen, the distance ele-
ments are secure on reverse faults because multiple conditions involving fault-loop, negative-sequence and zero-sequence
currents and the memory voltage are checked prior to declaring a forward fault.
On close-in forward faults beyond the series capacitors as seen from the relaying point, the current inversion phenomenon
may take place for a short period of time. The condition cannot sustain for a long time as very high fault currents would
occur causing large voltage drops across the series capacitors and prompting the overvoltage protection of the capacitors
to operate quickly. This would effectively remove the series compensation and eliminate the current inversion. However,
when the currents used by distance comparator (fault-loop current for ground and phase distance protection, and the nega-
tive- and zero-sequence currents for ground elements) stay shifted by more than 90 degrees from their natural fault position
determined by the user as the element characteristic angle, the distance elements may fail to pick-up on such a forward
fault for the brief period of current inversion. This is an inherent attribute of the 100% memory polarized mho element, and
not a weakness particular to the D60 relay.
Therefore, for dependability, it is recommended to use high-set phase overcurrent protection for direct tripping on close-in
faults potentially causing current inversion, and overreaching ground fault directional overcurrent functions (such as nega-
tive-sequence, ground or neutral) for communication-aided schemes.
The problem of steady-state overreaching due to the negative reactance of the series capacitors may be addressed in the
8 D60 in a traditional way by shortening the reach of an underreaching distance elements to the net inductive reactance of
the line between the potential source and the far end busbar(s). This generic approach has two major drawbacks. First, it
leaves large portion of the line uncovered by the directly tripping distance protection. Second, it does not solve the transient
overreaching problem caused by sub-synchronous oscillations.
Therefore, the D60 offers a unique option for dynamic reach control that is effectively based on the magnitude of the current
flowing through the series capacitor bank(s). The underreaching distance functions can be set as for plain uncompensated
line, i.e. using the impedance of the line alone, and the relay would control an effective reach accordingly using the current
magnitude as illustrated in the figure below.
The reach is reduced sufficiently to cope with both steady-state and transient overreach phenomena. For large degrees of
compensation and small-current faults, the transient overreach may be as high as 100%. This means that fast distance pro-
tection is not achievable. The adaptive D60's mechanism would guarantee security on external faults. Overreaching ground
fault directional overcurrent functions (such as negative-sequence, ground or neutral) shall be used for dependability.

8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES
X FAR
-E
BUS ND
BAR
SET REACH (ZR)
THE REACH IS
DYNAMICALLY ACTUAL REACH
REDUCED BY FOR VERY HIGH
VL/abs(I) CURRENTS
ACTUAL REACH IS
A FUNCTION OF
CURRENT
MAGNITUDE
ACTUAL REACH
FOR VERY SMALL
CURRENTS R
837729A1.CDR
Figure 8–7: DYNAMIC REACH CONTROL

Section (a) of the figure below shows the effect of adaptive reach control for low-current external fault. The reach is reduced
sufficiently to cope with both transient and steady-state overreach. Section (b) shows a high-current external fault. The air
gaps or MOVs conduct majority of the fault current and neither steady-state nor transient overreach takes place. The relay
does not reduce its reach as it is not necessary. Section (c) shows a high-current internal fault. Because of the large cur-
rent, the reach is not reduced and the element responds to this internal fault. Traditional approach would leave this fault out
of the relay reach.
The neutral and negative-sequence directional protection functions of the relay cope with the voltage and/or current inver-
sions by adding appropriate offset to their polarizing signals as explained in the Ground Directional Overcurrent section.
The offset impedance can always be successfully selected to guarantee correct fault direction discrimination regardless of
the degree of compensation and location of the series capacitors and the potential source.
Refer to Chapter 9: Application of Settings for detailed recommendations on settings for series compensation applications.

8.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
(a) LOW-CURRENT EXTERNAL

X
FAULT
FAR-E
N
BUSB D
AR
Impedance
RF
Trajectory
Set reach
Z SC&MOV
Steady-state
apparent
impedance
SC
The reach is safely
M OV
reduced
R
HIGH-CURRENT EXTERNAL
(b) FAULT
X
FAR-E
N
BUSB D Impedance
AR
RF Trajectory (no
Set reach subsynchronous
oscillations)
Steady-state
apparent
impedance
SC
The reach is not

M OV
reduced
(c) HIGH-CURRENT INTERNAL

X
FAULT
FAR-E
N
BUSB D
AR
Set reach Impedance
8
Trajectory (no
subsynchronous
oscillations)
RF
Steady-state
apparent
impedance
SC
The reach is not

M OV
reduced
837730A1.CDR
Figure 8–8: DYNAMIC REACH FOR INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL FAULTS

8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.5 SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING
8.5SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING 8.5.1 OVERVIEW
a) INTRODUCTION
Single pole operations make use of many features of the relay. At the minimum, the Trip Output, Recloser, Breaker Control,
Open Pole Detector, and Phase Selector must be fully programmed and in service; and either protection elements or digital
inputs representing fault detection must be available for successful operation. When single pole trip-and-reclose is required
overall control within the relay is performed by the Trip Output element. This element includes interfaces with pilot aided
schemes, the Line Pickup, Breaker Control, and Breaker Failure elements.
Single pole operations are based on use of the Phase Selector to identify the type of the fault, to eliminate incorrect fault
identification that can be made by distance elements in some circumstances and to provide trip initiation from elements that
are not capable of any fault type identification, such as high-set negative-sequence directional overcurrent element. The
scheme is also designed to make use of the advantages provided by communications channels with multiple-bit capacities
for fault identification.
Phase Selector
AR RIP
Volts Reset
and Output Fault Locator
Amps
Block Specific Protection Elements
Volts
and
Trip Output Amps
Protection Setting
Elements
1-Pole
Trip 1-Pole
Inputs Setting Request Trip
Open
Pilot- Pole
Aided
Schemes Detector
Trip
A or B or C
Setting Setting
Inputs Outputs Initiate Breaker

1-Pole Failure
Operation
Communications
Channels Breaker Breaker
1 and 2 1 and 2
AG SLG Pole State OOS
BG Faulted
CG Phase
Setting Permission
S B
e Inputs k
Reset t r
Breaker t
Control i 1
n Outputs &
3-Pole 3-Pole g 2
Trip Trip
Request
Line Pickup Setting
CLOSE 1
CLOSE 2
CLOSE 1
CLOSE 2
Multi - Phase
Operator
Void Force 3-Pole
3-Pole Operation
8
Setting Operation Setting
AR Force 3-P
Initiate
Reclose Request Trip
Initiate
AR Initiate 3-Pole
Recloser
Multi-Phase
837026A4.CDR
Figure 8–9: SINGLE-POLE OPERATION

The Trip Output element receives requests for single and three pole trips and three pole reclose initiation, which it then pro-
cesses to generate outputs that are used to:
• determine whether a single or three pole operation should be performed
• initiate tripping of breaker poles A, B and C, either individually or as a group
• initiate Breaker Failure protection for phases A, B and C, either individually or as a group
• notify the Open Pole Detector when a single pole operation is imminent

8.5 SINGLE-POLE TRIPPING 8 THEORY OF OPERATION
• initiate either single or three pole reclosing

• notify the Phase Selector when a trip operation is imminent
When notified that a single pole operation has been initiated Open Pole Detector will:
• initiate blocking of protection elements that could potentially maloperate when a breaker pole is open
• instruct the Phase Selector to de-assert all outputs, as an Open Pole invalidates calculations.
The operation of the scheme on a line in a single breaker arrangement will be described. The line is protected by a D60
relay using the Line Pickup and Zone 1 Phase and Ground Distance elements, and a Permissive Overreaching Transfer
Trip scheme (using Zone 2 Phase and Ground distance elements as well as Negative-Sequence Directional Overcurrent
elements, GND DIR O/C FWD: “NEG SEQ OC1 FWD”, GND DIR O/C REV: “NEG SEQ OC1 REV”). Zone 1 is configured to issue a
single-pole trip when appropriate (TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-1: “GND DIST Z1 OP”, TRIP 1-POLE INPUT-2: “PHS DIST Z1 OP”). By
default the POTT scheme will issue a single-pole trip. It is assumed that when tripping three-poles both the Zone 1 and the
POTT shall initiate three-pole reclosing. This is achieved by setting TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-1: “POTT TRIP 3P”, TRIP RECLOSE
INPUT-2: “GND DIST Z1 OP”, and TRIP RECLOSE INPUT-3: “PHS DIST Z1 OP”.
It is assumed for this discussion that the relay features that are shown on Single Pole Operation diagram above have all
been programmed for the application and are in service. The description begins with line breakers open at both the local
and remote ends, and the operation of the scheme is described in chronological order.
Because the line is de-energized the Line Pickup element is armed. The Recloser is presently enabled. An operator
requests that Breaker Control close the breaker, and it operates output relays to close breaker poles A, B and C. This oper-
ator manual close request is also forwarded from Breaker Control to Recloser, which becomes disabled, de-asserting its
“Enabled” output. This output is transferred to Trip Output, where it converts any input request for a single pole operation
into a three-pole operation. At the Recloser, the AR1 BLK TIME @ MAN CLOSE timer is started.
The breaker closes and status monitoring contacts on the breaker poles change state; the new breaker pole states are
reported to Breaker Control, which in turn transfers these states to the Recloser, Trip Output, Breaker Failure and Open
Pole Detector. Because a fault is not detected the AR1 BLK TIME @ MAN CLOSE times out and the Recloser is enabled, which
asserts the “Enabled” output, informing the Trip Output element that single pole trip operations are now permitted. When
normal voltage appears on the line the Line Pickup element is disarmed. As the local line breaker has not tripped the oper-
ator closes the breaker at the remote end of the line, placing the line in service.
Several scenarios are considered below.
b) SLG FAULT
An AG fault occurs close to the considered relay. Immediately after the fault, the Disturbance Detector (50DD) picks-up and
activates the Phase Selector. The Phase Selector recognizes an AG fault by asserting its PHASE SELECT AG operand.
Ground distance Z1 (AG element) responds to the fault. As the fault is close to the relay the phase distance Z1 (AB, CA ele-
ments) may respond to this fault as well. In any case, a single-pole operation is requested by Z1 via the GND DIST Z1 OP
and/or PHS DIST Z1 OP operands.
At this moment the request to trip is placed for the Trip Output. As the fault is recognized as an AG fault, the TRIP PHASE
A operand is asserted by the Trip Output. This signal is passed to the Breaker Control scheme and results in tripping pole A
of the breaker.
8 Simultaneously with the TRIP PHASE A operand, the TRIP 1-POLE operand is asserted. This operand activates the OPEN
POLE detector. The latter detector responds to the TRIP PHASE A signal by declaring phase A open by asserting OPEN
POLE OP FA (even before it is actually opened). The TRIP PHASE A signal resets only after the breaker actually operates
as indicated by its auxiliary contact. At this moment the Open Pole Detector responds to the breaker position and continues
to indicate phase A opened. This indication results in establishing blocking signals for neutral and negative-sequence over-
current elements (OPEN POLE BLK N), and distance elements (OPEN POLE BLK AB, OPEN POLE BLK CA). The two lat-
ter operands block phase distance AB and CA elements, respectively (all zones); the OPEN POLE FA OP blocks the
ground distance AG elements (all zones). As a result, the Z1 OP and Z2 PKP operands that were picked-up reset immedi-
ately. The following distance elements remain operational guarding the line against evolving faults: BG, CG and BC.
As Z2 and/or negative-sequence directional elements pick-up due to the fault, the permission to trip is keyed to the remote
end. Assume here that a single-bit channel is used. If so, no extra information is sent to the remote end, just permission to
trip sent over the TX1 operand. Upon receiving permission to trip over the RX1, the POTT decides to trip. The scheme will
check the Phase Selector for phase type identification and will issue a trip for phase A by asserting the POTT TRIP A oper-
and. This operand is passed to the Trip Output and results in exactly same action as described above for Z1.

Depending on response times, the actual trip is initiated either by the Z1 or by the POTT. At the moment TRIP 1-POLE
operand is asserted, the Phase Selector resets and no other trip action could take place. After the trip command is issued
all the picked up elements are forced to reset by the Open Pole Detector.
The TRIP 1-POLE operand initiates automatically a single-pole autoreclose. The AR is started and asserts its AR RIP oper-
and. This operand keeps blocking the Phase Selector so that it does not respond to any subsequent events. At the same
time the operand removes zero-sequence directional supervision from ground distance zones 2 and 3 so that they could
respond to a single-line-to-ground fault during open pole conditions.
1.25 cycles after the AR is initiated, the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP operand is asserted. This operand acts as an enabler for any
existing trip request. In this case none of the protection elements is picked up at this time, therefore no more trips are initi-
ated.
When the Recloser dead time interval is complete it signals the Breaker Control element to close the breaker. The Breaker
Control element operates output relays to close the breaker.
When pole A of the breaker closes this new status is reported to the Breaker Control element, which transfers this data to
the Breaker Failure, Recloser, Open Pole Detector and Trip Output elements. The response at Breaker Failure is depen-
dent on the programming of that element. The response at Recloser is not relevant to this discussion. At the Open Pole
Detector, the blocking signals to protection elements are de-asserted.
If the fault was transient the reset time would expire at the Recloser and the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP and RIP outputs would
be de-asserted, returning all features to the state described at the beginning of this description.
If the fault was permanent appropriate protection elements would detect it and place a trip request for the Trip Output ele-
ment. As the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP is still asserted, the request is executed as a three-pole trip.
The response of the system from this point is as described above for the second trip, except the Recloser will go to lockout
upon the next initiation (depending on the number of shots programmed).
c) SLG FAULT EVOLVING INTO LLG

When an AG fault occurs the events unfold initially as in the previous example. If the fault evolves quickly, the Phase Selec-
tor will change its initial assessment from AG to ABG fault and when the trip request is placed either by the Z1 or the POTT,
a trip-pole trip will be initiated. If this is the case, all three TRIP PHASE A, B and C operands will be asserted. The com-
mand is passed to the Breaker Control element and results in a three-pole trip. At the same time the Recloser is initiated as
per settings of the Trip Output. As the TRIP 3-POLE operand is asserted (not the TRIP 1-POLE operand) the Open Pole is
not activated. Because the AR RIP in progress is asserted, the Phase Selector is blocked as well.
If the fault evolves slowly, the sequence is different: The relay trips phase A as in the previous example. The Phase Selec-
tor Resets, the Open Pole Detector is activated and forces Z1 and Z2 AG, AB, CA and negative-sequence overcurrent ele-
ments to reset. If the Z1 BG element picks up, or Z2 BG element picks up resulting in operation of the POTT scheme, no
trip command will be issued until the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP is asserted. This happens 1.25 cycles after the first trip. If at this
time or any time later a request for trip is placed (due to an evolving fault), a three-pole trip is initiated. The TRIP 1-POLE
operand is de-asserted by the TRIP 3-POLE operand, resetting the OPEN POLE detector. Shortly all three-poles are
opened.
When the dead time expires, the Recloser signals the Breaker Control to close the breaker. At this time all the protection
elements are operational, as the Open Pole Detector is not blocking any elements. If the line-side VTs are used, the Line
Pickup element is armed as well. If there is a fault on the line, these elements will pickup the fault and issue next request for
trip. This request results in three-pole trip as the AR FORCE 3-P TRIP is still asserted.
8
The response of the system from this point is as described above for the second trip, except the Recloser will go to lockout
upon the next initiation (depending on the number of shots programmed).

8.5.2 PHASE SELECTION
The D60 uses phase relations between current symmetrical components for phase selection. First, the algorithm validates
if there is enough zero-, positive-, and negative-sequence currents for reliable analysis. The comparison is adaptive; that is,
the magnitudes of the three symmetrical components used mutually as restraints confirm if a given component is large
enough to be used for phase selection. Once the current magnitudes are validated, the algorithm analyzes phase relations
between the negative and positive-sequence currents and negative and zero-sequence currents (when applicable) as illus-
trated below.
AB, CG,
BG ABG ABG
AG,
I2F AG I2F BCG
BC,
BCG
I1F I0F
CG CA, BG,
CAG CAG 837725A1.CDR
Figure 8–10: PHASE SELECTION PRINCIPLE (ABC PHASE ROTATION)

Due to dual comparisons, the algorithm is very secure. For increased accuracy and to facilitate operation in weak systems,
the pre-fault components are removed from the analyzed currents. The algorithm is very fast and ensures proper phase
selection before any of the correctly set protection elements operates.
Under unusual circumstances such as weak-infeed conditions with the zero-sequence current dominating during any
ground fault, or during cross-country faults, the current-based phase selector may not recognize any of the known fault pat-
tern. If this is the case, voltages are used for phase selection. The voltage algorithm is the same as the current-based algo-
rithm, e.g. phase angles between the zero-, negative-, and positive-sequence voltages are used. The pre-fault values are
subtracted prior to any calculations.
The pre-fault quantities are captured and the calculations start when the Disturbance Detector (50DD) operates.
When the trip command is issued by the trip output logic (TRIP 1-POLE or TRIP 3-POLE) and during open pole conditions
(OPEN POLE OP), the phase selector resets all its output operands and ignores any subsequent operations of the Distur-
bance Detector.
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
TRIP 1-POLE
TRIP 3-POLE OR RESET
OPEN POLE OP
DELAY
8 0 DELAY FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

4 cycles PHASE SELECT AG
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND 0 START
500 ms PHASE SELECT BG
SRCn 50DD OP
PHASE SELECT CG
PHASE SELECT AB
PHASE SELECTOR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE SELECT BC
SRCn VT FUSE FAIL OP
PHASE SELECT CA
PHASE SELECT ABG
SETTING
PHASE SELECT BCG
DISTANCE SOURCE: PHASE SELECT CAG
PHASE SELECT 3P
I_0
PHASE SELECT SLG
I_1
PHASE SELECT MULTI-P
I_2
PHASE SELECT VOID
V_0
V_1
V_2
837027A3.CDR
Figure 8–11: PHASE SELECTOR LOGIC

8.5.3 COMMUNICATIONS CHANNELS FOR PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES
a) DESCRIPTION
In the D60 relay pilot-aided schemes transmit a code representing the type of fault determined by the local phase selector
according to the scheme logic. At a receiving terminal the local and remote data is combined to determine the action to be
performed. Schemes can be used with channels that can carry one, two or four bits. Using a one-bit channel, the schemes
at all terminals of the line use their local phase selectors to identify the fault type and initiate appropriate tripping actions. In
single pole operation applications however, a three-pole trip can be performed in the event of an in-line single-phase fault
co-incident with a fault on a different phase (cross-country fault) that is within the reach of the local phase selector, which is
considerably longer than the line. This possibility can be reduced by using a two-bit channel, and eliminated by using a
four-bit channel.
Using two-bit channels, the relays can share limited information about their local phase selection, improving considerably
the accuracy of single-pole tripping on cross-country faults. Two-bit channels however can only provide four different mes-
sages, one of which must be “no fault has been detected.” With only three messages available it is not possible to transmit
sufficient information to eliminate the use of local phase selector data, so a three-pole operation can occur in a cross-coun-
try fault condition. Using four-bit channels, the relays share enough information about fault types seen from all the line ter-
minals that local fault selector data can be rejected. In addition, in multiple bit systems the relays do not respond to non-
valid bit combinations, making the protection system more immune to communication problems than in a single bit system.
Each scheme within the relay has a setting that specifies the number of bits available on the associated communications
channel. This setting defines the input (RX1, RX2, RX3, RX4) and output (TX1, TX2, TX3, TX4 for communications and
[Scheme Abbreviation] TRIP A, TRIP B, TRIP C, TRIP 3P for action) operands used by the scheme, the data codes used to
convey fault data between terminals, and the method of combining information from the local and remote terminals to pro-
duce an output.
b) SINGLE BIT CHANNELS

The TX1 and RX1 operands are used, and fault data is coded per the following tables.
Table 8–11: PERMISSIVE SCHEME TRANSMIT CODES FOR 1-BIT CHANNELS

PHASE SELECTOR DETERMINATION OF BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED
FAULT TYPE
TX1
AG, BC, BCG, BG, CA, CAG, CG, AB, ABG, 3P 1
Unrecognized or AR FORCE 3P TRIP 1
None of the above 0
Table 8–12: BLOCKING SCHEME TRANSMIT CODES FOR 1-BIT CHANNELS

PHASE SELECTOR DETERMINATION OF BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED
FAULT TYPE
TX1
AG, BC, BCG, BG, CA, CAG, CG, AB, ABG, 3P 0
Unrecognized or AR FORCE 3P TRIP 0
None of the above 1 8
The action output is generated per the following tables.
Table 8–13: PERMISSIVE SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 1-BIT CHANNELS

REMOTE DATA LOCAL DATA
BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION LOCAL DETERMINATION OF TRIP OUTPUT
OF FAULT TYPE FAULT TYPE
RX1
1 Any AG Fault Trip Phase A
1 Any BG Fault Trip Phase B
1 Any CG Fault Trip Phase C
1 Any AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, Trip Three Phases
3P, Unrecognized

Table 8–14: BLOCKING SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 1-BIT CHANNELS

BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION LOCAL DETERMINATION OF TRIP OUTPUT
OF FAULT TYPE FAULT TYPE
RX1
0 Any AG Fault Trip Phase A
0 Any BG Fault Trip Phase B
0 Any CG Fault Trip Phase C
0 Any AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, Trip Three Phases
3P, Unrecognized
The scheme initiates a three-phase trip if the Phase Selector fails to recognize the fault type or after the AR FORCE 3P
TRIP operand is asserted.
c) TWO-BIT CHANNELS
The TX1, TX2, RX1 and RX2 operands are used and fault data is coded per the following tables.

PHASE SELECTOR DETERMINATION BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED
OF FAULT TYPE
TX1 TX2
AG, BC, BCG 1 0
BG, CA, CAG 0 1
CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized 1 1

PHASE SELECTOR DETERMINATION BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS
OF FAULT TYPE ASSERTED
TX1 TX2 TX1 STOP TX2 STOP
AG, BC, BCG 0 1 1 0
BG, CA, CAG 1 0 0 1
CG, AB, ABG, 3P 0 0 1 1
CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized 0 0 1 1

BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT LOCAL DETERMINATION TRIP OUTPUT
8 RX1
1
RX2
0
TYPE
AG, BC, BCG

OF FAULT TYPE
AG, AB, ABG CA, CAG, 3P Trip Phase A

0 1 BG, CA, CAG AG
1 1 CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized AG
0 1 BG, CA, CAG BG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, 3P Trip Phase B
1 1 CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized BG
1 0 AG, BC, BCG BG
1 1 CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized CG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG Trip Phase C
1 0 AG, BC, BCG CG
0 1 BG, CA, CAG CG
1 1 CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized Trip Three Phases
1 0 AG, BC, BCG BC, BCG, Unrecognized
0 1 BG, CA, CAG CA, CAG, Unrecognized

Table 8–18: BLOCKING SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR 2-BIT CHANNELS

BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION OF FAULT LOCAL DETERMINATION TRIP OUTPUT
TYPE OF FAULT TYPE
RX1 RX2
0 1 AG, BC, BCG AG, AB, ABG CA, CAG, 3P DIR BLOCK TRIP A
1 0 BG, CA, CAG AG
0 0 CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized AG
1 0 BG, CA, CAG BG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, 3P DIR BLOCK TRIP B
0 0 CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized BG
0 1 AG, BC, BCG BG
0 0 CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized CG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG DIR BLOCK TRIP C
0 1 AG, BC, BCG CG
1 0 BG, CA, CAG CG
0 0 CG, AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized AB, ABG, 3P, Unrecognized DIR BLOCK TRIP 3P
0 1 AG, BC, BCG BC, BCG Unrecognized
1 0 BG, CA, CAG CA, CAG Unrecognized
d) FOUR-BIT CHANNELS
The TX1, TX2, TX3, TX4, RX1, RX2, RX3 and RX4 operands are used.

PHASE SELECTOR BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED
DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE
TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
AG 1 0 0 0
BG 0 1 0 0
CG 0 0 1 0
AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, 0 0 0 1
Unrecognized

PHASE SELECTOR BIT PATTERN TRANSMITTED FLEXLOGIC™ OPRERANDS ASSERTED
DETERMINATION OF FAULT
TYPE TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX1 STOP TX2 STOP TX3 STOP TX4 STOP
AG 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
BG 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
CG 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
3P, Unrecognized 8


BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE LOCAL DETERMINATION OF TRIP OUTPUT
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 FAULT TYPE
0 0 0 1 MULTI-P AG Trip Phase A
0 1 0 0 BG AG
0 0 1 0 CG AG
1 0 0 0 AG AG, AB, ABG, CA, CAG, 3P,
Unrecognized
0 1 0 0 BG BG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, 3P, Trip Phase B
Unrecognized
1 0 0 0 AG BG
0 0 1 0 CG BG
0 0 0 1 MULTI-P BG
0 0 1 0 CG CG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, Trip Phase C
Unrecognized
1 0 0 0 AG CG
0 1 0 0 BG CG
0 0 0 1 MULTI-P CG
1 0 0 0 AG BC, BCG Trip Three Phases
0 1 0 0 BG CA, CAG
0 0 1 0 CG AB, ABG
0 0 0 1 MULTI-P Unrecognized
Table 8–22: BLOCKING SCHEME TRIP TABLE FOR FOUR-BIT CHANNELS

BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE LOCAL DETERMINATION TRIP OUTPUT
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 OF FAULT TYPE
0 0 0 0 Any while the INIT Trip as for single-bit
signal was not channel
established
1 1 1 0 MULTI-P AG DIR BLOCK TRIP A
1 0 1 1 BG AG
1 1 0 1 CG AG
0 1 1 1 AG AG, AB, ABG, CA, CAG, 3P,
Unrecognized
1 0 1 1 BG BG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, 3P, DIR BLOCK TRIP B
Unrecognized
8 0 1 1 1 AG BG
1 1 0 1 CG BG
1 1 1 0 MULTI-P BG
1 1 0 1 CG CG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, DIR BLOCK TRIP C
Unrecognized
0 1 1 1 AG CG
1 0 1 1 BG CG
1 1 1 0 MULTI-P CG
0 1 1 1 AG BC, BCG DIR BLOCK TRIP 3P
1 0 1 1 BG CA, CAG
1 1 0 1 CG AB, ABG
1 1 1 0 MULTI-P Unrecognized

8.5.4 PERMISSIVE ECHO SIGNALING
The “echo” feature can reduce the response time of an over-reaching scheme when a terminal is disconnected from the
line. In this condition, a Zone 2 element at the terminal that remains in-service can detect a fault, but cannot trip, as a per-
missive signal is not received from the remote terminal. This feature is provided in the permissive over-reaching transfer trip
and hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip schemes.
PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP SCHEME:
When used this feature will “echo” a reliable received permissive signal back to the originating terminal when a line-
end-open condition is identified by the Line Pickup logic. The Permissive Echo is programmed as a one-shot logic. The
echo is sent only once and then the echo logic locks out for a settable period. The duration of the echo pulse does not
depend on the duration or shape of the received RX signals but is settable.
The echo is sent back only if none of the overreaching protection elements operates.
HYBRID PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP PERMISSIVE ECHO:
When used this feature will “echo” a reliable received permissive signal back to the originating terminal if the line-end-
open condition is recognized by the LINE PICKUP scheme and the fault is not identified as a reverse fault by the zone
4 or the ground directional overcurrent function (if used). The Permissive Echo is programmed as a one-shot logic. The
echo is sent only once and then the echo logic locks out for a settable period. The duration of the echo pulse does not
depend on the duration or shape of the received RX signal but is settable as ECHO DURATION.
The echo is sent back only if none of the overreaching protection elements operates.
PERMISSIVE ECHO OPERANDS AND TRANSMIT CODES:
In single-pole tripping, single-bit channel applications the signal received on bit no. 1 (RX1) is echoed back on bit no. 1
(TX1). In two- and four-bit applications the following Echo Tables apply.
Table 8–23: ECHO TABLE FOR 2-BIT CHANNELS

LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE ECHOED BITS
TX1 TX2
AG 1 0
BG 0 1
CG 1 1
AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized Send back as received
Table 8–24: ECHO TABLE FOR 4-BIT CHANNELS

LOCAL DETERMINATION OF FAULT TYPE ECHOED BITS
TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
AG 1 0 0 0
BG 0 1 0 0
CG
AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, 3P, Unrecognized
0 0 1
Send back as received
0
8

8.5.5 PILOT SCHEME / PHASE SELECTOR COORDINATION
For local fault type identification the pilot schemes use the Phase Selector. The latter may fail to respond to certain fault
scenarios. Examples are: simultaneous forward and reverse fault, simultaneous SLG and LL fault involving different phases
(e.g. AG and BC) or two simultaneous faults in the same direction but at very different locations. The Phase Selector is opti-
mized to either indicate correctly the forward fault or to assert the Void flag. For example, a combination of AG and BC is
not a valid fault type - it is two different simultaneous faults and as such cannot be described by any single fault pattern,
therefore, the Phase Selector would assert the Void flag.
The VOID phase selection combined with a local trip request (such as high-set directional overcurrent) will result in three-
pole trip as per the Trip Output logic.
The Pilot Schemes, however, try to recover more information from the distance elements. Each scheme uses a forward
looking, either underreaching or overreaching, distance zone. A given Pilot Scheme analyzes this zone for fault type identi-
fication if the Phase Selector asserts its Void flag: the DUTT scheme uses Z1; all the other schemes use Z2. The schemes
analyze all six fault loops of the zone to determine the fault type.
For example, simultaneous forward AG and reverse BG faults may result in the Void indication. The POTT scheme would
analyze the Z2 response. As only the AG element is picked up, the local phase selection is determined as AG. This is a cor-
rect indication.
Depending on the number of bits used for communications, the accuracy of the overall response will be further improved as
illustrated in the next subsection.
This enhanced operation of the pilot-aided schemes is the reason to use a short pilot scheme priority time when setting the
Trip Output logic. The timer will force the scheme to wait for a decision from the pilot scheme for a short period of time
before accepting any local trip request. The advantage, however, materializes only if more than one-bit communications
channels are used, and is important only on parallel lines or when the application requires maximum accuracy of single-
pole tripping. In other cases, it is not recommended to delay the local trip decision.

8.5.6 CROSS-COUNTRY FAULT EXAMPLE
Assume a single pole operation application where D60 relays are used to protect a two terminal line, (terminals T1 and T2)
using phase and ground distance zone 1, 2 and 3 elements in a permissive over-reaching transfer trip scheme. The perfor-
mance of the system with one- two and four-bit communications channels is outlined for a mid-line phase A-to-ground fault
and a co-incident phase B-to-ground fault just behind terminal T2. Assume also that the reclosers are enabled and reset.
At T1 the following protection elements will pickup:
• Ground Distance Zone 1, 2, and 3 for an AG fault
• Ground Distance Zone 2 and 3 for a BG fault
• Phase Distance Zone 2 and 3 for an AB fault
At T1 the phase selector will determine the fault is type ABG. This response is independent from the distance elements –
the Phase Selector sees two forward faults.
At T2 the following protection elements will pickup:
• Ground Distance Zone 1, 2, and 3 for an AG fault
At T2 the phase selector will determine the fault is type AG. The reverse BG fault is likely to be ignored.
If a one-bit channel is used, terminal T1 will trip three poles but terminal T2 will trip phase A only, (see the Tables below)
which is undesirable.
TERMINAL REMOTE DATA LOCAL DATA

BIT PATTERN RECEIVED REMOTE DETERMINATION LOCAL DETERMINATION TRIP OUTPUT
OF FAULT TYPE OF FAULT TYPE
RX1
T1 1 Any MULTI-P (ABG) Trip Three Phases
T2 1 Any AG Trip Phase A
If a two-bit channel is used both terminals will trip phase A only, (see the Tables below) which is the desired outcome.

RX1 RX2
T1 1 0 AG ABG Trip Phase A
T2 1 1 ABG AG Trip Phase A
If a four-bit channel is used both terminals will trip phase A only, (see the Tables below) which is the desired outcome.

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4
8
T1 0 0 0 1 AG ABG Trip Phase A
T2 1 0 0 0 ABG AG Trip Phase A


9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1 APPLICATION GUIDELINES
9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1APPLICATION GUIDELINES 9.1.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides general application guidelines for stepped distance, overcurrent and pilot protection. Where relevant,
design details and performance characteristics of the D60 are given to facilitate the process of setting the relay for a given
application.
9.1.2 IMPACT OF MEMORY POLARIZATION
As explained in Chapter 8, the D60 uses a memorized positive sequence voltage as a polarizing signal in order to achieve
dependable operation for forward faults and secure non-operation for reverse faults.
The dynamic shift of the characteristic ensures improved directionality, but it also means that if a backup function is
required for a reverse fault on the bus, then it is appropriate to reverse Zone 4 so that a time delayed backup function may
be obtained. As mentioned earlier, it may be beneficial to also avoid extremely large reach settings by setting a remote
backup so that it is reverse looking. This strategy can be beneficial if the reduced reach enhances the discrimination
between the load and fault conditions.
9.1.3 HIGH-SET OVERCURRENT ELEMENTS
Especially at low SIR values, fast fault clearance times may be seen as extremely important, both from system stability, and
from equipment damage viewpoints. The high-set overcurrent element, when set appropriately, can be extremely useful in
achieving these goals. It helps the setting calculations if the system impedances are reasonably well known.
The overcurrent pick up should be set to the greater of the following values:
1. The maximum infeed seen by the relay, for a close in reverse fault.
2. The maximum fault level seen by the relay for a fault at 100% of the protected line.
The maximum error of the phase overcurrent elements is below 2%. A safety factor of 1.25 should be used to account for
relay errors and system impedance uncertainty.
If CT saturation is an issue such as close to a generation where long lasting dc components are likely to saturate the CTs, it
should be noted that the IOC elements require 1.33 cycle of data to operate for a multiple of pickup of 1.01. For higher mul-
tiples of pickup, the relation between the multiple of pickup and the amount of data required for operation before complete
CT saturation is approximately linear. For example, for a multiple of pickup of 4, approximately 1.33 / 4 = 0.332 of power
cycle is required by the phase IOC to operate. The above information should not be confused with the operating time,
which includes some inherent delays such as a trip rated output contact.

9.2 DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME) 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9.2DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME) 9.2.1 PHASE DISTANCE
a) PHASE CURRENT SUPERVISION AND FUSE FAILURE

The phase-to-phase (delta) current is used to supervise the phase distance elements, primarily to ensure that in a de-ener-
gized state the distance elements will not be picked up due to noise or induced voltages, on the line.
However, this supervision feature may also be employed to prevent operation under fuse failure conditions. This obviously
requires that the setting must be above maximum load current and less than the minimum fault conditions for which opera-
tion is expected. This potential problem may be avoided by the use of a separate fuse fail function, which means that the
phase current supervision can be set much lower, typically 2 times the capacitance charging current of the line.
The usage of the fuse fail function is also important during double-contingency events such as an external fault during fuse
fail conditions. The current supervision alone would not prevent maloperation in such circumstances.
It must be kept in mind that the Fuse Failure element provided on the D60 needs some time to detect fuse fail conditions.
This may create a race between the instantaneous Zone 12 and the Fuse Failure element. Therefore, for maximum secu-
rity, it is recommended to both set the current supervision above the maximum load current and use the Fuse Failure func-
tion. The current supervision prevents maloperation immediately after the fuse fail condition giving some time for the Fuse
Failure element to take over and block the distance elements permanently. This is of a secondary importance for time-
delayed Zones 2 through 4 as the Fuse Failure element has some extra time for guaranteed operation. The current super-
vision may be set below the maximum load current for the time delayed zones.
Blocking distance elements during fuse fail conditions may not be acceptable in some applications and/or under some pro-
tection philosophies. Applied solutions may vary from not using the Fuse Failure element for blocking at all; through using it
and modifying – through FlexLogic™ and multiple setting groups mechanisms – other protection functions or other relays to
provide some protection after detecting fuse fail conditions and blocking the distance elements; to using it and accepting
the fact that the distance protection will not respond to subsequent internal faults until the problem is addressed.
To be fully operational, the Fuse Failure element must be enabled, and its output FlexLogic™ operand must be indi-
cated as the blocking signal for the selected protection elements.
NOTE
For convenience, the current supervision threshold incorporates the 3 factor.
b) PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1

As typically used for direct tripping, the Zone 1 reach must be chosen so that it does not extend beyond the far end(s) of the
protected line. The Zone 1 provides nominally instantaneous protection for any phase fault within a pre-determined dis-
tance from the relay location. To ensure that no overreach occurs, typically requires a setting of 80 to 90% of the line length,
which covers CT and VT errors, relay inaccuracy and transient overreach as well as uncertainty in the line impedance for
each phase, although transposition may minimize this latter concern. The total relay inaccuracy including both steady state
and transient overreach even when supplied from CVTs under the Source Impedance Ratios of up to 30, is below 5%.
c) PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 2

The Zone 2 is an overreaching element, which essentially covers the final 10 to 20% whole of the line length with a time
delay. The additional function for the Zone 2 is as a timed backup for faults on the remote bus. Typically the reach is set to
125% of the positive sequence impedance of the line, to ensure operation, with an adequate margin, for a fault at 100% of
the line length. The necessary time delay must ensure that coordination is achieved with the clearance of a close-in fault on
the next line section, including the breaker operating time.
Typically the Zone 2 time delay would be 0.2 to 0.6 sec., although this may have to be reviewed more carefully if a short line
terminates on the remote bus because the two Zone 2 elements may overlap and therefore not coordinate satisfactorily.
d) PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 3

9 If a remote backup philosophy is followed, then the reach of this element must be set to account for any infeed at the
remote bus, plus the impedance of the longest line which terminates on this remote bus. The time delay must coordinate
with other time-delayed protections on any remote line. Circuit loading limitations created by a long zone reach may be
overcome by using lens or quadrilateral characteristics and/or a load encroachment supervising characteristic. Consider-
ation should also be given to a situation where the load impedance may enter into the relay characteristic for a time longer
than the chosen time delay, which could occur transiently during a system power swing. For this reason the Power Swing
Blocking function should be used.

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.2 DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME)
e) PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 4

A further contribution to remote backup, the reach of this element must be set to account for any infeed at the remote bus.
The time delay must coordinate with other time-delayed protections on the next line. The use of a lens characteristic or the
load encroachment element may be advantageous if load limits are a problem.
To avoid extremely large reach settings, the D60 has the ability to implement any element so that it is reverse looking,
which then can provide a back up for the longest line terminated on the local bus. This strategy can be beneficial if the
reduced reach helps discrimination between the load and fault conditions, but must be implemented at both ends of the
protected line.
9.2.2 GROUND DISTANCE
a) NEUTRAL CURRENT SUPERVISION

The current supervision for the ground distance elements responds to an internally calculated neutral current (3 x I_0). The
setting for this element should be based on twice the zero-sequence line capacitance current or the maximum zero-
sequence unbalance under maximum load conditions. This element should not be used to prevent an output when the load
impedance is inside the distance characteristic on a steady state basis.
b) POLARIZING CURRENT AND NON-HOMOGENEITY CORRECTION ANGLE OF THE QUAD CHARACTERISTIC

An ideal reactance line for single-line-to-ground faults is polarized from the fault current flowing through the fault resistance.
Such a line defines constant reach and could be implemented by the following angle comparator:
I × Z – V vs. j × I F (EQ 9.1)
The relay could only approximate the unknown fault current by the zero-sequence or the negative-sequence currents mea-
sured at the relaying point. Depending on system parameters, either the zero-sequence or the negative-sequence current
presents better approximation of the fault current angle.
Given the equivalent systems shown in the figure below, the angular difference between the zero-sequence or negative-
sequence currents at the relay, and the fault current can be calculated as follows:
IF Z 0A + Z 0L + Z 0B
Θ 0 = angle  ---------------------- = angle  ------------------------------------------- (EQ 9.2)
I 0_RELAY Z 0B + ( 1 – d )Z 0L
IF Z 1A + Z 1L + Z 1B
Θ 2 = angle  ---------------------- = angle  ------------------------------------------- (EQ 9.3)
 I 2_RELAY Z 1B + ( 1 – d )Z 1L
where: A is the local equivalent system

B is the remote equivalent system
L is the line
d is the per-unit (pu) intended reach of the zone (typically 0.7 to 0.9).

9.2 DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME) 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
IF
Z0A dZ0L (1 – d)Z0L Z0B
I0
I0
IF
I2
DEPENDING ON SYSTEM
Z1A dZ1L (1 – d)Z1L Z1B PARAMETERS, I0 OR I2 MAYBE A
BETTER APPROXIMATION OF THE
FAULT CURRENT ANGLE
I2
IF
842742A1.CDR
Figure 9–1: UNDERSTANDING SYSTEM HOMOGENEITY

If abs ( Θ 0 ) < abs ( Θ 2 ) , the zero-sequence network is more homogenous (the zero-sequence current better approximates
the fault current), and zero-sequence polarizing should be selected. Otherwise, negative-sequence is a better polarizing
signal.
The calculated Θ angles reflect errors between the ideal and applied polarizing angles. Therefore, after selecting the polar-
izing current, the corresponding angle should be chosen as the non-homogeneity correction angle. For example, calcula-
tions yielding Θ0 = 5° and Θ2 = –1° should result in selecting the negative-sequence for polarization, and the value of –1°
for non-homogeneity correction.
Quite often the non-homogeneity correction angle is used to apply extra security rather than correct the angle between the
relay and the fault currents. For extra security the angle should be set to negative values.
Ability to select an optimum polarizing signal and to correct for non-homogeneity should be approached with care. The best
polarizing signal and the correcting angle both depend on system parameters and intended reach of the zone. If the system
configuration is static, the selection is straightforward.
However, if the system configuration may change significantly, all the relevant system topologies shall be considered for
calculations. Either a compromise choice is made, or different settings are applied via switchable setting groups depending
on system conditions. In highly non-homogenous and dynamic systems where the correction for non-homogeneity is not
feasible, conservative reach (reduced) and/or correction angle (negative) settings should be considered.
c) GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 1

The Zone 1 reach must be set so that nominally instantaneous operation does not extend beyond the end of the protected
line. However this may be somewhat more complicated than for the phase elements, because of zero sequence mutual
induction with an adjacent parallel line, possibly carried on the same tower, which can be out of service and grounded at
multiple points. A fault beyond 100% of the protected line may cause overreach unless the reach is reduced significantly,
sometimes as low as 65% of the line length. If the line being protected does not have a significant interaction with an adja-
cent circuit, then the typical 80% setting may be used. If there is significant mutual coupling between the parallel lines, then
9 the mutual compensation feature of the ground distance elements can be used instead of a drastic reduction in the reach.
However, even in this case, there is more uncertainty as compared with the phase distance elements because the zero-
sequence impedance of the line and thus the zero-sequence-compensating factors may vary significantly due to weather
and other conditions.

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.2 DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME)
d) GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 2

To ensure that the Zone 2 can see 100% of the line, inter-circuit mutual effects must be considered, as they can contribute
to a significant under-reach. Typically this may occur on double circuit lines, when both lines may carry the same current.
An analytical study should be carried out to determine the appropriate reach setting.
The main purpose of this element is to operate for faults beyond the reach of the local Zone 1 element, and therefore a time
delay must be used similar to the phase fault case.
e) GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 3

This remote back up function must have a reach which is set to account for any infeed at the remote bus, plus the imped-
ance of the longest line which terminates on this remote bus. Similar to the phase fault case, a Zone 3 element must be
time coordinated with timed clearances on the next section.
f) GROUND DISTANCE ZONE 4

As a further contribution to a remote backup philosophy, the reach of this element must be set to account for any infeed at
the remote bus. The time delay must coordinate with other time-delayed protections on the next line. The use of a lens
characteristic or load encroachment element may be advantageous if load limits are a problem. To avoid extremely large
reach settings the D60 has the ability to implement any element, so that it is reverse looking. This strategy can be beneficial
if the reduced reach enhances the discrimination between the load and fault conditions. It should be recognized however
that, if adopted, this approach must be implemented at both ends of the protected line.

9.3 PROTECTION SIGNALING SCHEMES 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
9.3PROTECTION SIGNALING SCHEMES 9.3.1 OVERVIEW
The D60 includes five common pilot-aided schemes:

• direct under-reaching transfer trip (DUTT)
• permissive under-reaching transfer trip (PUTT)
• permissive over-reaching transfer trip (POTT)
• hybrid permissive over-reaching transfer trip (Hybrid POTT)
• directional comparison blocking
9.3.2 DIRECT UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (DUTT)
This scheme uses an under-reaching Zone 1 distance element to key a transfer trip signal to the remote end(s), where on
receipt, the DUTT pilot scheme operates without any additional supervision.
For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 1 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set
per rules of distance relaying.
The scheme generates an output operand (DUTT TX) that is used to transmit the signal to the remote end. Choices of com-
munications channel include Remote Inputs/Outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunica-
tions facilities the output operand should be assigned to operate an output contact connected to key the transmitter at the
interface.
Note that the same protection signaling may be used by a breaker failure scheme, in which case the signal can be sealed
in by breaker fail for a time longer than the auto-reclose “reclaim” time which then prevents auto-reclose when not required.
A provision for an optional seal-in of the send signal is made to cover those situations where PLC (Power Line Carrier) sig-
naling is used and the signal must be transmitted in a potentially noisy situation due to the fault.
The scheme output operand (DUTT OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in par-
ticular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed to initiate a trip,
breaker fail, and auto-reclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.
9.3.3 PERMISSIVE UNDER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (PUTT)
This scheme uses an under-reaching Zone 1 distance element to key a transfer trip signal to the remote end where it is
supervised by the over-reaching Zone 2 distance elements.
For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 1 and 2 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured
and set per rules of distance relaying.
The scheme generates an output operand (PUTT TX) that is used to transmit the signal to the remote end. Choices of com-
interface.
The PUTT RX PICKUP DELAY timer can be used to ride through spurious PLC receive signals.
The scheme output operand (PUTT OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output contacts in partic-
ular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed to initiate a trip,
breaker fail, and auto-reclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.
9 9.3.4 PERMISSIVE OVER-REACHING TRANSFER TRIP (POTT)
This scheme is intended for two-terminal line applications only.

This scheme uses an over-reaching Zone 2 distance element to essentially compare the direction to a fault at both the ends
of the line.
to key the scheme and initiate its operation. This provides increased coverage for high-resistance faults.

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.3 PROTECTION SIGNALING SCHEMES
Good directional integrity is the key requirement for an over-reaching forward-looking protection element used to supple-
ment Zone 2. Even though any FlexLogic™ operand could be used for this purpose allowing the user to combine
responses of various protection elements, or to apply extra conditions through FlexLogic™ equations, this extra signal is
primarily meant to be the output operand from either the Negative-Sequence Directional IOC or Neutral Directional IOC.
Both of these elements have separate forward (FWD) and reverse (REV) output operands. The forward indication should
be used (NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD or NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD).
An important consideration is when one of the line terminals is open. It is then necessary to identify this condition and
arrange for a continuous sending of the permissive signal or use a slower but more secure echo feature to send a signal to
the other terminal, which is producing the fault infeed. With any echo scheme however, a means must be provided to avoid
a permanent lock up of the transmit/receive loop. The echo co-ordination (ECHO DURATION) and lock-out (ECHO LOCK-
OUT) timers perform this function by ensuring that the permissive signal is echoed once for a guaranteed duration of time
before going to a lockout for a settable period of time.
It should be recognized that in ring bus or breaker and a half situations, it may be the line disconnect or a combination of
the disconnect and/or the breaker(s) status that is the indication that the terminal is open.
The POTT RX PICKUP DELAY timer is included in the permissive receive path to ride through spurious receive outputs that
may be produced during external faults, when power line carrier is utilized as the communications medium.
No current reversal logic is included for the overreaching phase and ground distance elements, because long reaches are
not usually required for two terminal lines. A situation can occur however, where the ground distance element will have an
extended reach. This situation is encountered when it is desired to account for the zero sequence inter-circuit mutual cou-
pling. This is not a problem for the ground distance elements in the D60 which do have a current reversal logic built into
their design as part of the technique used to improve ground fault directionality.
Unlike the distance protection elements the ground directional overcurrent functions do not have their reach well defined,
therefore the current reversal logic is incorporated for the extra signal supplementing Zone 2 in the scheme. The transient
blocking approach for this POTT scheme is to recognize that a permissive signal has been received and then allow a setta-
ble time TRANS BLOCK PICKUP DELAY for the local forward looking directional element to pick up.
The scheme generates an output operand (POTT TX) that is used to transmit the signal to the remote end. Choices of com-
interface. Power Line Carrier (PLC) channels are not recommended for this scheme since the PLC signal can be inter-
rupted by a fault.
For proper operation of the scheme the Zone 2 phase and ground distance elements must be enabled, configured and set
per rules of distance relaying. The Line Pickup element should be enabled, configured and set properly to detect line-end-
open/weak-infeed conditions.
If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, configured and set accord-
ingly The output operand from the scheme (POTT OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output
contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed to
initiate a trip, breaker fail, and auto-reclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.
9.3.5 HYBRID POTT SCHEME (HYB-POTT)
Generally, this scheme uses an over-reaching Zone 2 distance element to essentially compare the direction to a fault at
both ends of the line. Ground directional overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the
Zone 2 distance element to key the scheme and initiate its operation. This increases the coverage for high-resistance
faults.
The scheme is intended for three-terminal applications and for weak-infeed conditions. As a long reach of the overreaching
distance element may be required for three-terminal applications, transient blocking logic is provided for both distance and
ground directional overcurrent elements. In order to cope with weak-infeed conditions an echo feature is made available. 9
By default the scheme uses the reverse-looking Zone 4 distance element to identify reverse faults. Additionally, reverse-
looking ground directional overcurrent functions can be used in conjunction with Zone 4.
and set per rules of distance relaying. The Line Pickup element should be enabled, configured and set properly to detect
line-end-open/weak-infeed and undervoltage conditions.

9.3 PROTECTION SIGNALING SCHEMES 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, configured, and set
accordingly.
The scheme generates an output operand (HYBRID POTT TX) that is used to transmit the signal to the remote end.
Choices of communications channel include Remote Inputs/Outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with
telecommunications facilities the output operand should be assigned to operate an output contact connected to key the
transmitter at the interface.
For more application recommendation refer to the POTT scheme.
The output operand from the scheme (HYBRID POTT OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions, output
contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be programmed to
initiate a trip, breaker fail, and auto-reclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.
9.3.6 DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING
Generally, the scheme compares the direction to a fault at both ends of the line. Unlike the permissive schemes, the
absence of a blocking signal permits operation of the scheme. Consequently, the scheme is biased toward dependability
and requires an “on/off” type of signaling.
By default this scheme uses only a forward-looking over-reaching Zone 2 distance element to identify forward faults.
to increase the coverage for high-resistance faults.
By default the scheme uses only a reverse-looking Zone 4 distance element to identify reverse faults. Ground directional
overcurrent functions available in the relay can be used in conjunction with the Zone 4 distance element for better time and
sensitivity coordination.
and set per rules of distance relaying.
If used by this scheme, the selected ground directional overcurrent function(s) must be enabled, configured and set accord-
ingly.
The scheme generates output operands (BLOCKING SCHEME TX INIT and BLOCKING SCHEME TX STOP) that are
used control the transmission of signals to the remote end. Choices of communications channel include Remote Inputs/
Outputs and telecommunications interfaces. When used with telecommunications facilities the output operand should be
assigned to operate an output contact connected to key the transmitter at the interface.
A blocking scheme may be preferred over a Hybrid POTT scheme, because of shorter reach settings for the Zone 2 ele-
ments. This follows from the fundamental difference that all zone 2 elements are required to see an internal fault for the
POTT approach, under all system conditions, which in turn, means that the reversed Zone 4 block initiate elements must
also have an increased reach. A blocking scheme on the other hand, can have much shorter Zone 2 reach settings if
sequential clearance can be accepted. The simple rule to ensure that all faults can be cleared, is for each terminal to have
a reach setting equal to the distance to the tap plus twice the distance from the tap to the remote terminal.
The Zone 2 element must have a coordinating timer BLOCK RX CO-ORD PKP DELAY, to ensure that the blocking signal is
received for all external faults that are within the set reach of the local overreaching Zone 2.
Transient blocking logic is implemented via the TRANS BLOCK timer, which continues to send a blocking signal for a settable
time TRANS BLOCK RESET DELAY, if it was being sent for at least 30 ms during the initial reverse fault set via TRANS BLOCK
PICKUP DELAY.
The output operand from the scheme (BLOCKING SCHEME OP) must be configured to interface with other relay functions,
output contacts in particular, in order to make the scheme fully operational. Typically, the output operand should be pro-
grammed to initiate a trip, breaker fail, and auto-reclose, and drive a user-programmable LED as per user application.
9

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES
9.4SERIES COMPENSATED LINES 9.4.1 INTRODUCTION
For reasons described in Chapter 8: Theory of Operation, it is recommended to apply a combination of distance, ground
directional overcurrent and high-set overcurrent functions for protection of series compensated lines.
The setting rules described below must take into account variety of system configurations, particularly a status of series
capacitors (in-service, by-passed). Either the worst-case topology shall be considered or - if possible - adaptive settings
shall be applied though the multiple settings groups mechanism.
A line compensating capacitor is a bank of three physical capacitors and their overvoltage protecting devices (air gaps and/
or MOVs). If none of the MOV/gaps conducts any significant current, the positive-, negative- and zero-sequence reactance
of the three-phase bank equal the reactance of the actual (phase) capacitors. Under asymmetrical conditions, however,
such as a single line to ground fault, when only one MOV/gap may operate, the series capacitor bank would create extra
(series) asymmetry in addition to the fault (shunt) asymmetry. The positive-, negative- and zero-sequence impedances will
differ from each other and will not equal the impedance of the phase capacitors. Moreover, there may be mutual coupling
between the sequence networks representing the series capacitor bank. This makes analytical analysis of fault conditions
very burdensome. For setting calculations, however, it is justified to assume the zero-, positive-, and negative-sequence
reactance of the capacitor bank equal the reactance of the actual (phase) capacitors. This represents a worst-case low-cur-
rent fault scenario, when the steady-state effects of series compensation are most weighty.
9.4.2 DISTANCE
Traditionally, the reach setting of an underreaching distance function shall be set based on the net inductive impedance
between the potential source of the relay and the far-end busbar, or location for which the zone must not overreach. Faults
behind series capacitors on the protected and adjacent lines need to be considered for this purpose. For further illustration
a sample system shown in the figure below is considered.
voltage
SENDING RECEIVING
protection reactance
BUS BUS
level
0.5 pu 0.6 pu 0.5 pu 0.7 pu
-2 Ω -4 Ω -3 Ω -5 Ω
INFINITE
INFINITE
3Ω 10 Ω 7Ω
BUS
BUS
F2 A B B A F1
Protected Line
Figure 9–2: SAMPLE SERIES COMPENSATED SYSTEM
Assuming 20% security margin, the underreaching zone shall be set as follows.
At the Sending Bus, one must consider an external fault at F1 as the 5 Ω capacitor would contribute to the overreaching
effect. Any fault behind F1 is less severe as extra inductive line impedance increases the apparent impedance:
Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 – 3 – 5) = 1.6 Ω if the line-side (B) VTs are used
Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 – 4 – 3 – 5) = –1.6 Ω if the bus-side (A) VTs are used
The negative value means that an underreaching zone cannot be used as the circuit between the potential source of the
relay and an external fault for which the relay must not pick-up, is overcompensated, i.e. capacitive.
At the Receiving Bus, one must consider a fault at F2:
Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 – 4 – 2) = 3.2 Ω if the line-side (B) VTs are used
Reach Setting: 0.8 x (10 – 4 – 3 – 2) = 0.8 Ω if the bus-side (A) VTs are used 9
Practically, however, to cope with the effect of sub-synchronous oscillations, one may need to reduce the reach even more.
As the characteristics of sub-synchronous oscillations are in complex relations with fault and system parameters, no solid
setting recommendations are given with respect to extra security margin for sub-synchronous oscillations. It is strongly rec-
ommended to use a power system simulator to verify the reach settings or to use an adaptive D60 feature for dynamic
reach control.
If the adaptive reach control feature is used, the PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL setting shall be set accordingly.

9.4 SERIES COMPENSATED LINES 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
This setting is a sum of the overvoltage protection levels for all the series capacitors located between the relay potential
source and the far-end busbar, or location for which the zone must not overreach. The setting is entered in pu of the phase
VT nominal voltage (RMS, not peak value).
If a minimum fault current level (phase current) is causing a voltage drop across a given capacitor that prompts its air gap to
flash over or its MOV to carry practically all the current, then the series capacitor shall be excluded from the calculations
(the capacitor is immediately by-passed by its overvoltage protection system and does not cause any overreach problems).
If a minimum fault current does not guarantee an immediate capacitor by-pass, then the capacitor must be included in the
calculation: its overvoltage protection level, either air gap flash-over voltage or MOV knee-point voltage, shall be used
(RMS, not peak value).
Assuming none of the series capacitors in the sample system is guaranteed to get by-passed, the following calculations
apply:
For the Sending Bus: 0.5 + 0.7 = 1.2 pu if the line-side (B) VTs are used
0.6 + 0.5 + 0.7 = 1.8 pu if the bus-side (A) VTs are used
For the Receiving Bus: 0.6 + 0.5 = 1.1 pu if the line-side (B) VTs are used
0.6 + 0.5 + 0.5 = 1.6 pu if the bus-side (A) VTs are used
9.4.3 GROUND DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Ground directional overcurrent function (negative-sequence or neutral) uses an offset impedance to guarantee correct fault
direction discrimination. The following setting rules apply.
1. If the net impedance between the potential source and the local equivalent system is inductive, then there is no need
for an offset. Otherwise, the offset impedance shall be at least the net capacitive reactance.
2. The offset cannot be higher than the net inductive reactance between the potential source and the remote equivalent
system. For simplicity and extra security, the far-end busbar may be used rather than the remote equivalent system.
As the ground directional functions are meant to provide maximum fault resistance coverage, it is justified to assume that
the fault current is very low and none of the series capacitors is guaranteed to get by-passed. Consider settings of the neg-
ative-sequence directional overcurrent protection element for the Sample Series Compensated System.
For the Sending Bus relay, bus-side VTs:
• Net inductive reactance from the relay into the local system = –2 + 3 = 1 Ω > 0; there is no need for offset.
• Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = –4 + 10 – 3 = 3 Ω; the offset cannot be higher than 3 Ω.
• It is recommended to use 1.5 Ω offset impedance.
For the Sending Bus relay, line-side VTs:
• Net inductive reactance from relay into local system = –2 + 3 – 4 = –3 Ω < 0; an offset impedance ≥3 Ω must be used.
• Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = 10 – 3 = 7 Ω; the offset cannot be higher than 7 Ω.
• It is recommended to use 5 Ω offset impedance.
For the Receiving Bus relay, bus-side VTs:
• Net inductive reactance from relay into local system = –5 + 7 = 2 Ω > 0; there is no need for offset.
• Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = –3 + 10 – 4 = 3 Ω; the offset cannot be higher than 3 Ω.
For the Receiving Bus relay, line-side VTs:
9 • Net inductive reactance from relay into local system = –3 – 5 + 7 = –1 Ω < 0; an offset impedance ≥1 Ω must be used.
• Net inductive reactance from relay through far-end busbar = 10 – 4 = 6 Ω; the offset cannot be higher than 6 Ω.
9.4.4 HIGH-SET PHASE OVERCURRENT
The setting rules for high-set overcurrent protection are explained in the High-Set Overcurrent Elements section.

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.5 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS
9.5PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS 9.5.1 PHASE DISTANCE PROTECTION
a) DESCRIPTION
Phase distance elements of the D60 could be set to respond to faults beyond any three-phase power transformer. The relay
guarantees accurate reach and targeting for any phase fault. Moreover, the current and voltage transformers may be
located independently on different sides of the transformer.
The following setting rules apply to this feature:
1. A given distance zone is terminated by location of the VTs, not the CTs.
2. Consequently, the positive-sequence impedance of a transformer must be included in the reach setting only if the
transformer is located between the potential source and the intended reach point.
3. The current signals require compensation if the transformer is located between the CTs and the intended reach point.
If this is the case the CT connection setting shall be set to transformer connection and vector group as seen from the
CTs toward the reach point. Otherwise, the CT connection setting shall be set to "None".
4. The voltage signals require compensation if the transformer is located between the VTs and the intended reach point.
If this is the case the VT connection setting shall be set to transformer connection and vector group as seen from the
VTs toward the reach point. Otherwise, the VT connection setting shall be set to "None".
5. The reach setting is entered in secondary ohms and as such must take into account location and ratios of VTs and CTs
as well as voltage ratio of the involved power transformer.
The following equations explain the setting rules. Consider two applications as shown in the figure below:
(a) (b)
ZH ZT ZX ZH ZT ZX
H X H X
Z4 Z1 Z4 Z1
Figure 9–3: PHASE DISTANCE LOOKING THROUGH A POWER TRANSFORMER

where: ZX = intended reach impedance for Zone 1 (primary ohms)
ZH = intended reach impedance for Zone 4 (primary ohms)
ZT = positive-sequence impedance of the transformer
VX, VH = transformer rated voltages
nCT = transformation ratio of the CTs
nVT = transformation ratio of the VTs
Z1: Z1 reach setting (secondary ohms)
Z4: Zone 4 reach setting (secondary ohms)
b) ZONE 1 SETTING IN APPLICATION (A)

As the transformer is located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 1, the reach impedance must
include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. In addition, the primary impedance must be re-calculated for
the voltage level of the VTs and CTs, and eventually, re-calculated to secondary quantities:
V H 2 n CT
9
Z 1 = ( Z T ( at X ) + Z x ) ×  ------- × --------- (EQ 9.4)
 V X n VT

9.5 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
c) ZONE 4 SETTING IN APPLICATION (A)

As the transformer is not located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 4, the reach impedance must
not include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. Because both VTs and CTs are located on the same side
as the intended reach point, no correction for the transformer ratio is required. The primary impedance must be only re-cal-
culated to secondary quantities:
n CT
Z 4 = Z H × --------- (EQ 9.5)
n VT
d) ZONE 1 SETTING IN APPLICATION (B)

As the transformer is not located between the potential source and the reach point for Z1, the reach impedance must not
include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. The CTs are located on the other side of the transformer, thus
transformer ratio must be included:
VH n CT
Z 1 = Z X ×  ------- × --------- (EQ 9.6)
 V X n VT
e) ZONE 4 SETTING IN APPLICATION (B)

As the transformer is located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 4, the reach impedance must
include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. The VTs are located on the other side of the transformer, thus
transformer ratio must be included:
VX n CT
Z 4 = ( Z T ( at H ) + Z H ) ×  ------- × --------- (EQ 9.7)
VH n VT
9.5.2 EXAMPLE
Given the following for the system shown in the previous section:
ZX = 30 Ω ∠85° (intended reach of Zone 1)
ZH = 0.06 Ω ∠88° (intended reach of Zone 4)
nCT = 8000:5 = 1600 (located at H)
nVT = 315000:120 = 2625 (located at X)
Transformer: 13.8/315 kV, 150 MVA, 10%, delta/wye, 315 kV side lagging 30°
Transformer impedance:
2
10 ( 13.8 )
Z T ( at H ) = ---------- × ------------------- = 0.127Ω ∠90° (EQ 9.8)
100 150
The Zone 1 settings are:
13.8 1600
Z 1 = 30 × ----------- × ------------- = 0.8011Ω ∠85° (EQ 9.9)
315 2625
PHS DIST Z1 REACH: "0.80"
PHS DIST Z1 RCA: "85"
PHS DIST Z1 XMFR VOL CONNECTION: "None"
PHS DIST Z1 XMFR CUR CONNECTION: "Dy1"
The Zone 4 settings are:

9 315 1600
Z 4 = ( 0.127 ∠90° + 0.006 ∠88° ) × ----------- × ------------- = 2.601Ω ∠89.4° (EQ 9.10)
13.8 2625
PHS DIST Z4 REACH: "2.60"
PHS DIST Z4 RCA: "89"
PHS DIST Z4 XMFR VOL CONNECTION: "Yd11"
PHS DIST Z4 XMFR CUR CONNECTION: "None"

Appendices
APPENDIX A A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST
APPENDIX A FLEXANALOG PARAMETERSA.1FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST
A
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 1 of 8) Table A–1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 2 of 8)
ADDR DATA ITEM FLEXANALOG NAME ADDR DATA ITEM FLEXANALOG NAME
6144 SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS SRC 1 Ia RMS 6278 SRC 3 Neutral Current RMS SRC 3 In RMS
6146 SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS SRC 1 Ib RMS 6280 SRC 3 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 3 Ia Mag
6148 SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS SRC 1 Ic RMS 6282 SRC 3 Phase A Current Angle SRC 3 Ia Angle
6150 SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS SRC 1 In RMS 6283 SRC 3 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 3 Ib Mag
6152 SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ia Mag 6285 SRC 3 Phase B Current Angle SRC 3 Ib Angle
6154 SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle SRC 1 Ia Angle 6286 SRC 3 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 3 Ic Mag
6155 SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ib Mag 6288 SRC 3 Phase C Current Angle SRC 3 Ic Angle
6157 SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle SRC 1 Ib Angle 6289 SRC 3 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 3 In Mag
6158 SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ic Mag 6291 SRC 3 Neutral Current Angle SRC 3 In Angle
6160 SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle SRC 1 Ic Angle 6292 SRC 3 Ground Current RMS SRC 3 Ig RMS
6161 SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 1 In Mag 6294 SRC 3 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 3 Ig Mag
6163 SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle SRC 1 In Angle 6296 SRC 3 Ground Current Angle SRC 3 Ig Angle
6164 SRC 1 Ground Current RMS SRC 1 Ig RMS 6297 SRC 3 Zero Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 3 I_0 Mag
6166 SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ig Mag 6299 SRC 3 Zero Sequence Current Angle SRC 3 I_0 Angle
6168 SRC 1 Ground Current Angle SRC 1 Ig Angle 6300 SRC 3 Pos. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 3 I_1 Mag
6169 SRC 1 Zero Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 1 I_0 Mag 6302 SRC 3 Positive Seq. Current Angle SRC 3 I_1 Angle
6171 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 I_0 Angle 6303 SRC 3 Neg. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 3 I_2 Mag
6172 SRC 1 Pos. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 1 I_1 Mag 6305 SRC 3 Negative Seq. Current Angle SRC 3 I_2 Angle
6174 SRC 1 Pos. Seq. Current Angle SRC 1 I_1 Angle 6306 SRC 3 Differential Gnd Current Mag. SRC 3 Igd Mag
6175 SRC 1 Neg. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 1 I_2 Mag 6308 SRC 3 Differential Gnd Current Angle SRC 3 Igd Angle
6177 SRC 1 Neg. Seq. Current Angle SRC 1 I_2 Angle 6336 SRC 4 Phase A Current RMS SRC 4 Ia RMS
6178 SRC 1 Differential Gnd Current Mag. SRC 1 Igd Mag 6338 SRC 4 Phase B Current RMS SRC 4 Ib RMS
6180 SRC 1 Diff. Gnd. Current Angle SRC 1 Igd Angle 6340 SRC 4 Phase C Current RMS SRC 4 Ic RMS
6208 SRC 2 Phase A Current RMS SRC 2 Ia RMS 6342 SRC 4 Neutral Current RMS SRC 4 In RMS
6210 SRC 2 Phase B Current RMS SRC 2 Ib RMS 6344 SRC 4 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 4 Ia Mag
6212 SRC 2 Phase C Current RMS SRC 2 Ic RMS 6346 SRC 4 Phase A Current Angle SRC 4 Ia Angle
6214 SRC 2 Neutral Current RMS SRC 2 In RMS 6347 SRC 4 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 4 Ib Mag
6216 SRC 2 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 2 Ia Mag 6349 SRC 4 Phase B Current Angle SRC 4 Ib Angle
6218 SRC 2 Phase A Current Angle SRC 2 Ia Angle 6350 SRC 4 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 4 Ic Mag
6219 SRC 2 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 2 Ib Mag 6352 SRC 4 Phase C Current Angle SRC 4 Ic Angle
6221 SRC 2 Phase B Current Angle SRC 2 Ib Angle 6353 SRC 4 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 4 In Mag
6222 SRC 2 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 2 Ic Mag 6355 SRC 4 Neutral Current Angle SRC 4 In Angle
6224 SRC 2 Phase C Current Angle SRC 2 Ic Angle 6356 SRC 4 Ground Current RMS SRC 4 Ig RMS
6225 SRC 2 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 2 In Mag 6358 SRC 4 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 4 Ig Mag
6227 SRC 2 Neutral Current Angle SRC 2 In Angle 6360 SRC 4 Ground Current Angle SRC 4 Ig Angle
6228 SRC 2 Ground Current RMS SRC 2 Ig RMS 6361 SRC 4 Zero Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 4 I_0 Mag
6230 SRC 2 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 2 Ig Mag 6363 SRC 4 Zero Seq. Current Angle SRC 4 I_0 Angle
6232 SRC 2 Ground Current Angle SRC 2 Ig Angle 6364 SRC 4 Positive Seq. Current Mag. SRC 4 I_1 Mag
6233 SRC 2 Zero Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 2 I_0 Mag 6366 SRC 4 Positive Seq. Current Angle SRC 4 I_1 Angle
6235 SRC 2 Zero Sequence Current Angle SRC 2 I_0 Angle 6367 SRC 4 Negative Seq. Current Mag. SRC 4 I_2 Mag
6236 SRC 2 Pos. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 2 I_1 Mag 6369 SRC 4 Negative Seq. Current Angle SRC 4 I_2 Angle
6238 SRC 2 Positive Seq. Current Angle SRC 2 I_1 Angle 6370 SRC 4 Differential Gnd Current Mag. SRC 4 Igd Mag
6239 SRC 2 Neg. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 2 I_2 Mag 6372 SRC 4 Differential Gnd Current Angle SRC 4 Igd Angle
6241 SRC 2 Negative Seq. Current Angle SRC 2 I_2 Angle 6656 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vag RMS
6242 SRC 2 Differential Gnd Current Mag. SRC 2 Igd Mag 6658 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vbg RMS
6244 SRC 2 Diff. Gnd Current Angle SRC 2 Igd Angle 6660 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vcg RMS
6272 SRC 3 Phase A Current RMS SRC 3 Ia RMS 6662 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vag Mag
6274 SRC 3 Phase B Current RMS SRC 3 Ib RMS 6664 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vag Angle
6276 SRC 3 Phase C Current RMS SRC 3 Ic RMS 6665 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vbg Mag
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay A-1

A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST APPENDIX A
A ADDR
6667
DATA ITEM
SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 1 Vbg Angle
ADDR
6792
DATA ITEM
SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage Angle
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 3 Vag Angle
6668 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vcg Mag 6793 SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Vbg Mag
6670 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vcg Angle 6795 SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 3 Vbg Angle
6671 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vab RMS 6796 SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Vcg Mag
6673 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vbc RMS 6798 SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 3 Vcg Angle
6675 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vca RMS 6799 SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 3 Vab RMS
6677 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vab Mag 6801 SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 3 Vbc RMS
6679 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vab Angle 6803 SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 3 Vca RMS
6680 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vbc Mag 6805 SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Vab Mag
6682 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vbc Angle 6807 SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 3 Vab Angle
6683 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vca Mag 6808 SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Vbc Mag
6685 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vca Angle 6810 SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 3 Vbc Angle
6686 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 1 Vx RMS 6811 SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Vca Mag
6688 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Vx Mag 6813 SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 3 Vca Angle
6690 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 1 Vx Angle 6814 SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 3 Vx RMS
6691 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Mag. SRC 1 V_0 Mag 6816 SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Vx Mag
6693 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 V_0 Angle 6818 SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 3 Vx Angle
6694 SRC 1 Positive Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 1 V_1 Mag 6819 SRC 3 Zero Seq. Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 V_0 Mag
6696 SRC 1 Positive Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 1 V_1 Angle 6821 SRC 3 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 3 V_0 Angle
6697 SRC 1 Negative Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 1 V_2 Mag 6822 SRC 3 Positive Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 3 V_1 Mag
6699 SRC 1 Negative Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 1 V_2 Angle 6824 SRC 3 Positive Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 3 V_1 Angle
6720 SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 2 Vag RMS 6825 SRC 3 Negative Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 3 V_2 Mag
6722 SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 2 Vbg RMS 6827 SRC 3 Negative Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 3 V_2 Angle
6724 SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage RMS SRC 2 Vcg RMS 6848 SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 4 Vag RMS
6726 SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Vag Mag 6850 SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 4 Vbg RMS
6728 SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Angle SRC 2 Vag Angle 6852 SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage RMS SRC 4 Vcg RMS
6729 SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Vbg Mag 6854 SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Vag Mag
6731 SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 2 Vbg Angle 6856 SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage Angle SRC 4 Vag Angle
6732 SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Vcg Mag 6857 SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Vbg Mag
6734 SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 2 Vcg Angle 6859 SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 4 Vbg Angle
6735 SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 2 Vab RMS 6860 SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Vcg Mag
6737 SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 2 Vbc RMS 6862 SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 4 Vcg Angle
6739 SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 2 Vca RMS 6863 SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 4 Vab RMS
6741 SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Vab Mag 6865 SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 4 Vbc RMS
6743 SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 2 Vab Angle 6867 SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 4 Vca RMS
6744 SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Vbc Mag 6869 SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Vab Mag
6746 SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 2 Vbc Angle 6871 SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 4 Vab Angle
6747 SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Vca Mag 6872 SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Vbc Mag
6749 SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 2 Vca Angle 6874 SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 4 Vbc Angle
6750 SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 2 Vx RMS 6875 SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Vca Mag
6752 SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Vx Mag 6877 SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 4 Vca Angle
6754 SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 2 Vx Angle 6878 SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 4 Vx RMS
6755 SRC 2 Zero Seq. Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 V_0 Mag 6880 SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Vx Mag
6757 SRC 2 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 2 V_0 Angle 6882 SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 4 Vx Angle
6758 SRC 2 Positive Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 2 V_1 Mag 6883 SRC 4 Zero Seq. Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 V_0 Mag
6760 SRC 2 Positive Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 2 V_1 Angle 6885 SRC 4 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 4 V_0 Angle
6761 SRC 2 Negative Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 2 V_2 Mag 6886 SRC 4 Positive Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 4 V_1 Mag
6763 SRC 2 Negative Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 2 V_2 Angle 6888 SRC 4 Positive Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 4 V_1 Angle
6784 SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 3 Vag RMS 6889 SRC 4 Negative Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 4 V_2 Mag
6786 SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 3 Vbg RMS 6891 SRC 4 Negative Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 4 V_2 Angle
6788 SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage RMS SRC 3 Vcg RMS 7168 SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power SRC 1 P
6790 SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Vag Mag 7170 SRC 1 Phase A Real Power SRC 1 Pa
A-2 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

APPENDIX A A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST
ADDR
7172
DATA ITEM
SRC 1 Phase B Real Power
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 1 Pb
ADDR
7276
DATA ITEM
SRC 4 Phase B Reactive Power
FLEXANALOG NAME
SRC 4 Qb
A
7174 SRC 1 Phase C Real Power SRC 1 Pc 7278 SRC 4 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 4 Qc
7176 SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 1 Q 7280 SRC 4 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 4 S
7178 SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 1 Qa 7282 SRC 4 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 4 Sa
7180 SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 1 Qb 7284 SRC 4 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 4 Sb
7182 SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 1 Qc 7286 SRC 4 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 4 Sc
7184 SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 1 S 7288 SRC 4 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 4 PF
7186 SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 1 Sa 7289 SRC 4 Phase A Power Factor SRC 4 Phase A PF
7188 SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 1 Sb 7290 SRC 4 Phase B Power Factor SRC 4 Phase B PF
7190 SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 1 Sc 7291 SRC 4 Phase C Power Factor SRC 4 Phase C PF
7192 SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 1 PF 7552 SRC 1 Frequency SRC 1 Frequency
7193 SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor SRC 1 Phase A PF 7553 SRC 2 Frequency SRC 2 Frequency
7194 SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor SRC 1 Phase B PF 7554 SRC 3 Frequency SRC 3 Frequency
7195 SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor SRC 1 Phase C PF 7555 SRC 4 Frequency SRC 4 Frequency
7200 SRC 2 Three Phase Real Power SRC 2 P 7680 SRC 1 Demand Ia SRC 1 Demand Ia
7202 SRC 2 Phase A Real Power SRC 2 Pa 7682 SRC 1 Demand Ib SRC 1 Demand Ib
7204 SRC 2 Phase B Real Power SRC 2 Pb 7684 SRC 1 Demand Ic SRC 1 Demand Ic
7206 SRC 2 Phase C Real Power SRC 2 Pc 7686 SRC 1 Demand Watt SRC 1 Demand Watt
7208 SRC 2 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 2 Q 7688 SRC 1 Demand Var SRC 1 Demand var
7210 SRC 2 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 2 Qa 7690 SRC 1 Demand Va SRC 1 Demand Va
7212 SRC 2 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 2 Qb 7696 SRC 2 Demand Ia SRC 2 Demand Ia
7214 SRC 2 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 2 Qc 7698 SRC 2 Demand Ib SRC 2 Demand Ib
7216 SRC 2 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 2 S 7700 SRC 2 Demand Ic SRC 2 Demand Ic
7218 SRC 2 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 2 Sa 7702 SRC 2 Demand Watt SRC 2 Demand Watt
7220 SRC 2 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 2 Sb 7704 SRC 2 Demand Var SRC 2 Demand var
7222 SRC 2 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 2 Sc 7706 SRC 2 Demand Va SRC 2 Demand Va
7224 SRC 2 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 2 PF 7712 SRC 3 Demand Ia SRC 3 Demand Ia
7225 SRC 2 Phase A Power Factor SRC 2 Phase A PF 7714 SRC 3 Demand Ib SRC 3 Demand Ib
7226 SRC 2 Phase B Power Factor SRC 2 Phase B PF 7716 SRC 3 Demand Ic SRC 3 Demand Ic
7227 SRC 2 Phase C Power Factor SRC 2 Phase C PF 7718 SRC 3 Demand Watt SRC 3 Demand Watt
7232 SRC 3 Three Phase Real Power SRC 3 P 7720 SRC 3 Demand Var SRC 3 Demand var
7234 SRC 3 Phase A Real Power SRC 3 Pa 7722 SRC 3 Demand Va SRC 3 Demand Va
7236 SRC 3 Phase B Real Power SRC 3 Pb 7728 SRC 4 Demand Ia SRC 4 Demand Ia
7238 SRC 3 Phase C Real Power SRC 3 Pc 7730 SRC 4 Demand Ib SRC 4 Demand Ib
7240 SRC 3 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 3 Q 7732 SRC 4 Demand Ic SRC 4 Demand Ic
7242 SRC 3 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 3 Qa 7734 SRC 4 Demand Watt SRC 4 Demand Watt
7244 SRC 3 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 3 Qb 7736 SRC 4 Demand Var SRC 4 Demand var
7246 SRC 3 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 3 Qc 7738 SRC 4 Demand Va SRC 4 Demand Va
7248 SRC 3 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 3 S 9024 Fault 1 Prefault Ph A Current Mag. Prefault Ia Mag [0]
7250 SRC 3 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 3 Sa 9026 Fault 1 Prefault Ph A Current Angle Prefault Ia Ang [0]
7252 SRC 3 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 3 Sb 9027 Fault 1 Prefault Ph B Current Mag. Prefault Ib Mag [0]
7254 SRC 3 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 3 Sc 9029 Fault 1 Prefault Ph B Current Angle Prefault Ib Ang [0]
7256 SRC 3 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 3 PF 9030 Fault 1 Prefault Ph C Current Mag. Prefault Ic Mag [0]
7257 SRC 3 Phase A Power Factor SRC 3 Phase A PF 9032 Fault 1 Prefault Ph C Current Angle Prefault Ic Ang [0]
7258 SRC 3 Phase B Power Factor SRC 3 Phase B PF 9033 Fault 1 Prefault Ph A Voltage Mag. Prefault Va Mag [0]
7259 SRC 3 Phase C Power Factor SRC 3 Phase C PF 9035 Fault 1 Prefault Ph A Voltage Angle Prefault Va Ang [0]
7264 SRC 4 Three Phase Real Power SRC 4 P 9036 Fault 1 Prefault Ph B Voltage Mag. Prefault Vb Mag [0]
7266 SRC 4 Phase A Real Power SRC 4 Pa 9038 Fault 1 Prefault Ph B Voltage Angle Prefault Vb Ang [0]
7268 SRC 4 Phase B Real Power SRC 4 Pb 9039 Fault 1 Prefault Ph C Voltage Mag. Prefault Vc Mag [0]
7270 SRC 4 Phase C Real Power SRC 4 Pc 9041 Fault 1 Prefault Ph C Voltage Angle Prefault Vc Ang [0]
7272 SRC 4 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 4 Q 9042 Fault 1 Postfault Ph A Current Mag. Postfault Ia Mag [0]
7274 SRC 4 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 4 Qa 9044 Fault 1 Postfault Ph A Current Angle Postfault Ia Ang [0]
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay A-3

A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST APPENDIX A
A ADDR
9045
DATA ITEM
Fault 1 Postfault Ph B Current Mag.
FLEXANALOG NAME
Postfault Ib Mag [0]
ADDR
13562
DATA ITEM
RTD Inputs 11 Value
FLEXANALOG NAME
RTD Inputs 11 Value
9047 Fault 1 Postfault Ph B Current Angle Postfault Ib Ang [0] 13563 RTD Inputs 12 Value RTD Inputs 12 Value
9048 Fault 1 Postfault Ph C Current Mag. Postfault Ic Mag [0] 13564 RTD Inputs 13 Value RTD Inputs 13 Value
9050 Fault 1 Postfault Ph C Current Angle Postfault Ic Ang [0] 13565 RTD Inputs 14 Value RTD Inputs 14 Value
9051 Fault 1 Postfault Ph A Voltage Mag. Postfault Va Mag [0] 13566 RTD Inputs 15 Value RTD Inputs 15 Value
9053 Fault 1 Postfault Ph A Voltage Angle Postfault Va Ang [0] 13567 RTD Inputs 16 Value RTD Inputs 16 Value
9054 Fault 1 Postfault Ph B Voltage Mag. Postfault Vb Mag [0] 13568 RTD Inputs 17 Value RTD Inputs 17 Value
9056 Fault 1 Postfault Ph B Voltage Angle Postfault Vb Ang [0] 13569 RTD Inputs 18 Value RTD Inputs 18 Value
9057 Fault 1 Postfault Ph C Voltage Mag. Postfault Vc Mag [0] 13570 RTD Inputs 19 Value RTD Inputs 19 Value
9059 Fault 1 Postfault Ph C Voltage Angle Postfault Vc Ang [0] 13571 RTD Inputs 20 Value RTD Inputs 20 Value
9060 Fault 1 Type Fault Type [0] 13572 RTD Inputs 21 Value RTD Inputs 21 Value
9061 Fault 1 Location Fault Location [0] 13573 RTD Inputs 22 Value RTD Inputs 22 Value
9216 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage Synchchk 1 Delta V 13574 RTD Inputs 23 Value RTD Inputs 23 Value
9218 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency Synchchk 1 Delta F 13575 RTD Inputs 24 Value RTD Inputs 24 Value
9219 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase Synchchk 1 Delta Phs 13576 RTD Inputs 25 Value RTD Inputs 25 Value
9220 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage Synchchk 2 Delta V 13577 RTD Inputs 26 Value RTD Inputs 26 Value
9222 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency Synchchk 2 Delta F 13578 RTD Inputs 27 Value RTD Inputs 27 Value
9223 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase Synchchk 2 Delta Phs 13579 RTD Inputs 28 Value RTD Inputs 28 Value
13504 DCMA Inputs 1 Value DCMA Inputs 1 Value 13580 RTD Inputs 29 Value RTD Inputs 29 Value
13544 DCMA Inputs 21 Value DCMA Inputs 21 Value 32768 Tracking Frequency Tracking Frequency
13546 DCMA Inputs 22 Value DCMA Inputs 22 Value 39425 FlexElement 1 Actual FlexElement 1 Value
13552 RTD Inputs 1 Value RTD Inputs 1 Value 39431 FlexElement 4 Actual FlexElement 4 Value
13557 RTD Inputs 6 Value RTD Inputs 6 Value 40971 Current Setting Group Active Setting Group
13558 RTD Inputs 7 Value RTD Inputs 7 Value
A-4 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal
computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most
basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Mod-
bus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master com-
munication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that:
• The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to B
requests issued by a master computer.
• For Modbus®, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitor-
ing, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands.
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER
The Modbus® RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hard-
ware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear ter-
minal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10BaseT, or 10BaseF. Data flow is half-duplex in
all configurations. See Chapter 3 for details on wiring.
Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity
bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit
data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300).
The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are avail-
able. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for further details.
The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will
not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relay’s slave address (unless the
address is the broadcast address – see below).
A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will
accept any address when the Modbus® RTU protocol is used.
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER
Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a
packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by ‘dead-time’ on the communica-
tions line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet format-
ting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code.
Table B–1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT

DESCRIPTION SIZE
SLAVE ADDRESS 1 byte
FUNCTION CODE 1 byte
DATA N bytes
CRC 2 bytes
DEAD TIME 3.5 bytes transmission time
• SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master
and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent
bus contention. All of the relay’s ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see Chapter 5 for
details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an
exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address.
A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link
take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated
with Function Code 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored.
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay B-1

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL APPENDIX B
• FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to per-
form. See the Supported Function Codes section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indi-
cated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section
for further details.
• DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, set-
tings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master.
• CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus® includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check
B (CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device
receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet
thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the CRC.
• DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms
at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 µs at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps
between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves
start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave.
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one contin-
uous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The
resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no trans-
mission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most sig-
nificant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder.
A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request.
Table B–2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM

SYMBOLS: --> data transfer
A 16 bit working register
Alow low order byte of A
Ahigh high order byte of A
CRC 16 bit CRC-16 result
i,j loop counters
(+) logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator
N total number of data bytes
Di i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
G 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed
shr (x) right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits
are shifted right one location)
ALGORITHM: 1. FFFF (hex) --> A

2. 0 --> i
3. 0 --> j
4. Di (+) Alow --> Alow
5. j + 1 --> j
6. shr (A)
7. Is there a carry? No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue.
8. Is j = 8? No: go to 5; Yes: continue
9. i + 1 --> i
10. Is i = N? No: go to 3; Yes: continue
11. A --> CRC
B-2 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.2FUNCTION CODES B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus® officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports
some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE MODBUS DEFINITION GE MULTILIN DEFINITION

HEX
03
DEC
3 Read Holding Registers Read Actual Values or Settings
B
04 4 Read Holding Registers Read Actual Values or Settings
05 5 Force Single Coil Execute Operation
06 6 Preset Single Register Store Single Setting
10 16 Preset Multiple Registers Store Multiple Settings
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H)
This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay.
Data registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers
that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus Memory Map table for exact details on the data registers.
Since some PLC implementations of Modbus® only support one of function codes 03h and 04h, the relay interpretation
allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will
determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting 3
register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40,
300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively.
Table B–3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE

MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX) PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11
FUNCTION CODE 04 FUNCTION CODE 04
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40 BYTE COUNT 06
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 50 DATA #1 - high 00
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high 00 DATA #1 - low 28
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low 03 DATA #2 - high 01
CRC - low A7 DATA #2 - low 2C
CRC - high 4A DATA #3 - high 00
DATA #3 - low 00
CRC - low 0D
CRC - high 60

B.2 FUNCTION CODES APPENDIX B
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Sum-
mary of Operation Codes table below.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the
slave device 11H (17 dec) to perform a reset. The high and low Code Value bytes always have the values “FF” and “00”
respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus® definition of this function code.
B
OPERATION CODE - high 00 OPERATION CODE - high 00
OPERATION CODE - low 01 OPERATION CODE - low 01
CODE VALUE - high FF CODE VALUE - high FF
CODE VALUE - low 00 CODE VALUE - low 00
CRC - low DF CRC - low DF
CRC - high 6A CRC - high 6A
Table B–5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H

OPERATION DEFINITION DESCRIPTION
CODE (HEX)
0000 NO OPERATION Does not do anything.
0001 RESET Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key.
0005 CLEAR EVENT RECORDS Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu
command.
0006 CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY Clears all oscillography records.
1000 to 101F VIRTUAL IN 1-32 ON/OFF Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 32 either “ON” or “OFF”.
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are
always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and
slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device
11h (17 dec).

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low 51
DATA - high 00 DATA - high 00
DATA - low C8 DATA - low C8
CRC - low CE CRC - low CE
CRC - high DD CRC - high DD

APPENDIX B B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting
registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be
stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows
a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to
slave device 11h (17 decimal).
B
PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX) PACKET FORMAT EXMAPLE (HEX)
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02
BYTE COUNT 04 CRC - lo 07
DATA #1 - high order byte 00 CRC - hi 64
DATA #1 - low order byte C8
DATA #2 - high order byte 00
DATA #2 - low order byte 01
CRC - low order byte 12
CRC - high order byte 62
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception
response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order
bit of the function code set to 1.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the
unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11.

FUNCTION CODE 39 FUNCTION CODE B9
CRC - low order byte CD ERROR CODE 01
CRC - high order byte F2 CRC - low order byte 93
CRC - high order byte 95

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS APPENDIX B
B.3FILE TRANSFERS B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS
a) DESCRIPTION
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of
files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)"
and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from
the UR relay, use the following steps:
B 1. Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter
than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case
sensitive.
2. Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is
not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The
"position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have
read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244.
3. Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indi-
cates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size.
4. If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is
only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the pre-
vious operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous
block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus
connections.
b) OTHER PROTOCOLS
All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for
example, TFTP or MMS).
c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES

Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 Sep-
tember 1997). The files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format.
d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES

Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the Oscillography sec-
tion in Chapter 5 for additional details.
The Oscillography Number of Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (cap-
tured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file
is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the
Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by
periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available.
The Oscillography Number of Records register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data
per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography Available Records register specifies the actual num-
ber of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay.
Writing “Yes” (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography Clear Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the Oscil-
lography Number of Triggers and Oscillography Available Records registers to zero, and sets the Oscillography Last
Cleared Date to the present date and time.
To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames:
OSCnnnn.CFG and OSCnnn.DAT
Replace “nnn” with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names
OSCAnnnn.CFG and OSCAnnn.DAT

APPENDIX B B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
e) READING DATA LOGGER FILES

Familiarity with the data logger feature is required to understand this description. Refer to the Data Logger section of Chap-
ter 5 for details. To read the entire data logger in binary COMTRADE format, read the following files.
datalog.cfg and datalog.dat
To read the entire data logger in ASCII COMTRADE format, read the following files.
dataloga.cfg and dataloga.dat
To limit the range of records to be returned in the COMTRADE files, append the following to the filename before writing it:
B
• To read from a specific time to the end of the log: <space> startTime
• To read a specific range of records: <space> startTime <space> endTime
• Replace <startTime> and <endTime> with Julian dates (seconds since Jan. 1 1970) as numeric text.
f) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES

To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename:
EVT.TXT
To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename:
EVTnnn.TXT (replace nnn with the desired starting record number)
To read from a specific record to another specific record, use the following filename:
EVT.TXT xxxxx yyyyy (replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number)
g) READING FAULT REPORT FILES

Fault report data has been available via the D60 file retrieval mechanism since UR firmware version 2.00. The file name is
faultReport#####.htm. The ##### refers to the fault report record number. The fault report number is a counter that
indicates how many fault reports have ever occurred. The counter rolls over at a value of 65535. Only the last ten fault
reports are available for retrieval; a request for a non-existent fault report file will yield a null file. The current value fault
report counter is available in “Number of Fault Reports” Modbus register at location 0x3020.
For example, if 14 fault reports have occurred then the files faultReport5.htm, faultReport6.htm, up to
faultReport14.htm are available to be read. The expected use of this feature has an external master periodically poll-
ing the “Number of Fault Reports' register. If the value changes, then the master reads all the new files.
The contents of the file is in standard HTML notation and can be viewed via any commercial browser.
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION
The COMMAND password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of “0” removes COMMAND password protec-
tion. When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. COMMAND security
is required to change the COMMAND password. Similarly, the SETTING password is set up at memory location 4002.
These are the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" PASSWORD SECURITY
menu via the keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa.
To gain COMMAND level security access, the COMMAND password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain
SETTING level security access, the SETTING password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered SETTING
password must match the current SETTING password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware.
COMMAND and SETTING passwords each have a 30-minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular pass-
word, and is re-started whenever you “use” it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the SETTING password timer and
writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the COMMAND password timer. The value read at memory location
4010 can be used to confirm whether a COMMAND password is enabled or disabled (0 for Disabled). The value read at
memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a SETTING password is enabled or disabled.
COMMAND or SETTING password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on
which the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and
the passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B
B.4MEMORY MAPPING B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 42)

ADDR REGISTER NAME RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT DEFAULT
Product Information (Read Only)
0000 UR Product Type 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B 0002 Product Version
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
0 to 655.35 --- 0.01 F001 1
0010 Serial Number --- --- --- F203 “0”

0020 Manufacturing Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0022 Modification Number 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
0040 Order Code --- --- --- F204 “Order Code x”
0090 Ethernet MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0
0093 Reserved (13 items) --- --- --- F001 0
00A0 CPU Module Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00B0 CPU Supplier Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00C0 Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items) --- --- --- F203 (none)
Self Test Targets (Read Only)
0200 Self Test States (2 items) 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0
Front Panel (Read Only)
0204 LED Column x State (10 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F501 0
0220 Display Message --- --- --- F204 (none)
0248 Last Key Pressed 0 to 47 --- 1 F530 0 (None)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)
0280 Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke 0 to 42 --- 1 F190 0 (No key -- use
between real keys)
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (32 modules)
0400 Virtual Input 1 State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
0401 ...Repeated for module number 2
040A ...Repeated for module number 11
040B ...Repeated for module number 12
040C ...Repeated for module number 13
040D ...Repeated for module number 14
040E ...Repeated for module number 15
040F ...Repeated for module number 16

APPENDIX B B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)
0800 Digital Counter 1 Value -2147483647 to
2147483647
--- 1 F004 0 B
0802 Digital Counter 1 Frozen -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
0804 Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0806 Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp us 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
FlexStates (Read Only)
0900 FlexState Bits (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element States (Read Only)
1000 Element Operate States (64 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F502 0
User Displays Actuals (Read Only)
1080 Formatted user-definable displays (16 items) --- --- --- F200 (none)
Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only)
1200 User Map Values (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
14C0 Target Sequence 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
14C1 Number of Targets 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read/Write)
14C2 Target to Read 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
14C3 Target Message --- --- --- F200 “.”
Digital I/O States (Read Only)
1500 Contact Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1508 Virtual Input States (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1510 Contact Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1518 Contact Output Current States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1520 Contact Output Voltage States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1528 Virtual Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1530 Contact Output Detectors (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
Remote Input/Output States (Read Only)
1540 Remote Device 1 States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1542 Remote Input States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1550 Remote Devices Online 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)
1551 Remote Device 1 StNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
1553 Remote Device 1 SqNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0


B 1585
1589
...Repeated for module number 14
Platform Direct Input/Output States (Read Only)
15C0 Direct Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15C8 Direct Outputs Average Message Return Time 1 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
15C9 Direct Outputs Average Message Return Time 2 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
15CA Direct Inputs/Outputs Unreturned Message Count - Ch. 1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15CB Direct Inputs/Outputs Unreturned Message Count - Ch. 2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D0 Direct Device States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
15D1 Reserved 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D2 Direct Inputs/Outputs CRC Fail Count 1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
15D3 Direct Inputs/Outputs CRC Fail Count 2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)
1610 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
1611 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
Data Logger Actuals (Read Only)
1618 Data Logger Channel Count 0 to 16 CHNL 1 F001 0
1619 Time of oldest available samples 0 to 4294967295 seconds 1 F050 0
161B Time of newest available samples 0 to 4294967295 seconds 1 F050 0
161D Data Logger Duration 0 to 999.9 DAYS 0.1 F001 0
Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules)
1800 Phase A Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1802 Phase B Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1804 Phase C Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1806 Neutral Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1808 Phase A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180A Phase A Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
180B Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180D Phase B Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
180E Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1810 Phase C Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1811 Neutral Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1813 Neutral Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1814 Ground Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1816 Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1818 Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1819 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181B Zero Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
181C Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181E Positive Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
181F Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1821 Negative Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1822 Differential Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1824 Differential Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1825 Reserved (27 items) --- --- --- F001 0
18C0 ...Repeated for module number 4


Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules)
1A00 Phase AG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A02 Phase BG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A04 Phase CG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0 B
1A06 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A08 Phase AG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A09 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A0B Phase BG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A0C Phase CG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A0E Phase CG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A0F Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A11 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A13 Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A15 Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A17 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A18 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1A Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A1B Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1D Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A1E Auxiliary Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A20 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A22 Auxiliary Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A23 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A25 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A26 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A28 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A29 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A2B Negative Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
1A2C Reserved (20 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1A40 ...Repeated for module number 2
1AC0 ...Repeated for module number 4
1B00 ...Repeated for module number 5
Source Power (Read Only) (6 modules)
1C00 Three Phase Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C02 Phase A Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C04 Phase B Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C06 Phase C Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C08 Three Phase Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C0A Phase A Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C0C Phase B Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C0E Phase C Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C10 Three Phase Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C12 Phase A Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000


1C14 Phase B Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C16 Phase C Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C18 Three Phase Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
B
1C19 Phase A Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C1A Phase B Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C1B Phase C Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C1C Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1CA0 ...Repeated for module number 6
Source Energy (Read Only Non-Volatile) (6 modules)
1D00 Positive Watthour 0 to 1000000000000 Wh 0.001 F060 0
1D02 Negative Watthour 0 to 1000000000000 Wh 0.001 F060 0
1D04 Positive Varhour 0 to 1000000000000 varh 0.001 F060 0
1D06 Negative Varhour 0 to 1000000000000 varh 0.001 F060 0
1D08 Reserved (8 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1D10 ...Repeated for module number 2
Energy Commands (Read/Write Command)
1D60 Energy Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)
1D80 Frequency 2 to 90 Hz 0.01 F001 0
Breaker Flashover (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
21A6 Breaker 1 Flashover Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
21A7 Breaker 1 Flashover Side 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
21A8 Breaker 1 Flashover Side 2 Source 0 to 6 --- 1 F211 0 (None)
21A9 Breaker 1 Flashover Status Closed A 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
21AA Breaker 1 Flashover Status Closed B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
21AB Breaker 1 Flashover Status Closed C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
21AC Breaker 1 Flashover Voltage Pickup Level 0 to 1.5 pu 0.001 F001 850
21AD Breaker 1 Flashover Voltage Difference Pickup Level 0 to 100000 V 1 F060 1000
21AF Breaker 1 Flashover Current Pickup Level 0 to 1.5 pu 0.001 F001 600
21B0 Breaker 1 Flashover Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 100
21B1 Breaker 1 Flashover Supervision Phase A 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
21B2 Breaker 1 Flashover Supervision Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
21B3 Breaker 1 Flashover Supervision Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
21B4 Breaker 1 Flashover Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
21B5 Breaker 1 Flashover Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
21B6 Breaker 1 Flashover Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-Reset)
21B7 Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
21BB ...Repeated for module number 2 0 to 99999999 kA2-cyc 1 F060 0
Breaker Arcing Current Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (2 modules)
21E0 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase A 0 to 99999999 kA2-cyc 1 F060 0


21E2 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase B 0 to 99999999 kA2-cyc 1 F060 0
21E4 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Phase C 0 to 99999999 kA2-cyc 1 F060 0
21E6 Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase A 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
21E7 Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase B 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
21E8 Breaker 1 Operating Time Phase C 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0
21E9 Breaker 1 Operating Time 0 to 65535 ms 1 F001 0 B
21E6 ...Repeated for module number 2
Breaker Arcing Current Commands (Read/Write Command) (2 modules)
2224 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Passwords Unauthorized Access (Read/Write Command)
2230 Reset Unauthorized Access 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Fault Location (Read Only) (5 modules)
2340 Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2342 Prefault Phase A Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2343 Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2345 Prefault Phase B Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2346 Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2348 Prefault Phase C Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2349 Prefault Phase A Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
234B Prefault Phase A Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
234C Prefault Phase B Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
234E Prefault Phase B Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
234F Prefault Phase C Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
2351 Prefault Phase C Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2352 Fault 1 Phase A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2354 Fault 1 Phase A Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2355 Fault 1 Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
2357 Fault 1 Phase B Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2358 Fault 1 Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
235A Fault 1 Phase C Current Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
235B Fault 1 Phase A Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
235D Fault 1 Phase A Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
235E Fault 1 Phase B Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
2360 Fault 1 Phase B Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2361 Fault 1 Phase C Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
2363 Fault 1 Phase C Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 degrees 0.1 F002 0
2364 Fault Type 0 to 11 --- 1 F148 0 (NA)
2365 Fault Location based on Line length units (km or miles) -3276.7 to 3276.7 --- 0.1 F002 0
Synchrocheck Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)
2400 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage -1000000000000 to V 1 F060 0
1000000000000
2402 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency 0 to 655.35 Hz 0.01 F001 0
2403 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase 0 to 359.9 degrees 0.1 F001 0
Autoreclose Status (Read Only) (6 modules)
2410 Autoreclose Count 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0


Expanded FlexStates (Read Only)
2B00 FlexStates, one per register (256 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Digital I/O states (Read Only)
B 2D00
2D80
Contact Input States, one per register (96 items)
Contact Output States, one per register (64 items)
0 to 1
0 to 1
---
---
1
1
F108
F108
0 (Off)
0 (Off)
2E00 Virtual Output States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Remote I/O Status (Read Only)
2F00 Remote Device States, one per register (16 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F155 0 (Offline)
2F80 Remote Input States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)
3000 Oscillography Number of Triggers 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3001 Oscillography Available Records 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3002 Oscillography Last Cleared Date 0 to 400000000 --- 1 F050 0
3004 Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)
3005 Oscillography Force Trigger 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
3011 Oscillography Clear Data 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Fault Report Indexing (Read Only Non-Volatile)
3020 Number Of Fault Reports 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Fault Report Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (15 modules)
3030 Fault Time 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)
3100 Name of file to read --- --- --- F204 (none)
Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)
3200 Character position of current block within file 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3202 Size of currently-available data block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3203 Block of data from requested file (122 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Event Recorder (Read Only)
3400 Events Since Last Clear 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3402 Number of Available Events 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3404 Event Recorder Last Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Event Recorder (Read/Write Command)
3406 Event Recorder Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)
34C0 DCMA Inputs 1 Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0


34CA ...Repeated for module number 6
34CC ...Repeated for module number 7
34CE ...Repeated for module number 8
34D2 ...Repeated for module number 10 B
34DA ...Repeated for module number 14
34DC ...Repeated for module number 15
34DE ...Repeated for module number 16
34EA ...Repeated for module number 22
34EC ...Repeated for module number 23
34EE ...Repeated for module number 24
RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)
34F0 RTD Inputs 1 Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34F1 ...Repeated for module number 2
34FA ...Repeated for module number 11
34FB ...Repeated for module number 12
34FC ...Repeated for module number 13
34FD ...Repeated for module number 14
34FE ...Repeated for module number 15
34FF ...Repeated for module number 16


B 3516
3517
Expanded Direct Input/Output Status (Read Only)
3560 Direct Device States, one per register (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F155 0 (Offline)
3570 Direct Input States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Passwords (Read/Write Command)
4000 Command Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read/Write Setting)
4002 Setting Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read/Write)
4008 Command Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
400A Setting Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read Only)
4010 Command Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4011 Setting Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting)
4040 Invoke and Scroll Through User Display Menu Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
LED Test (Read/Write Setting)
4048 LED Test Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4049 LED Test Control 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)
4050 Flash Message Time 0.5 to 10 s 0.1 F001 10
4051 Default Message Timeout 10 to 900 s 1 F001 300
4052 Default Message Intensity 0 to 3 --- 1 F101 0 (25%)
4053 Screen Saver Feature 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4054 Screen Saver Wait Time 1 to 65535 min 1 F001 30
4055 Current Cutoff Level 0.002 to 0.02 pu 0.001 F001 20
4056 Voltage Cutoff Level 0.1 to 1 V 0.1 F001 10
Communications (Read/Write Setting)
407E COM1 minimum response time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
407F COM2 minimum response time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
4080 Modbus Slave Address 1 to 254 --- 1 F001 254
4083 RS485 Com1 Baud Rate 0 to 11 --- 1 F112 8 (115200)
4084 RS485 Com1 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)
4085 RS485 Com2 Baud Rate 0 to 11 --- 1 F112 8 (115200)
4086 RS485 Com2 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)
4087 IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554706
4089 IP Subnet Mask 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 4294966272
408B Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554497
408D Network Address NSAP --- --- --- F074 0
4097 Default GOOSE Update Time 1 to 60 s 1 F001 60


409A DNP Port 0 to 4 --- 1 F177 0 (NONE)
409B DNP Address 0 to 65519 --- 1 F001 1
409C DNP Client Addresses (2 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40A0 TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 502
40A1 TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 20000
40A2 TCP Port Number for the UCA/MMS Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 102 B
40A3 TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 80
40A4 Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 69
40A5 Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
(zero means “automatic”) (2 items)
40A7 DNP Unsolicited Responses Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40A8 DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout 0 to 60 s 1 F001 5
40A9 DNP Unsolicited Responses Max Retries 1 to 255 --- 1 F001 10
40AA DNP Unsolicited Responses Destination Address 0 to 65519 --- 1 F001 1
40AB Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F192 0 (Half-Duplex)
40AC DNP User Map Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40AD DNP Number of Sources used in Analog points list 1 to 6 --- 1 F001 1
40AE DNP Current Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40AF DNP Voltage Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B0 DNP Power Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B1 DNP Energy Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B2 DNP Other Scale Factor 0 to 8 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B3 DNP Current Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B4 DNP Voltage Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B5 DNP Power Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B6 DNP Energy Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B7 DNP Other Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B8 DNP IIN Time Sync Bit Period 1 to 10080 min 1 F001 1440
40B9 DNP Message Fragment Size 30 to 2048 --- 1 F001 240
40BA DNP Client Address 3 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40BC DNP Client Address 4 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40BE DNP Client Address 5 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40C0 DNP Communications Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
40C8 UCA Logical Device Name --- --- --- F203 “UCADevice”
40D0 GOOSE Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
40D1 UCA GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS Flexlogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
40D2 UCA Communications Reserved (14 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
40E0 TCP Port Number for the IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 2404
40E1 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40E2 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Common Address of ASDU 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
40E3 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Cyclic Data Trans. Period 1 to 65535 s 1 F001 60
40E4 IEC 60870-5-104 Sources used in M_ME_NC_1 point list 1 to 6 --- 1 F001 1
40E5 IEC 60870-5-104 Current Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E6 IEC 60870-5-104 Voltage Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E7 IEC 60870-5-104 Power Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E8 IEC 60870-5-104 Energy Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E9 IEC 60870-5-104 Other Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40EA IEC 60870-5-104 Client Address (5 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40FE IEC 60870-5-104 Communications Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
4100 DNP Binary Input Block of 16 Points (58 items) 0 to 58 --- 1 F197 0 (Not Used)
4140 DNP Object 1 Default Variation 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 2
4142 DNP Object 20 Default Variation 0 to 3 --- 1 F523 0 (1)


Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)
B 4168
4169
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Function
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Server IP Address
0 to 1
0 to 4294967295
---
---
1
1
F102
F003
0 (Disabled)
0
416B Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) UDP Port Number 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 123
Data Logger Commands (Read/Write Command)
4170 Data Logger Clear 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Data Logger (Read/Write Setting)
4180 Data Logger Rate 0 to 7 --- 1 F178 1 (1 min)
4181 Data Logger Channel Settings (16 items) --- --- --- F600 0
Clock (Read/Write Command)
41A0 Real Time Clock Set Time 0 to 235959 --- 1 F050 0
Clock (Read/Write Setting)
41A2 SR Date Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F051 0
41A4 SR Time Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F052 0
41A6 IRIG-B Signal Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F114 0 (None)
41A7 Clock Events Enable / Disable 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Fault Report Commands (Read/Write Command)
41B2 Fault Reports Clear Data Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)
41C0 Oscillography Number of Records 1 to 64 --- 1 F001 15
41C1 Oscillography Trigger Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F118 0 (Auto. Overwrite)
41C2 Oscillography Trigger Position 0 to 100 % 1 F001 50
41C3 Oscillography Trigger Source 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
41C4 Oscillography AC Input Waveforms 0 to 4 --- 1 F183 2 (16 samples/cycle)
41D0 Oscillography Analog Channel n (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
4200 Oscillography Digital Channel n (63 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)
4260 Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4261 Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
4280 FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4281 User LED type (latched or self-resetting) 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 1 (Self-Reset)


42AA ...Repeated for module number 22
42AC ...Repeated for module number 23
42AE ...Repeated for module number 24
42B0 ...Repeated for module number 25 B
42BA ...Repeated for module number 30
42BC ...Repeated for module number 31
42BE ...Repeated for module number 32
42CC ...Repeated for module number 39
42CE ...Repeated for module number 40
42DA ...Repeated for module number 46
Installation (Read/Write Setting)
43E0 Relay Programmed State 0 to 1 --- 1 F133 0 (Not Programmed)
43E1 Relay Name --- --- --- F202 “Relay-1”
User Programmable Self Tests (Read/Write Setting)
4441 User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4442 User Programmable Direct Device Off Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4443 User Programmable Remote Device Off Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4444 User Programmable Primary Ethernet Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4445 User Programmable Secondary Ethernet Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4446 User Programmable Battery Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4447 User Programmable SNTP Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
4448 User Programmable IRIG-B Fail Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4480 Phase CT Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1
4481 Phase CT Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
4482 Ground CT Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1
4483 Ground CT Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)
4500 Phase VT Connection 0 to 1 --- 1 F100 0 (Wye)
4501 Phase VT Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664


4502 Phase VT Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
4504 Auxiliary VT Connection 0 to 6 --- 1 F166 1 (Vag)
4505 Auxiliary VT Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664
4506 Auxiliary VT Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
B 4510 ...Repeated for module number 3

Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4580 Source Name --- --- --- F206 “SRC 1"
4583 Source Phase CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4584 Source Ground CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4585 Source Phase VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4586 Source Auxiliary VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
Power System (Read/Write Setting)
4600 Nominal Frequency 25 to 60 Hz 1 F001 60
4601 Phase Rotation 0 to 1 --- 1 F106 0 (ABC)
4602 Frequency And Phase Reference 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
4603 Frequency Tracking Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
Breaker Control Global Settings (Read/Write Setting)
46F0 UCA XCBR 1 SelTimOut 1 to 60 s 1 F001 30
Breaker Control (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
4700 Breaker 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4701 Breaker 1 Name --- --- --- F206 “Bkr 1"
4704 Breaker 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)
4705 Breaker 1 Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4706 Breaker 1 Close 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4707 Breaker 1 Phase A 3 Pole 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4708 Breaker 1 Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4709 Breaker 1 Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
470A Breaker 1 External Alarm 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
470B Breaker 1 Alarm Delay 0 to 1000000 s 0.001 F003 0
470D Breaker 1 Push Button Control 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
470E Breaker 1 Manual Close Recall Time 0 to 1000000 s 0.001 F003 0
4710 Breaker 1 UCA XCBR 1 SBOClass 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
4711 Breaker 1 UCA XCBR 1 SBOEna 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4712 Breaker 1 Out Of Service 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4713 UCA XCBR PwrSupSt Bit 0 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4714 UCA XCBR 1 PresSt Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4715 UCA XCBR 1 TrpCoil Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4716 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 65535 s 1 F001 0
Synchrocheck (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
4780 Synchrocheck 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4781 Synchrocheck 1 V1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
4782 Synchrocheck 1 V2 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 1 (SRC 2)
4783 Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Voltage Difference 0 to 100000 V 1 F060 10000
4785 Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Angle Difference 0 to 100 degrees 1 F001 30
4786 Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Frequency Difference 0 to 2 Hz 0.01 F001 100
4787 Synchrocheck 1 Dead Source Select 0 to 5 --- 1 F176 1 (LV1 and DV2)
4788 Synchrocheck 1 Dead V1 Maximum Voltage 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 30


4789 Synchrocheck 1 Dead V2 Maximum Voltage 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 30
478A Synchrocheck 1 Live V1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 70
478B Synchrocheck 1 Live V2 Minimum Voltage 0 to 1.25 pu 0.01 F001 70
478C Synchrocheck 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
478D Synchrocheck 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
478E Synchrocheck 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0 B
478F Synchrocheck 1 Frequency Hysteresis 0 to 0.1 Hz 0.01 F001 6
Flexcurves A and B (Read/Write Settings)
4800 FlexCurve A (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
48F0 FlexCurve B (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting)
4A00 Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
4C00 User display 1 top line text --- --- --- F202 ““
4C0A User display 1 bottom line text --- --- --- F202 ““
4C14 Modbus addresses of displayed items (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
4C19 Reserved (7 items) --- --- --- F001 0
4CA0 ...Repeated for module number 6
4CC0 ...Repeated for module number 7
4CE0 ...Repeated for module number 8
4DA0 ...Repeated for module number 14
4DC0 ...Repeated for module number 15
4DE0 ...Repeated for module number 16
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (12 modules)
4E00 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 2 (Disabled)
4E01 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line --- --- --- F202 (none)
4E0B User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text --- --- --- F202 (none)
4E15 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text --- --- --- F202 (none)
4E1F User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time 0 to 60 s 0.05 F001 0
4E20 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
4E21 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4E22 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
4E6C ...Repeated for module number 4
4EB4 ...Repeated for module number 6
4ED8 ...Repeated for module number 7
4EFC ...Repeated for module number 8
4F8C ...Repeated for module number 12


Flexlogic (Read/Write Setting)
5000 FlexLogic Entry (512 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 16384
Flexlogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
5800 Timer 1 Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F129 0 (millisecond)
5801 Timer 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 0
B 5802
5803
Timer 1 Dropout Delay
Timer 1 Reserved (5 items)
0 to 60000
0 to 65535
---
---
1
1
F001
F001
0
0
Phase TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5900 Phase TOC 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5901 Phase TOC 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5902 Phase TOC 1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5903 Phase TOC 1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5904 Phase TOC 1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5905 Phase TOC 1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5906 Phase TOC 1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)
5907 Phase TOC 1 Voltage Restraint 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5908 Phase TOC 1 Block For Each Phase (3 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
590B Phase TOC 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
590C Phase TOC 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
590D Reserved (3 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0


Phase IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5A00 Phase IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A01 Phase IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5A02 Phase IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000 B
5A03 Phase IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A04 Phase IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A05 Phase IOC1 Block For Each Phase (3 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5A08 Phase IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5A09 Phase IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5AA0 ...Repeated for module number 11
5AB0 ...Repeated for module number 12
Neutral TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5B00 Neutral TOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5B01 Neutral TOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5B02 Neutral TOC1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5B03 Neutral TOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5B04 Neutral TOC1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5B05 Neutral TOC1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5B06 Neutral TOC1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)
5B07 Neutral TOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5B08 Neutral TOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5B09 Neutral TOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5B0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Neutral IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5C00 Neutral IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C01 Neutral IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5C02 Neutral IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5C03 Neutral IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5C04 Neutral IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5C05 Neutral IOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5C06 Neutral IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5C07 Neutral IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C08 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0


B 5CA0
5CB0
Ground TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5D00 Ground TOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D01 Ground TOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5D02 Ground TOC1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5D03 Ground TOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5D04 Ground TOC1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5D05 Ground TOC1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5D06 Ground TOC1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)
5D07 Ground TOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5D08 Ground TOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5D09 Ground TOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Ground IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5E00 Ground IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5E01 Ground IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5E02 Ground IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5E03 Ground IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5E04 Ground IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5E05 Ground IOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5E06 Ground IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5E07 Ground IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5E08 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5EA0 ...Repeated for module number 11
5EB0 ...Repeated for module number 12
Negative Sequence TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
6300 Negative Sequence TOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6301 Negative Sequence TOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
6302 Negative Sequence TOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
6303 Negative Sequence TOC1 Curve 0 to 16 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
6304 Negative Sequence TOC1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
6305 Negative Sequence TOC1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)
6306 Negative Sequence TOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6307 Negative Sequence TOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)


6308 Negative Sequence TOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6309 Reserved (7 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Negative Sequence IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
6400 Negative Sequence IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6401 Negative Sequence IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1) B
6402 Negative Sequence IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
6403 Negative Sequence IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
6404 Negative Sequence IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
6405 Negative Sequence IOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6406 Negative Sequence IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6407 Negative Sequence IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Negative Sequence Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
64A0 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
64A1 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
64A2 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup 0 to 1.25 pu 0.001 F001 300
64A3 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
64A4 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
64A5 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
64A6 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
64A7 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Power Swing Detect (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
65C0 Power Swing Detect Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
65C1 Power Swing Detect Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
65C2 Power Swing Detect Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F513 0 (Two Step)
65C3 Power Swing Detect Supervision 0.05 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 600
65C4 Power Swing Detect Forward Reach 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 5000
65C5 Power Swing Detect Forward RCA 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 75
65C6 Power Swing Detect Reverse Reach 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 5000
65C7 Power Swing Detect Reverse RCA 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 75
65C8 Power Swing Detect Outer Limit Angle 40 to 140 degrees 1 F001 120
65C9 Power Swing Detect Middle Limit Angle 40 to 140 degrees 1 F001 90
65CA Power Swing Detect Inner Limit Angle 40 to 140 degrees 1 F001 60
65CB Power Swing Detect Delay 1 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 30
65CC Power Swing Detect Delay 1 Reset 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 50
65CD Power Swing Detect Delay 2 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 17
65CE Power Swing Detect Delay 3 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 9
65CF Power Swing Detect Delay 4 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 17
65D0 Power Swing Detect Seal In Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 400
65D1 Power Swing Detect Trip Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F514 0 (Delayed)
65D2 Power Swing Detect Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
65D3 Power Swing Detect Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
65D4 Power Swing Detect Event 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
65D5 Power Swing Detect Shape 0 to 1 --- 1 F085 0 (Mho Shape)
65D6 Power Swing Detect Quad Forward Middle 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 6000
65D7 Power Swing Detect Quad Forward Outer 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 7000
65D8 Power Swing Detect Quad Reverse Middle 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 6000
65D9 Power Swing Detect Quad Reverse Outer 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 7000
65DA Power Swing Detect Outer Right Blinder 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 10000
65DB Power Swing Detect Outer Left Blinder 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 10000
65DC Power Swing Detect Middle Right Blinder 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 10000
65DD Power Swing Detect Middle Left Blinder 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 10000


65DE Power Swing Detect Inner Right Blinder 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 10000
65DF Power Swing Detect Inner Left Blinder 0.1 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 10000
Load Encroachment (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
6700 Load Encroachment Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6701 Load Encroachment Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
B 6702
6703
Load Encroachment Minimum Voltage
Load Encroachment Reach
0 to 3
0.02 to 250
pu
ohms
0.001
0.01
F001
F001
250
100
6704 Load Encroachment Angle 5 to 50 degrees 1 F001 30
6705 Load Encroachment Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
6706 Load Encroachment Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
6707 Load Encroachment Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6708 Load Encroachment Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6709 Load Encroachment Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
670A Load Encroachment Reserved (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Trip Output (Read/Write Setting)
6800 Trip Mode 0 to 2 --- 1 F195 0 (Disabled)
6801 Trip 3-Pole Input1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
680A Trip 1-Pole Input4 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
680B Trip 1-Pole Input5 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
680C Trip 1-Pole Input6 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
680D Trip Reclose Input1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
680E Trip Reclose Input2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
680F Trip Reclose Input3 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6810 Trip Reclose Input4 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6813 Trip Force 3-Pole 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6814 Trip Pilot Priority 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
6815 BKR Phase A Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6816 BKR Phase B Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6817 BKR Phase C Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6818 Trip Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6819 Reverse Fault Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
681A Trip Delay On Evolving Faults 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
681B Reserved (5 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Open Pole Detect (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
6820 Open Pole Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6821 Open Pole Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6822 Open Pole Voltage SUPV 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6823 Open Pole Current PKP 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 50
6824 Open Pole Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6825 Open Pole Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6826 Open Pole Line XC0 300 to 9999.9 ohms 0.1 F003 99999
6828 Open Pole Line XC1 300 to 9999.9 ohms 0.1 F003 99999
682A Open Pole REM Current PKP 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 50
682B Reserved (5 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0


Pilot DUTT (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
6830 DUTT Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6831 DUTT Seal In Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
6832 DUTT 1P Number of Communication Bits 0 to 2 --- 1 F198 0 (1)
6833 DUTT RX1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6834 DUTT RX2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0 B
6835 DUTT RX3 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6836 DUTT RX4 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6837 DUTT 1P Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6838 DUTT 1P Event 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Pilot PUTT (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
6840 PUTT 1P Scheme Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6841 PUTT 1P Rx Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
6842 PUTT 1P Seal In Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
6843 PUTT 1P Number of Communication Bits 0 to 2 --- 1 F198 0 (1)
6844 PUTT 1P Rx1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6845 PUTT 1P Rx2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6846 PUTT 1P Rx3 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6847 PUTT 1P Rx4 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6848 PUTT 1P Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6849 PUTT 1P Event 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
684A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Pilot POTT (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
6850 POTT 1P Scheme Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6851 POTT 1P Permissive Echo 0 to 2 --- 1 F199 0 (Disabled)
6852 POTT 1P Rx Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
6853 POTT 1P Trans Block Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 20
6854 POTT 1P Trans Block Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 90
6855 POTT 1P Echo Duration 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 100
6856 POTT 1P Echo Lockout 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 250
6857 POTT 1P Line End Open Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 50
6858 POTT 1P Seal In Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
6859 POTT 1P Ground Directional Overcurrent Forward 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
685A POTT 1P Number of Communication Bits 0 to 2 --- 1 F198 0 (1)
685B POTT 1P Rx1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
685C POTT 1P Rx2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
685D POTT 1P Rx3 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
685E POTT 1P Rx4 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
685F POTT 1P Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6860 POTT 1P Event 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6861 POTT 1P Echo Condition 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Pilot Hybrid POTT (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
6868 Hybrid POTT 1P Scheme Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6869 Hybrid POTT 1P Permissive Echo 0 to 2 --- 1 F199 0 (Disabled)
686A Hybrid POTT 1P Rx Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
686B Hybrid POTT 1P Trans Block Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 20
686C Hybrid POTT 1P Trans Block Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 90
686D Hybrid POTT 1P Echo Duration 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 100
686E Hybrid POTT 1P Echo Lockout 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 250
686F Hybrid POTT 1P Seal In Delay 0 to 65.535 --- 0.001 F001 0
6870 Hybrid POTT 1P Ground Directional Overcurrent Forward 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6871 Hybrid POTT 1P Gnd Directional Overcurrent Reverse 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


6872 Hybrid POTT 1P Number of Communication Bits 0 to 2 --- 1 F198 0 (1)
6873 Hybrid POTT 1P Rx1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B 6877
6878
Hybrid POTT 1P Target
Hybrid POTT 1P Event
0 to 2
0 to 1
---
---
1
1
F109
F102
0 (Self-reset)
0 (Disabled)
6879 Hybrid POTT Echo Condition 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
687A Hybrid POTT Weak Infeed 0 to 2 --- 1 F199 1 (Enabled)
687B Hybrid POTT Weak Infeed Condition 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
687C Reserved (4 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Pilot Blocking (1P) (Read/Write Setting)
6880 Blocking Scheme 1P Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6881 Block 1P Rx Coord Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 10
6882 Block 1P Transient Block Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 30
6883 Block 1P Transient Block Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 90
6884 Blocking Scheme 1P Seal In Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
6885 Blocking Scheme 1P Gnd Directional Overcurrent Fwd 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6886 Blocking Scheme 1P Gnd Directional Overcurrent Rev 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6887 Blocking Scheme 1P Number of Communication Bits 0 to 2 --- 1 F198 0 (1)
6888 Blocking Scheme 1P Rx1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6889 Blocking Scheme 1P Rx2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
688A Blocking Scheme 1P Rx3 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
688B Blocking Scheme 1P Rx4 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
688C Blocking 1P Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
688D Blocking 1P Event 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
688E Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Autoreclose 1P 3P (Read/Write Setting)
6890 Autoreclose Mode 0 to 3 --- 1 F080 0 (1 & 3 Pole)
6891 Autoreclose Maximum Number of Shots 1 to 4 --- 1 F001 2
6892 Autoreclose Block Breaker 1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6893 Autoreclose Close Time Breaker 1 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 10
6894 Autoreclose Breaker Manual Close 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6895 Autoreclose Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6896 Autoreclose Block Time Manual Close 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 1000
6897 Autoreclose 1P Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6898 Autoreclose 3P Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6899 Autoreclose 3P TD Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
689A Autoreclose Multi-Phase Fault 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
689B Autoreclose Breaker 1 Pole Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
689C Autoreclose Breaker 3 Pole Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
689D Autoreclose 3-Pole Dead Time 1 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 50
689E Autoreclose 3-Pole Dead Time 2 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 120
689F Autoreclose Extend Dead T1 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A0 Autoreclose Dead T1 Extension 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 50
68A1 Autoreclose Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A2 Autoreclose Reset Time 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 6000
68A3 Autoreclose Breaker Closed 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A4 Autoreclose Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A5 Autoreclose Pause 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A6 Autoreclose Incomplete Sequence Time 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 500
68A7 Autoreclose Block Breaker 2 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
68A8 Autoreclose Close Time Breaker 2 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 10
68A9 Autoreclose Transfer 1 to 2 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)


68AA Autoreclose Transfer 2 to 1 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
68AB Autoreclose Breaker 1 Fail Option 0 to 1 --- 1 F081 0 (Continue)
68AC Autoreclose Breaker 2 Fail Option 0 to 1 --- 1 F081 0 (Continue)
68AD Autoreclose 1P Dead Time 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 100
68AE Autoreclose Breaker Sequence 0 to 4 --- 1 F082 3 (1 - 2)
68AF Autoreclose Transfer Time 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 400 B
68B0 Autoreclose Event 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
68B1 Autoreclose 3P Dead Time 3 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 200
68B2 Autoreclose 3P Dead Time 4 0 to 655.35 s 0.01 F001 400
68B3 Reserved (14 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7000 Phase UV1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7001 Phase UV1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7002 Phase UV1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 1000
7003 Phase UV1 Curve 0 to 1 --- 1 F111 0 (Definite Time)
7004 Phase UV1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7005 Phase UV1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 100
7006 Phase UV1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7007 Phase UV1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7008 Phase UV1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7009 Phase UV Measurement Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F186 0 (Phase to Ground)
Phase Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
7040 Phase OV1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7041 Phase OV1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7042 Phase OV1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 1000
7043 Phase OV1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7044 Phase OV1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7045 Phase OV1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7046 Phase OV1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7047 Phase OV1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Distance (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
7060 Distance Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7061 Memory Duration 5 to 25 cycles 1 F001 10
7062 Force Self-Polar 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Phase Distance (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (5 modules)
7070 Phase Distance Zone 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7071 Phase Distance Zone 1 Current Supervision 0.05 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 200
7072 Phase Distance Zone 1 Reach 0.02 to 250 ohms 0.01 F001 200
7073 Phase Distance Zone 1 Direction 0 to 2 --- 1 F154 0 (Forward)
7074 Phase Distance Zone 1 Comparator Limit 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90
7075 Phase Distance Zone 1 Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
7076 Phase Distance Zone 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7077 Phase Distance Zone 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7078 Phase Distance Zone 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7079 Phase Distance Zone 1 Shape 0 to 1 --- 1 F120 0 (Mho)
707A Phase Distance Zone 1 RCA 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85
707B Phase Distance Zone 1 DIR RCA 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85
707C Phase Distance Zone 1 DIR Comp Limit 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90
707D Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Right Blinder 0.02 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 1000
707E Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Right Blinder RCA 60 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85
707F Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Left Blinder 0.02 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 1000


7080 Phase Distance Zone 1 Quad Left Blinder RCA 60 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85
7081 Phase Distance Zone 1 Volt Limit 0 to 5 pu 0.001 F001 0
7082 Phase Distance Zone 1 Transformer Voltage Connection 0 to 12 --- 1 F153 0 (None)
7083 Phase Distance Zone 1 Transformer Current Connection 0 to 12 --- 1 F153 0 (None)
7084 Phase Distance Zone 1 Rev Reach 0.02 to 250 ohms 0.01 F001 200
B 7085
7086
Phase Distance Zone 1 Rev Reach RCA
Reserved (10 items)
30 to 90
---
degrees
---
1
---
F001
F001
85
0
Ground Distance (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (5 modules)
7130 Ground Distance Zone 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7131 Ground Distance Zone 1 Current Supervision 0.05 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 200
7132 Ground Distance Zone 1 Reach 0.02 to 250 ohms 0.01 F001 200
7133 Ground Distance Zone 1 Direction 0 to 2 --- 1 F154 0 (Forward)
7134 Ground Distance Zone 1 Comparator Limit 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90
7135 Ground Distance Zone 1 Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
7136 Ground Distance Zone 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7137 Ground Distance Zone 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7138 Ground Distance Zone 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7139 Ground Distance Zone 1 Shape 0 to 1 --- 1 F120 0 (Mho)
713A Ground Distance Zone 1 Z0 Z1 Magnitude 0 to 10 --- 0.01 F001 270
713B Ground Distance Zone 1 Z0 Z1 Angle -90 to 90 degrees 1 F002 0
713C Ground Distance Zone 1 RCA 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85
713D Ground Distance Zone 1 DIR RCA 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85
713E Ground Distance Zone 1 DIR Comp Limit 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90
713F Ground Distance Zone 1 Quad Right Blinder 0.02 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 1000
7140 Ground Distance Zone 1 Quad Right Blinder RCA 60 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85
7141 Ground Distance Zone 1 Quad Left Blinder 0.02 to 500 ohms 0.01 F001 1000
7142 Ground Distance Zone 1 Quad Left Blinder RCA 60 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85
7143 Ground Distance Zone 1 Z0M Z1 Magnitude 0 to 7 --- 0.01 F001 0
7144 Ground Distance Zone 1 Z0M Z1 Angle -90 to 90 degrees 1 F002 0
7145 Ground Distance Zone 1 Voltage Level 0 to 5 pu 0.001 F001 0
7146 Ground Distance Zone 1 Non-Homogeneous Angle -40 to 40 degrees 0.1 F002 0
7147 Ground Distance Zone 1 POL Current 0 to 1 --- 1 F521 0 (Zero-seq)
7148 Ground Distance Zone 1 Reverse Reach 0.02 to 250 ohms 0.01 F001 200
7149 Ground Distance Zone 1 Reverse Reach RCA 30 to 90 degrees 1 F001 85
Line Pickup (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
71F0 Line Pickup Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
71F1 Line Pickup Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
71F2 Line Pickup Phase IOC Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
71F3 Line Pickup UV Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 700
71F4 Line End Open Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 150
71F5 Line End Open Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 90
71F6 Line Pickup OV Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 40
71F7 Autoreclose Coordination Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 45
71F8 Autoreclose Coordination Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 5
71F9 Autoreclose Coordination Bypass 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)


71FA Line Pickup Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
71FB Line Pickup Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
71FC Line Pickup Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
71FD Terminal Open 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
71FE AR Accelerate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Breaker Failure (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules) B
7200 Breaker Failure 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7201 Breaker Failure 1 Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F157 0 (3-Pole)
7208 Breaker Failure 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7209 Breaker Failure 1 Amp Supervision 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
720A Breaker Failure 1 Use Seal-In 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
720B Breaker Failure 1 Three Pole Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
720C Breaker Failure 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
720D Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Supv Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
720E Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Supv Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
720F Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 1 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
7210 Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 Pickup 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
7211 Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 2 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
7213 Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 3 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 1 (Yes)
7215 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase A/3P 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7216 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase A/3P 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7217 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Test On 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7218 Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Hiset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
7219 Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Hiset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
721A Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Loset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
721B Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Loset Pickup 0.001 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1050
721C Breaker Failure 1 Loset Time 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
721D Breaker Failure 1 Trip Dropout Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
721E Breaker Failure 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
721F Breaker Failure 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7220 Breaker Failure 1 Phase A Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7221 Breaker Failure 1 Phase B Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7222 Breaker Failure 1 Phase C Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7223 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7224 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7225 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7226 Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Phase Directional (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7260 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7261 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7262 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7263 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 ECA 0 to 359 --- 1 F001 30
7264 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Pol V Threshold 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 700
7265 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block Overcurrent 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
7266 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7267 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Neutral Directional OC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7280 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7281 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)


7282 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing 0 to 2 --- 1 F230 0 (Voltage)
7283 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward ECA -90 to 90 ° Lag 1 F002 75
7284 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90
7285 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup 0.002 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 50
7286 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90
B 7287
7288
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Pickup
Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Target
0.002 to 30
0 to 2
pu
---
0.001
1
F001
F109
50
0 (Self-reset)
7289 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
728A Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
728B Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing Voltage 0 to 1 --- 1 F231 0 (Calculated V0)
728C Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Op Current 0 to 1 --- 1 F196 0 (Calculated 3I0)
728D Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Offset 0 to 250 ohms 0.01 F001 0
728E Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Pos Seq Restraint 0 to 0.5 --- 0.001 F001 63
728F Reserved 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Negative Sequence Directional OC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
72A0 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
72A1 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
72A2 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F179 0 (Neg Sequence)
72A3 Neg Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward ECA 0 to 90 ° Lag 1 F002 75
72A4 Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90
72A5 Neg Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup 0.05 to 30 pu 0.01 F001 5
72A6 Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Limit Angle 40 to 90 degrees 1 F001 90
72A7 Neg Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Pickup 0.05 to 30 pu 0.01 F001 5
72A8 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
72A9 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
72AA Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
72AB Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Offset 0 to 250 ohms 0.01 F001 0
72AC Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 1 Pos Seq Restraint 0 to 0.5 --- 0.001 F001 63
72AD Reserved (3 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Breaker Arcing Current Settings (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
72C0 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
72C1 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
72C2 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate A 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
72C3 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate B 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
72C4 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Initiate C 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
72C5 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
72C6 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Limit 0 to 50000 kA2-cyc 1 F001 1000
72C7 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
72C8 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
72C9 Breaker 1 Arcing Current Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DCMA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
7300 DCMA Inputs 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7301 DCMA Inputs 1 ID --- --- --- F205 “DCMA I 1"
7307 DCMA Inputs 1 Reserved 1 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
730B DCMA Inputs 1 Units --- --- --- F206 “mA”
730E DCMA Inputs 1 Range 0 to 6 --- 1 F173 6 (4 to 20 mA)
730F DCMA Inputs 1 Minimum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 4000
7311 DCMA Inputs 1 Maximum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 20000
7313 DCMA Inputs 1 Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0


7390 ...Repeated for module number 7 B
RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
7540 RTD Inputs 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7541 RTD Inputs 1 ID --- --- --- F205 “RTD Ip 1“
7547 RTD Inputs 1 Reserved 1 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
754B RTD Inputs 1 Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F174 0 (100 Ohm Platinum)
754C RTD Inputs 1 Reserved 2 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0


B 7730
7740
Neutral Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F00 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F01 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F02 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 1.25 pu 0.001 F001 300
7F03 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F04 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F05 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7F06 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7F07 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F08 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Auxiliary Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F30 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F31 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F32 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 300
7F33 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F34 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F35 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7F36 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7F37 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F38 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Auxiliary Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F60 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F61 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7F62 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 700
7F63 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7F64 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Curve 0 to 1 --- 1 F111 0 (Definite Time)
7F65 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 100
7F66 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


7F67 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7F68 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7F69 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Reserved (7 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Frequency (Read Only) B
8000 Tracking Frequency 2 to 90 Hz 0.01 F001 0
FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting)
8800 FlexState Parameters (256 items) --- --- --- F300 0
FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
9000 FlexElement 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9001 FlexElement 1 Name --- --- --- F206 “FxE 1 “
9004 FlexElement 1 InputP 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9005 FlexElement 1 InputM 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9006 FlexElement 1 Compare 0 to 1 --- 1 F516 0 (LEVEL)
9007 FlexElement 1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F515 0 (SIGNED)
9008 FlexElement 1 Direction 0 to 1 --- 1 F517 0 (OVER)
9009 FlexElement 1 Hysteresis 0.1 to 50 % 0.1 F001 30
900A FlexElement 1 Pickup -90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 1000
900C FlexElement 1 DeltaT Units 0 to 2 --- 1 F518 0 (Milliseconds)
900D FlexElement 1 DeltaT 20 to 86400 --- 1 F003 20
900F FlexElement 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9010 FlexElement 1 Reset Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9011 FlexElement 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
9012 FlexElement 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
9013 FlexElement 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Fault Report Settings (Read/Write Setting) (5 modules)
9200 Fault Report 1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
9201 Fault Report 1 Trigger 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
9202 Fault Report 1 Z1 Magnitude 0.01 to 250 ohms 0.01 F001 300
9203 Fault Report 1 Z1 Angle 25 to 90 degrees 1 F001 75
9204 Fault Report 1 Z0 Magnitude 0.01 to 650 ohms 0.01 F001 900
9205 Fault Report 1 Z0 Angle 25 to 90 degrees 1 F001 75
9206 Fault Report 1 Line Length Units 0 to 1 --- 1 F147 0 (km)
9207 Fault Report 1 Line Length 0 to 2000 0.1 F001 1000


DCMA Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
9300 DCMA Outputs 1 Source 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9301 DCMA Outputs 1 Range 0 to 2 --- 1 F522 0 (-1 to 1 mA)
9302 DCMA Output 1 Minimum -90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 0
9304 DCMA Outputs 1 Maximum -90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 1000
B 9306
930C
FlexElement Actuals (Read Only) (16 modules)
9A01 FlexElement Actual -2147483.647 to --- 0.001 F004 0
2147483.647
9A0B ...Repeated for module number 6
9A0D ...Repeated for module number 7
9A0F ...Repeated for module number 8
9A1B ...Repeated for module number 14
9A1D ...Repeated for module number 15
9A1F ...Repeated for module number 16
Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)
A000 Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 1) 0 to 5 --- 1 F001 0
A001 Setting Groups Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A002 FlexLogic to Activate Groups 2 through 8 (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A009 Setting Group Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A00A Setting Group Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Setting Groups (Read Only)
A00B Current Setting Group 0 to 5 --- 1 F001 0


VT Fuse Failure (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
A040 VT Fuse Failure Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A041 ...Repeated for module number 2
A044 ...Repeated for module number 5 B
Selector Switch Actuals (Read Only)
A400 Selector 1 Position 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 0
A401 Selector 2 Position 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 1
Selector Switch (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
A410 Selector 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A411 Selector 1 Range 1 to 7 --- 1 F001 7
A412 Selector 1 Timeout 3 to 60 s 0.1 F001 50
A413 Selector 1 Step Up 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A414 Selector 1 Step Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F083 0 (Time-out)
A415 Selector 1 Acknowledge 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A416 Selector 1 Bit0 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A419 Selector 1 Bit Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F083 0 (Time-out)
A41A Selector 1 Bit Acknowledge 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A41B Selector 1 Power Up Mode 0 to 2 --- 1 F084 0 (Restore)
A41C Selector 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
A41D Selector 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A41E Selector 1 Reserved (10 items) --- --- 1 F001 0
Flexcurves C and D (Read/Write Setting)
AC00 FlexCurve C (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
AC78 FlexCurve D (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
AD00 Latch 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
AD01 Latch 1 Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F519 0 (Reset Dominant)
AD02 Latch 1 Set 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AD03 Latch 1 Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
AD04 Latch 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
AD05 Latch 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
AD06 Latch 1 Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
AD0A ...Repeated for module number 2
AD14 ...Repeated for module number 3
AD1E ...Repeated for module number 4
AD3C ...Repeated for module number 7
AD5A ...Repeated for module number 10
AD6E ...Repeated for module number 12
AD8C ...Repeated for module number 15


Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
B000 Digital Element 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B001 Digital Element 1 Name --- --- --- F203 “Dig Element 1 “
B015 Digital Element 1 Input 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B016 Digital Element 1 Pickup Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0
B B018
B01A
Digital Element 1 Reset Delay
Digital Element 1 Block
0 to 999999.999
0 to 65535
s
---
0.001
1
F003
F300
0
0
B01B Digital Element 1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
B01C Digital Element 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B01D Digital Element 1 Reserved (3 items) --- --- --- F001 0
B020 ...Repeated for module number 2
B0A0 ...Repeated for module number 6
B0C0 ...Repeated for module number 7
B0E0 ...Repeated for module number 8
Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
B300 Digital Counter 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B301 Digital Counter 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Counter 1"
B307 Digital Counter 1 Units --- --- --- F206 (none)
B30A Digital Counter 1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30B Digital Counter 1 Up 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30C Digital Counter 1 Down 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30D Digital Counter 1 Preset -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
B30F Digital Counter 1 Compare -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
B311 Digital Counter 1 Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B312 Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B313 Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Count 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B314 Digital Counter 1 Set To Preset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B315 Digital Counter 1 Reserved (11 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
C000 Contact Input 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Cont Ip 1 “
C006 Contact Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C007 Contact Input 1 Debounce Time 0 to 16 ms 0.5 F001 20
C008 ...Repeated for module number 2


C048 ...Repeated for module number 10 B
C0A0 ...Repeated for module number 21
C0B0 ...Repeated for module number 23
C0C0 ...Repeated for module number 25
C0D0 ...Repeated for module number 27
C0E0 ...Repeated for module number 29
C0F0 ...Repeated for module number 31


B C1F8
C200
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting)
C600 Contact Input x Threshold (24 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F128 1 (33 Vdc)
Virtual Inputs Global Settings (Read/Write Setting)
C680 Virtual Inputs SBO Timeout 1 to 60 s 1 F001 30
Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
C690 Virtual Input 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C691 Virtual Input 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Virt Ip 1 “
C69B Virtual Input 1 Programmed Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 0 (Latched)
C69C Virtual Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C69D Virtual Input 1 UCA SBOClass 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
C69E Virtual Input 1 UCA SBOEna 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C69F Virtual Input 1 Reserved --- --- --- F001 0


C730 ...Repeated for module number 11 B
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
CC90 Virtual Output 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Virt Op 1 “
CC9A Virtual Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CC9B Virtual Output 1 Reserved (5 items) --- --- --- F001 0
CCA0 ...Repeated for module number 2
CCB0 ...Repeated for module number 3
CCC0 ...Repeated for module number 4
CCD0 ...Repeated for module number 5
CCE0 ...Repeated for module number 6
CCF0 ...Repeated for module number 7
CD00 ...Repeated for module number 8
CDA0 ...Repeated for module number 18
CDB0 ...Repeated for module number 19
CDC0 ...Repeated for module number 20
CDD0 ...Repeated for module number 21
CDE0 ...Repeated for module number 22
CDF0 ...Repeated for module number 23
CE00 ...Repeated for module number 24


B CE60
CE70
CEA0 ...Repeated for module number 34
CEB0 ...Repeated for module number 35
CEC0 ...Repeated for module number 36
CED0 ...Repeated for module number 37
CEE0 ...Repeated for module number 38
CEF0 ...Repeated for module number 39
CF00 ...Repeated for module number 40
CFA0 ...Repeated for module number 50
CFB0 ...Repeated for module number 51
CFC0 ...Repeated for module number 52
CFD0 ...Repeated for module number 53
CFE0 ...Repeated for module number 54
CFF0 ...Repeated for module number 55
D000 ...Repeated for module number 56
Mandatory (Read/Write Setting)
D280 Test Mode Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Mandatory (Read/Write)
D281 Force VFD and LED 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Mandatory (Read/Write Setting)
D282 Test Mode Initiate 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 1
Mandatory (Read/Write Command)
D283 Clear All Relay Records Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
D290 Contact Output 1 Name --- --- --- F205 “Cont Op 1"
D29A Contact Output 1 Operation 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D29B Contact Output 1 Seal In 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D29C Latching Output 1 Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D29D Contact Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)


D29E Latching Output 1 Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F090 0 (Operate-dominant)
D29F Reserved --- --- --- F001 0
D2A0 ...Repeated for module number 2
D2B0 ...Repeated for module number 3
D2C0 ...Repeated for module number 4
D2D0 ...Repeated for module number 5 B
D2E0 ...Repeated for module number 6
D2F0 ...Repeated for module number 7
D3D0 ...Repeated for module number 21


B D630
D640
Reset (Read/Write Setting)
D800 FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Control Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (7 modules)
D810 Control Pushbuttons 1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D811 Control Pushbuttons 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
D81A ...Repeated for module number 6
D81C ...Repeated for module number 7
Clear Records (Read/Write Setting)
D820 Clear Fault Reports operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D822 Clear Event Records operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D823 Clear Oscillography operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D824 Clear Data Logger operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D825 Clear Breaker 1 Arcing Current operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D82D Clear Energy operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D82F Clear Unauthorized Access operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D831 Clear Platform Direct Input/Output Statistics operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D832 Clear Relay Records Reserved (18 items) --- --- --- F001 0
Force Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting)
D8B0 Force Contact Input x State (96 items) 0 to 2 --- 1 F144 0 (Disabled)
Force Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting)
D910 Force Contact Output x State (64 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F131 0 (Disabled)
Direct Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Setting)
DB40 Direct Device ID 1 to 16 --- 1 F001 1
DB41 Direct I/O Channel 1 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DB42 Platform Direct I/O Data Rate 64 to 128 kbps 64 F001 64
DB43 Direct I/O Channel 2 Ring Configuration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DB44 Platform Direct I/O Crossover Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Direct input/output commands (Read/Write Command)
DB48 Direct input/output clear counters command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Direct inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
DB50 Direct Input 1 Device Number 0 to 16 --- 1 F001 0
DB51 Direct Input 1 Number 0 to 96 --- 1 F001 0
DB52 Direct Input 1 Default State 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
DB53 Direct Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DB54 ...Repeated for module number 2


DB5C ...Repeated for module number 4
DB70 ...Repeated for module number 9 B
DBA0 ...Repeated for module number 21
DBAC ...Repeated for module number 24
DBB0 ...Repeated for module number 25
DBBC ...Repeated for module number 28
DBC0 ...Repeated for module number 29
DBCC ...Repeated for module number 32
Platform Direct Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
DD00 Direct Output 1 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
DD01 Direct Output 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DD02 ...Repeated for module number 2
DD0A ...Repeated for module number 6
DD0C ...Repeated for module number 7
DD0E ...Repeated for module number 8


B DD38
DD3A
Direct I/O Alarms (Read/Write Setting)
DE00 Direct I/O Channel 1 CRC Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE01 Direct I/O Channel 1 CRC Alarm Message Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
DE02 Direct I/O Channel 1 CRC Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE03 Direct I/O Channel 1 CRC Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE04 Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE08 Direct I/O Channel 2 CRC Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE09 Direct I/O Channel 2 CRC Alarm Message Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
DE0A Direct I/O Channel 2 CRC Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE0B Direct I/O Channel 2 CRC Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE0C Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE10 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE11 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
DE12 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE13 Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE14 Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE18 Direct IO Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE19 Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count 100 to 10000 --- 1 F001 600
DE1A Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
DE1B Direct I/O Channel 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
DE1C Reserved (4 items) 1 to 1000 --- 1 F001 10
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
E000 Remote Device 1 ID --- --- --- F202 “Remote Device 1 “
E00A ...Repeated for module number 2
E014 ...Repeated for module number 3
E01E ...Repeated for module number 4
E03C ...Repeated for module number 7
E05A ...Repeated for module number 10
E06E ...Repeated for module number 12
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
E100 Remote Input 1 Device 1 to 16 --- 1 F001 1
E101 Remote Input 1 Bit Pair 0 to 64 --- 1 F156 0 (None)
E102 Remote Input 1 Default State 0 to 3 --- 1 F086 0 (Off)
E103 Remote Input 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


E120 ...Repeated for module number 9 B
E1A0 ...Repeated for module number 41
E1AC ...Repeated for module number 44
E1B0 ...Repeated for module number 45
E1BC ...Repeated for module number 48
E1C0 ...Repeated for module number 49
E1CC ...Repeated for module number 52
E1D0 ...Repeated for module number 53
E1DC ...Repeated for module number 56
E1E0 ...Repeated for module number 57


E1EC ...Repeated for module number 60
E1F0 ...Repeated for module number 61
B E1F8
E1FC
Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E600 Remote Output DNA 1 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
E601 Remote Output DNA 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
E602 Remote Output DNA 1 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E680 Remote Output UserSt 1 Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
E681 Remote Output UserSt 1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
E682 Remote Output UserSt 1 Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0


E6AC ...Repeated for module number 12
E6B8 ...Repeated for module number 15 B
E6BC ...Repeated for module number 16
E6CC ...Repeated for module number 20
E6DC ...Repeated for module number 24
E6EC ...Repeated for module number 28
E6FC ...Repeated for module number 32
B.4.2 DATA FORMATS
F001 F005
UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F002 F006
UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F003 F011
UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers) UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points)
High order word is stored in the first register. A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which
Low order word is stored in the second register. are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user
defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio
and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup
F004 ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the off-
UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers) set into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time
value is stored.
High order word is stored in the first register/
Low order word is stored in the second register.
F012
DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING
(unsigned 16-bit integer)
MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the
number of decimal points to display.
Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three
decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is
12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the dis-
played value on the unit is 12.35 kA.

F013 F082
POWER_FACTOR PWR FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER) ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE 1P/3P BKR SEQUENCE
Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values indi- 0 = 1, 1 = 2, 2 = 1 & 2, 3 = 1 – 2, 4 = 2 – 1
cate leading.
F083
F040 ENUMERATION: SELECTOR MODES
B UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER
0 = Time-Out, 1 = Acknowledge
F050
F084
UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER)
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR POWER UP
Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January
0 = Restore, 1 = Synchronize, 2 = Sync/Restore
1, 1970.
F085
F051
ENUMERATION: POWER SWING SHAPE
UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050)
0 = Mho Shape, 1 = Quad Shape
First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January,
2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1
Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1
F086
ENUMERATION: DIGITAL INPUT DEFAULT STATE
F052 0 = Off, 1 = On, 2= Latest/Off, 3 = Latest/On
UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx).
F090
Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm;
ENUMERATION: LATCHING OUTPUT TYPE
Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1
Last 16 bits are Seconds (xx:xx:.SS.SSS): 0=00.000s, 0 = Operate-dominant, 1 = Reset-dominant
1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s)
F100
ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE
F060
FLOATING_POINT IEEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits) 0 = Wye; 1 = Delta
F070 F101
HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY
0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100%
F071
HEX4 4 BYTES - 8 ASCII DIGITS
F102
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED
F072 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
F103
F073 ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES
bitmask curve shape bitmask curve shape
0 IEEE Mod Inv 9 IAC Inverse
F074
1 IEEE Very Inv 10 IAC Short Inv
2 IEEE Ext Inv 11 I2t
3 IEC Curve A 12 Definite Time
F081 4 IEC Curve B 13 FlexCurve™ A
ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE 1P/3P BKR FAIL OPTION 5 IEC Curve C 14 FlexCurve™ B
0 = Continue, 1 = Lockout 6 IEC Short Inv 15 FlexCurve™ C
7 IAC Ext Inv 16 FlexCurve™ D

bitmask curve shape bitmask curve shape

F115
8 IAC Very Inv
ENUMERATION: BREAKER STATUS
0 = Auxiliary A, 1 = Auxiliary B
F104
ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE
F117
0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed, 2 = Linear
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
0 = 1×72 cycles, 1 = 3×36 cycles, 2 = 7×18 cycles, 3 = 15×9 cycles B
F105
ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT
0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2 F118
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE
0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected
F106
ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION
F119
0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE™ PICKUP RATIOS
mask value mask value mask value mask value

F108
ENUMERATION: OFF/ON 0 0.00 30 0.88 60 2.90 90 5.90
1 0.05 31 0.90 61 3.00 91 6.00
0 = Off, 1 = On
2 0.10 32 0.91 62 3.10 92 6.50
3 0.15 33 0.92 63 3.20 93 7.00
F109 4 0.20 34 0.93 64 3.30 94 7.50
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION 5 0.25 35 0.94 65 3.40 95 8.00
0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled 6 0.30 36 0.95 66 3.50 96 8.50
7 0.35 37 0.96 67 3.60 97 9.00
8 0.40 38 0.97 68 3.70 98 9.50
F110
9 0.45 39 0.98 69 3.80 99 10.00
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL
10 0.48 40 1.03 70 3.90 100 10.50
0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None
11 0.50 41 1.05 71 4.00 101 11.00
12 0.52 42 1.10 72 4.10 102 11.50
F111 13 0.54 43 1.20 73 4.20 103 12.00
ENUMERATION: UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES 14 0.56 44 1.30 74 4.30 104 12.50
0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse Time 15 0.58 45 1.40 75 4.40 105 13.00

16 0.60 46 1.50 76 4.50 106 13.50
17 0.62 47 1.60 77 4.60 107 14.00
F112 18 0.64 48 1.70 78 4.70 108 14.50
ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES
19 0.66 49 1.80 79 4.80 109 15.00
bitmask value bitmask value bitmask value 20 0.68 50 1.90 80 4.90 110 15.50
0 300 4 9600 8 115200 21 0.70 51 2.00 81 5.00 111 16.00
1 1200 5 19200 9 14400 22 0.72 52 2.10 82 5.10 112 16.50
2 2400 6 38400 10 28800 23 0.74 53 2.20 83 5.20 113 17.00
3 4800 7 57600 11 33600 24 0.76 54 2.30 84 5.30 114 17.50

25 0.78 55 2.40 85 5.40 115 18.00
26 0.80 56 2.50 86 5.50 116 18.50
F113 27 0.82 57 2.60 87 5.60 117 19.00
ENUMERATION: PARITY
28 0.84 58 2.70 88 5.70 118 19.50
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even 29 0.86 59 2.80 89 5.80 119 20.00
F114 F120
ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE ENUMERATION: DISTANCE SHAPE
0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated 0 = Mho, 1 = Quad

bitmask element
F122
180 Load Enchroachment
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE
190 Power Swing Detect
0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS 224 SRC1 VT Fuse Failure
225 SRC2 VT Fuse Failure
F123 226 SRC3 VT Fuse Failure

ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY 227 SRC4 VT Fuse Failure
B 0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A 228 SRC5 VT Fuse Failure
229 SRC6 VT Fuse Failure
232 SRC1 50DD (Disturbance Detection)
F124 233 SRC2 50DD (Disturbance Detection)
ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS
bitmask element
0 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
242 Open Pole Detector
16 Phase Time Overcurrent 1
272 Breaker 1
17 Phase Time Overcurrent 2
273 Breaker 2
24 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1
280 Breaker Failure 1
25 Phase Directional Overcurrent 2
281 Breaker Failure 2
32 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
288 Breaker Arcing Current 1
33 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
48 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1
49 Neutral Time Overcurrent 2
56 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1
57 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 2
60 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1
294 Breaker 1 Flashover
61 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 2
295 Breaker 2 Flashover
64 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
304 Autoreclose 1
65 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
305 Autoreclose 2
80 Ground Time Overcurrent 1
306 Autoreclose 3
81 Ground Time Overcurrent 2
307 Autoreclose 4
96 Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 1
308 Autoreclose 5
97 Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent 2
309 Autoreclose 6
112 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 1
312 Synchrocheck 1
113 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 2
313 Synchrocheck 2
120 Negative Sequence Overvoltage
336 Setting Group
140 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1
337 Reset
144 Phase Undervoltage 1
360 Trip Output
145 Phase Undervoltage 2
366 DUTT Pilot Scheme
148 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1
368 PUTT Pilot Scheme
152 Phase Overvoltage 1
370 POTT Pilot Scheme
156 Neutral Overvoltage 1
372 Hybrid POTT Pilot Scheme
160 Phase Distance Zone 1
374 Directional Comparison Blocking Pilot Scheme
376 Autoreclose 1P/3P
385 Selector 1
386 Selector 2
390 Control Pushbutton 1
168 Line Pickup
172 Ground Distance Zone 1

bitmask element bitmask element

400 FlexElement™ 1 685 User-Programmable Pushbutton 6
406 FlexElement™ 7 691 User-Programmable Pushbutton 12 B
407 FlexElement™ 8
420 Non-volatile Latch 1
F125
ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL
0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service
425 Non-volatile Latch 6 F126
426 Non-volatile Latch 7 ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE
427 Non-volatile Latch 8 0 = No, 1 = Yes
F127
ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING
432 Non-volatile Latch 13 0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset
434 Non-volatile Latch 15 F128
435 Non-volatile Latch 16 ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD
512 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
0 = 17 V DC, 1 = 33 V DC, 2 = 84 V DC, 3 = 166 V DC
513 Digital Element 2
515 Digital Element 4 F129
ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE
517 Digital Element 6 0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute
F130
520 Digital Element 9 ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE
0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault
524 Digital Element 13 F131
525 Digital Element 14 ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
526 Digital Element 15 0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze
544 Digital Counter 1
F133
ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE
0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed
549 Digital Counter 6 F134
550 Digital Counter 7 ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL
551 Digital Counter 8 0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a
680 User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
682 User-Programmable Pushbutton 3 F135
ENUMERATION: GAIN CALIBRATION
684 User-Programmable Pushbutton 5 0 = 0x1, 1 = 1x16

F136 F143
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number)
0 = 31 x 8 cycles, 1 = 15 x 16 cycles, 2 = 7 x 32 cycles A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error
3 = 3 x 64 cycles, 4 = 1 x 128 cycles
F144
F138 ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE
B ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE
0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed
0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File
F145
F140 ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER
ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE,
DISABLED bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type
0 null 7 G 14 N 21 U
0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46 A, 2 = Voltage 280 V, 3 = Current
4.6 A, 4 = Current 2 A, 5 = Notched 4.6 A, 6 = Notched 2 A 1 A 8 H 15 O 22 V
2 B 9 I 16 P 23 W
3 C 10 J 17 Q 24 X
F141
4 D 11 K 18 R 25 Y
ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERROR
5 E 12 L 19 S 26 Z
bitmask error 6 F 13 M 20 T
0 Any Self Tests
1 IRIG-B Failure
F146
2 DSP Error
ENUMERATION: MISC. EVENT CAUSES
4 No DSP Interrupts
5 Unit Not Calibrated bitmask definition
9 Prototype Firmware 0 Events Cleared
10 Flexlogic Error Token 1 Oscillography Triggered
11 Equipment Mismatch 2 Date/time Changed
13 Unit Not Programmed 3 Default Settings Loaded
14 System Exception 4 Test Mode On
15 Latching Out Error 5 Test Mode Off
18 SNTP Failure 6 Power On
19 Battery Failure 7 Power Off
20 Primary Ethernet Failure 8 Relay In Service
21 Secondary Ethernet Failure 9 Relay Out Of Service
22 EEPROM Data Error 10 Watchdog Reset
23 SRAM Data Error 11 Oscillography Clear
24 Program Memory 12 Reboot Command
25 Watchdog Error 13 Led Test Initiated
26 Low On Memory 14 Flash Programming
27 Remote Device Off 15 Fault Report Trigger
28 Direct Device Off 16 User Programmable Fault Report Trigger
29 Direct Ring Break
30 Any Minor Error
F147
31 Any Major Error
ENUMERATION: LINE LENGTH UNITS
0 = km, 1 = miles
F142
ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE
0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause

F148 F156
ENUMERATION: FAULT TYPE ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS
bitmask fault type bitmask fault type
bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD#
0 NA 6 AC
0 NONE 22 DNA-22 44 UserSt-12
1 AG 7 ABG
1 DNA-1 23 DNA-23 45 UserSt-13
2 BG 8 BCG
3
4
CG
AB
9
10
ACG
ABC
3 DNA-3 25 DNA-25 47 UserSt-15 B
5 BC 11 ABCG
F151 7 DNA-7 29 DNA-29 51 UserSt-19

ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION 8 DNA-8 30 DNA-30 52 UserSt-20
bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD#
10 DNA-10 32 DNA-32 54 UserSt-22
0 NONE 17 RTD 17 33 RTD 33
11 DNA-11 33 UserSt-1 55 UserSt-23
1 RTD 1 18 RTD 18 34 RTD 34
2 RTD 2 19 RTD 19 35 RTD 35
3 RTD 3 20 RTD 20 36 RTD 36
4 RTD 4 21 RTD 21 37 RTD 37
5 RTD 5 22 RTD 22 38 RTD 38
6 RTD 6 23 RTD 23 39 RTD 39
7 RTD 7 24 RTD 24 40 RTD 40
8 RTD 8 25 RTD 25 41 RTD 41
9 RTD 9 26 RTD 26 42 RTD 42
10 RTD 10 27 RTD 27 43 RTD 43
21 DNA-21 43 UserSt-11
11 RTD 11 28 RTD 28 44 RTD 44
12 RTD 12 29 RTD 29 45 RTD 45
13 RTD 13 30 RTD 30 46 RTD 46 F157
14 RTD 14 31 RTD 31 47 RTD 47 ENUMERATION: BREAKER MODE
15 RTD 15 32 RTD 32 48 RTD 48
0 = 3-Pole, 1 = 1-Pole
16 RTD 16
F158
F152 ENUMERATION: SCHEME CALIBRATION TEST
ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP
0 = Normal, 1 = Symmetry 1, 2 = Symmetry 2, 3 = Delay 1
0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3 4 = Delay 2
4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6
F159
F154 ENUMERATION: BREAKER AUX CONTACT KEYING
ENUMERATION: DISTANCE DIRECTION
0 = 52a, 1 = 52b, 2 = None
0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse, 2 = Non-Directional
F166
F155 ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE
0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca
0 = Offline, 1 = Online
F167
ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE
0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4,
4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6

F168 F176
ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION ENUMERATION: SYNCHROCHECK DEAD SOURCE SELECT
0 = Disabled, 1 = Adapt. 2nd, 2 = Trad. 2nd
bitmask synchrocheck dead source
0 None
F170 1 LV1 and DV2
ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET and GAIN
B
2 DV1 and LV2
TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT SELECTION 3 DV1 or DV2
0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH 4 DV1 Xor DV2
5 DV1 and DV2
F171
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE F177
0 = dcmA IN, 1 = Ohms IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = dcmA OUT ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT
0 = None, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485,
3 = Front Panel-RS232, 4 = Network
F172
ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS
F178
bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot
ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER RATES
0 F 4 K 8 P 12 U
0 = 1 sec, 1 = 1 min, 2 = 5 min, 3 = 10 min, 4 = 15 min,
1 G 5 L 9 R 13 V
5 = 20 min, 6 = 30 min, 7 = 60 min
2 H 6 M 10 S 14 W
3 J 7 N 11 T 15 X
F179
ENUMERATION: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL
F173 OVERCURRENT TYPE
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA I/O RANGE
0 = Neg Sequence, 1 = Zero Sequence
bitmask dcmA I/O range
0 0 to –1 mA
F180
1 0 to 1 mA ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND
2 –1 to 1 mA
0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND
3 0 to 5 mA
4 0 to 10 mA
5 0 to 20 mA F181
6 4 to 20 mA ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE
0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE
F174
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE F183
ENUMERATION: AC INPUT WAVEFORMS
0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel,
2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper bitmask definition
0 Off
1 8 samples/cycle
F175
ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS 2 16 samples/cycle
3 32 samples/cycle
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C
4 64 samples/cycle
F185
ENUMERATION: PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G

F186 F197
ENUMERATION: MEASUREMENT MODE ENUMERATION: DNP BINARY INPUT POINT BLOCK
0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase
bitmask Input Point Block
0 Not Used
F190 1 Virtual Inputs 1 to 16
ENUMERATION: SIMULATED KEYPRESS 2 Virtual Inputs 17 to 32
bitmsk keypress bitmsk keypress

3 Virtual Outputs 1 to 16 B
4 Virtual Outputs 17 to 32
0 --- 21 Escape
use between real keys 5 Virtual Outputs 33 to 48
22 Enter
6 Virtual Outputs 49 to 64
1 1 23 Reset
7 Contact Inputs 1 to 16
2 2 24 User 1
3 3 25 User 2
4 4 26 User 3
5 5 27 User-programmable key 1
13 Contact Outputs 1 to 16
11 Decimal Pt 33 User-programmable key 7
17 Remote Inputs 1 to 16
12 Plus/Minus 34 User-programmable key 8
18 Remote Inputs 17 to 32
13 Value Up 35 User-programmable key 9
19 Remote Devs 1 to 16
14 Value Down 36 User-programmable key 10
20 Elements 1 to 16
15 Message Up 37 User-programmable key 11
21 Elements 17 to 32
16 Message Down 38 User-programmable key 12
17 Message Left 39 User 4 (control pushbutton)
18 Message Right 40 User 5 (control pushbutton)
19 Menu 41 User 6 (control pushbutton)
20 Help 42 User 7 (control pushbutton)
F192 28 Elements 129 to 144
ENUMERATION: ETHERNET OPERATION MODE 29 Elements 145 to 160
0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex 30 Elements 161 to 176

ENUMERATION: DNP SCALE
A bitmask of 0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000, 35 Elements 241 to 256
6 = 10000, 7 = 100000, 8 = 0.001
ENUMERATION: SINGLE POLE TRIP MODE 39 Elements 305 to 320
A bitmask of 0 = Disabled, 1 = 3 Pole Only, 2 = 3 Pole & 1 Pole 40 Elements 321 to 336
ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL DIR OC OPERATE CURRENT
0 = Calculated 3I0, 1 = Measured IG 45 Elements 401 to 406

bitmask Input Point Block

F211
ENUMERATION: SOURCE SELECTION
51 Elements 497 to 512 0 = None, 1 = SRC 1, 2 = SRC 2, 3 = SRC 3, 4 = SRC 4,
5 = SRC 5, 6 = SRC 6
54 Elements 545 to 560 F222
B 55 LED States 1 to 16 ENUMERATION: TEST ENUMERATION
56 LED States 17 to 32 0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1
57 Self Tests 1 to 16
58 Self Tests 17 to 32
F230
ENUMERATION: DIRECTIONAL POLARIZING
F198 0 = Voltage, 1 = Current, 2 = Dual
ENUMERATION: PILOT SCHEME COMMUNICATION BITS
0 = 1, 1 = 2, 2 = 4
F231
ENUMERATION: POLARIZING VOLTAGE
F199 0 = Calculated V0, 1 = Measured VX
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED/CUSTOM
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Custom
F300
UR_UINT16: FLEXLOGIC™ BASE TYPE (6-bit type)
F200 The FlexLogic™ BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit
TEXT40: 40-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16 bit value.
20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDD,
where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic™ type is associated
with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE
F201 type, and D represents bits for the descriptor.
TEXT8: 8-CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix
4 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB [PTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descrip-
tor range.
[0] Off(0) this is boolean FALSE value
F202 [0] On (1)This is boolean TRUE value
TEXT20: 20-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT [2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 - 96)
[3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1-96)
10 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
[4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1-64)
[6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1-64)
[10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1-64)
F203
TEXT16: 16-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT [11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1-64)
[12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1-64)
[13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1-64)
F204 [14] REMOTE INPUTS (1-32)
[28] INSERT (Via Keypad only)
TEXT80: 80-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
[32] END
[34] NOT (1 INPUT)
[36] 2 INPUT XOR (0)
F205
[38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 inputs)
[40] OR (2 to 16 inputs)
[42] AND (2 to 16 inputs)
[44] NOR (2 to 16 inputs)
F206
TEXT6: 6-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT [46] NAND (2 to 16 inputs)
[48] TIMER (1 to 32)
[50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 to 64)
F207 [52] SELF-TEST ERROR (see F141 for range)
[56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1 to 6)
[62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (see F146 for range)
[64 to 127] ELEMENT STATES
F208

F400 F506|
UR_UINT16: CT/VT BANK SELECTION BITFIELD: 1 PHASE ELEMENT STATE
bitmask bank selection 0 = Pickup, 1 = Operate
0 Card 1 Contact 1 to 4
F507
BITFIELD: COUNTER ELEMENT STATE
3
4
Card 2 Contact 5 to 8
Card 3 Contact 1 to 4
0 = Count Greater Than, 1 = Count Equal To, 2 = Count Less Than B
F508
BITFIELD: DISTANCE ELEMENT STATE
bitmask distance element state
F500
UR_UINT16: PACKED BITFIELD 0 Pickup
1 Operate
First register indicates input/output state with bits 0(MSB)-15(LSB)
2 Pickup AB
corresponding to input/output state 1-16. The second register indi-
cates input/output state with bits 0-15 corresponding to input/out- 3 Pickup BC
put state 17-32 (if required) The third register indicates input/ 4 Pickup CA
output state with bits 0-15 corresponding to input/output state 33- 5 Operate AB
48 (if required). The fourth register indicates input/output state with
6 Operate BC
bits 0-15 corresponding to input/output state 49-64 (if required).
7 Operate CA
The number of registers required is determined by the specific
8 Timed
data item. A bit value of 0 = Off, 1 = On
9 Operate IAB
10 Operate IBC
F501 11 Operate ICA
UR_UINT16: LED STATUS
Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing
the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates F509
the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off. BITFIELD: SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Operate
F502
BITFIELD: ELEMENT OPERATE STATES F511
Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124 BITFIELD: 3-PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID 0 = Operate, 1 = Operate A, 2 = Operate B, 3 = Operate C
X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].
F513
F504 ENUMERATION: POWER SWING MODE
BITFIELD: 3-PHASE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Two Step, 1 = Three Step
bitmask element state
0 Pickup
1 Operate F514
2 Pickup Phase A ENUMERATION: POWER SWING TRIP MODE
3 Pickup Phase B 0 = Delayed, 1 = Early
4 Pickup Phase C
5 Operate Phase A
F515
6 Operate Phase B
ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE
7 Operate Phase C
0 = SIGNED, 1 = ABSOLUTE
F505
F516
BITFIELD: CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE
0 = Contact State, 1 = Voltage Detected, 2 = Current Detected
0 = LEVEL, 1 = DELTA

F517 F525
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT DIRECTION OPERATION ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION
0 = OVER, 1 = UNDER
bitmask Default Variation
0 1
F518 1 2
ENUMERATION: FLEXELEMENT™ UNITS
B
2 3
0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes 3 4

4 5
5 7
F519
ENUMERATION: NON-VOLATILE LATCH
0 = Reset-Dominant, 1 = Set-Dominant F530
ENUMERATION: FRONT PANEL INTERFACE KEYPRESS
bitmask keypress bitmask keypress
F521 0 None 22 Value Down
ENUMERATION: GROUND DISTANCE POLARIZING CURRENT
1 Menu 23 Reset
0 = Zero-Sequence; 1 = Negative-Sequence 2 Message Up 24 User 1
3 7 ~
25 User 2
4 8 26 User 3
F522
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA OUTPUT RANGE 5 9 31 User PB 1
6 Help 32 User PB 2
0 = –1 to 1 mA; 1 = 0 to 1 mA; 2 = 4 to 20 mA
7 Message Left 33 User PB 3
8 4 34 User PB 4
F523 9 5 35 User PB 5
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECTS 20, 22, AND 23 DEFAULT 10 6 36 User PB 6
VARIATION
11 Escape 37 User PB 7
bitmask Default Variation 12 Message Right 38 User PB 8
0 1 13 1 39 User PB 9
1 2 14 2 40 User PB 10
2 5 15 3 41 User PB 11
3 6 16 Enter 42 User PB 12
17 Message Down 44 User 4
18 0 45 User 5
F524 19 Decimal 46 User 6
ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 21 DEFAULT VARIATION
20 +/– 47 User 7
bitmask Default Variation 21 Value Up
0 1
1 2
F600
2 9
UR_UINT16: FLEXANALOG PARAMETER
3 10
Corresponds to the modbus address of the value used when this
parameter is selected. Only certain values may be used as Flex-
Analogs (basically all metering quantities used in protection)

APPENDIX C C.1 UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
APPENDIX C UCA/MMS COMMUNICATIONSC.1UCA/MMS PROTOCOL C.1.1 UCA
The Utility Communications Architecture (UCA) Version 2 represents an attempt by utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. There is a set of reference documents available from the
Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and vendors of UCA/MMS software libraries that describe the complete capabili-
ties of the UCA. Following, is a description of the subset of UCA/MMS features that are supported by the UR relay. The ref-
erence document set includes:
• Introduction to UCA version 2
• Generic Object Models for Substation and Feeder Equipment (GOMSFE)
• Common Application Service Models (CASM) and Mapping to MMS
• UCA Version 2 Profiles
These documents can be obtained from the UCA User’s Group at http://www.ucausersgroup.org. It is strongly recom-
mended that all those involved with any UCA implementation obtain this document set.
C
COMMUNICATION PROFILES:
The UCA specifies a number of possibilities for communicating with electronic devices based on the OSI Reference Model.
The UR relay uses the seven layer OSI stack (TP4/CLNP and TCP/IP profiles). Refer to the "UCA Version 2 Profiles" refer-
ence document for details.
The TP4/CLNP profile requires the UR relay to have a network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) in order
to establish a communication link. The TCP/IP profile requires the UR relay to have an IP address in order to establish a
communication link. These addresses are set in the SETTINGS ! PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !" NETWORK
menu. Note that the UR relay supports UCA operation over the TP4/CLNP or the TCP/IP stacks and also supports opera-
tion over both stacks simultaneously. It is possible to have up to two simultaneous connections. This is in addition to DNP
and Modbus/TCP (non-UCA) connections.
C.1.2 MMS
a) DESCRIPTION
The UCA specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (Application) layer for trans-
fer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number of years and provides a set of services suitable for
the transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Data can be grouped to form objects and be mapped to MMS ser-
vices. Refer to the “GOMSFE” and “CASM” reference documents for details.
SUPPORTED OBJECTS:
The "GOMSFE" document describes a number of communication objects. Within these objects are items, some of which
are mandatory and some of which are optional, depending on the implementation. The UR relay supports the following
GOMSFE objects:
• DI (device identity) • PHIZ (high impedance ground detector)
• GCTL (generic control) • PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay)
• GIND (generic indicator) • POVR (overvoltage relay)
• GLOBE (global data) • PTOC (time overcurrent relay)
• MMXU (polyphase measurement unit) • PUVR (under voltage relay)
• PBRL (phase balance current relay) • PVPH (volts per hertz relay)
• PBRO (basic relay object) • ctRATO (CT ratio information)
• PDIF (differential relay) • vtRATO (VT ratio information)
• PDIS (distance) • RREC (reclosing relay)
• PDOC (directional overcurrent) • RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay)
• PDPR (directional power relay) • XCBR (circuit breaker)
• PFRQ (frequency relay)
UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain.
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay C-1

C.1 UCA/MMS PROTOCOL APPENDIX C
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION:
Peer-to-peer communication of digital state information, using the UCA GOOSE data object, is supported via the use of the
UR Remote Inputs/Outputs feature. This feature allows digital points to be transferred between any UCA conforming
devices.
FILE SERVICES:
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of Oscillography, Event Record, or other files from a UR relay.
COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES:
The exact structure and values of the implemented objects can be seen by connecting to a UR relay with an MMS browser,
such as the “MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS DDE/OPC” server from Sisco Inc.
NON-UCA DATA:
C The UR relay makes available a number of non-UCA data items. These data items can be accessed through the "UR" MMS
domain. UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain.
b) PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION AND CONFORMANCE STATEMENT (PICS)

The D60 relay functions as a server only; a UR relay cannot be configured as a client. Thus, the following list of
supported services is for server operation only:
NOTE
The MMS supported services are as follows:

CONNECTION MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
• Initiate
• Conclude
• Cancel
• Abort
• Reject
VMD SUPPORT SERVICES:
• Status
• GetNameList
• Identify
VARIABLE ACCESS SERVICES:
• Read
• Write
• InformationReport
• GetVariableAccessAttributes
• GetNamedVariableListAttributes
OPERATOR COMMUNICATION SERVICES:
(none)
SEMAPHORE MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
DOMAIN MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
• GetDomainAttributes
PROGRAM INVOCATION MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
EVENT MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
C-2 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

JOURNAL MANAGEMENT SERVICES:

(none)
FILE MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
• ObtainFile
• FileOpen
• FileRead
• FileClose
• FileDirectory
The following MMS parameters are supported:
• STR1 (Arrays)
• STR2 (Structures) C
• NEST (Nesting Levels of STR1 and STR2) - 1
• VNAM (Named Variables)
• VADR (Unnamed Variables)
• VALT (Alternate Access Variables)
• VLIS (Named Variable Lists)
• REAL (ASN.1 REAL Type)
c) MODEL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCE (MIC)

This section provides details of the UCA object models supported by the UR series relays. Note that not all of the protective
device functions are applicable to all the UR series relays.
Table C–1: DEVICE IDENTITY – DI
NAME M/O RWEC
Name m rw
Class o rw
d o rw
Own o rw
Loc o rw
VndID m r
Table C–2: GENERIC CONTROL – GCTL

FC NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
ST BO<n> SI rw Generic Single Point Indication
CO BO<n> SI rw Generic Binary Output
CF BO<n> SBOCF rw SBO Configuration
DC LN d rw Description for brick
BO<n> d rw Description for each point
Actual instantiation of GCTL objects is as follows:
NOTE GCTL1 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points – SI1 to SI32); includes SBO functionality.
Table C–3: GENERIC INDICATORS – GIND 1 TO 6

FC NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
ST SIG<n> SIG r Generic Indication (block of 16)
RP BrcbST BasRCB rw Controls reporting of STATUS

Table C–4: GENERIC INDICATOR – GIND7

FC OBJECT CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
NAME
ST SI<n> SI r Generic single point indication
SI<n> d rw Description for all included SI
RP BrcbST BasRCB rw Controls reporting of STATUS
Actual instantiation of GIND objects is as follows:
NOTE GIND1 = Contact Inputs (96 total points – SIG1 to SIG6)

GIND2 = Contact Outputs (64 total points – SIG1 to SIG4)
C GIND3 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points – SIG1 to SIG2)

GIND4 = Virtual Outputs (64 total points – SIG1 to SIG4)
GIND5 = Remote Inputs (32 total points – SIG1 to SIG2)
GIND6 = Flex States (16 total points – SIG1 representing Flex States 1 to 16)
GIND7 = Flex States (16 total points – SI1 to SI16 representing Flex States 1 to 16)
Table C–5: GLOBAL DATA – GLOBE

FC OBJECT NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
ST ModeDS SIT r Device is: in test, off-line, available, or unhealthy
LocRemDS SIT r The mode of control, local or remote (DevST)
ActSG INT8U r Active Settings Group
EditSG INT8u r Settings Group selected for read/write operation
CO CopySG INT8U w Selects Settings Group for read/write operation
IndRs BOOL w Resets ALL targets
CF ClockTOD BTIME rw Date and time
RP GOOSE PACT rw Reports IED Inputs and Outputs
Table C–6: MEASUREMENT UNIT (POLYPHASE) – MMXU

MX V WYE rw Voltage on phase A, B, C to G
PPV DELTA rw Voltage on AB, BC, CA
A WYE rw Current in phase A, B, C, and N
W WYE rw Watts in phase A, B, C
TotW AI rw Total watts in all three phases
Var WYE rw Vars in phase A, B, C
TotVar AI rw Total vars in all three phases
VA WYE rw VA in phase A, B, C
TotVA AI rw Total VA in all 3 phases
PF WYE rw Power Factor for phase A, B, C
AvgPF AI rw Average Power Factor for all three phases
Hz AI rw Power system frequency
CF All MMXU.MX ACF rw Configuration of ALL included MMXU.MX
All MMXU.MX d rw Description of ALL included MMXU.MX
RP BrcbMX BasRCB rw Controls reporting of measurements
Actual instantiation of MMXU objects is as follows:
NOTE 1 MMXU per Source (as determined from the ‘product order code’)

Table C–7: PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS

ST Out BOOL r 1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operated
Tar PhsTar r Targets since last reset
FctDS SIT r Function is enabled/disabled
PuGrp INT8U r Settings group selected for use
CO EnaDisFct DCO w 1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled
RsTar BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
RsLat BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
ElementSt d r Element state string
The following GOMSFE objects are defined by the object model described via the above table:
C
• PBRO (basic relay object)
• PDIF (differential relay)
• PDIS (distance)
• PDOC (directional overcurrent)
• PDPR (directional power relay)
• PFRQ (frequency relay)
• PHIZ (high impedance ground detector)
• PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay)
• POVR (over voltage relay)
• PTOC (time overcurrent relay)
• PUVR (under voltage relay)
• RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay)
• POVR (overvoltage)
• PVPH (volts per hertz relay)
• PBRL (phase balance current relay)
Actual instantiation of these objects is determined by the number of the corresponding elements present in the D60
as per the ‘product order code’.
NOTE
Table C–8: CT RATIO INFORMATION – ctRATO

OBJECT NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
PhsARat RATIO rw Primary/secondary winding ratio
NeutARat RATIO rw Primary/secondary winding ratio
LN d rw Description for brick (current bank ID)
Table C–9: VT RATIO INFORMATION – vtRATO

OBJECT NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
PhsVRat RATIO rw Primary/secondary winding ratio
LN d rw Description for brick (current bank ID)
Actual instantiation of ctRATO and vtRATO objects is as follows:
NOTE 1 ctRATO per Source (as determined from the product order code).
1 vtRATO per Source (as determined from the product order code).

Table C–10: RECLOSING RELAY – RREC

ST Out BOOL r 1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operated
FctDS SIT r Function is enabled/disabled
PuGrp INT8U r Settings group selected for use
SG ReclSeq SHOTS rw Reclosing Sequence
CO EnaDisFct DCO w 1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled
RsTar BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
RsLat BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
CF ReclSeq ACF rw Configuration for RREC.SG
C ElementSt d r Element state string
Actual instantiation of RREC objects is determined by the number of autoreclose elements present in the D60 as
per the product order code.
NOTE
Also note that the Shots class data (i.e. Tmr1, Tmr2, Tmr3, Tmr4, RsTmr) is specified to be of type INT16S (16 bit
signed integer); this data type is not large enough to properly display the full range of these settings from the D60.
Numbers larger than 32768 will be displayed incorrectly.
Table C–11: CIRCUIT BREAKER – XCBR

ST SwDS SIT rw Switch Device Status
SwPoleDS BSTR8 rw Switch Pole Device Status
PwrSupSt SIG rw Health of the power supply
PresSt SIT rw The condition of the insulating medium pressure
PoleDiscSt SI rw All CB poles did not operate within time interval
TrpCoil SI rw Trip coil supervision
CO ODSw DCO rw The command to open/close the switch
CF ODSwSBO SBOCF rw Configuration for all included XCBR.CO
RP brcbST BasRCB rw Controls reporting of Status Points
Actual instantiation of XCBR objects is determined by the number of breaker control elements present in the D60 as
per the product order code.
NOTE
C.1.3 UCA REPORTING
A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the UR to detect "dead" connections. If there is no data
traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the UR. This frees up the con-
nection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using UCA reporting, clients should configure BasRCB objects such
that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the UR will not abort the con-
nection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this timeout will not apply.

APPENDIX D D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-104 COMMS.D.1IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following: Ë
– used
in standard direction; Ë – not used; – cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
1. SYSTEM OR DEVICE:
Ë System Definition
Ë Controlling Station Definition (Master)
Controlled Station Definition (Slave)
Ë
2. NETWORK CONFIGURATION:
Point-to-Point Multipoint
Multiple Point-to-Point Multipoint Star
3. PHYSICAL LAYER
Transmission Speed (control direction):
Unbalanced Interchange Unbalanced Interchange Balanced Interchange Circuit
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended X.24/X.27:
if >1200 bits/s: D
100 bits/sec. 2400 bits/sec. 2400 bits/sec.
600 bits/sec. 19200 bits/sec.
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):

Unbalanced Interchange Unbalanced Interchange Balanced Interchange Circuit
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended X.24/X.27:
if >1200 bits/s:
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
4. LINK LAYER
Link Transmission Procedure: Address Field of the Link:
Balanced Transmision Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only)
Unbalanced Transmission One Octet
Two Octets
Structured
Unstructured
Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay D-1

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL APPENDIX D
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ADSU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the
indicated causes of transmission:
The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
5. APPLICATION LAYER
Transmission Mode for Application Data:
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
stanadard.
Common Address of ADSU:
One Octet
Two Octets
Ë
Information Object Address:
One Octet Structured
Ë
D Two Octets Unstructured
Ë
Three Octets
Ë
Cause of Transmission:
One Octet
Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.
Ë
Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system.
Selection of standard ASDUs:
For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following: Ë
– used in standard direction; Ë – not used; – cannot be
selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
Process information in monitor direction
Ë
<1> := Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
<2> := Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
Ë <3> := Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
<4> := Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
Ë <5> := Step position information M_ST_NA_1
<6> := Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
Ë <7> := Bitstring of 32 bits M_BO_NA_1
<8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag M_BO_TA_1
Ë <9> := Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
<10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_NE_TA_1
Ë <11> := Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
<12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_NE_TB_1
Ë
<13> := Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
<14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_NE_TC_1
Ë
<15> := Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
<16> := Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
<17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
<18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
<19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
Ë <20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection M_SP_NA_1
D-2 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

Ë <21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor M_ME_ND_1
Ë
<30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_SP_TB_1
Ë <31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a M_DP_TB_1
Ë <32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a M_ST_TB_1
Ë <33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a M_BO_TB_1
Ë <34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TD_1
Ë <35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TE_1
Ë <36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TF_1
Ë
<37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a M_IT_TB_1
Ë <38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TD_1
Ë <39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1
Ë <40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set
<30> to <40> are used.
Process information in control direction
Ë
<45> := Single command C_SC_NA_1
D
Ë <46> := Double command C_DC_NA_1
Ë <47> := Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1
Ë <48> := Set point command, normalized value C_SE_NA_1
Ë <49> := Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
Ë <50> := Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
Ë <51> := Bitstring of 32 bits C_BO_NA_1
Ë
<58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a C_SC_TA_1
Ë <59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a C_DC_TA_1
Ë <60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a C_RC_TA_1
Ë <61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TA_1
Ë <62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TB_1
Ë <63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TC_1
Ë <64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a C_BO_TA_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used.
System information in monitor direction
Ë
<70> := End of initialization M_EI_NA_1
System information in control direction

Ë
<100> := Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
Ë
<101> := Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
Ë
<102> := Read command C_RD_NA_1
Ë
<103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard) C_CS_NA_1
<104> := Test command C_TS_NA_1
Ë
<105> := Reset process command C_RP_NA_1
<106> := Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
Ë
<107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a C_TS_TA_1

Parameter in control direction

Ë <110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value PE_ME_NA_1
Ë <111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value PE_ME_NB_1
Ë
<112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value PE_ME_NC_1
Ë <113> := Parameter activation PE_AC_NA_1
File transfer
Ë <120> := File Ready F_FR_NA_1
Ë <121> := Section Ready F_SR_NA_1
Ë <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
Ë <123> := Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
Ë <124> := Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
Ë <125> := Segment F_SG_NA_1
Ë <126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction) C_CD_NA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments

D (station-specific parameters)
In the following table:
• Shaded boxes are not required.
• Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard.
• Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used.
• ‘X’ if only used in the standard direction
TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR

UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU
INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION

UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
<1> M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X
<2> M_SP_TA_1
<3> M_DP_NA_1
<4> M_DP_TA_1
<5> M_ST_NA_1
<6> M_ST_TA_1
<7> M_BO_NA_1
<8> M_BO_TA_1



BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
<9> M_ME_NA_1 D
<10> M_ME_TA_1
<11> M_ME_NB_1
<12> M_ME_TB_1
<13> M_ME_NC_1 X X X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<16> M_IT_TA_1
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1
<19> M_EP_TC_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1 X X X
<31> M_DP_TB_1
<32> M_ST_TB_1
<33> M_BO_TB_1
<34> M_ME_TD_1
<35> M_ME_TE_1
<36> M_ME_TF_1
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1
<40> M_EP_TF_1
<45> C_SC_NA_1 X X X X X
<46> C_DC_NA_1
<47> C_RC_NA_1
<48> C_SE_NA_1
<49> C_SE_NB_1



BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
D <50> C_SE_NC_1
<51> C_BO_NA_1
<58> C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X
<59> C_DC_TA_1
<60> C_RC_TA_1
<61> C_SE_TA_1
<62> C_SE_TB_1
<63> C_SE_TC_1
<64> C_BO_TA_1
<70> M_EI_NA_1*) X
<100> C_IC_NA_1 X X X X X
<101> C_CI_NA_1 X X X
<102> C_RD_NA_1 X
<103> C_CS_NA_1 X X X
<104> C_TS_NA_1
<105> C_RP_NA_1 X X
<106> C_CD_NA_1
<107> C_TS_TA_1
<110> P_ME_NA_1
<111> P_ME_NB_1
<112> P_ME_NC_1 X X X
<113> P_AC_NA_1
<120> F_FR_NA_1
<121> F_SR_NA_1
<122> F_SC_NA_1
<123> F_LS_NA_1
<124> F_AF_NA_1
<125> F_SG_NA_1
<126> F_DR_TA_1*)

6. BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

Station Initialization:
Remote initialization
Ë
Cyclic Data Transmission:
Cyclic data transmission
Ë
Read Procedure:
Read procedure
Ë
Spontaneous Transmission:
Spontaneous transmission
Ë
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous:
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information
object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a project-
specific list.
Ë Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1
Ë Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1 D
Ë Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1
Ë Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project)
Ë Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1
Ë Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1
Ë Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation:
Global
Ë
Group 1
Ë Group 5
Ë Group 9
Ë Group 13
Ë
Group 2
Ë Group 6
Ë Group 10
Ë Group 14
Ë
Group 3
Ë Group 7
Ë Group 11
Ë Group 15
Ë
Group 4
Ë Group 8
Ë Group 12
Ë Group 16
Ë
Clock synchronization:
Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)
Ë
Command transmission:
Direct command transmission
Ë
Ë Direct setpoint command transmission
Select and execute command
Ë
Ë Select and execute setpoint command
C_SE ACTTERM used
Ë
No additional definition
Ë
Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Ë
Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Ë
Persistent output
Ë
Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands

Ë
Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s

Transmission of integrated totals:

Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
Ë
Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
Ë
Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands
Ë
Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously
Ë
Counter read
Ë
Counter freeze without reset
Ë
Counter freeze with reset
Ë
Counter reset
Ë
General request counter

Ë
Request counter group 1
Ë
Ë
D Request counter group 3

Ë
Ë
Parameter loading:
Threshold value
Ë
Ë Smoothing factor
Ë Low limit for transmission of measured values
Ë High limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation:
Ë Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure:
Ë Test procedure
File transfer:
File transfer in monitor direction:
Ë Transparent file
Ë Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
Ë Transmission of sequences of events
Ë Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
File transfer in control direction:
Ë Transparent file
Background scan:
Ë Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay:
Acquisition of transmission delay

Definition of time outs:

PARAMETER DEFAULT REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE VALUE
t0 30 s Timeout of connection establishment 120 s
t1 15 s Timeout of send or test APDUs 15 s
t2 10 s Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages t2 < t1 10 s
t3 20 s Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state 20 s
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s

Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
PARAMETER DEFAULT REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE VALUE
k 12 APDUs Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable 12 APDUs
w 8 APDUs Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs 8 APDUs
Maximum range of values k: 1 to 32767 (215 – 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU

Maximum range of values w: 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU D
Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
Portnumber:
PARAMETER VALUE REMARKS
Portnumber 2404 In all cases
RFC 2200 suite:

RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet
as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter-
net. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen
by the user of this standard.
Ethernet 802.3
Ë
Ë Serial X.21 interface
Ë Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)

D.1.2 POINT LIST
Only Source 1 data points are shown in the following table. If the NUMBER OF SOURCES IN MMENC1 LIST setting is increased,
data points for subsequent sources will be added to the list immediately following the Source 1 data points.
Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 1 of 4) Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 2 of 4)
POINT DESCRIPTION UNITS POINT DESCRIPTION UNITS
M_ME_NC_1 Points 2045 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle degrees
2000 SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS A 2046 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude V
2001 SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS A 2047 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle degrees
2002 SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS A 2048 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude V
2003 SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS A 2049 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle degrees
2004 SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude A 2050 SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power W
2005 SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle degrees 2051 SRC 1 Phase A Real Power W
2006 SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude A 2052 SRC 1 Phase B Real Power W
2007 SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle degrees 2053 SRC 1 Phase C Real Power W
2008 SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude A 2054 SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power var
D 2009
2010
SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle
SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude
degrees
A
2055
2056
SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power
SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power
var
var
2011 SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle degrees 2057 SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power var
2012 SRC 1 Ground Current RMS A 2058 SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power VA
2013 SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude A 2059 SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power VA
2014 SRC 1 Ground Current Angle degrees 2060 SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power VA
2015 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude A 2061 SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power VA
2016 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle degrees 2062 SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor none
2017 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude A 2063 SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor none
2018 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle degrees 2064 SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor none
2019 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude A 2065 SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor none
2020 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle degrees 2066 SRC 1 Positive Watthour Wh
2021 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude A 2067 SRC 1 Negative Watthour Wh
2022 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle degrees 2068 SRC 1 Positive Varhour varh
2023 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS V 2069 SRC 1 Negative Varhour varh
2024 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS V 2070 SRC 1 Frequency Hz
2025 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS V 2071 Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase A kA2-cyc
2026 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude V 2072 Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase B kA2-cyc
2027 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle degrees 2073 Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase C kA2-cyc
2028 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude V 2074 Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase A kA2-cyc
2029 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle degrees 2075 Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase B kA2-cyc
2030 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude V 2076 Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase C kA2-cyc
2031 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle degrees 2077 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude A
2032 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS V 2078 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Angle degrees
2033 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS V 2079 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude A
2034 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS V 2080 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Angle degrees
2035 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude V 2081 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude A
2036 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle degrees 2082 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Angle degrees
2037 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude V 2083 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Voltage Magnitude V
2038 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle degrees 2084 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Voltage Angle degrees
2039 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude V 2085 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Voltage Magnitude V
2040 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle degrees 2086 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Voltage Angle degrees
2041 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS V 2087 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Voltage Magnitude V
2042 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude V 2088 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Voltage Angle degrees
2043 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle degrees 2089 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Current Magnitude A
2044 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude V 2090 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Current Angle degrees

Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 3 of 4) Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 4 of 4)
POINT DESCRIPTION UNITS POINT DESCRIPTION UNITS
2091 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Current Magnitude A 420 - 435 LED Column 1 State[1] -
2092 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Current Angle degrees C_SC_NA_1 Points
2093 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Current Magnitude A 1100 - Virtual Input States[0] - No Select Required -
1115
2094 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Current Angle degrees
1116 - Virtual Input States[1] - Select Required -
2095 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Voltage Magnitude V 1131
2096 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Voltage Angle degrees M_IT_NA_1 Points
2097 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Voltage Magnitude V 4000 Digital Counter 1 Value -
2098 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Voltage Angle degrees 4001 Digital Counter 2 Value -
2099 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Voltage Magnitude V 4002 Digital Counter 3 Value -
2100 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Voltage Angle degrees 4003 Digital Counter 4 Value -
2101 Fault 1 Type none 4004 Digital Counter 5 Value -
2102 Fault 1 Location none 4005 Digital Counter 6 Value -
2103 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage V 4006 Digital Counter 7 Value -
2104 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency Hz 4007 Digital Counter 8 Value -
2105 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase degrees
2106 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage V
2107 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency Hz D
2108 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase degrees
2109 Tracking Frequency Hz
2110 FlexElement 1 Actual none
2118 Current Setting Group none
P_ME_NC_1 Points
5000 - Threshold values for M_ME_NC_1 points -
5117
M_SP_NA_1 Points
100 - 115 Virtual Input States[0] -
116 - 131 Virtual Input States[1] -
132 - 147 Virtual Output States[0] -
196 - 211 Contact Input States[0] -
292 - 307 Contact Output States[0] -
356 - 371 Remote Input 1 States[0] -
372 - 387 Remote Input 1 States[1] -
388 - 403 Remote Device 1 States -
404 - 419 LED Column 1 State[0] -


APPENDIX E E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
APPENDIX E DNP COMMUNICATIONSE.1DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE
The following table provides a ‘Device Profile Document’ in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
Table E–1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3)
(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin
Device Name: UR Series Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:

For Requests: Level 2 Ë Master
For Responses: Level 2 Slave
Ë
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Input Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Binary Counters (Object 20)
Frozen Counters (Object 21)
E
Counter Change Event (Object 22)
Frozen Counter Event (Object 23)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 240
Received: 292 Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

Ë None None
Ë
Fixed at 2
Ë Ë Configurable
Ë Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Ë
Never
Ë Always
Ë Sometimes
Ë Configurable
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay E-1

E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT APPENDIX E
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

Ë Never
Ë Always
Ë
When reporting Event Data
Ë
When sending multi-fragment responses
Ë Sometimes
Ë Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm: Ë None Ë
Fixed at 3 s Ë Variable Ë Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment: Ë
None Ë Fixed at ____ Ë Variable Ë Configurable
Application Confirm: Ë None Ë
Fixed at 4 s Ë Variable Ë Configurable
Complete Appl. Response: Ë
None Ë Fixed at ____ Ë Variable Ë Configurable
Others:
Transmission Delay: No intentional delay
Inter-character Timeout: 50 ms
Need Time Delay: Configurable (default = 24 hrs.)
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: 10 s
Binary input change scanning period: 8 times per power system cycle
E Packed binary change process period:

Analog input change scanning period:
1s
500 ms
Counter change scanning period: 500 ms
Frozen counter event scanning period: 500 ms
Unsolicited response notification delay: 500 ms
Unsolicited response retry delay configurable 0 to 60 sec.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs Ë
Never Ë Always Ë Sometimes Ë Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE Ë Never Ë
Always Ë Sometimes Ë Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE Ë Never Ë
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK Ë Never Ë
Count > 1 Ë
Never Ë Always Ë Sometimes Ë Configurable
Pulse On Ë Never Ë Always Ë
Sometimes Ë Configurable
Pulse Off Ë Never Ë Always Ë
Latch On Ë Never Ë Always Ë
Latch Off Ë Never Ë Always Ë
Queue Never
Ë Ë Always Ë Sometimes Ë Configurable
Clear Queue Never
Ë Ë Always Ë Sometimes Ë Configurable
Explanation of ‘Sometimes’: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is
determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both “Pulse On” and “Latch On” operations perform the same func-
tion in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the “On” state. If the Virtual Input is set to “Self-Reset”,
it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic™. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. “Pulse Off” and “Latch Off”
operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the “Off” state. “Trip” and “Close” operations both put the appropriate
Virtual Input into the “On” state.
E-2 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested: specific variation requested:
Ë Never Ë Never
Ë
Only time-tagged Ë
Binary Input Change With Time
Ë Only non-time-tagged Ë Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Ë Configurable Ë Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:

Ë Never Never
Ë
Ë
Configurable Ë When Device Restarts
Ë Only certain objects Ë When Status Flags Change
Ë Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function No other options are permitted.
Ë

codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

Ë No Counters Reported Ë No Counters Reported
Ë Configurable (attach explanation) Ë Configurable (attach explanation)
Default Object:
Ë 20 Ë
16 Bits (Counter 8)
Default Variation: 1 Ë
32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9)
Point-by-point list attached
Ë Ë Other Value: _____
Ë
Point-by-point list attached E
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Yes
Ë
Ë No

E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the D60 in both request messages
and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or
28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Table E–2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)

OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION FUNCTION QUALIFIER FUNCTION QUALIFIER
NO. NO. CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX) CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX)
1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 0 Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
E 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
(parse only) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
10 0 Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)
request default variation) 06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) echo of request
4 (operate) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index)
6 (dir. op, noack)
20 0 Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 7 (freeze) 06(no range, or all)
variation) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08(limited quantity)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28(index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
Note 1: A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. The default varia-
tions for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings. Refer to the Communications section in Chapter 5
for details. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respec-
tively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for change-
event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the D60 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.


20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
cont’d 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
21 0 Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index) E
2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
22 0 Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
1 32-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
23 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)


23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
cont’d 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
E 5 short floating point 1 (read)

22 (assign class)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06(no range, or all)
129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08(limited quantity) (see Note 2)
17, 28(index)
32 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
5 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
without Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
7 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
with Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
34 0 Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1 16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)


34 2 32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
cont’d 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
3 Short floating point Analog Input Reporting 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Deadband 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
1 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07 (limited qty=1) (see Note 2)
08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited quantity)
(quantity = 1)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class) E
1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class)
20 (enable unsol) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00 (start-stop)
(index must =7)
--- No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart)
see Note 3
--- No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
--- No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)

E.2 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX E
E.2DNP POINT LISTS E.2.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is per-
formed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY INPUT POINTS

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle
Change Event Buffer Size: 1000
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 1 of 12) Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 2 of 12)
point name/description change point name/description change
event class event class
0 Virtual Input 1 2 30 Virtual Input 31 2
1 Virtual Input 2 2 31 Virtual Input 32 2
2 Virtual Input 3 2 32 Virtual Output 1 2
E 3 Virtual Input 4 2 33 Virtual Output 2 2

APPENDIX E E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
60 Virtual Output 29 2 107 Contact Input 12 1
79 Virtual Output 48 2 126 Contact Input 31 1 E
96 Contact Input 1 1 143 Contact Input 48 1

154 Contact Input 59 1 201 Contact Output 10 1
E 173 Contact Input 78 1 220 Contact Output 29 1

192 Contact Output 1 1 239 Contact Output 48 1

248 Contact Output 57 1 295 Remote Device 8 1
256 Remote Input 1 1 303 Remote Device 16 1
257 Remote Input 2 1 304 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 1
258 Remote Input 3 1 305 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 1
259 Remote Input 4 1 320 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 1
260 Remote Input 5 1 321 Phase Time Overcurrent 2 1
261 Remote Input 6 1 328 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 1
262 Remote Input 7 1 329 Phase Directional Overcurrent 2 1
263 Remote Input 8 1 336 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 1
264 Remote Input 9 1 337 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 1
265 Remote Input 10 1 352 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 1
266 Remote Input 11 1 353 Neutral Time Overcurrent 2 1
267 Remote Input 12 1 360 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 1 E
268 Remote Input 13 1 361 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 2 1
269 Remote Input 14 1 364 Negative-Sequence Directional 1
Overcurrent 1
270 Remote Input 15 1
365 Negative-Sequence Directional 1
271 Remote Input 16 1 Overcurrent 2
272 Remote Input 17 1 368 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 1
273 Remote Input 18 1 369 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 1
274 Remote Input 19 1 384 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 1
275 Remote Input 20 1 385 Ground Time Overcurrent 2 1
276 Remote Input 21 1 400 Negative-Sequence Instantaneous 1
278 Remote Input 23 1 401 Negative-Sequence Instantaneous 1
Overcurrent 2
416 Negative-Sequence Time 1
281 Remote Input 26 1 417 Negative-Sequence Time 1
444 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 1
448 Phase Undervoltage 1 1
285 Remote Input 30 1 449 Phase Undervoltage 2 1
452 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 1
456 Phase Overvoltage 1 1
288 Remote Device 1 1 460 Neutral Overvoltage 1 1
464 Phase Distance Zone 1 1
289 Remote Device 2 1
291 Remote Device 4 1 466 Phase Distance Zone 3 1
294 Remote Device 7 1 472 Line Pickup 1

476 Ground Distance Zone 1 1 700 Control Pushbutton 7 1
477 Ground Distance Zone 2 1 704 FlexElement™ 1 1
484 Load Encroachment 1 708 FlexElement™ 5 1
488 DUTT 1 709 FlexElement™ 6 1
489 PUTT 1 710 FlexElement™ 7 1
490 POTT 1 711 FlexElement™ 8 1
491 Hybrid POTT 1 724 Non-Volatile Latch 1 1
492 Directional Comparison Blocking 1 725 Non-Volatile Latch 2 1
494 Power Swing Detect 1 726 Non-Volatile Latch 3 1
528 Source 1 VT Fuse Failure 1 727 Non-Volatile Latch 4 1
536 50DD Disturbance Detector 1 1 731 Non-Volatile Latch 8 1
E 539 50DD Disturbance Detector 4 1 734 Non-Volatile Latch 11 1

559 Stub Bus 1 735 Non-Volatile Latch 12 1
576 Breaker Control 1 1 736 Non-Volatile Latch 13 1
577 Breaker Control 2 1 737 Non-Volatile Latch 14 1
584 Breaker Failure 1 1 738 Non-Volatile Latch 15 1
585 Breaker Failure 2 1 739 Non-Volatile Latch 16 1
592 Breaker Arcing Current 1 1 816 Digital Element 1 1
598 Breaker Flashover 1 1 820 Digital Element 5 1
599 Breaker Flashover 2 1 821 Digital Element 6 1
616 Synchrocheck 1 1 822 Digital Element 7 1
617 Synchrocheck 2 1 823 Digital Element 8 1
640 Setting Group 1 824 Digital Element 9 1
641 Reset 1 825 Digital Element 10 1
664 Trip Output 1 826 Digital Element 11 1
666 Phase Selector 1 827 Digital Element 12 1
668 Open Pole Detector 1 828 Digital Element 13 1
679 Autoreclose 1P/3P 1 829 Digital Element 14 1
689 Selector Switch 1 1 830 Digital Element 15 1
690 Selector Switch 2 1 831 Digital Element 16 1
694 Control Pushbutton 1 1 848 Digital Counter 1 1

854 Digital Counter 7 1 990 User-Programmable Pushbutton 7 1
855 Digital Counter 8 1 991 User-Programmable Pushbutton 8 1
864 LED State 1 (IN SERVICE) 1 992 User-Programmable Pushbutton 9 1
865 LED State 2 (TROUBLE) 1 993 User-Programmable Pushbutton 10 1
866 LED State 3 (TEST MODE) 1 994 User-Programmable Pushbutton 11 1
867 LED State 4 (TRIP) 1 995 User-Programmable Pushbutton 12 1
868 LED State 5 (ALARM) 1
869 LED State 6 (PICKUP) 1
880 LED State 9 (VOLTAGE) 1
881 LED State 10 (CURRENT) 1
882 LED State 11 (FREQUENCY) 1
883 LED State 12 (OTHER) 1
884 LED State 13 (PHASE A) 1
885 LED State 14 (PHASE B) 1
886 LED State 15 (PHASE C) 1
887 LED State 16 (NTL/GROUND) 1
898 SNTP FAILURE 1
899 BATTERY FAIL 1
900 PRI ETHERNET FAIL 1
901 SEC ETHERNET FAIL 1 E
902 EEPROM DATA ERROR 1
903 SRAM DATA ERROR 1
904 PROGRAM MEMORY 1
905 WATCHDOG ERROR 1
906 LOW ON MEMORY 1
907 REMOTE DEVICE OFF 1
908 DIRECT DEVICE OFF
909 DIRECT RING BREAK
910 ANY MINOR ERROR 1
911 ANY MAJOR ERROR 1
912 ANY SELF-TESTS 1
913 IRIG-B FAILURE 1
914 DSP ERROR 1
916 NO DSP INTERUPTS 1
917 UNIT NOT CALIBRATED 1
921 PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE 1
922 FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN 1
923 EQUIPMENT MISMATCH 1
925 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED 1
926 SYSTEM EXCEPTION 1
927 LATCHING OUT ERROR 1
984 User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 1

E.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS

Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when Variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
Table E–4: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
0 Virtual Input 1
1 Virtual Input 2
2 Virtual Input 3
3 Virtual Input 4
4 Virtual Input 5
5 Virtual Input 6
E 6
7
Virtual Input 7
Virtual Input 8
8 Virtual Input 9
9 Virtual Input 10
10 Virtual Input 11
11 Virtual Input 12
12 Virtual Input 13
13 Virtual Input 14
14 Virtual Input 15
15 Virtual Input 16
16 Virtual Input 17
17 Virtual Input 18
18 Virtual Input 19
19 Virtual Input 20
20 Virtual Input 21
21 Virtual Input 22
22 Virtual Input 23
23 Virtual Input 24
24 Virtual Input 25
25 Virtual Input 26
26 Virtual Input 27
27 Virtual Input 28
28 Virtual Input 29
29 Virtual Input 30
30 Virtual Input 31
31 Virtual Input 32

E.2.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is per-
formed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear),
10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 2
FROZEN COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time) E
Default Class for all points: 2
Table E–5: BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX
0 Digital Counter 1
1 Digital Counter 2
2 Digital Counter 3
3 Digital Counter 4
4 Digital Counter 5
5 Digital Counter 6
6 Digital Counter 7
7 Digital Counter 8
8 Oscillography Trigger Count
9 Events Since Last Clear
A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. D60 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit
integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative
counter values.

E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs
are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the
maximum positive representation is 32767 for 16-bit values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul-
letin 9809-001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to
data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.
When using the D60 in DNP systems with limited memory, the Analog Input Points below may be replaced with a user-
definable list. This user-definable list uses the same settings as the Modbus User Map and can be configured with the Mod-
bus User Map settings. When used with DNP, each entry in the Modbus User Map represents the starting Modbus address
of a data item available as a DNP Analog Input point. To enable use of the Modbus User Map for DNP Analog Input points,
set the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting to Enabled (this setting is in the PRODUCT SETUP !" COMMUNICATIONS !"
DNP PROTOCOL menu). The new DNP Analog points list can be checked via the “DNP Analog Input Points List” webpage,
accessible from the “Device Information menu” webpage.
After changing the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting, the relay must be powered off and then back on for the set-
ting to take effect.
NOTE
Only Source 1 data points are shown in the following table. If the NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting is increased,
data points for subsequent sources will be added to the list immediately following the Source 1 data points.
Units for Analog Input points are as follows:
E •
•
Current:
Voltage:
A (amps)
V (volts)
•
•
Frequency:
Angle:
Hz (hertz)
degrees
• Real Power: W (watts) • Ohm Input: ohms
• Reactive Power: var (vars) • RTD Input: °C (degrees Celsius)
• Apparent Power: VA (volt-amps)
• Energy Wh, varh (watt-hours, var-hours)

Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms
Default Class for all Points: 1

Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 1 of 3) Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 2 of 3)
POINT DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION
0 SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS 52 SRC 1 Phase B Real Power
1 SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS 53 SRC 1 Phase C Real Power
2 SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS 54 SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power
3 SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS 55 SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power
4 SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude 56 SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power
5 SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle 57 SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power
6 SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude 58 SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power
7 SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle 59 SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power
8 SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude 60 SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power
9 SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle 61 SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power
10 SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude 62 SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor
11 SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle 63 SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor
12 SRC 1 Ground Current RMS 64 SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor
13 SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude 65 SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor
14 SRC 1 Ground Current Angle 66 SRC 1 Positive Watthour
15 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 67 SRC 1 Negative Watthour
16 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle 68 SRC 1 Positive Varhour
17 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 69 SRC 1 Negative Varhour
18 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle 70 SRC 1 Frequency
19 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 71 Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase A
20 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle 72 Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase B
21
22
SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle
73
74
Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase C
Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase A
E
23 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS 75 Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase B
24 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS 76 Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase C
25 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS 77 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude
26 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude 78 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Angle
27 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle 79 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude
28 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude 80 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Angle
29 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle 81 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude
30 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude 82 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Angle
31 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle 83 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Voltage Magnitude
32 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS 84 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Voltage Angle
33 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS 85 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Voltage Magnitude
34 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS 86 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Voltage Angle
35 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude 87 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Voltage Magnitude
36 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle 88 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Voltage Angle
37 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude 89 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Current Magnitude
38 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle 90 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Current Angle
39 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude 91 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Current Magnitude
40 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle 92 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Current Angle
41 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS 93 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Current Magnitude
42 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude 94 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Current Angle
43 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle 95 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Voltage Magnitude
44 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude 96 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Voltage Angle
45 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle 97 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Voltage Magnitude
46 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude 98 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Voltage Angle
47 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle 99 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Voltage Magnitude
48 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude 100 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Voltage Angle
49 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle 101 Fault 1 Type
50 SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power 102 Fault 1 Location
51 SRC 1 Phase A Real Power 103 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage

Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 3 of 3)

POINT DESCRIPTION
104 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency
105 Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase
106 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage
107 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency
108 Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase
109 Tracking Frequency
110 FlexElement 1 Actual
118 Current Setting Group

APPENDIX F F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F MISCELLANEOUSF.1CHANGE NOTES F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table F–1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N D60 REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO
1601-0089-0.1 1.5x (Beta) 23 August 1999 N/A
1601-0089-A1 2.0x 17 December 1999 N/A
1601-0089-A2 2.0x 14 January 2000 URD-001
1601-0089-A3 2.2x 12 May 2000 URD-002
1601-0089-A4 2.2x 14 June 2000 URD-003
1601-0089-A4a 2.2x 28 June 2000 URD-003a
1601-0089-B1 2.4x 08 September 2000 URD-004
1601-0089-B2 2.4x 03 November 2000 URD-005
1601-0089-B3 2.6x 08 March 2001 URD-006
1601-0089-B4 2.8x 27 September 2001 URD-007
1601-0089-B5 2.9x 03 December 2001 URD-008
1601-0089-B6 2.9x 07 January 2002 URD-009
1601-0089-B7 2.9x 15 March 2002 URD-010
1601-0089-B8 2.6x 27 February 2004 URX-120
1601-0089-C1 3.0x 02 July 2002 URD-010
1601-0089-C2 3.1x 30 August 2002 URD-012
1601-0089-C3 3.0x 18 November 2002 URD-016
1601-0089-C4 3.1x 18 November 2002 URD-017
1601-0089-C5 3.0x 11 February 2003 URD-020
1601-0089-C6 3.1x 11 February 2003 URD-021
1601-0089-D1 3.2x 11 February 2003 URD-023
1601-0089-D2 3.2x 02 June 2003 URX-084
1601-0089-E1 3.3x 01 May 2003 URX-080 F
1601-0089-E2 3.3x 29 May 2003 URX-083
1601-0089-F1 3.4x 10 December 2003 URX-111
1601-0089-F2 3.4x 09 February 2004 URX-115
1601-0089-F3 3.4x 27 February 2004 URX-130
1601-0089-G1 4.0x 23 March 2004 URX-123
1601-0089-G2 4.0x 17 May 2004 URX-136
1601-0089-H1 4.2x 30 June 2004 URX-145
1601-0089-H2 4.2x 23 July 2004 URX-151
F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE D60 MANUAL
Table F–2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION H2

PAGE PAGE CHANGE DESCRIPTION
(H1) (H2)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0089-H2
3-21 3-21 Update Updated CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS table
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay F-1

F.1 CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX F
Table F–3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION H1

(G2) (H1)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0089-H1
1-12 1-13 Update Updated COMMISSIONING section
2-4 2-4 Update Updated D60 ORDER CODES table

2-6 2-6 Update Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS specifications for Breaker Flashover
3-9 3-9 Update Updated FORM-A CONTACT FUNCTIONS diagram to 827821A5
5-13 5-13 Update Updated DNP PROTOCOL sub-section to reflect new settings
5-18 5-19 Update Updated FAULT REPORTS section
5-53 5-54 Update Updated FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS table for firmware release 4.2x
5-157 5-159 Update Updated AUTORECLOSE section
--- 5-178 Add Added BREAKER FLASHOVER section
B-8 B-8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP for firmware release 4.2x
Table F–4: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION G2

(G1) (G2)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0089-G2
3-6 3-6 Update Updated TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM to 837774A2
Table F–5: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION G1 (Sheet 1 of 2)

F (F3)
Title
(G1)
Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0089-G1.
2-4 2-4 Update Updated D60 ORDER CODES table

2-5 2-5 Update Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table
2-6 2-6 Update Updated PHASE DISTANCE and GROUND DISTANCE specifications
2-13 2-13 Add Added dcmA outputs specifications to OUTPUTS section
2-13 2-13 Add Added IRIG-B outputs specifications to OUTPUTS section
3-4 3-4 Update Update MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION section to reflect new hardware
3-6 3-6 Update Updated TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM to 837712AD to indicate new hardware
3-7 3-7 Update Updated DIELECTRIC STRENGTH section
3-8 3-8 Update Updated CT/VT MODULES section for new hardware
3-15 3-15 Update Updated drawings and description in TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS section
3-16 3-17 Update Updated drawings and description in CPU COMMUNICATIONS PORTS section
3-18 3-19 Update Updated IRIG-B section to indicate updated functionality
5-17 5-18 Update Updated REAL TIME CLOCK section

5-18 5-18 Update Updated FAULT REPORTS section to indicate settings moved from deleted LINE section
5-41 5- Remove Removed LINE section. These settings are now part of the FAULT REPORTS section
5-54 5-53 Update Updated FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS table
5-68 5-67 Update Updated FLEXELEMENT™ SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 842004A3
5-69 5-68 Update Updated FLEXELEMENT™ INPUT MODE SETTING diagram to 842706A2
5-75 5-74 Update Updated DISTANCE section for five zones
5-76 5-75 Update Updated PHASE DISTANCE section and logic diagrams for non-directional protection
F-2 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

APPENDIX F F.1 CHANGE NOTES
Table F–5: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION G1 (Sheet 2 of 2)

(F3) (G1)
5-83 5-83 Update Updated GROUND DISTANCE section and logic diagrams for non-directional protection
5-112 5-114 Update Updated NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT sub-section
5-146 5-149 Update Updated TRIP OUTPUT section
5-172 5-176 Update Updated OPEN POLE DETECTOR section
5-202 5-206 Add Added DCMA OUTPUTS section
6-15 6-15 Update Updated FAULT REPORTS section
8-2 8-2 Update Updated DISTANCE CHARACTERISTICS section for non-directional protection
8-21 8-22 Update Updated PHASE SELECTOR LOGIC diagram to 837027A3
9-3 9-3 Update Updated GROUND DISTANCE section
B-8 B-8 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP for firmware release 4.0x
Table F–6: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION F3

(F1) (F2)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0089-F3.
5-83 5-83 Update Updated GROUND DISTANCE section.
Table F–7: MAJOR UPDATES FOR D60 MANUAL REVISION F2

(F1) (F2)
Title Title Update Manual part number to 1601-0089-F2.
3-15 3-15 Update Updated TRANSDUCER I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827831A9-X1.
F
5-8 5-8 Update Updated DISPLAY PROPERTIES section.
5-43 5-44 Update Updated DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827061AM.
5-104 5-106 Update Updated PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827072A4.
5-105 5-107 Update Updated PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827033A6.
5-133 5-135 Update Updated PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827039AB.
5-134 5-136 Update Updated PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827066A5.

F.2 ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX F
F.2ABBREVIATIONS F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
A..................... Ampere FREQ ............. Frequency

AC .................. Alternating Current FSK................ Frequency-Shift Keying
A/D ................. Analog to Digital FTP ................ File Transfer Protocol
AE .................. Accidental Energization, Application Entity FxE ................ FlexElement™
AMP ............... Ampere FWD............... Forward
ANG ............... Angle
ANSI............... American National Standards Institute G .................... Generator
AR .................. Automatic Reclosure GE.................. General Electric
ASDU ............. Application-layer Service Data Unit GND............... Ground
ASYM ............. Asymmetry GNTR............. Generator
AUTO ............. Automatic GOOSE.......... General Object Oriented Substation Event
AUX................ Auxiliary GPS ............... Global Positioning System
AVG ................ Average
HARM ............ Harmonic / Harmonics
BER................ Bit Error Rate HCT ............... High Current Time
BF................... Breaker Fail HGF ............... High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT)
BFI.................. Breaker Failure Initiate HIZ ................. High-Impedance and Arcing Ground
BKR................ Breaker HMI ................ Human-Machine Interface
BLK ................ Block HTTP ............. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
BLKG.............. Blocking HYB ............... Hybrid
BPNT.............. Breakpoint of a characteristic
BRKR ............. Breaker I...................... Instantaneous
I_0.................. Zero Sequence current
CAP................ Capacitor I_1.................. Positive Sequence current
CC .................. Coupling Capacitor I_2.................. Negative Sequence current
CCVT ............. Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer IA ................... Phase A current
CFG................ Configure / Configurable IAB ................. Phase A minus B current
.CFG............... Filename extension for oscillography files IB ................... Phase B current
CHK................ Check IBC................. Phase B minus C current
CHNL ............. Channel IC ................... Phase C current
CLS ................ Close ICA................. Phase C minus A current
CLSD.............. Closed ID ................... Identification
CMND ............ Command IED................. Intelligent Electronic Device
CMPRSN........ Comparison IEC................. International Electrotechnical Commission
CO.................. Contact Output IEEE............... Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
COM............... Communication IG ................... Ground (not residual) current
COMM............ Communications Igd.................. Differential Ground current
COMP ............ Compensated, Comparison IN ................... CT Residual Current (3Io) or Input
CONN............. Connection INC SEQ ........ Incomplete Sequence
CONT ............. Continuous, Contact INIT ................ Initiate
CO-ORD......... Coordination INST............... Instantaneous
F CPU................ Central Processing Unit
CRC ............... Cyclic Redundancy Code
INV................. Inverse
I/O .................. Input/Output
CRT, CRNT .... Current IOC ................ Instantaneous Overcurrent
CSA................ Canadian Standards Association IOV................. Instantaneous Overvoltage
CT .................. Current Transformer IRIG ............... Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
CVT ................ Capacitive Voltage Transformer ISO................. International Standards Organization
IUV................. Instantaneous Undervoltage
D/A ................. Digital to Analog
DC (dc)........... Direct Current K0 .................. Zero Sequence Current Compensation
DD .................. Disturbance Detector kA................... kiloAmpere
DFLT .............. Default kV................... kiloVolt
DGNST........... Diagnostics
DI.................... Digital Input LED................ Light Emitting Diode
DIFF ............... Differential LEO................ Line End Open
DIR ................. Directional LFT BLD ........ Left Blinder
DISCREP ....... Discrepancy LOOP............. Loopback
DIST ............... Distance LPU................ Line Pickup
DMD ............... Demand LRA................ Locked-Rotor Current
DNP................ Distributed Network Protocol LTC ................ Load Tap-Changer
DPO ............... Dropout
DSP................ Digital Signal Processor M.................... Machine
dt .................... Rate of Change mA ................. MilliAmpere
DTT ................ Direct Transfer Trip MAG............... Magnitude
DUTT.............. Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip MAN............... Manual / Manually
MAX ............... Maximum
ENCRMNT ..... Encroachment MIC ................ Model Implementation Conformance
EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute MIN ................ Minimum, Minutes
.EVT ............... Filename extension for event recorder files MMI................ Man Machine Interface
EXT ................ Extension, External MMS .............. Manufacturing Message Specification
MRT ............... Minimum Response Time
F ..................... Field MSG............... Message
FAIL................ Failure MTA................ Maximum Torque Angle
FD .................. Fault Detector MTR ............... Motor
FDH................ Fault Detector high-set MVA ............... MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)
FDL ................ Fault Detector low-set MVA_A ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)
FLA................. Full Load Current MVA_B ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)
FO .................. Fiber Optic MVA_C........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)

APPENDIX F F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
MVAR ............. MegaVar (total 3-phase) SAT .................CT Saturation

MVAR_A......... MegaVar (phase A) SBO ................Select Before Operate
MVAR_B......... MegaVar (phase B) SCADA ...........Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C) SEC ................Secondary
MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour SEL .................Select / Selector / Selection
MW................. MegaWatt (total 3-phase) SENS ..............Sensitive
MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A) SEQ ................Sequence
MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B) SIR..................Source Impedance Ratio
MW_C ............ MegaWatt (phase C) SNTP ..............Simple Network Time Protocol
MWH .............. MegaWatt-Hour SRC ................Source
SSB.................Single Side Band
N..................... Neutral SSEL...............Session Selector
N/A, n/a .......... Not Applicable STATS.............Statistics
NEG ............... Negative SUPN..............Supervision
NMPLT ........... Nameplate SUPV ..............Supervise / Supervision
NOM............... Nominal SV ...................Supervision, Service
NSAP ............. Network Service Access Protocol SYNC..............Synchrocheck
NTR................ Neutral SYNCHCHK....Synchrocheck
O .................... Over T......................Time, transformer

OC, O/C ......... Overcurrent TC ...................Thermal Capacity
O/P, Op........... Output TCP.................Transmission Control Protocol
OP .................. Operate TCU ................Thermal Capacity Used
OPER ............. Operate TD MULT ........Time Dial Multiplier
OPERATG...... Operating TEMP..............Temperature
O/S ................. Operating System TFTP...............Trivial File Transfer Protocol
OSI ................. Open Systems Interconnect THD ................Total Harmonic Distortion
OSB................ Out-of-Step Blocking TMR ................Timer
OUT................ Output TOC ................Time Overcurrent
OV .................. Overvoltage TOV ................Time Overvoltage
OVERFREQ ... Overfrequency TRANS............Transient
OVLD ............. Overload TRANSF .........Transfer
TSEL...............Transport Selector
P..................... Phase TUC ................Time Undercurrent
PC .................. Phase Comparison, Personal Computer TUV.................Time Undervoltage
PCNT ............. Percent TX (Tx)............Transmit, Transmitter
PF................... Power Factor (total 3-phase)
PF_A .............. Power Factor (phase A) U .....................Under
PF_B .............. Power Factor (phase B) UC...................Undercurrent
PF_C .............. Power Factor (phase C) UCA ................Utility Communications Architecture
PFLL............... Phase and Frequency Lock Loop UDP ................User Datagram Protocol
PHS................ Phase UL ...................Underwriters Laboratories
PICS............... Protocol Implementation & Conformance UNBAL............Unbalance
Statement
PKP ................ Pickup
PLC ................ Power Line Carrier
UR...................Universal Relay
URC ................Universal Recloser Control
.URS ...............Filename extension for settings files
F
POS................ Positive UV...................Undervoltage
POTT.............. Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip
PRESS ........... Pressure V/Hz ................Volts per Hertz
PRI ................. Primary V_0 .................Zero Sequence voltage
PROT ............. Protection V_1 .................Positive Sequence voltage
PSEL .............. Presentation Selector V_2 .................Negative Sequence voltage
pu ................... Per Unit VA ...................Phase A voltage
PUIB............... Pickup Current Block VAB.................Phase A to B voltage
PUIT ............... Pickup Current Trip VAG ................Phase A to Ground voltage
PUSHBTN ...... Pushbutton VARH ..............Var-hour voltage
PUTT.............. Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip VB ...................Phase B voltage
PWM .............. Pulse Width Modulated VBA.................Phase B to A voltage
PWR............... Power VBG ................Phase B to Ground voltage
VC...................Phase C voltage
QUAD............. Quadrilateral VCA ................Phase C to A voltage
VCG ................Phase C to Ground voltage
R..................... Rate, Reverse VF ...................Variable Frequency
RCA................ Reach Characteristic Angle VIBR ...............Vibration
REF ................ Reference VT ...................Voltage Transformer
REM ............... Remote VTFF...............Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
REV................ Reverse VTLOS ............Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal
RI.................... Reclose Initiate
RIP ................. Reclose In Progress WDG ...............Winding
RGT BLD........ Right Blinder WH..................Watt-hour
ROD ............... Remote Open Detector w/ opt ..............With Option
RST ................ Reset WRT................With Respect To
RSTR ............. Restrained
RTD................ Resistance Temperature Detector X .....................Reactance
RTU................ Remote Terminal Unit XDUCER.........Transducer
RX (Rx) .......... Receive, Receiver XFMR..............Transformer
s ..................... second Z......................Impedance, Zone

S..................... Sensitive

F.3 WARRANTY APPENDIX F
F.3WARRANTY F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from
defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from
date of shipment from factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay
providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation
charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement under war-
ranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident,
incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered
outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.
F GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for
expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard
Conditions of Sale.

INDEX
Index
Numerics B
10BASE-F BANKS ............................................................ 5-6, 5-38, 5-39
communications options ................................................. 3-17 BATTERY FAIL .................................................................. 7-4
description .................................................................... 3-18 BINARY INPUT POINTS .................................................... E-8
interface ........................................................................ 3-28 BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ............................................... E-14
redundant option ........................................................... 3-17 BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................. 1-3
settings ......................................................................... 5-12 BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-4
specifications ................................................................ 2-15 BLOCKING SCHEME
application of settings ...................................................... 9-8
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-54
logic ............................................................................ 5-198
A settings ............................................................ 5-196, 5-197
BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................... F-4
actual values ................................................................. 6-18
AC CURRENT INPUTS ..................................... 2-13, 3-8, 5-38
clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-2
AC VOLTAGE INPUTS .............................................. 2-13, 3-8
ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-12, 4-12
logic ................................................................. 5-177, 5-181
ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................... 5-73
measurement ............................................................... 5-177
ACTUAL VALUES
Modbus registers ........................................ B-12, B-13, B-32
maintenance ................................................................. 6-18
settings ....................................................................... 5-176
metering .......................................................................... 6-8
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
product information ........................................................ 6-19
BREAKER CONTROL
records ......................................................................... 6-15
control of 2 breakers ........................................................ 4-8
status .............................................................................. 6-3
description ....................................................................... 4-8
ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-25
dual breaker logic .......................................................... 5-44
ALTITUDE ....................................................................... 2-16
ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS ................................................... 2-2
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-20
APPARENT POWER ................................................2-12, 6-13
settings ......................................................................... 5-42
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
BREAKER FAILURE
breaker trip circuit integrity .......................................... 5-173
description ................................................................... 5-130
contact inputs .............................................................. 5-200
determination ............................................................... 5-131
pilot schemes .................................................................. 9-6
series compensated lines ........................................ 8-16, 9-9
logic ............................................ 5-134, 5-135, 5-136, 5-137
stepped distance scheme ................................................. 9-2
main path sequence ..................................................... 5-131
APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-16
ARCHITECTURE ............................................................. 5-52
settings ............................................................ 5-129, 5-132
ARCING CURRENT ....................................................... 5-176
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
AUTORECLOSE
BREAKER FLASHOVER
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
description .................................................................. 5-160
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-54
settings ....................................................................... 5-178
logic ....................................................... 5-167, 5-168, 5-169
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
Modbus registers .................................................. B-13, B-28
BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ...................................... 5-6
sequence .................................................................... 5-170
BRIGHTNESS .................................................................... 5-8
settings ............................. 5-159, 5-162, 5-163, 5-164, 5-166
specifications ................................................................ 2-10
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-54 C
logic ............................................................................ 5-144
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-34 C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS .................................... 3-29, 3-30
settings ....................................................................... 5-144 CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-16
specifications .................................................................. 2-9 CHANGES TO D60 MANUAL ..............................................F-1
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE CHANGES TO MANUAL ...................................... F-1, F-2, F-3
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-54 CHANNEL COMMUNICATION .......................................... 3-21
logic ............................................................................ 5-143 CHANNELS
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-34 banks ................................................................... 5-38, 5-39
settings ....................................................................... 5-143 CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ......................... 5-171
specifications .................................................................. 2-9 CLEANING ....................................................................... 2-16
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL ....................................... 3-8 CLEAR RECORDS .................................................... 5-10, 7-1
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-12 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
INDEX
settings ......................................................................... 5-10

CLOCK
setting date and time ........................................................ 7-2
settings ......................................................................... 5-18
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay i

INDEX
COMMANDS MENU ........................................................... 7-1 CURVES

COMMUNICATIONS definite time ...................................................... 5-107, 5-138
10BASE-F ....................................................3-17, 3-18, 5-12 FlexCurves™ ...................................................... 5-45, 5-107
channel ......................................................................... 3-21 I2T ............................................................................... 5-107
connecting to the UR ................................................ 1-7, 1-8 IAC .............................................................................. 5-106
CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-2 IEC .............................................................................. 5-105
dnp ............................................................... 5-13, 5-18, E-1 IEEE ............................................................................ 5-104
G.703 ............................................................................ 3-24 inverse time undervoltage ............................................. 5-138
half duplex...................................................................... B-1 types ........................................................................... 5-103
HTTP ............................................................................ 5-16
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol .............................................. 5-16
inter-relay communications ............................................. 2-15
Modbus .................................................. 5-12, 5-18, B-1, B-3 D
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-16
DATA FORMATS, MODBUS ............................................. B-49
network ......................................................................... 5-12
DATA LOGGER
overview ........................................................................ 1-10
clearing ...................................................................5-10, 7-1
RS232 ........................................................................... 3-16
Modbus ........................................................................... B-7
RS485 ..........................................................3-17, 3-18, 5-11
settings ...................................... 5-12, 5-13, 5-15, 5-16, 5-18
settings ..........................................................................5-22
specifications................................................................. 2-15
specifications .................................................................2-12
UCA/MMS ........... 5-15, 5-42, 5-201, 5-205, 5-206, 5-207, C-1
via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-6
web server..................................................................... 5-16
DATE ................................................................................ 7-2
COMTRADE ............................................................... B-6, B-7
DCMA INPUTS .................................................................6-14
CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-16
CONTACT INFORMATION .................................................. 1-1
settings ........................................................................ 5-212
CONTACT INPUTS
specifications .................................................................2-13
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
DCMA OUTPUTS
dry connections ............................................................. 3-14
description .....................................................................3-15
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-36
Modbus registers ................................. B-9, B-14, B-38, B-40
settings ........................................................................ 5-213
module assignments ...................................................... 3-10
specifications .................................................................2-14
settings ....................................................................... 5-199
DEFINITE TIME CURVE ...................................... 5-107, 5-138
specifications................................................................. 2-13
DESIGN ............................................................................ 1-3
thresholds ................................................................... 5-199
DEVICE ID ..................................................................... 5-205
wet connections ............................................................. 3-14
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT .......................................... E-1
wiring ............................................................................ 3-12
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ..........................................2-16, 3-7
CONTACT OUTPUTS
DIGITAL COUNTERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
FlexLogic™ operands ........................................... 5-59, 5-60
FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-55
Modbus registers .......................................... B-9, B-14, B-42
logic ............................................................................ 5-175
module assignments ...................................................... 3-10
Modbus registers .................................................... B-9, B-38
settings ....................................................................... 5-202
settings ........................................................................ 5-174
wiring ............................................................................ 3-12
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
CONTROL ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-145
application example ...................................................... 5-172
CONTROL POWER
description....................................................................... 3-8
logic ............................................................................ 5-171
specifications................................................................. 2-14
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
settings ........................................................................ 5-171
DIGITAL INPUTS
see entry for CONTACT INPUTS
settings ......................................................................... 5-26
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
specifications................................................................. 2-11
see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS
COUNTERS
DIMENSIONS .................................................................... 3-1
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
DIRECT DEVICES
settings ....................................................................... 5-174
actual values ................................................................... 6-7
CRC ALARM .................................................................... 5-36
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-2
settings ........................................................................ 5-208
CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ....................................... 2-14, 3-7
DIRECT I/O
CSA APPROVAL .............................................................. 2-16
see also DIRECT INPUTS and DIRECT OUTPUTS
CT BANKS
application example ........................................... 5-209, 5-210
settings ......................................................................... 5-38
configuration examples ........................ 5-23, 5-32, 5-36, 5-37
CT INPUTS ............................................................... 5-6, 5-38
settings ..................................... 5-23, 5-32, 5-36, 5-37, 5-208
CT WIRING ........................................................................ 3-8
DIRECT INPUTS
CURRENT BANK ............................................................. 5-38
INDEX
actual values ................................................................... 6-6

CURRENT METERING
application example ........................................... 5-209, 5-210
actual values ................................................................. 6-11
clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2
Modbus registers ................................ B-10, B-16, B-44, B-46
specifications................................................................. 2-12
ii D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

INDEX
settings ....................................................................... 5-208 oscillography ................................................................... 4-2

specifications ................................................................ 2-13 overview .......................................................................... 4-1
DIRECT OUTPUTS requirements ................................................................... 1-5
application example ........................................... 5-209, 5-210 EQUATIONS
clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2 definite time curve ............................................ 5-107, 5-138
Modbus registers ................................ B-10, B-44, B-45, B-46 FlexCurve™ ................................................................. 5-107
settings ....................................................................... 5-209 I²t curves ..................................................................... 5-107
DIRECT UNDERREACH TRANSER TRIP IAC curves ................................................................... 5-106
see entry for DUTT IEC curves ................................................................... 5-105
DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC ..................................... 8-4 IEEE curves ................................................................. 5-104
DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING ETHERNET
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-28 actual values ................................................................... 6-6
see BLOCKING SCHEME configuration .................................................................... 1-7
DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT Modbus registers .......................................................... B-10
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL entries settings ......................................................................... 5-12
DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION ...................................... 5-112 specifications ................................................................. 2-15
DISPLAY ............................................................1-10, 4-8, 5-8 EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS ............................................. 4-5
DISTANCE EVENT RECORDER
analysis of elements ........................................................ 8-7 actual values ................................................................. 6-17
characteristics ................................................................. 8-2 clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-1
ground ................................................................... 2-7, 5-85 Modbus .......................................................................... B-7
mho characteristic .................................................5-79, 5-80 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-14
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-29 specifications ................................................................. 2-12
phase ..................................................................... 2-6, 5-77 via enerVista software ...................................................... 4-2
quad characteristic ..................... 5-79, 5-80, 5-81, 5-87, 5-88 EVENTS SETTING ............................................................. 5-4
settings ......................................................................... 5-76 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................ B-5
stepped distance ............................................................. 9-2
DISTURBANCE DETECTOR
internal ......................................................................... 5-41 F
DNA-1 BIT PAIR ............................................................ 5-207
F485 ................................................................................ 1-10
DNP COMMUNICATIONS
FACEPLATE ...................................................................... 3-1
binary counters ............................................................. E-15
FACEPLATE PANELS ................................................. 4-4, 4-7
binary input points ........................................................... E-8
FAST FORM-C RELAY ..................................................... 2-14
binary output points ....................................................... E-14
FAST TRANSIENT TESTING ............................................ 2-16
control relay output blocks ............................................. E-14
FAULT LOCATOR
device profile document ................................................... E-1
logic .............................................................................. 6-16
frozen counters ............................................................. E-15
implementation table ....................................................... E-4
operation ....................................................................... 6-15
specifications ................................................................. 2-12
settings ......................................................................... 5-13
FAULT REPORT
user map ....................................................................... 5-15
actual values ................................................................. 6-15
DUPLEX, HALF .................................................................. B-1
clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-1
DUTT
Modbus .......................................................................... B-7
Modbus registers ................................................. B-14, B-18
settings ......................................................................... 5-19
logic ............................................................................ 5-186
FAULT REPORTS
settings ....................................................................... 5-185
FAULT TYPE .................................................................... 6-15
DYNAMIC REACH CONTROL ........................................... 8-17
FAX NUMBERS .................................................................. 1-1
FEATURES ........................................................................ 2-1
Fiber ................................................................................ 3-22
E FIRMWARE REVISION ..................................................... 6-19
FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ....................................... 2-16 FLASH MESSAGES ............................................................ 5-8
ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-3 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
ENERGY METERING actual values ................................................................... 6-5
actual values ................................................................. 6-13 Modbus registers ................................................. B-14, B-35
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-12 settings ......................................................................... 5-29
specifications ................................................................ 2-12 specifications ................................................................. 2-11
ENERGY METERING, CLEARING .................................... 5-10 FLEXCURVES™
ENERVISTA UR SETUP equation ...................................................................... 5-107
creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1 Modbus registers ................................................. B-21, B-37
event recorder ................................................................. 4-2 settings ......................................................................... 5-45
INDEX
firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2 specifications ................................................................. 2-11

installation ...................................................................... 1-5 table .............................................................................. 5-45
introduction ..................................................................... 4-1 FLEXELEMENTS™
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay iii

INDEX
actual values ................................................................. 6-14 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-56

direction ........................................................................ 5-70 logic ............................................................................ 5-122
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-55 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-24
hysteresis ...................................................................... 5-70 settings ........................................................................ 5-122
Modbus registers ..................................................B-35, B-36 GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT
pickup ........................................................................... 5-70 see entry for GROUND TOC
scheme logic ................................................................. 5-69 GROUND TOC
settings ........................................................5-68, 5-69, 5-71 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-56
specifications................................................................. 2-11 logic ............................................................................ 5-121
FLEXLOGIC™ Modbus registers ........................................................... B-24
editing with enerVista UR Setup ....................................... 4-1 settings ........................................................................ 5-121
equation editor .............................................................. 5-67 specifications .................................................................. 2-8
evaluation...................................................................... 5-62 GROUPED ELEMENTS .....................................................5-73
example ............................................................... 5-52, 5-62
example equation ........................................................ 5-145
gate characteristics ........................................................ 5-61
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-22 H
operands .............................................................. 5-53, 5-54
HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1
operators ....................................................................... 5-61
HTTP PROTOCOL ............................................................5-16
rules .............................................................................. 5-61
HUMIDITY ........................................................................2-16
specifications................................................................. 2-11
HYBRID PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP
timers ............................................................................ 5-67
see entry for HYBRID POTT
worksheet ...................................................................... 5-63
HYBRID POTT
FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR .................................. 5-67
FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS
logic ............................................................................ 5-195
settings ......................................................................... 5-67
settings ............................................................. 5-192, 5-194
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................ 5-217
HYRBRID POTT
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ......................................... 5-218
FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................ 6-17
FORM-A RELAY
high impedance circuits .................................................. 3-10
outputs .......................................................... 3-9, 3-10, 3-14 I
specifications................................................................. 2-14
FORM-C RELAY I2T CURVES .................................................................. 5-107
outputs ................................................................... 3-9, 3-14 IAC CURVES .................................................................. 5-106
specifications................................................................. 2-14 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
FREQUENCY METERING interoperability document ................................................. D-1
actual values ................................................................. 6-13 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-17
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-12 settings ..........................................................................5-16
settings ......................................................................... 5-40 IEC CURVES .................................................................. 5-105
specifications................................................................. 2-12 IED ................................................................................... 1-2
FREQUENCY TRACKING ........................................ 5-40, 6-14 IED SETUP ....................................................................... 1-5
FREQUENCY, NOMINAL .................................................. 5-39 IEEE C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ............................ 3-29, 3-30
FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-4 IEEE CURVES ................................................................ 5-104
FUSE ............................................................................... 2-13 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS .................................................. 1-4
FUSE FAILURE IN SERVICE INDICATOR ...........................................1-12, 7-3
see VT FUSE FAILURE INPUTS
AC current ............................................................ 2-13, 5-38
AC voltage ............................................................ 2-13, 5-39
contact inputs .................................. 2-13, 3-12, 5-199, 5-217
G dcmA inputs .......................................................... 2-13, 3-15
direct inputs ...................................................................2-13
G.703 .................................................... 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-28
IRIG-B .................................................................. 2-13, 3-19
GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................. 5-106
remote inputs ........................................... 2-13, 5-205, 5-206
GOMSFE .......................................................................... C-1
RTD inputs ............................................................ 2-13, 3-15
GOOSE ...... 5-15, 5-205, 5-206, 5-207, 5-208, 5-209, 6-5, B-17
virtual .......................................................................... 5-201
GROUND CURRENT METERING ...................................... 6-11
INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................. 1-1
GROUND DIRECTIONAL SUPERVISION .......................... 5-92
INSTALLATION
GROUND DISTANCE
communications .............................................................3-17
contact inputs/outputs .................................. 3-10, 3-12, 3-13
CT inputs ........................................................................ 3-8
RS485 ...........................................................................3-18
op scheme ..................................................................... 5-92
settings ..........................................................................5-37
INDEX
scheme logic ........................................................ 5-90, 5-91

VT inputs ........................................................................ 3-8
settings ......................................................................... 5-85
INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
specifications................................................................... 2-7
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries
GROUND IOC
INSULATION RESISTANCE ..............................................2-16
iv D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

INDEX
INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................ 1-2 MIC .................................................................................. C-3

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS .................................. 2-15 MMS
INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-2 see entry for UCA/MMS
INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE .................................. 5-138 MODBUS
IOC data logger .............................................................. B-6, B-7
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries event recorder ................................................................ B-7
IP ADDRESS ................................................................... 5-12 exception responses ....................................................... B-5
IRIG-B execute operation ........................................................... B-4
connection .................................................................... 3-19 fault report ...................................................................... B-7
settings ......................................................................... 5-18 flex state parameters ..................................................... 5-29
specifications ........................................................2-13, 2-14 function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-3
ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ............................................... 2-16 function code 05h ........................................................... B-4
function code 06h ........................................................... B-4
function code 10h ........................................................... B-5
introduction .................................................................... B-1
K memory map data formats ............................................. B-49
obtaining files ................................................................. B-6
KEYPAD ................................................................... 1-11, 4-8
oscillography .................................................................. B-6
passwords ...................................................................... B-7
read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-3
L settings ................................................................ 5-12, 5-18
store multiple settings ..................................................... B-5
LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-2 store single setting .......................................................... B-4
LASER MODULE ............................................................. 3-22 supported function codes ................................................ B-3
LATCHING OUTPUTS user map .......................................................5-18, B-9, B-21
application example ........................................... 5-203, 5-204 MODEL INFORMATION .................................................... 6-19
settings ....................................................................... 5-202 MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER ........................................ 6-19
specifications ................................................................ 2-14 MODULES
LED INDICATORS ....................................... 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 5-25 communications ............................................................. 3-17
LED TEST contact inputs/outputs .................................. 3-10, 3-12, 3-13
FlexLogic™ operand ...................................................... 5-60 CT ................................................................................... 3-8
settings ......................................................................... 5-23 CT/VT ....................................................................... 3-8, 5-6
specifications ................................................................ 2-11 direct inputs/outputs ....................................................... 3-22
LINE insertion .......................................................................... 3-4
pickup ........................................................................... 5-74 order codes ..................................................................... 2-5
LINE PICKUP ordering ........................................................................... 2-5
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-56 power supply ................................................................... 3-7
logic .............................................................................. 5-75 transducer I/O ................................................................ 3-15
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-30 VT ................................................................................... 3-8
settings ......................................................................... 5-74 withdrawal ....................................................................... 3-4
specifications .................................................................. 2-8 MONITORING ELEMENTS .............................................. 5-176
LINK POWER BUDGET .................................................... 2-15 MOUNTING ........................................................................ 3-1
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
settings ............................................................. 5-101, 5-102 N
specifications ................................................................ 2-10
NAMEPLATE ...................................................................... 1-1
LOGIC GATES ................................................................. 5-61
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC
LOST PASSWORD ............................................................ 5-7
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
characteristics ............................................................. 5-127
M FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-56
logic ............................................................................ 5-128
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-2 settings ............................................................ 5-126, 5-128
MANUFACTURING DATE ................................................. 6-19 specifications ................................................................... 2-9
MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ...................................... B-49 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC
MEMORY POLARIZATION .......................................... 8-6, 9-1 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-56
MEMORY VOLTAGE LOGIC ............................................. 5-77 logic ............................................................................ 5-125
MENU HEIRARCHY .................................................1-11, 4-10 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-25
MENU NAVIGATION ......................................... 1-11, 4-9, 4-10 settings ....................................................................... 5-125
METERING specifications ................................................................... 2-8
conventions .............................................................. 6-8, 6-9 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE
current .......................................................................... 2-12 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-56
frequency ...................................................................... 2-12 logic ............................................................................ 5-142
INDEX
power ............................................................................ 2-12 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-25

voltage .......................................................................... 2-12 settings ....................................................................... 5-142
METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................... 6-9 specifications ................................................................... 2-9
MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC ......................... 5-79, 8-2
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay v

INDEX
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC OST ........................................................................ 2-10, 5-94

FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-56 OUT-OF-STEP TRIPPING ........................................ 2-10, 5-94
logic ............................................................................ 5-124 OUTPUTS
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-24 contact outputs .......................................... 3-10, 3-12, 5-202
settings ....................................................................... 5-124 control power .................................................................2-14
specifications................................................................... 2-8 critical failure relay .........................................................2-14
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC Fast Form-C relay ..........................................................2-14
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-31 Form-A relay ......................................... 2-14, 3-9, 3-10, 3-14
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT Form-C relay .................................................. 2-14, 3-9, 3-14
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-57 IRIG-B ...........................................................................2-14
logic ............................................................................ 5-120 latching outputs ................................................... 2-14, 5-202
polarization.................................................................. 5-118 remote outputs .................................................. 5-207, 5-208
settings ....................................................................... 5-116 virtual outputs .............................................................. 5-204
specifications................................................................... 2-8 OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES .................................... 5-103
NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT OVERCURRENT CURVES
see entry for NEUTRAL IOC definite time ................................................................. 5-107
NEUTRAL IOC FlexCurves™ ............................................................... 5-107
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-57 I2T ............................................................................... 5-107
logic ............................................................................ 5-115 IAC .............................................................................. 5-106
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-23 IEC .............................................................................. 5-105
settings ....................................................................... 5-115 IEEE ............................................................................ 5-104
specifications................................................................... 2-8 OVERVOLTAGE
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE auxiliary ................................................................ 2-9, 5-144
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-57 negative sequence ....................................................... 5-142
logic ............................................................................ 5-141 negative-sequence .......................................................... 2-9
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-34 neutral .................................................................. 2-9, 5-141
settings ....................................................................... 5-141 phase ................................................................... 2-9, 5-140
specifications................................................................... 2-9
NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for NEUTRAL TOC
NEUTRAL TOC P
PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................... 3-1
logic ............................................................................ 5-114
PARITY ............................................................................5-11
PASSWORD SECURITY .................................................... 5-7
settings ....................................................................... 5-114
PASSWORDS
specifications................................................................... 2-8
changing ........................................................................4-13
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
lost password ..........................................................4-13, 5-7
Modbus ........................................................................... B-7
settings ......................................................................... 5-72
overview ........................................................................1-12
specifications................................................................. 2-11
security ........................................................................... 5-7
settings ........................................................................... 5-7
PC SOFTWARE
O see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP
PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS .............................................. 5-138
ONE SHOTS .................................................................... 5-61 PERMISSIVE OVERREACH TRANSFER TRIP
OPEN POLE DETECTOR see entry for POTT
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-57 PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP
logic ............................................................................ 5-184 see entry for PUTT
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-26 PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-4
settings ....................................................................... 5-182 PHASE ANGLE METERING ............................................... 6-9
specifications................................................................. 2-10 PHASE CURRENT METERING .........................................6-11
OPERATING TEMPERATURE .......................................... 2-16 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OC
OPERATING TIMES ........................................................... 2-6 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-31
ORDER CODES ................................................. 2-4, 6-19, 7-2 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-2 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-57
ORDERING .......................................................... 2-3, 2-4, 2-5 logic ............................................................................ 5-113
OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ............................. 2-16 phase A polarization ..................................................... 5-111
OSCILLOGRAPHY settings ............................................................. 5-111, 5-112
actual values ................................................................. 6-17 specifications .................................................................. 2-8
clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-1 PHASE DISTANCE
Modbus .......................................................................... B-6 application of settings ...................................................... 9-2
Modbus registers ..................................................B-14, B-18 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-57
INDEX
settings ......................................................................... 5-20 logic ..............................................................................5-85

specifications................................................................. 2-12 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-29
via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-6 op scheme .....................................................................5-84
via enerVista software ...................................................... 4-2 settings ..........................................................................5-77
vi D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

INDEX
specifications .................................................................. 2-6 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-16

PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................6-19, B-8
see entry for PHASE IOC PRODUCT SETUP ............................................................. 5-7
PHASE IOC PRODUCTION TESTS ...................................................... 2-16
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-57 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-3
logic ............................................................................ 5-110 PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-4
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-23 PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE
specifications .................................................................. 2-8 see USER-PROGRAMMBLE PUSHBUTTONS
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE PUTT
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-58 application of settings ...................................................... 9-6
logic ............................................................................ 5-140 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-59
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-29 logic ............................................................................ 5-188
settings ....................................................................... 5-140 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-27
specifications .................................................................. 2-9 settings ....................................................................... 5-187
PHASE ROTATION .......................................................... 5-40
PHASE SELECT
PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT Q
see entry for PHASE TOC
QUAD DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC .... 5-79, 5-80, 5-81, 5-87,
PHASE TOC
5-88, 8-5, 8-6
logic ............................................................................ 5-109
settings ....................................................................... 5-108 R
specifications .................................................................. 2-8
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE REACTIVE POWER ................................................. 2-12, 6-12
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-58 REAL POWER ......................................................... 2-12, 6-12
logic ............................................................................ 5-139 REAL TIME CLOCK
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-29 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-18
settings ....................................................................... 5-139 settings ......................................................................... 5-18
specifications .................................................................. 2-9 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ...................................... 3-5
PHASOR ESTIMATION ...................................................... 8-1 RECLOSER CURVES ............................................ 5-48, 5-107
PHONE NUMBERS ............................................................ 1-1 RECLOSING
PICS .................................................................................C-2 description ................................................................... 5-160
PILOT SCHEMES logic ....................................................... 5-167, 5-168, 5-169
application of settings ...................................................... 9-6 sequence ..................................................................... 5-170
blocking ...................................................................... 5-196 settings ............................. 5-159, 5-162, 5-163, 5-164, 5-166
directional comparison blocking ................................... 5-196 REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .................................................. 3-17
DUTT .......................................................................... 5-185 RELAY ACTIVATION ........................................................ 4-12
hybrid POTT ................................................................ 5-192 RELAY ARCHITECTURE .................................................. 5-52
POTT .......................................................................... 5-189 RELAY MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 7-2
PUTT .......................................................................... 5-187 RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-37
specifications ................................................................ 2-10 RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ............................................ 1-12
POTT REMOTE DEVICES
application of settings ...................................................... 9-6 actual values ................................................................... 6-4
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-58 device ID ..................................................................... 5-205
hybrid POTT ................................................................ 5-192 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-60
logic ............................................................................ 5-191 Modbus registers .......................................... B-9, B-14, B-46
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-27 settings ....................................................................... 5-205
settings .................................................. 5-189, 5-190, 5-191 statistics .......................................................................... 6-5
POWER METERING REMOTE INPUTS
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-11 actual values ................................................................... 6-3
specifications ................................................................ 2-12 FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-60
values ........................................................................... 6-12 Modbus registers .......................................... B-9, B-14, B-46
POWER SUPPLY settings ....................................................................... 5-206
description ...................................................................... 3-7 specifications ................................................................. 2-13
low range ...................................................................... 2-13 REMOTE OUTPUTS
specifications ................................................................ 2-13 DNA-1 bit pair .............................................................. 5-207
POWER SWING BLOCKING .....................................2-10, 5-94 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-48
POWER SWING DETECT UserSt-1 bit pair ............................................... 5-208, 5-209
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-58 REPLACEMENT MODULES ................................................ 2-5
logic .................................................................... 5-99, 5-100 RESETTING .......................................................... 5-60, 5-208
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-25 REVISION HISTORY ..........................................................F-1
settings .................................................................5-93, 5-97 RFI SUSCEPTIBILITY ...................................................... 2-16
INDEX
specifications ................................................................ 2-10 RFI, CONDUCTED ........................................................... 2-16

POWER SYSTEM RMS CURRENT ............................................................... 2-12
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-20 RMS VOLTAGE ................................................................ 2-12
PREFERENCES RS232
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay vii

INDEX
configuration ................................................................... 1-8 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 2-6

specifications................................................................. 2-15 ST TYPE CONNECTORS ..................................................3-18
wiring ............................................................................ 3-16 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ........................................... F-4
RS422 STATUS INDICATORS ....................................................... 4-5
configuration ................................................................. 3-26 STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME ......................................... 9-2
timing ............................................................................ 3-27 STUB BUS ........................................................................ 0-iii
two-channel application .................................................. 3-26 SURGE IMMUNITY ...........................................................2-16
with fiber interface ......................................................... 3-28 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING ...................... 6-9
RS485 SYNCHROCHECK
communications ............................................................. 3-17 actual values ..................................................................6-13
description..................................................................... 3-18 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-59
specifications................................................................. 2-15 logic ............................................................................ 5-158
RTD INPUTS Modbus registers .................................................. B-13, B-20
actual values ................................................................. 6-14 settings ............................................................. 5-155, 5-156
Modbus registers ..................................................B-15, B-33 specifications .................................................................. 2-9
settings ....................................................................... 5-213 SYSTEM FREQUENCY .....................................................5-39
specifications................................................................. 2-13 SYSTEM SETUP ..............................................................5-38
S T
SALES OFFICE .................................................................. 1-1 TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................ 7-3
SCAN OPERATION ............................................................ 1-4 TARGET SETTING ............................................................ 5-4
SELECTOR SWITCH TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-3
actual values ................................................................... 6-5 TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................5-16
application example ..................................................... 5-150 TEMPERATURE, OPERATING ..........................................2-16
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-59 TERMINALS ...................................................................... 3-5
logic ............................................................................ 5-150 TESTING
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-37 force contact inputs ...................................................... 5-217
settings ....................................................................... 5-146 force contact outputs .................................................... 5-218
specifications................................................................. 2-11 lamp test ......................................................................... 7-2
timing ................................................................5-148, 5-149 self-test error messages .................................................. 7-3
SELF-TESTS THEORY OF OPERATION ................................................. 8-1
description....................................................................... 7-3 TIME ................................................................................. 7-2
error messages ................................................................ 7-4 TIME OVERCURRENT
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-60 see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries
Modbus registers ............................................................ B-8 TIMERS ...........................................................................5-67
SERIAL NUMBER ............................................................ 6-19 TOC
SERIAL PORTS ground ......................................................................... 5-121
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-16 neutral ......................................................................... 5-114
settings ......................................................................... 5-11 phase .......................................................................... 5-108
SERIES COMPENSATED LINES ............................... 8-16, 9-9 specifications .................................................................. 2-8
SETTING GROUPS ..............................5-59, 5-73, 5-145, B-36 TRACKING FREQUENCY ....................................... 6-14, B-35
SETTINGS, CHANGING ................................................... 4-11 TRANSDUCER I/O
SIGNAL SOURCES actual values ..................................................................6-14
description....................................................................... 5-5 settings ............................................................. 5-212, 5-213
metering ........................................................................ 6-11 specifications .................................................................2-13
settings ......................................................................... 5-41 wiring .............................................................................3-15
SIGNAL TYPES .................................................................. 1-3 TRIP LEDs .......................................................................5-25
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM .............................................. 2-1, 2-2 TRIP OUTPUT
SITE LIST, CREATING ....................................................... 4-1 FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-59
SNTP PROTOCOL logic ............................................................................ 5-154
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-18 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-26
settings ......................................................................... 5-17 settings ........................................................................ 5-151
SOFTWARE specifications .................................................................2-10
installation ....................................................................... 1-5 TROUBLE INDICATOR ..............................................1-12, 7-3
see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP TYPE TESTS ....................................................................2-16
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-4 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM .............................................. 3-6
SOFTWARE, PC
see entry for enerVista UR Setup
SOURCE FREQUENCY .................................................... 6-13
SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES .................................... 5-138 U
SOURCES
UCA SBO TIMER
INDEX
description....................................................................... 5-5
for breaker control ..........................................................5-42
metering ........................................................................ 6-11
for virtual inputs ........................................................... 5-201
UCA/MMS
settings ................................................................ 5-40, 5-41
device ID ..................................................................... 5-205
viii D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

INDEX
DNA2 assignments ...................................................... 5-207 USERST-1 BIT PAIR ........................................... 5-208, 5-209
MIC .................................................................................C-3
overview .........................................................................C-1
PICS ...............................................................................C-2 V
remote device settings ................................................. 5-205
VAR-HOURS ........................................................... 2-12, 6-13
remote inputs .............................................................. 5-206
VIBRATION TESTING ...................................................... 2-16
reporting .........................................................................C-6
VIRTUAL INPUTS
SBO timeout ........................................................ 5-42, 5-201
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
settings ......................................................................... 5-15
commands ....................................................................... 7-1
UserSt-1 bit pair ................................................ 5-208, 5-209
UL APPROVAL ................................................................ 2-16
logic ............................................................................ 5-201
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
Modbus registers ................................................... B-8, B-40
commands .................................................................... 5-10
settings ....................................................................... 5-201
resetting .......................................................................... 7-2
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
UNDERVOLTAGE
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
auxiliary .......................................................................... 2-9
phase ....................................................................2-9, 5-139
UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS .......................... 5-138
settings ....................................................................... 5-204
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED .............................................. 5-37
VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................................ 5-39
UNPACKING THE RELAY .................................................. 1-1
VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ................................................... 2-16
UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM ................................. 5-37
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-138
UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-2
VOLTAGE METERING
URPC
see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP
specifications ................................................................. 2-12
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
values ........................................................................... 6-11
example ........................................................................ 5-31
VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC ..................... 5-108
invoking and scrolling .................................................... 5-30
VT FUSE FAILURE
logic ............................................................................ 5-182
settings .................................................................5-30, 5-31
specifications ................................................................ 2-11
settings ....................................................................... 5-181
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
VT INPUTS ............................................................... 5-6, 5-39
custom labeling ............................................................... 4-7
VT WIRING ........................................................................ 3-8
defaults ........................................................................... 4-6
VTFF
description ...................................................................... 4-6
see VT FUSE FAILURE
settings ......................................................................... 5-25
specifications ................................................................ 2-11
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-60 W
settings ......................................................................... 5-28 WARRANTY .......................................................................F-6
specifications ................................................................ 2-11 WATT-HOURS ........................................................ 2-12, 6-13
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS WEB SERVER PROTOCOL .............................................. 5-16
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-19 WEBSITE ........................................................................... 1-1
settings ......................................................................... 5-26 WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................. 3-6
INDEX
GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay ix

INDEX
INDEX
x D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

D60 Line Distance Relay: Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D60 Line Distance Relay: Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

D60 Line Distance Relay: Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title Page

D60 Line Distance Relay

Manual P/N: 1601-0089-H2 (GEK-106625A)

215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario I

MODULE OLD NEW DESCRIPTION

1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION

GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay v

3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS

4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

vi D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

5.4.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ............................................................................. 5-72

6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay vii

7. COMMANDS AND 7.1 COMMANDS

8. THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS

9. APPLICATION OF 9.1 APPLICATION GUIDELINES

viii D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

9.2 DISTANCE ELEMENTS (STEPPED DISTANCE SCHEME)

A. FLEXANALOG A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST

B. MODBUS B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

C. UCA/MMS C.1 UCA/MMS PROTOCOL

D. IEC 60870-5-104 COMMS. D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay ix

E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

F. MISCELLANEOUS F.1 CHANGE NOTES

x D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST

D60 Line Distance Relay RATINGS: Model:

Figure 1–1: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)

GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:

GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay 1-1

1.2UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR

1-2 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE

Input Elements CPU Module Output Elements

Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM

GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay 1-3

Figure 1–3: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION

1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE

1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS

1-4 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS

GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay 1-5

1-6 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

1.3.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA UR SETUP WITH THE D60

a) CONFIGURING AN ETHERNET CONNECTION

GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay 1-7

b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION

c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY

1-8 D60 Line Distance Relay GE Multilin

Expand the Site List by double-clicking

Communications Status Indicator

GE Multilin D60 Line Distance Relay 1-9

1.4UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING

Figure 1–4: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS